dvp-plc application manual programmingprofsite.um.ac.ir/~shoraka/delta plc applications...

DVP-PLC Application Manual【Programming】

Table of Contents Chapter 1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram

Preface-The Background and Functions of PLC ...................................................... 1-1

1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram........................................................ 1-1

1.2 The Difference between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram ... 1-2

1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram ............................................................. 1-4

1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram .................................................................. 1-8

1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure ......................... 1-11

1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram ............................................................... 1-14

1.7 The Example for Designing Basic Program........................................................ 1-16

Chapter 2 DVP-PLC Function 2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number .............................................................. 2-1

2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H] ................................................................................... 2-7

2.3 The Numbering and Function of External Input/Output Contact [X] / [Y] .............. 2-9

2.4 The Numbering and Function of Auxiliary Relay [M] ........................................... 2-11

2.5 The Numbering and Function of Step Relay [S] ................................................. 2-12

2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T] ......................................................... 2-13

2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C]...................................................... 2-16

2.8 Register Number and Function [D], [E], [F] ........................................................ 2-28

2.8.1 Data register [D] ........................................................................................ 2-28

2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F] ................................................................................ 2-29

2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics .................................................. 2-30

2.9 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I] ........................................ 2-30

2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register ................................................... 2-33

2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions.................................... 2-53

2.12 Fault Code Information ................................................................................... 2-84

Chapter 3 Basic Commands 3.1 Summary of Basic Command and Step Ladder Command .................................. 3-1

3.2 Basic Commands Explanations ......................................................................... 3-3

Chapter 4 Step Ladder Commands 4.1 Step Ladder Command [STL], [RET] ................................................................. 4-1

4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) ...................................................................... 4-1

4.3 Step Ladder Command Explanation .................................................................. 4-2

4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder Program .............................................. 4-7

4.5 Categories of Procedures ................................................................................. 4-8

4.6 IST command .................................................................................................. 4-18

Chapter 5 Application Commands 5.1 Summary of Parameters ................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Application Command Structure ........................................................................ 5-7

5.3 Handling of Numeric Values ............................................................................. 5-12

5.4 Index register E, F ........................................................................................... 5-15

5.5 Index for Commands ........................................................................................ 5-17

Chapter 6 Application Commands API 00-49........................................... 6-1 Chapter 7 Application Commands API 50-99........................................... 7-1 Chapter 8 Application Commands API 100-149 ....................................... 8-1 Chapter 9 Application Commands API 150-199 ....................................... 9-1 Chapter 10 Application Commands API 215-246 ..................................... 10-1

1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram

DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-1

Preface----The Background and Functions of PLC PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) is one of electronic equipments. It was called “Sequence Controller”

before. It was named “Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)” by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacture Association)

in 1978 and defined as electronic equipment. The operation of PLC is in the following:

Step 1. Read the external input signal, such as the status of keypad, sensor, switch and pulse.

Step 2. Using microprocessor to execute the calculations of logic, sequence, timer, counter and formula according to

the status and the value of the input signal read in the step 1 and pre-write programs saved inner to get the

corresponding output signal, such as open or close of relay, operation of controlled machine or procedure to control

automatic machine or procedure of manufacture. PLC also can be used to maintain and adjust of production program

by editing or modifying the peripheral equipments (personal computer/handheld programming panel). The common

program language of PLC is ladder diagram.

There are stronger functions in PLC with the development and application requirements of electronic technology,

such as position control, network and etc. Output/Input signals are DI (Digital Input), AI (Analog Input), PI (Pulse

Input), DO (Digital Output), AO (Analog Output) and PO (Pulse Output). Thus PLC plays an important role in the

feature industry.

1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram

Ladder diagram is an automatic control diagram language that developed during World War II. At first, it just has

basic components, such as A contact (normally open), B contact (normally close), output coil, timer counter and etc.

(The power panel is made up of these basic components) It has more functions, differential contact, latched coil and

the application commands, add, minus, multiply and divide calculation, that traditional power panel can’t make since

PLC is developed.

The working principles of the traditional Ladder Diagram and the PLC Ladder Diagram are similar to each other;

the only difference is that the symbols for the traditional ladder diagram are expressed in the format that are close to

its original substance, while those for the PLC ladder diagram employ the symbols that are more explicit when being

used in computers or data sheets. In the Ladder Diagram Logics, it could be divided into the Combination Logics

and the Sequential Logics, and is described as follows:

1. Combination Logics:

The following example is the combination logics that show in traditional diagram and PLC ladder diagram

separately.

Traditional Ladder Diagram PLC Ladder Diagram

X4

X0

X2

X3

X1

Y0

Y2

Y1

X0Y0

X1Y1

Y2X2

X3

X4



Example 1: Circuit 1 utilizes one X0 (NO: Normally Open) switch, which is normally known as the “A” switch or

contact, and its characteristic is that the contact is in the OFF condition at regular time (not pressed); the

output point Y0 is thus in OFF condition. However, once the switch motion (the button is pressed) is

conducted, the contact will be ON, and the output point Y0 will be in ON condition.

Example 2: Similarly, Circuit 2 utilizes the X1 (NC: Normally Close) switch, which is normally known as the “B” switch

or contact, and its characteristic is that the contact is in the ON condition at regular time; the output point

Y0 is thus in ON condition. While the switch motion is conducted (which is in the OFF condition), the

output point Y0 is in OFF condition.

Example 3: This is an example of combination logics output, which has more than one input equipment. The output

point Y2 will be in ON condition when X2 is in OFF condition or X3 and X4 are in ON condition.

2. Sequential logics:

The sequential logics are a type of circuit that possesses the “Draw-Back” structure, which is to draw back the

circuit’s output result and has it serve as the input condition. Thus, under the same input condition, different

output results will be generated in accordance with previous conditions and motions with different orders.

The following example is the sequential logics that show in traditional diagram and PLC ladder diagram

separately.

Traditional Ladder Diagram PLC Ladder Diagram

X5 X6 Y3

Y3

Y3X5

Y3

X6

When the above circuit is just supplied with power, although the X6 switch is ON, the X5 switch is still OFF, thus,

the output relay Y3 will be in OFF condition; output of the relay will only be ON after X5 is ON. Once the output relay

Y3 is in ON condition, there will be a feedback signal containing the ON condition from Y3 to connect in parallel with

the A contact of X5; this circuit is thus also known as the self-latched circuit. The circuit motion is showed in the

following chart: Device status Step X5 X6 Y3

1 N N OFF 2 Y N ON 3 N N ON 4 N Y OFF 5 N N OFF

N: is in OFF condition Y: is in ON condition

From above chart, you can find that the same input may get different result. For example, in the step 1 and 3, the

status of X5 and X6 are in OFF condition but Y3 is in OFF condition in step 1 and in ON condition in step3. That is due

to the self-latched circuit feedback input. In this example, it explains with contact A, contact B and output coil. The

usage of other equipments is the same with this. Please refer to the chapter 3 for the detail.

1.2 The Difference between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram



Although the working principles are in accordance with each other for the traditional ladder diagram and the PLC

ladder diagram, PLC is indeed utilizing the microcomputer chip (MCU) to simulate the motion of the traditional ladder

diagram, which is to use the scan method to look over one by one the conditions of all input devices and output coils,

and afterwards, with the conditions in consideration, to calculate and generate the same output result as that of the

traditional ladder diagram based on the logics of the combination status of the ladder diagram. However, since that

there is only one MCU, the only way to examine the circuits is to look it over one after another within the ladder

diagram program, then calculate the output result in compliance with the program and the input/output status, and

finally, output the results to the external interface; thereafter, start over with the readout of the input status, the

calculation, output, and repeatedly go over the above-mentioned motions again; the time needed to complete the

whole set of cyclic motion is called one Scan Time. The scan time will become longer in accordance with the

increment of the program. With this scan time, it will incur repeated input detections, and thus, result in delay in the

output responses; and the longer the delay time, the greater the error towards the control, and what’s worse, is that

the condition might be unqualified for the control requests. By then, PLC (with faster Scan Time) would be chosen to

do the job; the scan speed is thus an essential specification to PLC. Thanks to the advanced technique of ASIC (IC

with specific functions) within the microcomputer, PLC of the present has made greater progress in the scan speed,

and what follows is the scanning chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram Program.

Calculate the result by ladder diagram algorithm (it doesn’t sent to the outer output point but the inner equipment will output immediately.)

Y0

X0 X1Y0Start

M100 X3Y1

X10

::

X100 M505Y126End

Send the result to the output point

Read input state from outside

Execute in cycles

In addition to the difference of scan time, PLC ladder diagram and traditional ladder diagram also has difference

in “reverse current”. In the following chart of traditional ladder diagram, if X0, X1, X4 and X6 are in ON condition and

the others are in OFF condition, output point Y0 will be in ON condition as shown as dotted line in the following

diagram. But in the PLC ladder diagram will have error in the peripheral equipment—WPLSoft due to scan method of

MCU is from up to down and from left to right.



Reverse current of traditional ladder diagram

X6

X0 X1 X2

X3 X4 X5a b

Y0

Reverse current of PLC ladder diagram

X6

X0Y0

X1 X2 Y0

X3 X4 X5a b

There is a fault in the 3rd row of ladder diagram.

1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram

Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made

up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder

diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of

electric control circuit. Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical

equipments of traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter and etc.

The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although internal equipment has

the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and contact. It doesn’t have the real components in it.

In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal memory. If this bit is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the

coil is OFF. You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or contact a).

Otherwise, you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Close,

NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, 8-bits makes up a byte. 2 bytes can make up a word. 2 words

makes up double word. When using many relays to do calculation, such as add/ subtraction or shift, you could use

byte, word or double word. Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil but also

value of counting time and times.

In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these equipments, the

corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word.

Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC: (Refer to Chapter 2 for detail)

Input relay

Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input

point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input

signal). Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1. You couldn’t change the state of

input relay by program design or forced ON/OFF via HPP. The contacts (contact a, b) can be

used unlimitedly. If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and

can’t be used with other functions.

Equipment indication method: X0, X1,…X7, X10, X11,…. The symbol of equipment is X

and the number uses octal. There are numeric indications of input point on MPU and

expansion unit.



Output relay

Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output

point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by input relay contact, the contact of

other internal equipment and itself contact. It uses a normally open contact to connect to external

load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesn’t have the

corresponding output relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay.

Equipment indication: Y0, Y1,…Y7, Y10, Y11,…. . The symbol of equipment is Y and the

number uses octal. There are numeric indications of output point on MPU and expansion

unit.

Internal relay The internal relay doesn’t connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in PLC. Its

function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each auxiliary relay has the

corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of input relay, output relay or other

internal equipment. Its contacts can be used unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay can’t output

directly, it should output with output point.

Equipment indication: M0, M1,…, M4, M5. The symbol of equipment is M and the number

uses decimal number system.

STEP DVP PLC provides input method for controlling program of step actions. It is very easy to

write control program by using the conversion of control step S of command STL. If there is no

step program in the program, step point S could be used as internal relay M or alarm point.

Equipment indication: S0, S1,…S1023. The symbol of equipment is S and the number

uses decimal.

Timer Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil is ON, its

contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining desired time. The time value

of timer is set by settings and each timer has its regular period. User sets the timer value and

each timer has its timing period. Once the coil is OFF, the contact won’t act (contact a is open

and contact b is close) and the timer will be set to zero.

Equipment indication: T0, T1,…,T255. The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses

decimal system. The different number range corresponds with the different timing period.

Counter Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the pulse of

counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter. When coil is form OFF

to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit

and high-speed counter for user to use.

Equipment indication: C0, C1,…,C255. The symbol of equipment is C and the number

uses decimal.



Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value and

counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores 16-bit binary

number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number of data register to store

double words.

Equipment indication: D0, D1,…,D9,999. The symbol of equipment is D and the number

uses decimal.

File register The file register can be used to store data or parameter when the register that PLC needs is

not enough during handling data and parameter. It can store 16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in

each file register. It uses two continuous number of file register to handle double word. There are

1600 file registers for EP series and 10000 file registers for EH series. There is not the real

equipment number for file register, thus it needs to execute READ/WRITE of file register via

commands API147 MEMR, API148 MEMW or the peripheral equipment HPP and WPLSoft.

Equipment indication: K0~K9,999. There is no equipment symbol and uses decimal

number for number.

Index register Index register E and F are 16-bit data register just the same as general data register. It can

be wrote and read freely and has the function of index indication to use for character device, bit

device and constants.

Equipment indication: E0~E7, F0~F7. The symbols of equipment are E, F and the number

uses decimal.

The structure and explanation of ladder diagram:

Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment

Normally open, contact a LD X, Y, M, S, T, C

Normally close, contact b LDI X, Y, M, S, T, C

Serial normally open AND X, Y, M, S, T, C

Parallel normally open OR X, Y, M, S, T, C

Parallel normally close ORI X, Y, M, S, T, C

Rising-edge trigger switch LDP X, Y, M, S, T, C

Falling-edge trigger switch LDF X, Y, M, S, T, C

Rising-edge trigger in serial ANDP X, Y, M, S, T, C

Falling-edge trigger in serial ANDF X, Y, M, S, T, C



Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment

Rising-edge trigger in parallel ORP X, Y, M, S, T, C

Falling-edge trigger in parallel ORF X, Y, M, S, T, C

Block in serial ANB none

Block in parallel ORB none

Multiple output MPS MRD MPP

none

Output command of coil drive OUT Y, M, S

S

Step ladder STL S

Basic command, Application command

Application command

Please refer chapter 3 basic command and chapter 5 application command

Inverse logic INV none

Block: The block is the ladder diagram that made up of the serial or parallel calculation of two or above equipments. It

will get the result of parallel block or serial block according to operation character.

Serial block

Parallel block

Divergent line and combinative line: the vertical line is usually a separation for devices. This line is combination line

for the left device (it means that there are at least two columns or above circuit at

the left connect to this vertical line) this line is the divergent line for the right

device (it means that there are at least two rows or above circuit connect to this

line.

1 2

combinative line of block 1divergent line of block 2

combinative line of block 2



Network: this is the complete network that made up of devices and blocks. The vertical line or continuous line and the

block or device that line can connect to is the same network.

Independent network: Network1

Network2

Incomplete network:

1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram

The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (the right power line will be omitted during

the edited of DPLSoft and WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row. The maximum contacts in a row

are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have the new row and start with continuous line to

continue more input devices. The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be

used repeatedly. The drawing is shown as follows.

Y100000

00000X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1

X11 X12 X13

The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The output handling,

including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most right side in ladder diagram.

Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at the right corner is

the explanation order.

TMR T0 K10

Y1X0 X1 Y1 X4

M3T0M0

X3 M1

122

34

55

567

8



The explanation of command order:

1 LD X0 2 OR M0 3 AND X1 4 LD X3 AND M1 ORB 5 LD Y1 AND X4 6 LD T0 AND M3 ORB 7 ANB 8 OUT Y1 TMR T0 K10

The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram

1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.

LD command

AND Block

LD command

OR Block The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that command LDP

and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown in the following.

X0

OFF ON OFFTime

Rising-edge

X0

OFF ON OFFTime

Falling-edge

2. AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.

AND command

AND command

The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.

3. OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block.

OR command

OR command

OR command



The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.

4. ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series.

ANB command

5. ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel.

ORBcommand

If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or network from up to

down or from left to right.

6. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various outputs.

The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place between

horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the

contacts status in the same vertical line. Basically, each contact could have memory command but in some places of

ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command

can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol “┬”.

MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same in the same

horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep on analyzing other ladder diagram. You can

recognize the command MRD by the symbol “├”.

MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack. Because it is the last

item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending.



You can recognize this command by the symbol “└”.

Basically, that is all right to use the above method to

analyze but sometimes compiler will omit the same

outputs as shown at the right.

MPS

MRD

MPPMPP

MPS

7. STL command: this command is used in the syntax design for the Sequential Function Chart (SFC). This

command helps the programmer to have clearer ideas on the program procedure, and thus the procedure will

be more readable. As shown in the following diagrams, we can get clear procedure, and original step point will

have the action of “power loss” after each step point S transfer to the next step point. In this way, we could

transfer to our procedure diagram from the left diagram to the PLC structure diagram below.

e

S0

S21

S22

M1002initialpulse

M1002SET S0

SET S21SS0

SET S22SS21

SS22

S0

RET

8. RET command: you should add RET command after finishing step ladder program and RET command should

add after STL command as shown in the following.

eSS20

RET

eSS20

RET

Refer to chapter 4 for the structure of step ladder [ STL ] , [ RET ].

1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure



Ladder Diagram

X0 X2 X1

X1

M1

C0Y0

SET S0

M2 Y0

M0

X10Y10

SET S10

S0S

X11Y11

SET S11

S10S

SET S12

SET S13

X12Y12

SET S20

S11S

X13S0

RET

S20S

S12S

S13S

X0CNT C0 K10

X1M0

C0

X1

M2

RST C0

M1

M2

END

LD X0OR X1LDOR

X2M0

ORI M1ANBLDAND

M2Y0

5

1 ORblock

2 ORblock

Serial block3

ANDblock

Serial block4 ANI

ORBANIOUTANDSETSTLLD

X1Y0C0S0S0X10

Multipleoutputs

Step ladder Start

State working item andstep point transfer

Output state will keep onhandling according to program scan state

7

8

8

910

1213

11

14

Y10S10S10

OUTSETSTLLD X11OUTSETSETSETSTLLDOUT

Y11S11S12S13S11X12Y12

S10 state take outTake out X11 state

State working item andstep point transfer

S11 state take outTake out X12 state

State working item andstep point transferSET

STLSTLSTLLDOUTRET

S20S20S12S13X13S0

15

LD S0CNTLD C0

C0K10 17

18

Simultaneous divergence

State working itemand step point transfer

End of step ladder

Return

Read C0

Multiple outputs

MPSAND X1OUT M0MRDANI X1OUT M1MPPANIOUTEND

M2M2

Program End

Syntax Fuzzy Structure

The analytic process of correct ladder diagram should be from left to right or from up to down. But there are some

exceptions as shown in the following.

Example 1: there are two methods to use command to show the following ladder diagram but the result is the same.



Good method Bad method

LD X0 LD X0 OR X1 OR X1 LD X2 LD X2 OR X3 OR X3 ANB LD X4 LD X4 OR X5 OR X5 ANB

X0 X2 X4

X5X3X1

ANB ANB

The results for the above two programs to convert to ladder diagram are the same. Why one is better than the

other? That is due to operation of MPU. The operation of the program in the left side is one block merges to another

one. Although the length of the program at the right side is the same as the left one, the operation of the program in

the right side is merged at the last. (command ANB is used to merge, it can’t use more than 8 continuous times). In

this program, it just needs to use continuous two times of command ANB and MPU allows that. But when the program

needs to use more than continuous 8 times of command ANB, MPU won’t allow. So the best method is to merge once

the block is established and in this way the logic of programmer will be in order.

Example 2: there are two methods to use command to show the following ladder diagram but the result is the same.

Good method Bad method

LD X0 LD X0 OR X1 LD X1 OR X2 LD X2 OR X3 LD X3 ORB ORB

X0

X1

X2

X3

ORB

The difference is very clear in these two programs. In the bad method, the more program code it needs and the

operation memory of MPU also needs to increase. So that is better to decode in the order of the definition.

The error figures of ladder diagram

When editing ladder diagram, you can use all ladder symbols to make up all kinds of figures. When drawing

ladder diagram, you should start from left power line and end with the right power line (the right power line will be

omitted when using DPLSoft ladder diagram) due to the principle for PLC to handle figure program is from up to down

and from left to right (it is drew from left to right and draw the next new row after finishing drawing a row). They are the

common error figure in the following.

It can’t do OR operation upward.



reverse flow power

There is reverse power flow during the circuit that is from input to output signal.

The correct is output from right upper corner.

If you want to merge or edit, the order should be from left upper corner to right lower corner. The block of dot line should move up.

It can’t do parallel operation with empty device.

Empty device can’t do operation with other device.

There is no device in the middle block.

.

The device in series should be arranged in parallel with the block that it connects in series.

The position of Label P should be in the first row of the complete network.

The block that is connected in series should be arranged in parallel with the upper horizontal line.

1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram

To put the block in the front of ladder diagram can omit command ANB when series block and parallel block

connect in series.



Command

LD X0

LD X1

OR X2

X0 X1

X2

ANB

Command

LD X1

OR X2

X0X1

X2

AND X0

To put the block in the front of ladder diagram can omit command ORB when single equipment and block are

connected in parallel.

Command

LD T0

LD X1

AND X2

T0

X1 X2

ORB

Command

LD X1

AND X2 T0

X1 X2

OR T0

In figure a of ladder diagram, it does not illegal due to the reverse power flow. In figure a, the upper block is

shorter than lower block, you could make it legal by switching them.

command

LD X0

OR X1

AND X2

LD X3

AND X4

X0

X1 X2

X3 X4

Fig. a ORB

command

LD X3

AND X4

LD X1

OR X0

AND X2

X0

X1 X2

X3 X4

Fig. b ORB



You can omit commands MPS, MPP when the multiple outputs in the same horizontal line don’t need to operate

with other input device.

command MPS AND X0 OUT Y1 MPP

X0Y1

Y0

OUT Y0

command OUT Y0 AND X0

Y0

Y1X0

OUT Y1

Correct the circuit of reverse flow power

In the following examples, the figure at the left is the ladder diagram that is draw by our definition but there is

reverse flow power in it. Therefore, we correct it and show it at the right side.

Example 1:

X0

X3

X6

X1

X4

X7

X2

X5

X10 LOOP1

reverse flow power

X0 X1 X2

X3 X4 X5

X10

X6 X7 X5

X10 LOOP1

Example 2:

X0

X3

X6

X1

X4

X7

X2

X5

X10 LOOP1

reverse flow power

X0

X3

X6

X1

X4

X7

X2

X5

X10

reverse flow power

LOOP1

X0 X1 X2

X3 X4 X5

X6

X3 X7 X10

X6

X0 X1 X7 X10

LOOP2

X4

1.7 The Example for Designing Basic Program



Start, Stop and Latching

In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch.

Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are several latching circuits in the

following:

Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop

When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally

contact X2＝Off, and Y1=On are set at the same time, if

X2=On, the coil Y1 will stop acting. Therefore, it calls priority of

stop.

X2Y1

X1

Y1

Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start

When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally

contact X2＝Off and Y1=On (coil Y1 will be active and

latching) are valid at the same time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will be

active due to latched contact. Therefore, it calls priority of start.

X2Y1

X1

Y1

Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands

SET Y1

RST Y1

X1

X2

Top priority of stop

The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made up

of RST and SET command.

It is top priority of stop when RST command is set behind

SET command. When executing PLC from up to down, The

coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at

the same time, therefore it calls priority of stop.

It is top priority of start when SET command is set after

RST command. When X1 and X2 act at the same time, Y1 is

ON so it calls top priority of start. SET

Y1RST

Y1

X2

X1

Top priority of start

Example 4: latched

Auxiliary relay M512 is latched at the right side. (refer to

PLC user manual) the circuit at the right side will be latched

when power is on and it will be also latched once the power

loss and power on again. Therefore the latched is continuous.

X2

M512X1

SET

RST M512

Y1M512

The common control circuit



Example 5: condition control

X3Y1

X1

Y1

X4Y2

X2

Y2

Y1

X1

X3

X2

X4

Y1

Y2

X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched

circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series.

Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1.

Example 6: Interlock control

X3Y1

X1

Y1

X4Y2

X2

Y2

Y1

Y2

X1

X3

X2

X4

Y1

Y2

The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2.

Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other won’t act. (This is called interlock.)

Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and Y2 won’t act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of

ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram, Y1 has higher priority than Y2.

Example 7: Sequential Control

X3Y1

X1

Y1

X4Y2

X2

Y2

Y1

Y2

If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be

an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in the left

side) Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after

acting. In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute in sequential.

Example 8: Oscillating Circuit

The period of oscillating circuit is ΔT+ΔT



Y1Y1

Y1

T T

The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact, Y1

normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1.

In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1, Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON.

Finally, coil Y1 will be OFF and output 0. Scan repeatedly, the period of oscillating circuit is nT+ΔT.

T0X0

TMR

Y1

Y1

T0

Kn

Y1

T Tn

X0

The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be closed at the next

scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is the setting of timer and it is decimal

number. T is the base of timer. (clock period))

Example 9: Blinking Circuit

T2TMR Kn2

T1X0

TMR

Y1

T2

T1

Kn1

X0 T1

Y1

Tn1

X0Tn2

The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It uses two

timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2. T is the base of timer

(clock period)

Example 10: Triggered Circuit

Y1

M0X0

Y1Y1

M0

M0

X0

M0

Y1

T



In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single pulse of ΔT (a

scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be OFF and normally close M0

and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once

a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil M0 is ON for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This

circuit usually executes alternate two actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a

period T, output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T.

Example 11: Delay Circuit

T10X0

TMR

Y1T10

K1000

TB = 0.1 sec

X0

Y1

100 seconds

When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close

contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delay 100 seconds once input X0 is OFF

and T10 is ON. Please refer to timing chart above.

Example 12: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two timers. No matter input X0 is

ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay.

T5

T5

TMR

Y4T6

X0K50

Y4

T6Y4

TMRX0

K30

X0

T5

Y0

T6

5 seconds

3 seconds

Example13: Extend Timer Circuit

T12TMR Kn2

T11X0

TMR

Y1

T11

Kn1

T12

In this circuit, the total delay time from input X0 is

close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is

clock period.

Example 14: The method of enlarge counter range



C6CNT Kn2

C5X13

CNT

RST

C5Kn1

X14C5RST

Y1C6

C6

The range of 16-bit counter is 0~32,767. If using

two counters as figure in left side, the counter range

can be enlarge to n1*n2. When counter C5 attains n1,

counter C6 will counts one time and reset itself. Then

counter C6 will count the pulse of X13. When counter

C6 attains n2, the pulse of X13 will be n1*n2.

Example 15: Traffic light control (by using step ladder command)

Vertical Light

HorizontalLight

Traffic light control

Red light Yellow light

Green light

Green blink light

Vertical light Y0 Y1 Y2 Y2

Horizontal light Y10 Y11 Y12 Y12

Light Time 35 Sec 5 Sec 25 Sec 5 Sec

Timing chart:

25 Sec

5 Sec 5 Sec

5 Sec 5 Sec25 Sec

Y0

Y1

Y2

Y10

Y11

Y12

Vertical Light

Red

Yellow

Green

Horizontal Light

Red

Yellow

Green



SFC Figure:

S0

S20

S21

S22

S0

M1002

T0

T1

T13

Y0

S23

T2

TMR T0 K350

Y2

TMR T1 K250

Y2

TMR T2 K50M1013

Y1

S30

S31

S32

T10

T11

S33

T12

Y12

TMR T10 K250

Y11

TMR T12 K50

Y12

TMR T11 K50M1013

Y10

TMR T13 K350

Ladder Diagram: M1002

ZRST S0 S127

SET S0

SET S20

Y2

END

S0S

S21S

Y1S23S

Y12S30

S

T13S23S

S33S

SET S30S20

S

TMR T0

SET S21T0

Y0

K350

TMR T1

SET S22T1

K250

Y2

S22S TMR T2

SET S23T2

K50M1013

TMR T10

SET S31T10

K250

Y12

S31S TMR T11

SET S32T11

K50M1013

Y11S32

S

TMR T12

SET S33T12

K50

Y10S33

S

TMR T13 K350

S0

RET



Drawing by SFC Editor (WPLSoft )

Drawing by SFC Internal Ladder Diagram View

LAD-0

S0ZRST S127M1002

S0SET

Transferred condition 1

TRANS*T0

S22

Y2

T2TMR K50M1013


TRANS*T13

TRANS*T13

TRANS*T13

TRANS*T13

TRANS*T13

TRANS*T13

TRANS*T13

0

2

3

4

5

6

7

1

LAD-0

S0

S20

S21

S22

S23

S30

S31

S32

S33

S0


TRANS*T12

TRANS*T12

TRANS*T12

TRANS*T12

TRANS*T12

TRANS*T12

TRANS*T12

2 DVP-PLC Function


2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number ES, EX, SS Models: Type Device Item Usage Range Function

X External input relay X0~X177, 128 points, octal number system

Correspond to external input point

Y External output relay Y0~Y177, 128 points, octal number system

Total is 256

points Correspond to external output point

For general M0~M511, M768~M999, 744 points

For latched * M512~M767, 256 points M Auxiliary

For special M1000~M1279, 280 points(some are latched)

Total is 1280 points

Contacts can switch to On/Off in program (some is latched)

100ms timer T0~T63, 64 points

10ms counter T64~T126, 63 points (when M1028=On, it is 10ms, M1028=Off, it is 100ms)

T Timer

1ms timer T127, 1 points

Total is 128

points

When the timer indicated by TMR command attains the setting, the T contact with the same number will be ON.

16-bit count up for general C0~C111, 112 points

16-bit count up for latched * C112~C127, 16 points

Total is 128

points

1-phase input C235~C238, C241, C242, C244, 7 points

1-phase 2 inputs C246, C247, C249, 3 points

C Counter 32-bit count up/down high-speed counter for latched* 2-phase 2 inputs C251, C252, C254, 3 points

Total is 13

points

When the counter indicated by CNT (DCNT) command attains the setting, the C contact with the same number will be ON.

Initial step point latched * S0~S9, 10 points

Zero point return latched * S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST command)

Rel

ay b

it m

ode

S Step point

latched * S20~S127, 108 points

Total is 128

points

Usage device of step ladder diagram (SFC)

T Present value of timer T0~T127, 128 points When timer attains, the contact of timer will be ON.

C Present value of counter C0~C127, 16-bit counter, 128 C235~C254, 32-bit counter, 13 points

When timer attains, the contact of timer will be ON.

For general D0~D407, 408 points For latched * D408~D599, 192 points

Total is 600 points

For special

D1000~D1311, 312 points (for V4.9 and above) D1000~D1143, 144 points (for V4.8 and below)

Reg

iste

r WO

RD

dat

a

D Data register

For index indication E(=D1028), F(=D1029), 2points

Total is 312 points

(144 points)

It can be memory area for storing data. E and F can be used as the special purpose of index indication

N For master control nested loop N0~N7, 8 points Control point of master control nested loop

P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P63, 64 points Location pointer of CJ, CALL

Time interrupt I6□□, 1 point (□□＝10~99ms) (for Version 5.7)

External interrupt I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points

Poin

ter

I Interrupt

Communication interrupt I150

Location pointer of interrupt subroutine

K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)

Con

stan

t

H Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation) H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)

* latched area is fixed, it can’t be changed.

2 DVP-PLC Function


EP/SA models:

Type Device Item Range Function

X External input relay X0~X177, 128 points, octal number

system

Correspond to

external input point

Y External output relay Y0~Y177, 128 points, octal number

system

Total is

256 points

Correspond to

external output point

For general M0~M511, 512 points (*1)

For latched * M512~M999, 488 points (*3)

M2000~M4095, 2096 points (*3) M Auxiliary

Relay

For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points (some

are latched)

Total is

4096points

Contacts can be

switched during

ON/OFF in the

program (some is

latched)

100ms

T0~T199, 200 points (*1)

T192~T199 for subroutine

T250~T255, 6 points (accumulative

type) (*4)

10ms

T200~T239, 40 points (*1)

T240~T245, 6 points (accumulative

type) (*4)

T Timer

1ms T246~T249, 4 points (accumulative

type) (*4)

Total is

256 points

When the timer that

TMR command

indicates attains the

setting, the T contact

with the same

number will be On.

C0~C95, 96 points (*1) 16-bit count up

C96~C199, 104 points (*3)

C200~C215, 16 points (*1) 32-bit count up/down

C216~C234, 19 points (*3)

C235~C244, 1-phase 1 input, 9

points (*3)

C246, C247, C249, 1-phase 2

inputs, 3 points (*3)

C Counter

32-bit high-speed

counter

C251, C252, C254, 2-phase 2

inputs, 3 points (*3)

Total is

250 points

When the timer that

CNT(DCNT)

command indicates

attains, the contact C

with the same

number will be On.

Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points (*1)

Zero point return S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST

command) (*1)

For general S20~S512, 492 points (*1)

For latched * S512~S895, 384 points (*3)

Rel

ay b

it m

ode

S Step

point

For alarm S896~S1023, 128 points (*3)

Total is

1024 points

Usage device of step

ladder diagram

2 DVP-PLC Function



T Present value of timer T0~T255, 256 points

When timer attains,

the contact will be

On.

C Present value of counter

C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 points

C200~C254, 16-bit counter, 50 points

When timer attains,

the contact will be On.

For general D0~D199, 200 points (*1)

For latched*

D200~D999, 800 points (*3)

D2000~D4999, 3000 points

(*3)

For special D1000~D1999, 1000 points

D Data

register

For index indication E0~E3, F0~F3, 8 points (*1)


It is the memory area

for storing data. E and

F can be used as

special purpose of

index indication

Reg

iste

r WO

RD

dat

a

None File register * K0~K1599 (1600 points) (*4)

It is expansion

register for storing

data

N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points The control point of

master control nested

P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points The location point of

CJ, CALL

External interrupt I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total is 6

points

Time interrupt I6□□, I7□□, 2 points (□□＝1~99ms,

time base=0.1ms)

High-speed counter

reaches interrupt I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points

Poin

ter

I For

interrupt

Communication interrupt I150

The location point of

interrupt subroutine.

K Decimal number system K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)

K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)

Con

stan

t

H Hexadecimal number system H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)

H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)

*1: non-latched area is fixed, it can’t be changed.

*2: non-latched area can be changed to latched area by parameter setting.

*3: latched area can be changed to non-latched area by parameter setting.

*4: latched area is fixed, it can’t be modified. (the area marked with【】can’t be changed)

2 DVP-PLC Function


Latched setting for each EP/SA model: For general For latched Special auxiliary relay Latched

M0~M511 M512~M999 M1000~M1999 M2000~M4095 Factory setting is

latched Factory setting is latchedM Auxiliary relay It is fixed to be

non-latched Start: D1200(K512) End: D1201(K999)

Some are latched and can’t be changed Start: D1202(K2000)

End: D1203(K4095)

100 ms 10 ms 10ms 1 ms 100 ms

T0 ~T199 T200~T239 T240~T245 T246~T249 T250~T255 T Timer

It is fixed to be non-latched


Accumulative type It is fixed to be latched

16 bits count up 32 bits count up/down 32 bits count up/down high speed counter

C0~C95 C96~C199 C200~C215 C216~C234 C235~C255 It is fixed to be

latched It is fixed to be

latched Factory setting is latched C Counter


Start: D1208（K96）

End: D1209（K199）

It is fixed to be

non-latched

Start: D1210（K216）

End: D1211（K234）

Start: D1212（K235） End: D1213（K255）

For general Latched Special

register Latched For general

S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S511 S512~S895 S896~S1023 Factory setting is latched

S Step relay

It is fixed to be non-latched Start: D1214（K512） End: D1215（K895）

It is fixed to be latched

For general Latched Special register Latched D0~D199 D200~D999 D1000~D1999 D2000~D9999

Factory setting is latched Factory setting is latchedD

Register It is fixed to be non-latched Start: D1216 (K200)

End: D1217 (K999)

Some are latched and can’t be changed Start: D1218 (K2000)

End: D1219 (K4999)

K0~K1599 Data Register

It is fixed to be latched

EH model:


X External input relay X0~X377, 256 points, octal number system Corresponds to external input point

Y External output relay Y0~Y377, 256 points, octal number system

Total is

512 points

Corresponds to external output point

For general M0~M499, 500 points (*2)

For latched M500~M999, 500 points (*3) M2000~M4095, 2096 points (*3) M Auxiliary

relay For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points (some are

latched)

Total is

4096 points

Contacts can be switched between On/Off in the program (some is latched)

100ms T0~T199, 200 points (*2) T192~T199 is for subroutine 【T250~T255】, 6-point Accumulative type (*4)

10ms T200~T239, 40 points (*2) 【T240~T245】, 6-point Accumulative type (*4)

Rel

ay b

it m

ode

T Timer

1ms 【T246~T249】, 4-point Accumulative type (*4)

Total is

256 points

When the timer that set by TMR command attains, the T contact with the same number will be On.

2 DVP-PLC Function



16-bit count up C0~C99, 100 points (*2) C100~C199, 100 points (*3)

32-bit count up/down

C200~C219, 20 points (*2) C220~C234, 15 points (*3) C Counter

High-speed counter

C235~C244, 1-phase 1 input, 10 points (*3) C246~C249, 1-phase 2 inputs, 4 points(*3) C251~C254, 2-phases 2 inputs, 4 points (*3)

Total is

253 points

When the timer that set by CNT(DCNT) command attains, the contact C will be On.

Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points (*2)

For zero point return

S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST command) (*2)

For general S20~S499, 480 points (*2) For latched S500~S899, 400 points (*3)

S Step points

For alarm S900~S1023, 124 points (*3)

Total is

1024 points

Usage device of step ladder diagram (SFC)

T Present value of timer T0~T255, 256 points When timer attains, the contact of timer will be On.

C Present value of counter C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 points C200~C254, 132-bit counter, 53 points

When timer attains, the contact of timer will be On.

For general D0~D199, 200 points, (*2)

For latched D200~D999, 800 points (*3) D2000~D9999, 8000 points (*3)

For special D1000~D1999, 1000 points D Data

register

For index E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 points (*1)


It is the memory area for storing data. E and F can be used as special purpose of index indication R

egis

ter W

OR

D d

ata

None File register K0~K9999(10000 points) (*4) Expansion register for storing data

N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points Master control nested control point

P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points The location pointer of CJ, CALL

External interrupt

I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3), I40□(X4), I50□(X5), 6 points (□=1, rising-edge trigger , □=0, falling-edge trigger )

Time interrupt I6□□, I7□□, I8□□, 3 points(□□＝1~99ms) time base=1ms I8□□, 1 point (□□＝1~99, time base=0.1ms)

High-speed counter attained interrupt I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points

Pulse interrupt I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points

Poin

ter

I

Inte

rrupt

Communication interrrupt I150

The location pointer of interrupt subroutine

K Decimal system K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)

Con

stan

t

H Hexadecimal system H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation) H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)

2 DVP-PLC Function


*1: the area of non-latched is fixed, it can’t be changed.

*2: the area of non-latched, it can be changed to latched area by parameter setting.

*3: latched area can be changed to non-latched area by parameter setting.

*4: latched area is fixed, it can’t be modified. (the area marked with【】can’t be changed)

Latched setting for each EH model:

* 1: HFFFF means factory setting is non-latched.

When switching between power On/Off or MPU RUN/STOP mode, the memory type of version 5.5 and higher of ES,

ES/EX/SS series will be as following:

Memory type Power Off=>On STOP=>RUN RUN=>STOP

Clear all M1031Non-latched

area

Clear all M1032 latched area

Factory setting

When M1033=Off, clear Non-latched Clear

When M1033=On, unchangedClear Unchanged 0

Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear UnchangedSpecial M, Special D, index register

Initial Unchanged Unchanged Initial setting

For general For latched Special auxiliary relay Latched

M0~M499 M500~M999 M1000~M1999 M2000~M4095 M Auxiliary relay Start: D1200(K500)

End: D1201(K999) Some are latched and they can’t be changed.

Start: D1202(K2000) End: D1203(K4095)

100 ms 10 ms 10ms 1 ms 100 ms T0 ~T199 T200~T239 T240~T245 T246~T249 T250~T255

Factory setting is non-latched

Factory setting is non-latched

T Timer

Start: D1204 (HFFFF)*1 End: D1205 (HFFFF)*1

Start: D1206 (HFFFF)*1End: D1207 (HFFFF)*1

Accumulative type Fixed latched

16-bit count up 32-bit count up/down 32-bit high-speed count up/downC0~C99 C100~C199 C200~C219 C220~C234 C235~C245 C246~C255

Non-latched (default) Latched (default) Non-latched

(default) Latched (default) Latched (default) C

Counter Start: D1208 (K100) End: D1209 (K199)

Start: D1210 (K220) End: D1211 (K234)

Start: D1212 (K235) End: D1213 (K255)

Initial Zero point return For general Latched Step point for alarm

S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S499 S500~S899 S900~S1023 Non-latched (default) Latched (default)

S Step relay

Start: D1214 (K500) End: D1215 (K899)

Always is latched

For general Latched Special register Latched

D0~D199 D200~D999 D1000~D1999 D2000~D9999

Non-latched (default) Latched (default) Latched (default) D Register

Start: D1216 (K200) End: D1217 (K999)

Some is latched, it can’t be changed Start: D1218 (K2000)

End: D1219 (K9999)

2 DVP-PLC Function


The memory type of EP/SA/EH models will be as following:

Memory type Power Off=>On STOP=>RUN RUN=>STOP

Clear all M1031 Non-latched

area

Clear all M1032 latched area

Factory setting

When M1033=Off, clear Non-latched Clear

When M1033=On, No changeClear Unchanged 0

Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear 0 Special M, Special D, index register

Initial Unchanged Unchanged Initial setting

File Register Unchanged 0

2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H]

K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)

Constant H Hexadecimal H0 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)

H0 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)

There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is the

explanation of value types.

1. Binary Number (BIN)

It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary system is in the

following. Bit : Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0.

Nibble : It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to represent number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal.

Byte : It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0). It can used to represent 00~FF of hexadecimal system.

Word : It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16 bits, b15~b0. It can used to represent 0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system.

Double Word : It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32 bits, b31~b0. It can used to represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal.

The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows.

NB0NB1NB2NB3NB4NB5NB6NB7

BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0

W1

DW

W0

Double Word

Word

Byte

Nibble

Bit

2. Octal Number (OCT)

The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number.

Example:

External input: X0~X7, X10~X17…(device number)

2 DVP-PLC Function


External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17…(device number)

3. Decimal Number (DEC)

The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.

To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)

To be the device number of S, M, T, C, D, E, F, P, I. For example: M10, T30. (device number)

To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)

4. BCD (Binary Code Decimal, BCD)

It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent the

four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output

value to 7-segment display to be display.

5. Hexadecimal Number (HEX)

The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.

To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H)

Constant K:

In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100 in

decimal number.

Exception: The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or double word. For example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12 and 16-bit data separately.

Constant H:

In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example, H100 means 100 in

hexadecimal number. Reference Chart:

Binary (BIN)

Octal (OCT)

Decimal (DEC)

BCD (Binary Code Decimal)

Hexadecimal(HEX)

For PLC internal operation Equipment X, Y number

Constant K, equipment M, S, T, C, D, E, F, P, I number

For DIP Switch and 7-segment display Constant H

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 7 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 10 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 11 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 12 10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 A 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 13 11 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 B 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 14 12 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 C 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 15 13 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 D

2 DVP-PLC Function


Binary (BIN)

Octal (OCT)

Decimal (DEC)

BCD (Binary Code Decimal)

Hexadecimal(HEX)

For PLC internal operation EquipmentX, Y number

Constant K, equipment M, S, T, C, D, E, F, P, I number

For DIP Switch and 7-segment display Constant H

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 16 14 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 E 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 17 15 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 F 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 20 16 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 21 17 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 11

: : :

: : :

: : :

: : :

: : :

0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 143 99 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 63

2.3 The Numbering and Function of External Input/Output Contact [X] / [Y]

Input/output contact number:(octal number)

For MPU, the number of input and output contact will be counted from X0 and Y0. The number will be changed

with points of MPU. For I/O expansion unit, the number of input / output terminal is counted with the connection

sequence of MPU.

For ES, EX, SS Models:

Model no DVP-14ES DVP-14SS DVP-20EX DVP-24ES DVP-32ES DVP-60ES Expansion I/O

Input X X0~X7

(8 Points) X0~X7

(8 Points) X0~X7

(8 Points)X0~X17

(16 Points) X0~X17

(16 Points) X0~X43

(36 Points) X20(X50)~X177

(Note)

Output Y Y0~Y5

(6 Points) Y0~Y5

(6 Points) Y0~Y5

(6 Points)Y0~Y7

(8 Points) Y0~Y17

(16 Points) Y0~Y27

(24 Points) Y20(Y30)~Y177

(Note)

Note: Besides DVP-60ES, the started input number of expansion unit is from X20 and the started output

number of expansion unit from Y20. The started input number of DVP-60ES is X50 and the started

output number of DVP-60ES is Y30. The number of expansion I/O is increased by 8 times and if it is

less than 8 points, it will count with 8 points.

EP/SA model:

Model no DVP-12SA (Note1) DVP-14EP DVP-32EP Expansion I/O

Input X X0~X7 (8 points) X0~X7 (8 points) X0~X17 (16 points) X20~X177 (note 2)

Output Y Y0~Y3 (4 points) Y0~Y7 (8 points) Y0~Y17 (16 points) Y20~Y177 (note 2)

Note 1: All SA functions are the same as EP except function expansion card. All SA expansion units share

with SS series.

Note 2: The started input number of expansion unit is from X20 and the started output number of

expansion unit from Y20. The number of expansion I/O is increased by 8 times and if it is less than

8 points, it will count with 8 points.

2 DVP-PLC Function


EH model:

Model no DVP-16EH DVP-20EH DVP-32EH DVP-48EH DVP-64EH DVP-80EH Expansion I/O

Input X X0~X7

(8 points) X0~X13(12

points) X0~X17

(16 points)X0~X27

(24 points)X0~X37

(32 points)X0~X47

(40 points) X20~X377

(note)

Output Y Y0~Y7

(8 points) Y0~Y7(8 points)

Y0~Y17 (16 points)

Y0~Y27 (24 points)

Y0~Y37 (32 points)

Y0~Y47 (40 points)

Y20~Y377 (note)

Note: Besides DVP-16EH and DVP-20EH, the started input/output number of expansion unit starts with

the last number of MPU. The started input number of DVP-60EH is X20 and the started output

number of DVP-60EH is Y20. The numbers of expansion I/O are sequential numbers. The input

number can be up to X377 and output number can be up to Y377.

Input relay: X0~X377

The number of input relay (or called input terminal) uses octal number. The points of EH model can be up

to 256 points, the range as follows: X0~X7, X10~X17, ……, X370~X377.

Output relay: Y0~Y377

The number of output relay (or called output terminal) uses octal number. The points of EH model can be

up to 256 points, the range as follows: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17, ……, Y370~Y377.

Input/output contact Function:

The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input

equipment. It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program. The

On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the On/Off of input equipment but can’t be changed by using

peripheral equipment (HPP or WPLSoft).

(※ There is a special relay M1304 in EH model to force input contact X On/Off by peripheral equipment

HPP or WPLSoft, but PLC won’t receive any external input signal at this time.)

Output contact Y Function:

The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending On/Off

signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is unlimited usage

times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program. But there is number for output coil Y and it is

recommended to use one time in program. Otherwise, the output result will be decided by the circuit of last

output Y with PLC program scan method.

2 DVP-PLC Function


X0

X10

Y0

Y0

1

2

Y0 is repeated

The output of Y0 will be decided by circuit ○2 , i.e.

decided by On/Off of X10.

The Handling Process of PLC Program (Batch I/O)

X0

Y0

Y0

M0

input X

input terminal

read in memory

Input signal memory

Device

Mem

oryread X0 state from memory

Write Y0 state into

read Y0 state from memory

Write M0 state into

Output

Program

Input signal

output

Y output

output terminal

output latched memory

Input signal:

1. PLC will read the On/Off of input signal into the

memory of input signal before executing

program.

2. The input signal state in memory won’t change

if On/Off of the input signal changes during

executing. The new On/Off state will be read

into memory in the next scan.

3. The delay time from the changes of external

signal On→Off or Off→On to the contact will be

10ms.

Program:

PLC executes each command in program from

address 0 after reading On/Off state of input

signal in input signal memory and save each

On/Off of output coil into each equipment

memory.

Output:

1. When executing END command, send On/Off

state of Y in memory to output latched memory.

In fact, this memory is the coil of output relay.

2. The delay time from the change of On→Off or

Off→On of relay coil to contact On/Off.

2.4 The Numbering and Function of Auxiliary Relay [M]

The number of auxiliary relay:(decimal number)

ES, EX, SS models:

For general M0~M511, M768~M999, 744 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

For latched M512~M767, 256 points. It is fixed to be latched area. Auxiliary relay M

For special M1000~M1279, 280 points. Some are latched.


2 DVP-PLC Function


EP/SA models:

For general M0~M511, 512 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

For latched M512~M999, M2000~M4095, 2584 points. It can be changed to non-latched area by parameters.

Auxiliary relay M

For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points.


EH models:

For general M0~M499, 500 points. It can be changed to latched area by setting parameters.

For latched M500~M999, M2000~M4095, 2596 points. It can be changed to non-latched area by setting parameters.

Auxiliary relay M

For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points. Some are latched.


Auxiliary Relay Function

There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage times in

program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can’t drive external load directly. There are three types

divided by its characteristics. 1. Auxiliary relay for general : It will reset to OFF when power loss during running. Its state will be OFF when

power on after power loss. 2. Auxiliary relay for latched : The state will be saved when power loss during running and the state when

power on after power loss will be the same as the state before power loss. 3. Auxiliary relay for special : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function. Please don’t use undefined

auxiliary relay. Please refer to 2.10 Special relay and special register for each special auxiliary relay and 2.11 Functions of special auxiliary relay and special registers.

2.5 The Numbering and Function of Step Relay [S]

The numbering of auxiliary relay (by decimal number):

ES, EX, SS models:

Initial latched S0~S9, 10 points. It is fixed to be latched area.

Zero point

return latched

S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command) It is fixed to be

latched area. Step relay S

Latched S20~S127, 108 points. It is fixed to be latched area.

Total is128

points

EP/SA Models:

For initial S0~S9, 10 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

For zero point

return

S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command) It is fixed to be

non-latched area.

For general S20~S511, 492 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

For latched S512~S895, 384 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area

by parameters.

Step relay S

For alarm S896~S1023, 128 points. It is fixed to be latched area.

Total is1024 points

2 DVP-PLC Function


EH Models:

For initial S0~S9, 10 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters.

For zero point

return S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command). It can be latched area by setting parameters.

For general S20~S499, 480 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters.

For latched S500~S899, 400 points. It can be non-latched area by setting

parameters.

Step relay S

For alarm S900~S1023, 124 points. It can be latched area by setting

parameters.

Total is1024 points

The function of step relay:

Step relay S is the basic equipment of step ladder diagram and it can set process easily in PLC. In step ladder

diagram (or call Sequential Function Chart, SFC), it should be used with command STL, REL and etc.

There are 1024 points, S0~S1023, in step relay S. Like output relay Y, there are output coil and A, B contacts in

each step relay S and unlimited usage times in program. But it can’t drive external load directly. Step relay (S) can be

used as general auxiliary relay when not use with step command. There are four types divided by its characteristics. 1. Initial step relay : S0~S9, 10 points.

In Sequential Function Chart (SFC), it is the step point for initiating.

2. Zero point return step relay

: S10~S19, 10 points. S10 – S19 are for zero point return when using API 60 IST in program. If it can’t use IST command, they will be used as general step relay.

3. General step relay : EP/SA model: S20~S511, 492 points. EH mode: S20~S499, 480 points. Those step points that are used as general in sequential function chart (SFC). They will be cleared when power loss after running.

4. Latched step relay : ES, EX, SS models: S20~S127, 108 points. EP models: S512~S895, 384points. EH models: S500~S899, 400 points. In sequential function chart (SFC), latched step relay will be saved when power loss after running. The state of power on after power loss will be the same as the sate before power loss.

5. Step relay for alarm : EP/SA models: S896~S1023, 128 points. EH models: S900~S1023, 124 points. The step relay for alarm uses with alarm drive command API 46 ANS to be the contact for alarm. It is used to record warning and eliminate external malfunction.

2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T]

The numbering of timer (by decimal number):

ES, EX, SS models:

100ms for general T0~T63, 64 points

10ms for general T64~T126, 63 points (when M1028=On, it is 10ms. when M1028=Off, it

is 100ms) Timer T

1ms for general T127, 1 points

Total is

128

points

2 DVP-PLC Function


EP/SA model:

100ms for general T0~T199, 200 points. (T192~T199 are the timers for subroutine.) 100ms for accumulative T250~T255, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area.

10ms for general T200~T239, 40 points. 10ms for accumulative T240~T245, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area.

Timer T

1ms for accumulative T246~T249, 4 points. It is fixed to be latched area.

Total is 256

points

EH model:

100ms for general T0~T199, 200 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. (T192~T199 are the timers for subroutine.)


10ms for general T200~T239, 40 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. 10ms for accumulative T240~T245, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area.

Timer T


Total is256

points

Timer function:

The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be ON when the

present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data register D can be also used as

settings.

The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings

There are three types divided by these characteristics as follows.

1. General timer:

ES/EP/SA Series

Models :

General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if

timer attains when executing command TMR.

EH Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if


T0Y0

X0TMR T0 K100

X0

T0

Y0

K100

10 sec

presentvalue

When X0=On, timer T0 is counted up with

100ms. The output coil T0=On, when the present

value of timer equals to setting (K100).

When X0=Off or power off, timer T0 will be

cleared to 0 and output coil T0 will be OFF.

2. Accumulative timer:

2 DVP-PLC Function


ES/EP Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if timer attains when executing command TMR.

EH Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if timer attains when executing command TMR.

T250Y0

X0TMR T250 K100

X0

T2

Y0

K100

T1+T2=10sec

T250

T1

present value

When X0=On, timer T250 is counted up with 100ms. The output coil T0=On, when the present value of timer equals to settings (K100).

If X0=Off or power off during counting, timer T250 pauses and keep on counting after X0=On. The present value counts up till the present value of timer equals to settings (K100), output coil T0=On.

3. Timer for subroutine

If timer is used in subroutine or have interrupt in subroutine, use timer T192~T194 for it.

ES/EP Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if


EH Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if


If general timer is used in subroutine or interrupt to insert in subroutine and the subroutine won’t be executed,

timer can’t count correctly.

Designate method of settings: actual setting time of timer = unit * settings.

1. Designate constant K: Settings designates constant K directly

2. Designate indirectly D: Settings use data register D to be indirect designation

The detail of timer:

Beside timer used for subroutine, the flow chart of general timer is in the following:

T0Y0

X0T0 K100TMR

input reflash

When X0=On,it starts to count.

1st scan 2nd scan Nth scan (N+1)th scan

contact Y0=On

contact T0 is OnT0 counts to 10sec now, but contactisn On.　

Timer will start when executing TMR command.If scan time is longer, same scan will count withplural timing pulse automatically.

From action above, the action since the coil is started to be ON in detail are in the following: +T0 T -α

α : 1ms timer is 0.001 second, 10ms timer is 0.01 second, 100ms timer is 0.1 second T : Setting time of timer (second) T0 : Scan time (second)

2 DVP-PLC Function


If contact is wrote prior to TMR command in program, it needs to add 2*T0 (two times scan time) in the worst

situation.

If timer setting is 0, output contact will be ON when TMR command is executed in the next time.

2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C]

The numbering of counter (by decimal number):

ES, EX, SS model:

16 bits count up for general C0~C111, 112 points

Counter C 16 bits count up for latched C112~C127, 16 points. it is always latched area

1-phase input C235~C238, C241, C242, C244, 7 points. It is always latched area

1-phase 2 inputs C246, C247, C249, 3 points. It is always latched area 32 bits count up/down High speed counters C

2-phase inputs C251, C252, C254, 3 points. It is always latched area

Total is141

points

EP/SA models:

16 bits count up for general C0~C95, 96 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

16 bits count up for latched

C96~C199, 104 points. It can be non-latched area by setting parameters.

32 bits count up/down for general

C200~C215, 15 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area. Counter C

32 bits count up/down for latched

C216~C234, 19 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by setting parameters.

1-phase input for latched

C235~C242, C244, 9 points. It can be changed to benon-latched area by setting parameters.

1-phase 2 inputs for latched

C246, C247, C249, 3 points. It can be changed to benon-latched area by setting parameters.

32 bits count up/down High speed counters C

2-phase 2 inputs for latched

C251, C252, C254, 3 points. It can be changed to benon-latched area by setting parameters.

Total is250

points

EH models:

16-bit count up for general

C0~C99, 100 points. It can be changed to be latched area by parameters.

16-bit count up for latched

C100~C199, 100 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by parameters.

32-bit count up/down for general

C200~C219, 20 points. It can be changed to be latched area by parameters.

Counter C

32-bit count up/down for latched


Software 1-phase 1 input


Hardware 1-phase 1 input


Hardware 1-phase 2 inputs


32 bits count up/down High-speed counters C

Hardware 1-phase 2 inputs


Total is 253

points

Features:

2 DVP-PLC Function


Item 16 bits counters 32 bits counters

Type General General High speed Count direction Count up Count up/down

Settings 0~32,767 -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647 Designate for constant

Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D (2 for designated)

Present value change

Counter will stop when attaining settings

Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings

Output contact

When count attains settings, contact will be ON and latched.

When count up attains settings, contact will be ON and latched.When count down attains settings, contact will reset to OFF.

Reset action The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will reset to OFF.Present register 16 bits 32 bits

Contact action

After scanning, act together. After scanning, act together.

Act immediately when count attains. It has no relation with scan period.

Functions:

When pulse input signal of counter is from OFF to ON, the present value of counter equals to settings and output

coil is ON. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings.

16-bit counters C0~C199:

1. Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32,767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be ON

immediately at the first count.

2. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the value

before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss.

3. If using MOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at

the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the

same as settings.

4. The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register D1000~D1999)

to be indirect setting.

5. If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it can be

positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is -32,768.

Example:

LD X0

RST C0

LD X1

CNT C0 K5

LD C0

OUT Y0

C0Y0

X1C0 K5CNT

X0C0RST

2 DVP-PLC Function


1. When X0=On, RST command is executed, C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to OFF.

2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will count up (add 1).

3. When counter C0 attains settings K5, C0 contact is ON and C0 = setting =K5. C0 won’t accept X1 trigger signal and C0 remains K5.

X0

X1

01

23

45

0

Contacts Y0, C0

C0 present value

settings

32-bit general addition/subtraction counters C200~C234:

1. The setting range of general 32-bit counter is K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647. (not for DVP ES, EX and SS

MPU)

2. Special auxiliary relay used to switch count up/down of general 32-bit addition/subtraction counters decided by

M1200~M123. For example: When M1200=Off, C200 is for addition. When M1200=On, C200 is for

subtraction.

3. Settings can be constant K or data register D (special data register D1000~D1999 is not included) and also can

be positive/negative number. If using data register D, it will occupy two continuous data register.

4. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If it is latched counter, counter will save the present

value and the contacts state and keep on counting when power is on after power loss.

5. The next number will be -2,147,483,648 for counter to count up after 2,147,483,647. By the same way, once

counter counts down to -2,147,483,648 the next value will be 2,147,483,647.

Example:

LD X10

OUT M1200

LD X11

RST C200

LD X12

CNT C200 K-5

LD C200

OUT Y0

C200Y0

X12C200 K-5DCNT

X11C200RST

X10M1200

2 DVP-PLC Function


1. X10 drives M1200 to decide C200 is

addition or subtraction.

2. When X11 is from Off to ON and RST

command is executed, C200 will be clear

to 0 and contact will be off.

3. When X12 is from Off to On, counter

will add one (count up) or subtract 1 (count

down).

4. When counter C200 is from K-6 to K-5,

the contact of C200 is from Off to On.

When counter C200 is from K-5 to K-6, the

contact of C200 will be from On to Off.

X10

X11

X12

01

23

45

43

21

0-1

-2-3

-4-5

-6-7

-8

0

-7-6

-5-4

-3

contacts Y0, C0

C200 present value

output contactis On before.

gradualincrease

gradualincreasegradual decrease

5. If using MOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at the

next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same

as settings.

32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235~C254:

1. Setting range of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter is : K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647.

2. The operation of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235~C244 is decided by the On/Off of

special auxiliary relay M1235~M1244. For example: if M1235=Off, C235 is addition and if M1235=On,

C235 is subtraction.

3. The operation of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C246~C254 is decided by the On/Off of

special auxiliary relay M1246~M1254. For example: if M1246=Off, C246 is addition and if M1246=On,

C246 is subtraction.

4. The settings can be positive / negative numbers by using constant K or data register D (special data

register D1000~D1999 is not included). If using data register D, the setting will occupy two continuous data

register.

5. If using DMOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value which is large than setting to any high-speed

counter, at the next time that input point X of counter is from Off to On, this contact doesn’t have any

change and it will do addition and subtraction with present value.

6. The next number will be -2,147,483,648 for counter to count up after 2,147,483,647. By the same way,

once counter counts down to -2,147,483,648, the next value will be 2,147,483,647.

2 DVP-PLC Function


High-speed counter for ES / EX / SS series, 1-phase high-speed counter: 5KHz, total frequency: 40KHz.

1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Type Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254

X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A X1 U/D R R D D D B B B X2 U/D U/D R R R R X3 U/D R S S S

U: Increasing A: A phase input S: Start input

D: Decreasing B: B phase input R: Clear input

Input points X0 and X1 can be used as high-speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 40KHz.

High-speed counter for EP/SA series, 1-phase high-speed counter: 10KHz, total frequency: 40KHz.

1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Type Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254

X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A X1 U/D R R D D D B B B X2 U/D U/D R R R R X3 U/D R S S S X4 U/D X5 U/D



1. Input point X0, X1 can be used as high-speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 20KHz

2. There are two functions for input points X5

When M1260=Off, C240 is general U/D high-speed counter.

When M1260=On, it is Global reset for C235~C239.

C235~C240 are high-speed counters for EH series and they are program interrupted 1-phase high-speed

counter (10KHz) and total frequency is 20KHz. C241~ C254 are Hardware High Speed Counter, is called HHSC.

pulse input frequency of HHSC0 and HHSC 1 can up to 100 KHz; HHSC2 and HHSC3 can up to 30KHz (both of

single phase and AB phase).

C241, C246, C251 share HHSC0




1. Each HHSC can be used for a number one time and it uses command DCNT to designate.

2. There are three modes for each HHSC:

A. 1-phase input, it is called Pulse/Direction mode

B. 1-phase 2 inputs, it is called CW/CCW mode

C. 2-phase inputs, it is called AB phase mode

2 DVP-PLC Function


Type Program-interrupted 1-phase

High-speed Counter Hardware High-speed Counter

1-phase input 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Type

Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254

X0 U/D U/D U A X1 U/D D B X2 U/D R R R X3 U/D S S S X4 U/D U/D U A X5 U/D D B X6 R R R X7 S S S X10 U/D U A X11 D B X12 R R R X13 S S S X14 U/D U A X15 D B X16 R R R X17 S S S



3. System structure of hardware high-speed counter:

A. There are Reset signal and Start signal of external inputs in HHSC0~3. It also can be Reset signal

by setting special M, M1272 (HHSC0), M1274 (HHSC1), M1276 (HHSC2) and M1278 (HHSC3).

And it can be Start signal by setting special M, M1273 (HHSC0), M1275 (HHSC1), M1277

(HHSC2) and M1279 (HHSC3).

B. If input external control signals of R and S aren’t used when using high-speed counter, the

function of input signal can be closed by setting M1264/ M1266/ M1268/ M1270 and M1265 /

M1267/ M1269/ M1271 to True. The corresponding external input can be used as general inputs.

Please refer following for using.

C. When using special M to be high-speed counter, control input with START and TRSET and the

action will be affected with scan time.

2 DVP-PLC Function


HHSC0

HHSC1

HHSC2

HHSC3

M1265

M1273

M1267

M1275

M1269

M1277

M1271

M1279

X3 X7 X17X13

M1272 M1274 M1276 M1278

M1264 M1266 M1268 M1270X2 X6 X12 X16

M1241 M1242 M1243 M1244C241 C242 C243 C244

D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228

X1 X5 X11 X15

X14X10X4X0

HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3






M1246

M1247

M1248

M1249 M1254

M1253

M1252

M1251

DHSCS

DHSCR

DHSCZ

SET/RESETI 060 interruptcounting value reset010 ~ I

I 010I 020I 030I 040I 050I 060

M1289M1290M1291M1292M1293M1294M1294

HHSC0

HHSC1

HHSC2

HHSC3

DHSCS occupies one group setting valueDHSCR occupies one group setting valueDHSCZ occupies two groups setting value

ANDOR

Reset signal R

ANDOR

U/D mode setting flag

Counting modeselection

U/DUA

BD

Counting up/down flag

Setting value:0~3 respectivelyrepresent Mode 1~4(1~4 ) frequency mode

Counting pulse

Counting pulse

Comparator

Current valueof counter

Start signal S

Interrupt inhibit flag

High speedcompar isoncommand

Comparison valuereached operation

Comparison valuereached output

Comparison valuereached setting

4. Counting mode selection

ES/EX/SS/EP high-speed counter uses special D1022 in 2-phase inputs counting mode to select

double frequency mode. D1022 content will be loaded in at the first scan time when PLC switches

from STOP to RUN. (ES/EX/SS series MPU (V5.5 and higher) supports this function.

Device No. Functions

D1022 Double frequency setting of counter counting method

D1022=K1 Normal frequency mode

D1022=K2 Double frequency mode (factory setting)

D1022=K4 Four times frequency mode

Double frequency mode (↑,↓ means the action of counting)

Counting mode

Wave for counting mode

2-phase inputs

1(normal frequency)

A-phase

B-phasecounting up

counting down

2 DVP-PLC Function


Counting mode

Wave for counting mode

2 (double frequency)

B-phase

counting up counting down

A-phase

4 (four times

frequency)

A-phase

B-phase

counting upcounting down

There are 1 to 4 times frequency for EH hardware high-speed counter (HHSC0~3) and set by Special D1225~D1228.

Facotry setting is double frequency.

Type Special D(settings)

Count up (+1) Count down (-1)

1(normal frequency)

U/D

U/D FLAG 1-phase input

2(double frequency)

U/D

U/D FLAG

1(normal frequency)

U

D 1-phase 2 inputs 2(double

frequency)

U

D

1(normal frequency)

A

B

2(double frequency)

A

B

3(three times frequency)

A

B

2-phase 2 inputs

4(four times frequency)

A

B

5. Device number and special registers for high-speed counter

Device number Functions

M1150 Declare DHSZ command to be used for multi-group setting comparison modeM1151 Multi-group setting comparison finishes to execute a cycle M1152 Declare DHSZ command to be used in frequency control mode

2 DVP-PLC Function



M1153 Frequency control finishes executing.

M1235 ~ M1244 C235 ~ C244 are count direction of high-speed counters. When M12□□=Off, C2□□ is count up. When M12□□=On, C2□□ is count down.

M1246 ~ M1249 M1251 ~ M1254

C246 ~ C249, C251 ~ C254 are monitor count direction of high-speed counters. When C2□□ counts up, M12□□=Off. When C2□□ count down, M12□□

=On. M1264 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC0 M1265 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0 M1266 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC1 M1267 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC1 M1268 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC2 M1269 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC2 M1270 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC3 M1271 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC3 M1272 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0 M1273 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0 M1274 External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC1 M1275 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC1 M1276 External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC2 M1277 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC2 M1278 External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC3 M1279 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC3 M1289 Disable high-speed counter interrupt insert I010~I060 M1290 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I010 M1291 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I020 M1292 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I030 M1293 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I040 M1294 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I050 M1312 C235 Start input point control M1313 C236 Start input point control M1314 C237 Start input point control M1315 C238 Start input point control M1316 C239 Start input point control M1317 C240 Start input point control M1320 C235 Reset input point control M1321 C236 Reset input point control M1322 C237 Reset input point control M1323 C238 Reset input point control M1324 C239 Reset input point control M1325 C240 Reset input point control M1326 C235 Start/Reset enable control M1327 C236 Start/Reset enable control M1328 C237 Start/Reset enable control M1329 C235 Start input point control M1330 C236 Start input point control M1331 C238 Start/Reset enable control

2 DVP-PLC Function



M1332 C239 Start/Reset enable control M1333 C240 Start/Reset enable control D1022 ES/EX/SS/EP/SA models double frequency selection of AB phase counter

D1150 The register to record the comparison item of settings comparison mode of multi-group

D1151 The register to record the comparison item of frequency control mode

D1152 Executing DHSZ command in frequency control mode, the high word of pulse output frequency.

D1153 Executing DHSZ command in frequency control mode, the low word of pulse output frequency.

D1225 First group counter setting, C241, C246 and C251 counting mode D1226 Second group counter setting, C242, C247 and C252 counting mode D1227 Third group counter setting, C243, C248 and C253 counting mode D1228 4th group counter setting, C244, C249 and C254 counting mode

D1225 ~ D1228

HHSC0~ HHSC3 counting mode of EH hardware high-speed counter When setting to 1, it is normal frequency. Setting to 2 is double frequency.(Factory setting) Setting to 3 is three times frequency and setting to 4 is four times frequency.

1-phase inputs high-speed counter:

Example:

LD X10 RST C241 LD X11 OUT M1241 LD X12 DCNT C241 K5 LD C241 OUT Y0

C241Y0

X12C241 K5DCNT

X11C241RST

X10

M1241

1. X11 drives M1241 to decide C241 is

addition or subtraction. 2. When X10=On and RST command is

executed, clear C241 to 0 and reset output contact to off.

3. When X12=On, C241 receives count signal from X0 and counter will count up (+1) or count down (-1).

4. When counter C241 attains settings K5, C241 will be ON. If there is still signal input for X0, it will keep on counting.

X12

X0

01

23

45

0

X10

X11,M1241 contact

67

65

43

counting upcounting down

C241 present value

Y0, C241 contact

2 DVP-PLC Function


5. C241 for ES, EX, SS, EP series has external input Reset X1 signal.

6. C241 for EH series has external input Reset signal (X2), Start signal (X3).

7. EH series external input contact of clear signal of C241 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input contact

of start signal is disabled by M1265.

8. EH series internal input contact of clear signal of C241 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input contact of

start signal is disabled by M1273.

9. Counting mode (normal frequency or double frequency) of C246 (HHSC0) of EH series can be set by D1225.

Factory setting is double frequency.

1-phase 2 inputs high-speed counters:

Example:

LD X10 RST C246 LD X11 DCNT C246 K5 LD C246 OUT Y0

C246Y0

X11C246 K5DCNT

C246RSTX10

1. When X10=On and RST command is executed,

clear C246 to 0 and reset output contact to off.

2. When X11=On, C246 receives count signal

from X0 input terminal and counter will count up

(+1) or receive count signal from X1 input

terminal and counter will count down (-1).

3. When C246 attains settings K5, C246 will be

on. After C246 is ON, if there is counter pulse

input, C246 will keep on counting.

X11

01

23

45

0

X10

67

65

43

X1count upX0

count down

C246presentvalue

Y0, C246 contact

4. C246 for EH series has external input Reset signal X2 or Start signal X3.

5. C246 (HHSC0) of EH series can be normal frequency or double frequency by setting D1225. Factory setting

is double frequency.

6. EH series external input contact of clear signal ( R ) of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input

contact of start signal ( S ) is disabled by M1265.

7. EH series internal input contact of clear signal ( R ) of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input

contact of start signal ( S ) is disabled by M1273.

2 DVP-PLC Function


2-phase AB input high-speed counter:

Example:

LD X10 RST C251 LD X11 DCNT C251 K5 LD C251 OUT Y0

C251Y0

X11C251 K5DCNT

C251RSTX10

1. When X11=On, RST command is executed and reset C251 to 0, output contact is reset to off.

2. C251 receives A phase counting signal of X0 input terminal and B phase counting signal of X1 input

terminal to execute add 1 (count up) or subtract 1 (count down) when X12=on. EH series can set different

frequency for counting mode.

3. When counter C251 attains settings K5, C251 contact will be ON. After C251 is On, if there is counter

pulse input, C251 will keep on counting.

4. For ES/EP/SA series, it can be set to normal frequency, double frequency or four times frequency by

D1022 (counting mode setting). Factory setting is double frequency.

5. EH series C251 has external input reset signal X2 and start signal X3.

6. The counting mode (normal frequency, double frequency, third times frequency, four times frequency) of

EH series C251 (HHSC0) can be set by D1225. Factory setting is double frequency.

7. EH series external input contact of clear signal of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input

contact of start signal is disabled by M1265.

8. EH series internal input contact of clear signal of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input

contact of start signal is disabled by M1273. ES/EX/SS, EP/SA series:

01

23

45

X11

X10

6

3

01

23

45

A-phase X0

B-phase X1

C251 present value

Y0, C251 contact

Counting up Counting down

2 DVP-PLC Function


EH series:(double frequency)

01

23

45

X11

X10

6

2

01

23

45

A-phase X0B-phaseX1

C251present value

Y0. C251 contact

counting up counting down

2.8 Register Number and Function [D], [E], [F]

2.8.1 Data register [D]

It is used to store numerical data and data length is 16-bit (-32,768~+32,767). The left-most bit is sign bit. Two

16-bit registers also can be combined to a 32-bit register (The number for each 32-bit register will be (D0, D1), (D2,

D3) …..and the number for upper bit will be greater than low bit.) The left-most bit sign bit and the store range is

-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647.

ES, EX, SS model:

For general D0~D407, 408 points

For latched * D408~D599, 192 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)

Special D1000~D1143, 144 points. (Some are latched area) Data register D

Index register E, F E(=D1028), F(=D1029), 2 points

Total is744

points

EP/SA model:

For general D0~D199, 200 points. (It is fixed to be unlatched area)

For latched D200~D999, D2000~D4999, 3800 points. (It can be used to

be unlatched area by setting parameter.)

Special D1000~D1999, 1000 points. (Some are latched area)

Data register D

Index register E, F E0~E3, F0~F3, 8 points

Total is5000 points

File register K0~K1599, MPU 1600 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)

2 DVP-PLC Function


EH model:

For general D0~D199, 200 points. It can be latched area by setting

parameter

For latched D200~D999, D2000~D9999, 8800points. It can be

non-latched area by setting parameter

For special D1000~D1999, 1000 pints. Some are latched.

Data register D

Index register E, F E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 points.

Total is10000 points

File register K0~K9999, MPU is 1000 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)

There are five types of register which sorts by characters in the following:

1. General register : The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or

power is off. If M1033=On when PLC switches from Run to STOP, data won’t be

cleared but the data will be cleared to 0 when power is off.

2. Latched register : The data is the latched register won’t be cleared when PLC is power off. If you want

to clear the data in this register, you should use RST or ZRST command.

3. Special register : Each special register has the special definition and purpose. It is used to save system

status, error messages, monitor state. Please refer to chapter 2.11 for detail.

4. Index register [E], [F] : Index registers are 16-bit registers. There are 2 points, E and F, for ES/EX/SS

models. There are 8 points, E0~E3 and F0~F3, for EP models. There are 16 points,

E0~E7 and F0~F7, for EH models. If you want to use index register to be 32-bit

register, you should indicate E and at this moment F can’t be used.

5. File register : There are 1600 file registers (K0~K1599) for EP/SA MPU and 10000 file registers

(K0~K9,999) for EH MPU. There is no real device number for file register, you should

execute read/write of file register by command API 147 MEMR, API 148 MEMW,

peripheral device HPP or WPLSoft.

2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F]

E0 F0

F0E0

16-bit 16-bit

32-bit

upper 16-bit lower 16-bit

Index registers E, F are 16-bit data register, just the same as general

data register. It can be wrote/read.

It can be used as 32-bit register. But at this time, this register should

be indicated to E and F can’t be used. Otherwise, the data will be

error. (It is recommend to use command DMOVP K0 E and clear E

and F to 0 when power on.

The combination of E and F when using as 32-bit register are:

(E0, F0) , (E1, F1) (E2, F2) ….(E7, F7)

2 DVP-PLC Function


K14 F0

X0K8 E0MOV

D5E0 D10F0

MOV

MOV

When X0=On and E0=8, F0=14, D5E0=D(5+8)=D13, D10F0

=D(10+14) = D24, the content in D13 will be moved to D24.

The function of Index register is the same as general operand. It can be used to move or compare and used to

be index for byte device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D) and bit device (X, Y, M, S). For ES/EP/SA series, it can’t be

used for constant (K, H). But for EH series, it can be used for constant (K, H).

ES/EX/SS models: E0, F0 2 points

EP model: E0~E3, F0~F3, total is 8 points

EH model: E0~E7, F0~F7, total is 16 points

※ some commands don’t support index function, please refer to chapter 5.4 for using index register E and F.

※ When using command mode of WPLSoft to use constant (K,H) to be index register, it needs to use symbol “@”:

Example: ”MOV K10@E0 D0F0”

2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics

EP/SA/EH series will check following when PLC is power on or change from STOP→RUN.

1. M1101 (if it starts file register function)

2. D1101 (the start number of file register of EP/SA series (K0~K1599), for EH series is K0~K9999)

3. D1102 (item number for reading, EP/SA series is K0~K1600 and EH series is K0~K10000)

4. D1103 (the address to save the reading data, the start address of designated file register D

(K2000~K9999). It is used to decide if transferring file to designated register automatically.

Note:

The action which read from file register to data register D won’t be executed when D1101 for EP/SA model

is greater than 1600, D1101 for EH model is greater than 8,000 or the value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or

greater than 9,999.

When starting executing the action to read data from file register to data register, PLC will stop reading

once the address of file register or data register D exceeds usage range.

There are 1600 file registers for EP/SA models and 10000 file registers for EH models. There is no actual

number for file register, therefore it should use command API 147 MEMR, API 148 MEMW or peripheral

HPP02 and WPLSoft to execute the read/write of file register. If the address of file register for reading

exceeds useful range, the data for reading will be 0.

2.9 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I]

2 DVP-PLC Function


ES, EX, SS models:

N For master control nested N0~N7, 8 points Control point of master control nested

P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P63, 64 points Location pointer of CJ, CALL

Insert timer interrupt I6□□, 1 point (□□＝10~99ms, time base=1ms) (for Version 5.7)

Insert external interrupt I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points

Pointer

I Interrupt

Insert communication interrupt I150

Location pointer of interrupt subroutine

EP/SA models:

N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points The control point of master control nested

P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points The location point of CJ, CALL

Insert external interrupt

I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total is 6 points

Insert time interrupt I6□□, I7□□, 2 points (□□＝10~99ms, time base=1ms)

Insert high-speed counter attained interrupt

I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points

Pointer

I For interrupt

Insert communication interrupt

I150

The location point of


EH models:

N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points Master control nested control point

P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points The location pointer of CJ, CALL

Insert external interrupt

I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3), I40□(X4), I50□(X5), 6 points (□=1, rising-edge trigger , □=0, falling-edge trigger )

Insert time interrupt

I6□□ , I7□□ , I8□□ , 2 points (□□＝

1~99ms, time base=1ms) I8□□ , 1 points (□□＝0.1~9.9ms, time base=0.1ms)

Insert high-speed counter attained interrupt

I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points

Insert pulse interrupt I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points

Pointer

I Interrupt

Insert communication interrupt

I150

The location pointer of

interrupt subroutine

Nest Level Pointer N: used with command MC and MCR. MC is master start command. When MC command is

executed, the commands between MC and MCR will be executed normally. MC-MCR master

command supports nested program structure and the maximum is 8 levels, which is

numbered from N0 to N7. Refer to chapter3.7 for detail information.

2 DVP-PLC Function


Pointer P: use with application commands API 00 CJ, API 01 CALL, API 02 SRET. Refer to chapter 5.5 commands CJ,

CALL, SRET usage method for more information.

CJ condition jump:

X2Y2

X1

P1CJX0

Y1

P**

0

P1 N

When X0=On, program will jump from 0 to N

(designated label P1) and keep on executing

without executing the address between 0 and

N.

When X0=Off, program will execute from 0 and

keep on executing the followings. CJ command

won’t be executed at this time.

CALL subroutine, SRET subroutine END:

Y0

X1

P2CALLX0

Y1

P**

20

P2

FEND

Y0

SRET

24

(subroutine P2) subroutine

Call subroutine P**

subroutine return

When X0 is On, it will jump

to P2 to execute the

designated subroutine as

executing CALL

command. When

executing SRET

command, return to

address 24 to go on

executing.

Interrupt pointer I:

It is used with application command API 04 EI, API 05DI, API 03 IRET. Refer to chapter 5.5 for more information.

There are five functions below. Interrupt insert should be used with EI, interrupt insert enable, interrupt insert disable

and IRET interrupt insert return, etc. 1. External interrupt insert : When input signal of input terminal X0~X5 is triggered on rising-edge or

falling-edge, it will interrupt present program and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine pointer I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3), I40□(X4), I50□(X5) to execute and return to previous address to execute when executing IRET command. That is due to special hardware circuit design of PLC MPU and is not affected by scan period.

2. Timer interrupt insert : It is special hardware circuit design in PLC MPU. It will stop present program and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine to execute automatically every a period time (can be set to 10ms~99ms).

3. Counter attained interrupt insert : The comparison command API 53 DHSCS of high-speed counter can designate to interrupt present program and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine to execute interrupt pointer I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060 when comparison attained.

2 DVP-PLC Function


4. Pulse interrupt insert : Using pulse output command API 57 PLSY to send interrupt vector I130(corresponds to M1342) and I140(corresponds to M1343) at the same time when pulse output the first pulse. But it should start flag M1342 and M1343 first. And it also can set to send interrupt vector I110 (corresponds to M1340) and I120(corresponds to M1341) once pulse finishes to output the last pulse.

5. Communication interrupt insert : When using communication command RS, it can be set to have interrupt request when receiving specific charcters. Interrupt number is I150 and specific characters is set to low byte of D1168. When PLC connects to communication device and received data length is not the same, setting end character to D1168 and interrupt subroutine to I150. When PLC receives this end character, it will execute interrupt subroutine I150.

2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register

The kinds and functions of special auxiliary relay (Special M) and special registers (special D) are as shown in

the following. Please notice that some equipment with the same number will be different to the different model. In the

following chart, the meaning of column “Attribute” are: “R” means can only read. “R/W” means can read/write.

“-“ means can do nothing. “#” means system setting, user can read the detail explanation of the setting in the manual.

“*” means can refer following for explanation.

Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN

STOP Attribute Latched Factory

setting

M1000* Normally open contact (a contact). This contact is ON when running and it is ON when the status is set to RUN.

○ ○ ○ Off On Off R NO Off

M1001* Normally OFF contact (b contact). This contact is OFF in running and it is OFF when the status is set to RUN.

○ ○ ○ On Off On R NO On

M1002* ON only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get positive pulse in the RUNmoment. Pulse width=scan period.

○ ○ ○ Off On Off R NO Off

M1003* OFF only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get negative pulse in the RUNmoment. Pulse width=scan period.

○ ○ ○ On Off On R NO On

M1004* On when error occurs ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off

M1005 Password of data backup memory card and MPU password don’t match

╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off

M1006 Data backup memory card isn’t initial ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1008* Monitor timer flag (ON: PLC WDT time out) ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1009 System used - - - - - - - - -

M1010 ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: PLSY Y0 mode selection. It is continuous output when it is ON.EH：PULSE will be output at the END.

○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1011* 10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1012* 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1013* 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1014* 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1015* High-speed timer activates ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1016* When it is Off, it will display two right-most bits. When it is On, it will display (two right-most bits + 2000).

╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1017* ±30 seconds adjustment ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO OffM1018 Flag for Radian/Degree, On for degree ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1019* Cancle X0~X17 input delay ○ ╳ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

M1020 Zero flag ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO OffM1021 Borrow flag ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO OffM1022 Carry flag ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off

M1023 PLSY Y1 mode selection, it is continuous output when it is ON. ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1024 System used flag - - - - - - - - -

M1025 If PLC receive illegal communication request when HPP, PC or HMI connects to PLC, M1025 will be set and save the error code in D1025.

○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off

M1026 EP/EH: Startup flag of RAMP module ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1027 PR output flag ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1028

10ms/100ms time switch flag. The base setting flag of T64~T126 is 100ms, when timer is OFF and the base setting flag is 10ms when it is ON.

○ ╳ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1029*

ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: Pulse output Y0 of PLSY and PLSR command execution completed or other relative command execution completed EH: The first group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) output complete executing or other relative command execution completed

○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off

M1030*

ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: Pulse output Y1 of PLSY and PLSR command execution completed EH: The second group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3) output complete executing

○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off

M1031* Clear all non-latched memory ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1032* Clear all latched memory ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1033* Memory latched at STOP ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1034* All Y outputs disable ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1035* Start X input point to be RUN/STOP switch and correspond to D1035 (for EP/SA models, only X7 can be used)

╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES Off

M1039* Constant scan mode ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1040 Step transition inhibits ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1041 Step transition starts ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1042 Start pulse ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1043 Zero point return completed ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1044 Zero point condition ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1045 All outputs clear inhibit ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1046 STL state setting (On) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1047 STL monitor enable ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1048 Flag for alarm point state ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1049 Monitor flag for alarm point ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1050 I001 masked ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1051 I101 masked ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1052 I201 masked ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1053 I301 masked ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1054 I401 masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1055 I501 masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1056 I6□□ masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1057 I7□□ masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

M1059 I010~I060 masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1060 System error message 1 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1061 System error message 2 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1062 System error message 3 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1063 System error message 4 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1064 Operator error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1065 Syntax error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1066 Program error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1067* Program execution error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off

M1068* Execution error locked (D1068) ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off

M1070

ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: time pulse unit switch of PWM command Y1. When it is ON, the time pulse unit is 100us and when it is OFF, the time pulse unit is 1ms. EH: Unit setting for PWM command of the 1st pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1). On is 100us and Off is 1ms.


M1071 Unit setting for PWM command of the 2nd pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3). On is 100us and Off is 1ms. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1072 Execute PLC RUN command ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1073 System used - - - - - - - - - M1074 System used - - - - - - - - - M1075* FLASH write error ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1076* Real time clock error ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1077 Battery voltage is too low or malfunction ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off

M1078 PLSY command Y0 pulse output stop immediately flag ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1079 PLSY command Y1 pulse output stop immediately flag ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1080 System used - - - - - - - - - M1081 FLT command change direction flag ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1083 Enable/Disable execute interrupt program in FROM/TO mode ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1088 Matrix compared flag. If the result is the same, M1088 = 1. If the result is different, M1088 = 0. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off

M1089 Matrix search start flag. Compare from the first bit and M1090=1. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off

M1090 Matrix search start flag. Compare from the first bit and M1090=1. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off

M1091 Matrix finding bit flag. When find it, it will stop comparing and M1091=1. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off

M1092 Matrix pointer error flag. When pointer Pr exceeds this range, M1092=1. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off

M1093 Matrix pointer increases flag. It will add 1 to present pointer. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off

M1094 Matrix pointer clears flag. It will clear present pointer to 0. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off

M1095 Carry flag for matrix rotate/shift output ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1096 Complement flag for matric shift input ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO OffM1097 Direction flag for matrix rotate/shift ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO OffM1098 Matrix count bit 0 or 1 flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO OffM1099 It is On when matrix count result 0 ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

M1100 A sampling flag of SPD command ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1101* To decide whether start file register or not ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes OffM1104* DIP switch function card SW1 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1105* DIP switch function card SW2 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1106* DIP switch function card SW3 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1107* DIP switch function card SW4 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1108* DIP switch function card SW5 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1109* DIP switch function card SW6 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1110* DIP switch function card SW7 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1111* DIP switch function card SW8 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1112* TR1 transistor output ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1113* TR2 transistor output ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1115* Start switch for accel/decel pulse output ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1116* Acceleration flag for accel/decel pulse output ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1117* Target attained frequency flag ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1118* Deceleration flag for accel/decel pulse output ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1119* Completed function flag ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1120 Communication protocol holding ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1121 Transmission ready ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO OffM1122 Sending request ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1123 Receiving completed ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1124 Receiving wait ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1125 Communication reset ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1126 STX/ETX user/system selection ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1127 MODRD/RDST/MODRW commands. Data receivingcompleted. ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1128 Transmit/Receive Indication ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1129 Receiving time out ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1130 STX/ETX selection ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1131 MODRD/RDST/MODRW, M1131=On when data convert to HEX ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off

M1133* Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output switch (On is start) ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1134* Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output. On is continuous output switch ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off

M1135* Output pulse numbers attained flag ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1140 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW data received error ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO OffM1141 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW command error ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO OffM1142 VFD-A command data received error ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off

M1143 ASCII/RTU mode selections (use with MODRD / MODWR / MODRW) (it is Off when in ASCII mode and it is On when in RTU)


M1144* Ouput start switch of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1145* Acceleration flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R NO Off

M1146* Target attained frequency flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R NO Off

M1147* Deceleration flag of accel/decel pulse output ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

function of adjustable slope

M1148* Complete function flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1149* Stop counting temporality flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off

M1150 Declare DHSZ command used for multi-group settings comparison mode ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1151 Finish executing multi-group settings comparison mode ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off

M1152 Declare DHSZ command used to be frequency control mode ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1153 Finish executing frequency control mode ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off

M1154* Start designated deceleration function flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope

╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1161 8/16 bits mode (it is On when in 8 bits mode) ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1167 HKY input is 16 bits mode ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1168 SMOV working mode indication ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1170* Start executing single step ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1171* Execute single step ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1172* 2-phase pulse output switch (on is start) ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1173* On is continuous output switch ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1174* Output pulse number attained flag ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1178* VR0 potentiometer starts ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1179* VR1 potentiometer starts ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1196 System used - - - - - - - - -

M1197 System used - - - - - - - - -

M1198 System used - - - - - - - - -

M1199 System used - - - - - - - - -

M1200 C200 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off














2 DVP-PLC Function


Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting






















M1235 C235 counting mode (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off




M1239 C239 counter mode setting (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1240 C240 counter mode setting (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1241 C241 counter mode setting (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off


M1243 C243 counter mode setting (on: count down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off


M1246 C246 counter monitor (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off


M1248 C247 counter monitor (on: count down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off




M1253 C254 counter monitor (on: count down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting


M1256 System used - - - - - - - - -

M1258 Swap Y0 and Y1 pulse output signal ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1259 Swap Y2 and Y3 pulse output signal ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1260 Let X5 be the reset input signal of all high-speed counter ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1261 DHSCR command High-speed comparison flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1264 HHSC0 Start function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1265 HHSC0 Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off







M1272 HHSC0 Start control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1273 HHSC0 Reset control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off







M1280 I00□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off






M1286 I6□□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off



M1289 I010 flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off






2 DVP-PLC Function


Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

M1303 Swap high and low byte ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1304* X input point can decide to be On-Off ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1305 Factory setting ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1312 C235 Start input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off






M1320 C235 Reset input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off






M1328 C235 Start/Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off






M1334 Stop CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output temporarily ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1335 Stop CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output temporarily ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1336 CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse send flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off

M1337 CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse send flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off

M1338 Start CH0 (Y0, Y1) offset pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1339 Start CH1 (Y2, Y3) offset pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1340 To have interrupt (I110) after finishing sending CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1341 To have interrupt (I120) after finishing sending CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1342 To have interrupt (I130) at the same time that sending CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1343 To have interrupt (I140) at the same time that sending CH1 (Y2,Y3) pulse ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1344 Start CH0 (Y0, Y1) compensation pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1345 Start CH1 (Y2, Y3) compensation pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off

M1350* PLC LINK start flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1351* Start PLC LINK automatically or by manual ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

M1360* PLC LINK ID 1 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off


2 DVP-PLC Function


Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting















M1376* PLC LINK ID 1 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
















M1392* PLC LINK ID 1 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off








2 DVP-PLC Function


Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting









M1408* PLC LINK ID 1 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
















M1424* PLC LINK ID 1 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off














2 DVP-PLC Function


Special M Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting



Special

D Function ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

D1000* Watchdog timer (WDT) value (Unit: 1ms) ○ ○ ○ 200 - - R/W NO 200

D1001

DVP model number+memory capacity / type (user can read PLC program version from this register. For example, D1001 = H XX27 means version 2.7. When reading from HPP it will display Knnnnn and you can convert it to hexadecimal number by pressing <H> key.

○ ○ ○ - - - R NO #

D1002* Program capacity ○ ○ ○ - - - R NO #

D1003 Sum of program memory (sum of the PLC internal program memory. User can identify the content of PLC control program by this register)

○ ○ ○ - - - R NO #

D1004* Check code for grammar ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0

D1005 System used - - - - - - - - -

D1008* STEP address when WDT timer is ON ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1010* Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1011* Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1012* Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1015* 0~32,767(unit: 0.1ms) addition type of high-speed connection timer ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1018* πPI (Low byte) ╳ ○ ○ H’0FDB H’0FDB H’0FDB R/W NO H’0FDB

D1019* πPI(High byte) ╳ ○ ○ H’4049` H’4049` H’4049` R/W NO H’4049`

D1020* ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: X0~X7 input filter (unit: ms)EH: X0~X17 input filter (unit: ms) ○ ○ ○ 10 - - R/W NO 10

D1021* ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: X10~X17 input delaysetting (unit: ms) EH: X20~X377 input filter (unit: ms)

○ ○ ○ 10 - - R/W NO 10

D1022 Double frequency selection for AB phase counter of ES/EX/SS and EP/SA models ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1024 System used flag - - - - - - - - -

D1025* Communication error code ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1028 Index register E0 ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0

D1029 Index register F0 ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0

D1030 Output numbers of Y0 pulse (Low word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1031 Output numbers of Y0 pulse (High word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1032 Output numbers of Y1 pulse (Low word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1033 Output numbers of Y1 pulse (High word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1035* Set the number of X input point of RUN/STOP ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1037 HKY command scan time setting, unit: 1ms ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 500

D1038* When PLC MPU is slave, the setting of data response delay time. Time unit is 0.1ms. ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special D Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

D1039* Constant scan time (ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1040 On state number 1 of STEP point S ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0








D1049 On number of alarm point ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1050 ↓

D1055

PLC will automatically convert the ASCII data saved in D1070~D1085 to HEX. ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1056* Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1057* Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1(CH1) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1058* Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 (CH2) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1059* Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 (CH3) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0




D1067* Algorithm error code ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1068* Lock the algorithm error address ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1069 Step number of errors associated with flags M1065~M1067 ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1070 ↓

D1085

When the PLC built-in RS-485 communication command receives feedback signals from receiver. The signals will be saved in the registers D1070~D1085. User can use the contents saved in the registers to check the feedback data.

○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1089 ↓

D1099

When the PLC built-in RS-485 communication command is executed, the transmitting signals will be stored in the registers D1089~D1099. User can use the contents saved in registers to check the feedback data.

○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1101* Start address of file register ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W Yes 0 D1102* Copy numbers of file register ╳ ○ ○ 1600 - - R/W Yes 1600

D1103* Set start D number for file register to store (the number should be large than 2000) ╳ ○ ○ 2000 - - R/W Yes 2000

D1104* Parameter index for Accel/Decel pulse output Y0 (corresponds to device D) ○ ○ ╳ 0 0 - R/W NO 0

D1110* Average of EX series analog input channel 0 (CH 0) and EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1111* Average of EX series analog input channel 1 (CH 1) and EP/EH series DA card channel 1 (CH1) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special D Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

D1112* Average of EX series analog input channel 2 (CH 2) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1113* Average of EX series analog input channel 3 (CH 3) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1116* EX series analog output channel 0 (CH 0) and EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1117* EX series analog output channel 1 (CH 1) and EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1118*

For EX model only. It is the filter wave time setting between the A/D conversions, and with the default setting as 0 and the unit as 1ms, all will be regarded as 5ms if D1118<=5.

○ ╳ ╳ 5 - - R/W NO 5

D1119 System used - - - - - - - - -

D1120 RS-485 communication protocol ○ ○ ○ H’86 - - R/W NO H’86

D1121 PLC communication address (the address that save PLC communication address, it is latched) ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes 1

D1122 Residual words of transmitting data ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1123 Residual words of receiving data ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1124 Start character definition (STX) ○ ○ ○ H’3A - - R/W NO H’3A

D1125 First ending character definition (EXT1) ○ ○ ○ H’0D - - R/W NO H’0D

D1126 Second ending character definition (EXT2) ○ ○ ○ H’0A - - R/W NO H’0A

D1129 RS-485 time-out setting (ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1130 MODBUS return error code record ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1133* Special high-speed pulse output register (D) index ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1137* Address of operator error occurs ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0

D1139* Connection number of BCD module expansionunit (the maximum is two units) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1140* Special expansion module number, maximum is 8 units ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1141 System used - - - - - - - - -

D1142 Input points (X) of expansion unit ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1143 Output points (Y) of expansion unit ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1144* Parameter index for Accel/Decel pulse output of adjustable slope (corresponds to component D) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1145* Connection number of KEY module expansion unit ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1146* Connection number of DISP module expansionunit ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1148 System used - - - - - - - - -

D1149

Memory card type: 0: no card, 1: RS-232, TS-01, RS-422, 4: potentiometer switch, 5: DIP switch, 6: transitor output card, 7: high-speed pulse output card, 8: 2AD card, 9: 2DA card

╳ ○ ○ - - - R NO 0

D1150 Table count register in multi-group setting comparison mode ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1151 Table count register in frequency control mode ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1152 The change value of high word of DHSZ D ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1153 The change value of low word of DHSZ D ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special D Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

D1154* Recommended Interval of accelerated time (10~32767 ms) of Accel/Decel pulse output of adjustable slope

╳ ○ ╳ 200 - - R/W NO 200

D1155* Recommended Interval of decelerated time (-1~ -32700 ms) of Accel/Decel pulse output of adjustable slope

╳ ○ ╳ -1000 - - R/W NO -1000

D1156 ↓

D1165

Special D that indicated by RTMU command (K0~K9) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1170* PC value when executing single step ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1172* 2-phase pulse output frequency (12Hz~20KHz) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1173* 2-phase pulse output mode selection (K1and K2) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1174* Target number for 2-phase pulse outputs (low 16-bit) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1175* Target number for 2-phase pulse outputs (high 16-bit) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1176* Present output number of 2-phase pulse (low 16-bit) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1177* Present output number of 2-phase pulse (high 16-bit) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1178* VR0 value ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1179* VR1 value ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1182 Pointer register E1 ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0

D1183 Pointer register F1 ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0





D1188 Pointer register E4 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0

D1189 Pointer register F4 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0







D1196 System used - - - - - - - - -

D1197 System used - - - - - - - - -

D1198 System used - - - - - - - - -

D1199 System used - - - - - - - - -

D1200* Start address of M0~M999 auxiliary relay latched ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #

D1201* End address of M0~M999 auxiliary relay latched ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 999

D1202* Start address of M2000~M4095 auxiliary relay latched ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 2000

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special D Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

D1203* End address of M2000~M4095 auxiliary relay latched ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 4095

D1204* Start latched address of 100ms timer T0~T199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF

D1205* End latched address of 100ms timer T0~T199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF

D1206* Start latched address of 10ms timer T200~T239 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF

D1207* End latched address of 10ms timer T200~T239 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF

D1208* Start latched address of 16-bit counter C0~C199 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #

D1209* End latched address of 16-bit counter C0~C199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 199

D1210* Start latched address of 32-bit counter C200~C234 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #

D1211* End latched address of 32-bit counter C200~C234 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 234

D1212* Start latched address of 32-bit high-speed counter C235~C255 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 235

D1213* End latched address of 32-bit high-speed counter C235~C255 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 255

D1214* Start latched address of step point (S0~S1023) ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #

D1215* End latched address of step point (S0~S1023) ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #

D1216* Start latched address of register D0~D999 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 200

D1217* End latched address of register D0~D999 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 999

D1218* Start latched address of register D2000~D9999 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 2000

D1219* End latched address of register D2000~D9999 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #

D1220 The first group of pulse output phase 00: 1-phase (Y0 output) 01:A Phase 02:B Phase ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1221 The second group of pulse output phase 00:1- phase (Y2 output) 01:A Phase 02:B Phase ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1225 The first group of the count setting of counter (HHSC0). It is the count mode of C241, C246, C251.

╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1226 The second group of the count setting of counter (HHSC1).. It is the count mode of C242, C247, C252.

╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1227 The third group of the count setting of counter (HHSC2).. It is the count mode of C243, C248, C253.

╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1228 The forth group of the count setting of counter (HHSC3).. It is the count mode of C244, C249, C254.

╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1256 ↓

D1295

MODRW command of RS-485 is built-in. The characters that sent during executing is saved in D1256~D1295. User can check according to the content of these registers.

○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1296 ↓

D1311

MODRW command of RS-485 is built-in. PLC system will convert ASCII in the content of the register that user indicates to HEX and save it in D1296 – D1311.

○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1313* Real time clock (RTC) second 00~59 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1314* Real time clock (RTC) minute 00~59 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1315* Real time clock (RTC) hour 00~23 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1316* Real time clock (RTC) day 01~31 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 1

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special D Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

D1317* Real time clock (RTC) month 01~12 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 1

D1318* Real time clock (RTC) week 1~7 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 6

D1319* Real time clock (RTC) year 00–99 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1320* The 1st special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1321* The 2nd special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1322* The 3rd special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1323* The 4th special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0





D1328 CH0 (Y0,Y1) offset pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1329 CH0 (Y0,Y1) offset pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1330 CH1 (Y2,Y3) offset pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1331 CH1 (Y2,Y3) offset pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1332 CH0 (Y0,Y1) residual pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1333 CH0 (Y0,Y1) residual pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1334 CH1 (Y2,Y3) residual pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1335 CH1 (Y2,Y3) residual pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1336 Present value of CH0 pulse (Low word) Y0, Y1 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1337 Present value of CH0 pulse (High word) Y0, Y1 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1338 Present value of CH1 pulse (Low word) Y2, Y3 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1339 Present value of CH1 pulse (High word) Y2, Y3 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0

D1340 The 1st step acceleration frequency ╳ ╳ ○ 200 - - R/W Yes 200

D1341 Maximum output frequency (Low word) (it is fixed to 200KHz) ╳ ╳ ○ H’04D0 - - R Yes H’04D0

D1342 Maximum output frequency (High word) (it is fixed to 200KHz) ╳ ╳ ○ 3 - - R Yes 3

D1343 Acceleration /Deceleration time ╳ ╳ ○ 100 - - R/W Yes 100

D1344 CH0 (Y0,Y1) complement pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0

D1345 CH0 (Y0,Y1) complement pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0

D1346 CH1 (Y2,Y3) complement pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0

D1347 CH1 (Y2,Y3) complement pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0

D1355* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 1 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064


D1357* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 3

╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special D Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

ID 3














D1375* The first KEY module X coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1376* The first KEY module Y coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1377* The first KEY module button number ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1378* The second KEY module X coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1379* The second KEY module Y coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1380* The second KEY module button number ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1381* The first BCD module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1382* The first BCD module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1383* The second BCD module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1384* The second BCD module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1385* The first DISP module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0

D1386* The first DISP module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0

D1387* The decimal setting of first DISP module ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0

D1388* The second DISP module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0

D1389* The second DISP module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0

D1390* The decimal setting of second DISP module ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0

D1391* The third DISP module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0

D1392* The third DISP module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0

D1393* The decimal setting of third DISP module ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special D Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

D1415* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 1 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
















D1431* PLC LINK times ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1432* PLC LINK counts ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1433* PLC LINK units ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1434* Read items of PLC LINK ID 1 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16













2 DVP-PLC Function


Special D Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting




D1450* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 1 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16















D1465* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 16 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1480*

↓ D1495*

ID 1 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 1 reads is in D1355. The range is D100-D115 of ID 1 PLC.

╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1496* ↓

D1511*

ID 1 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 1 writes is in D1415. The range is D200-D215 of ID 1 PLC.

╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1512* ↓

D1527*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1528* ↓

D1543*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1544* ↓

D1559*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1560* ↓

D1575*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1576* ↓

D1591*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1592* ↓

D1607*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1608* ↓

D1623*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special D Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

D1624* ↓

D1639*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1640* ↓

D1655*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1656* ↓

D1671*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1672* ↓

D1687*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1688* ↓

D1703*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1704* ↓

D1719*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1720* ↓

D1735*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1736* ↓

D1751*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1752* ↓

D1767*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1768* ↓

D1783*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1784* ↓

D1799*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1800* ↓

D1815*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1816* ↓

D1831*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1832* ↓

D1847*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1848* ↓

D1863*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1864* ↓

D1879*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1880* ↓

D1895*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1896* ↓

D1911*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1912* ID 14 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 14 writes is in D1428. The range is ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special D Function

ESEXSS

EPSA EH

Off

On

STOP

RUN

RUN


setting

↓ D1927*

D200-D215 of ID 14 PLC.

D1928* ↓

D1943*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1944* ↓

D1959*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1960* ↓

D1975*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1976* ↓

D1991*


╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0

2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions

PLC Operation

Flag

M1000~M1003

1. M1000: M1000 is On contact during runing, i.e. a normally open contact a. Using M1000 to

drive indicated lamp during running, you can know that PLC is in RUN state. M1000

is always on when PLC is RUN.

M1000Y0 PLC is running

always ONM1000 is On contact during operation

2. M1001: M1001 is Off contact during running, i.e. a normally close contact b. M1001 is

always Off when PLC is RUN.

3. M1002: M1002 will be ON at the first scan when PLC starts RUN and then is Off. M1002 can

be regarded as scan initial pulse and pulse width is a scan time. It can be used to

initial, i.e. start positive pulse (it is ON once it is RUN).

4. M1003: It is Off at the first scan when PLC is RUN and then is ON later, i.e. start negative

pulse (it is Off once it is RUN).

PLC RUN

M1000

M1001

M1002

M1003

scan time

2 DVP-PLC Function


MonitorTimer

D1000

1. Monitor timer is used to moitor PLC scan time. When scan time exceeds the setting time of

moitor timer, RED ERROR LED will be light and all outputs will be Off. 2. The initial value of monitor timer is 200ms. You can use command MOV to change the

setting of monitor timer in the program when program is long or calculation is complicated. Following example is set moinitor timer to 300ms.

M10020 MOV K300 D1000

Primary pulse 3. The maximum setting for monitor timer is 32,767ms. But please notice that if monitor timer

settings is too large, the detected time of calculation abnormal will be delay. Therefore, if it is

not the complicated calculateion makes scan time exceeds 200ms, it is better to set monitor

timer around 200ms.

4. Please monitor D1010~D1012 to check if scan time exceeds D1000 setting when

calculation is complicated or PLC MPU connects too many special module to cause scan

time too long. In this situation, besides modify D1000 setting, you can also use WDT

command (API 07) in PLC program. When CPU excutes WDT command, internal monitor

timer will be clear to 0 to make scan time not exceed monitor timer setting.

ProgramCapacity

D1002

It is different program capacity for different series:

1. ES, EX, SS series: 3792 Steps

2. EP, SA series: 7920 Steps

3. EH series: 15872 Steps

GrammarCheck

M1004

D1004, D1137

1. If there is grammar error, PLC ERROR LED will blinking and special relay M1004=On.

2. Time to check PLC grammar: When power is from Off→On. Other time:

Writing program into PLC by WPLSoft or HPP

Using On-line Programming function by EH series and WPLSoft

3. It will happen with illegal operand (device) or grammar error. You can get the fault by

checking special register D1004 with fault code information. Fault address is saved in data

register D1137 (if it is general circuit error, D1137 will be invalid).

4. Refer to chapter 2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC device number for each device usage range.

5. Refer to chapter 2.12 Troubleshooting and Fault Information for checking grammar.

Scan Time-outTimer

M1008, D1008

1. When scan time-out during executing, PLC ERROR LED will light and M1008=On.

2. Using WPLSoft or HPP to monitor D1008 which saves timeout STEP address as WDT timer

is ON.

2 DVP-PLC Function


Scan TimeMonitor

D1010~D1012

The present value, minimum value and maximum value of scan time are saved in

D1010~D1012.

1. D1010: the present scan time.

2. D1011: the minimum scan time.

3. D1012: the maximum scan time.

Internal ClockPulse

M1011~M1014

1. There are four following clock pulses in PLC. Once PLC is power on, these four clock pulse

will act automatically.

M1011 (10 ms)

M1012 (100 ms)

M1013 (1 sec)

M1014 (60 sec)

100 Hz

10 Hz

1 Hz

10 ms

100 ms

1 sec

1 min

2. When PLC is STOP, clock pulse will also act. The start timing of clock pulse and RUN are

not synchronized.

High-speedTimer

M1015, D1015

1. The steps for using special M and special D directly:

Only valid when PLC is RUN.

When M1015=On, it will start high-speed timer D1015 once PLC finish executing END

command of that scan period. The minimum unit of D1015 is 100us.

The range of D1015 is 0~32,767. When it counts to 32,767, it will start from 0.

When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately.

2. There is high-speed timer command HST for EH series, refer command API 196 HST for

detail.

3. Example:

When X10 is On, set M1015=On to start high-speed timer and record in D1015.

When X10=Off, set M1015=Off to close high-speed timer.

X10M1015

2 DVP-PLC Function


RealTimeClock

M1016, M1017

M1076

D1313~D1319

1. The relative command special M and special D.

Device name Fuunction

M1016 Year display of real

time clock

Off: show the 2 right most bits

On: show the (2 right most bits + 2000)

M1017 ±30 seconds

adjustment

When Off→On, it is triggered to adjust

When it is during 0~29 seconds, minute won’t change

and second will be reset to 0.

When it is during 30~59 seconds, it will add 1 to

minute and reset second to 0.

M1076 Real time clock

malfunction

It will be ON when setting exceeds range or battery

has run down.

D1313 Second 0~59

D1314 Minute 0~59

D1315 Hour 0~23

D1316 Day 1~31

D1317 Month 1~12

D1318 Week 1~7

D1319 Year 0~99(2 right-most bit)

2. If real time clock setting is error, time will reset to Jan. 1, 2000. 00:00 Saturday when PLC is

power on again.

3. Adjust method of perpetual clock:

It can use specific command TWR to adjust for EP/EH mode built-in real time clock.

Refer to API 167 TWR for detail.

Using peripherial WPLSoft and digital setting display DU-01 to set.

π(PI)

D1018, D1019 1. It uses 32-bit data register which is combined with D1019 and D1018 to save floating point

value π(PI),

2. Floating point value = H 40490FDB

2 DVP-PLC Function


Response time adjustment ofinput terminal

M1019

D1020, D1021

1. Digital filter circuit is built-in input terminals X0~X17 can set response time of receive pulse

from input terminal by the content of D1020 and D1021. Unit is ms.

2. When PLC is from Off→On, the content of D1020 and D1021 will become to 10

automatically.

X0

X17

0ms

1ms

10ms

15ms

0

1

10

15

Terminal response time

state memory

input reflash

setting by D1020 (default is 10)

3. When setting X0~X17 response time to 0ms to execute following program, the faster

response time in input terminla will be 50µs due to input terminal connects to RC filter circuit

in series.

M1000MOV K0 D1020

normally ON contact

4. It is not necessary to adjust response time when using high-speed counter, interrupt insert

or fast pulse catch (M1056~M1059) in program.

5. It is the same to use command REFF (API 51) or change the content of D1020 and D1021.

ExecutionCompleted

Flag

M1029, M1030

Execution Completed Flag:

1. API 52 MTR, API 71 HKY, API 72 DSW, API 74 SEGL, API 77 PR:

M1029=On for a scan period once the command finish executing.

2. API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR:

For EP/SA/ES/EX/SS MPU, M1029 will be On after Y0 pulse finishes output and

M1030 will be On after Y1 pulse completes output. When commands PLSY and PLSR

are Off, M1029 and M1030 will be Off.

For EH MPU, M1029 will be On after Y0 and Y1 pulses complete output and M1030

will be On after Y2 and Y3 pulse complete output. When commands PLSY, PLSR are

Off, M1029 or M1030 will be Off.

It is needed to clear by user after executing M1029 and M1030.

3. API 63 INCD: M1029 will be On for a scan period when designated group finish comparison.

2 DVP-PLC Function


4. API 67 RAMP, API 69 SORT:

M1029= On after completing execution, M1029 is needed to clear by user.

If this command is Off, M1029 will be Off.

5. API 155 DABSR, API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 158 DRVA:

M1029=On when the first output group Y0 and Y1 pulses complete sending and

M1030=On when the second output group Y2 and Y3 pulses complete sending.

M1029 or M1030 will be Off when execute this command in the next time and it will be

On after completing execution.

Communication Error Code

D1025

Error code when communication error:

01: illegal command.

02: illegal equipment address.

03: request data exceeds range.

07: checksum error

ClearCommand

M1031, M1032

1. M1031 (clear unlatched area) , M1032 (clear latched area)

Device The component that will be cleared

M1031

Clear unlatched

area

The contact state of Y, general M, general S

T contact for general and time coil

C contact for general, time coil reset coil

D present register for general

T present register for general

C present register for general

M1032

Clear latched area

The contact state of M and S for latched

Accumulative timer T contact and time coil

Latched C and hig-speed counter C contact, count coil

Present register D for latched

Present register of accumulative timer T

Latched C and present register of high-speed counter C

Output Latchedin STOP mode

M1033

When M1003 is On, the On/Off state of output will be held once PLC is from RUN to STOP. If

output contact load of PLC is heater, heater’s state will be held as PLC is from RUN to STOP

and RUN after program modification.

2 DVP-PLC Function


All Output Yare inhibited

M1034

When M1034 is drove to be On, all output Y will be Off.

M1034 all outputs inhibited

RUN/STOPSwitch

M1035, D1035

1. For EH series, when M1035 is drove to be On to start input point X0~X17 to be RUN/STOP

switch by the content of D1035 (0~17).

2. For EP/SA series, When M1035 is drove to be On to start input point X7 to be RUN/STOP

switch.

Communication Response Delay

D1038

For ES/EX/SS/EP/SA series, data response delay time can be set when PLC MPU is to be

Slave in RS-485 communication. Unit is 0.1ms.

Constant ScanTime

M1039, D1039

1. When M1039 is On, program scan time is determined by D1039. When program finishes

executing, it will execute the next scan as constant scan time attained. If D1039 is less than

program scan time, it will scan by program scan time.

M1000

normally ON contact MOV P K20 D1039

M1039 Constant scan time

Scan time is fixed to 20ms

2. The relative commands of scan time are RAMP(API 67), HKY(API 71), SEGL(API 74),

ARWS(API 75) and PR(API 77). They should be used with “constant scan time” or “constant

time insert interrupt”.

3. Especial for command HKY(API 71), scan time should be set to 20ms and above when it is

used 4×4 matrix to be 16 keys to operate.

4. Scan time D1010~D1012 display also include constant scan time.

2 DVP-PLC Function


AnalogFunction

D1056~D1059

D1110~D1113

D1116~D1118

1. For EX MPU, analog input channel resolution 10 bits (±10V or ±20mA)

2. For EX MPU, analog output channel resolution 8 bits (0~10V or 0~20mA)

3. It is analog digital converter filter time setting for EX series. The factory setting is 0 and unit

is 1ms. If D1118 ≦5, it will be regarded as 5ms.

4. Resolution of EP/EH analog input AD card: 12 bits (±10V or ±20mA)

5. Resolution of EP/EH analog input DA card: 12 bits (0~10Vor 0~20mA)

Device Function

D1056 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0)

D1057 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH 1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1 (CH1)

D1058 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 (CH 2) D1059 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 (CH 3)

D1110 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH 0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0)

D1111 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH 1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1 (CH1)

D1112 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 (CH 2) D1113 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 (CH 3)

D1116 EX MPU analog output channel 0 (CH 0), EP/EH MPU DA card channel 0 (CH0)

D1117 EX MPU analog output channel 1 (CH 1), EP/EH MPU DA card channel 1 (CH1)

D1118 EX series analog input filter setting (ms)

AlgorithmError Flag

M1067~M1068

D1067~D1068

1. Algorithm error flag:

Component Explanation Latched STOP→RUN RUN→STOP

M1067 Algorithm error flag none clear latched

M1068 Algorithm error lock flag none unchanged latched

D1067 Algorithm error code none clear latched

D1068 STEP value of algorithm error none unchanged latched

2. Error code explanation:

D1067 error code Function

0E18 BCD conversion error

0E19 Divisor is 0

0E1A Usage exceeds limit (include E and F)

0E1B It is negative number after doing radical

0E1C FROM/TO communication error

2 DVP-PLC Function


FileRegister

M1101

D1101~D1103

1. For EP/EH series, When PLC is power on or from STOP to RUN, it will check start file

register function from M1101, the start number of file register from D1101 (file registers for

EP/SA series: K0~K1,599; for EH series: K0~K9,999), read item number of file register from

D1102(read items of file registers for EP/SA series: K0~K1,600; for EH series: K0~K8,000),

D1103(file registers for save and read, start number of designated data register D (for

EP/SA series: K2,000~K4,999, for EH series: K2,000~K9,999) to determine to send file

register to designated data register automatically or not).

2. Please refer to commands API 148 MEMR and API 149 MEMW explantion.

DIP Switch Function Card

M1104~M1111

1. When PLC is RUN with DIP switch card, 8 DIP switches correspond to M1104~M1111

separately.

2. Please refer to command API 109 SWRD for detail.

TransistorOutput Card

M1112, M1113

When PLC is RUN with transistor output card, M1112 and M1113 correspond to 2 points

transistors output TR1 and TR2 separately.

Pulse Outputwith

Acceleration/Deceleration

M1115~M1119

D1104

1. The definition of special D and special M which are used by pulse output with acceleration/

deceleration:

Device Function

M1115 Start switch for accel/decel pulse output M1116 Flag that is used in acceleration M1117 Target frequency attained flag M1118 Flag that is used in deceleration M1119 Complete function flag D1104 Using parameter index (correspond to D component)

2. Corresponding table for parameter (frequency range is 25Hz~10KHz)

index Function

+0 Start frequency (SF)

+1 Gap frequency (GF)

+2 Target frequency (TF)

+3 Total number of pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32-bit)

+4 Total number of pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32-bit) (TP)

+5 Output pulse number in acceleration area (lower 16-bit of 32-bit)

+6 Output pulse number in deceleration area (upper 16-bit of 32-bit) (AP)

3. It doesn’t need to use command, it just need to fill parameter chart and set M1115 to start.

This function can use Y0 output only, the timing is as following.

2 DVP-PLC Function


GF

GP

TF

SF

AP AP

Frequency

Pulse number

Acceleration/Deceleration step number= (TF-SF)/GF

Output pulse number for each step AP/(Acceleration or Deceleration step number)

GP=

AP is pulse number of acceleration/deceleration

4. Note:

This function should be executed under the following conditions all exist. Once a condition

doesn’t exist, this function can’t execute.

Start frequency must be less than target frequency.

Gap frequency must be less than (target frequency – start frequency)

Total number of pulse number must be greater than (accel/decel pulse number *2)

Start frequency and target frequency: the minimum is 25Hz and the maximum is

10KHz.

Accel/decel pulse number must be more than accel/decel step number

When M1115 is from On to Off, M1119 will be cleared and M1116, M1117 and M1118 aren

unchanged. When PLC is from STOP RUN or from RUN STOP, M1115~M1119 will be

cleared to Off. And D1104 will be cleared to 0 only when it is from Off On.

If the function “acceleration/deceleration pulse output” and command PLSY Y0 output

exist at the same time, it will execute one action which starts Y0 output first.

5. How to calculate action time of each section

If start frequency is set to 1KHz, gap frequency is set to 1KHz, target frequency is set to

5KHz, total pulse number is 100 and accel/decel pulse number is 40, timing chart of

accel/decel area is in the following.

2 DVP-PLC Function


50004000300020001000

t t t t1 2 3 4

Frequency (Hz)

Time (sec)

You can get accel/decel step = (5K – 1K) / 1K = 4 and output number of each pulse is

40 / 4 = 10. Therefore, you can get t1 = (1 / 1K) * 10 = 10ms, t2 = (1 / 2K) * 10 = 5ms, t3

= (1 / 3K) * 10 = 3.33ms and t4 = (1 / 4K) * 10 = 2.5ms from the following figure.

Example: Forward/Reverse accel/decel step motor control

K500MOVM1002

D1104

K1000MOV D500

K100MOV D501

MOV D502

K80000DMOV D503

K10000DMOV D505

K10000

M1115SET

Using D500-D506 to be parameter address

1KHz start frequency

100Hz gap frequency

10KHz target frequency

80000 pulses output

10000 pulses in acceleration/deceleration section

When PLC is RUN, it will save each parameter setting into the register that designated

by D1104.

When M1115=On, acceleration/deceleration pulse starts to output.

M1116=On during acceleration, M1117=On when speed attained, M1118=On in

deceleration and M1119=On after finishing executing.

M1115 won’t be reset automatically and it needs to be cleared by user.

Actual pulse output curve is in the following:

2 DVP-PLC Function


10K

1K

10000 90000 100000

Frequency (Hz)

Pulsenumber

SpecialHigh-speedpulse output

M1133~M1135

D1133

1. For EP series, the definition of special D and special M for special high-speed pulse (50KHz)

output function:

Device Function

M1133 Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output switch (On is start executing)

M1134 On is continuous output switch

M1135 Output pulse number attained flag

D1133 Index for special high-speed pulse output register (D)

2. Corresponding table for D1133 parameter

Index Function

+0 Special high-speed pulse output frequency (lower 16-bit of 32 bits)

+1 Special high-speed pulse output frequency (upper 16-bit of 32 bits)

+2 Special high-speed pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32 bits)

+3 Special high-speed pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32 bits)

+4 Display present special high-speed pulse output number (lower

16-bit of 32 bits)

+5 Display present special high-speed pulse output number (upper

16-bit of 32 bits)

3. Function explanation:

Output frequency and output numbers above can be modified when M1133=On and

M1135=Off. It won’t affect present output pulse once output frequency or output target number

is changed. Present output pulse number will be displayed once a scan time update. It will be

cleared to 0 when M1133 is from Off On and it will keep that last output number when M1133

is from On Off.

2 DVP-PLC Function


4. Note:

This special high-speed pulse output function can use special Y1 output point in RUN. It

can exist with PLSY Y1 at the same time and PLSY (Y0) won’t be affected. If command PLSY

(Y1) is executed prior to this function, this function can’t be used and vice versa. When

executing this function, general Y1 output will be invalid and outputs point of Y0 and Y2~Y7

can be used.

The difference between this function and command PLSY is higher than output frequency.

The maximum output can up to 50KHz.

ExtensionConnectedDetection

D1139, D1140

D1142, D1143

D1145, D1146

1. D1139: connection number of BCD expansion module, the maximum is 2 connections to use

with KEY expansion module.

2. D1140: special expansion module (AD, DA, XA, PT, TC, RT, HC, PU) numbers, the

maximum is 8.

3. D1142: Digital expansion input X point number.

4. D1143: Digital expansion input Y point number.

5. D1145: connection number of KEY expansion module, the maximum is 2connects to use

with BCD expansion module.

6. D1146: connection number indication of DISP expansion module, the maximum is 3

connections.

BCD Module

D1139

D1381~D1384

1. For EH series, special D and special M definition of BCD module:

Device Function

D1139 connection number indication of BCD expansion module, the

maximum is 2 connections to use with KEY expansion module

D1381 Low byte of first BCD module

D1382 High byte of first BCD module

D1383 Low byte of second BCD module

D1384 High byte of second BCD module

2. Explanation:

PLC will update BCD module to read out BCD module value by each scan.

Special D above will be updated automatically when PLC is RUN.

The maximum number for a MPU is 2 connections, such as 2 KEY modules, a KEY

module and a BCD expansion unit or 2 BCD expansion units.

2 DVP-PLC Function


3. BCD module external wiring terminal:

DIP Switch

W1

W2

W4

W8

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

4. BCD module wiring example:

D7 D6 D5 D0

W8W4W2W1

DIP switch group

it needs to connect a diode in series (1N4148 is recommended)

KEY Module

D1145

D1375~D1380

1. For EH series, the definition of special D and special M of KEY module:

Device Function

D1145 Connection number indication of KEY expansion module, the

maximum is 2 connections to use with BCD expansion module

D1375 X coordinate of the first KEY module (1~8)

D1376 Y coordinate of the first KEY module (1~8)

D1377 Button number of the first KEY module (1~64)

D1378 X coordinate of the second KEY module (1~8)

D1379 Y coordinate of the second KEY module (1~8)

D1380 Button number of the second KEY module (1~64)

2 DVP-PLC Function


2. Explanation:

KEY module uses scan method to read data to PLC, it will just care the first button once

there are two more keys are pressed at the same time.

The maximum number for a MPU to connect is 2 connections, such as 2 KEY

modules, a KEY module and a BCD expansion unit or 2 BCD expansion units.

KEY module will be updated in each scan when PLC is RUN.

Calculated method of button number is: H+(V-1)*8. For coordinate (5,1) button, its

number is 5.

3. KEY module external wiring terminal:

H1H2

V1V2

Matrix Keypad

4. KEY module wiring example:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

1 (1,1) (2,1) (3,1) (4,1) (5,1) (6,1) (7,1) (8,1)

(1,1)

V1H1

V2

V3

V4

V5

V6

V7

V8

H1

V1

H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H 7 H8

(1,2) (2,2) (3,2) (4,2) (5,2) (6,2) (7,2) (8,2)

(1,3) (2,3) (3,3) (4,3) (5,3) (6,3) (7,3) (8,3)

(1,4) (2,4) (3,4) (4,4) (5,4) (6,4) (7,4) (8,4)

(1,5) (2,5) (3,5) (4,5) (5,5) (6,5) (7,5) (8,5)

(1,6) (2,6) (3,6) (4,6) (5,6) (6,6) (7,6) (8,6)

(1,7) (2,7) (3,7) (4,7) (5,7) (6,7) (7,7) (8,7)

(1,8) (2,8) (3,8) (4,8) (5,8) (6,8) (7,8) (8,8)

Button numberD1377(D1380)

Button coordinate(x,y)(D1375, D1376)(D1378, D1379)

2 DVP-PLC Function


DISP Module

D1146

D1385~D1393

1. For EH series, the definition of special D and special M definition of DISP module (7-segment

display):

Device Function

D1146 Connection number indication of DISP expansion module, the

maximum is 3 connections.

D1385 Low byte of first DISP module

D1386 High byte of first DISP module

D1387 The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the first DISP module

D1388 Low byte of the second DISP module

D1389 High byte of the second DISP module

D1390 The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the second DISP module

D1391 Low byte of the third DISP module

D1392 High byte of the third DISP module

D1393 The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the third DISP module

2. Explanation:

It needs to use common cathode 7-segment display.

The maximum DISP module expansion units that a PLC can connect are 3 DISP

module expansion units and each DISP module expansion unit has 8 7-segment

displays.

Each 7-segment display uses 4-BITS to display.

Dot setting: there are 8 7-segment displays on a 7-segment display expansion unit.

There is a dot in each 7-segment display and each dot setting can be filled in 1~8 to

display the dot of DISP1~DISP8. If the setting is out of range, no dot of 7-segment

display will light.

Pre-zero: this function is used to decide if it needs to display 0. It will check from the

left-most bit and display “0” after non-zero bit. For example: if the values of

DISP8~DISP1 are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and the 0 of DISP8 won’t be displayed.

First DISP D1385 D1386 D1387

BIT b12~b15 b8~b11 b4~b7 b0~b3 b12~b15 b8~b11 b4~b7 b0~b3 b15~b8 b7~b0

DISP number DISP4 DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 DISP8 DISP7 DISP6 DISP5 Pre- zero

dot

The value of STOP->RUN

F F F F F F F F 0 0

2 DVP-PLC Function


3. DISP module external wiring terminal:

abcdefg

dot

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

cathode 7-segment display (8-bit)

4. Example of DISP module wiring:

Common cathode 7-segment display circuit: the device from BCD to Common cathode

7-segment display.

Power Input

1. using external +24VDC to be driven

power of display module.

2. Using internal +24VDC to be driven

power of display module.

P

24VDC

OV

Shortcircuit

P

24VDC

OV24V

additional DC

Common cathode 7-segment display connection:

abcdefg

dot

7D6D5D4D3D2D1D0D

2 DVP-PLC Function


Adjustable Acceleration/Deceleration Pulse

Output FunctionExplanation

M1144~M1149,

M1154

D1032, D1033

D1144, D1154

D1155

1. For EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of adjustable accel/decel pulse

output function:

Device Function

M1144 Start switch of accel/decel pulse output

M1145 Flag that is used in acceleration

M1146 Target frequency attained flag

M1147 Flag that is used in deceleration

M1148 Completed function flag

M1149 stop counting temporarily flag

M1154 Start designated deceleration gap time flag and frequency flag

D1032 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of Y1 pulse accumulative output numbers

D1033 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of Y1 pulse accumulative output numbers

D1144 Using parameter index (correspond to D component)

D1154 Recommended value of designated deceleration gap time (10~32767 ms)

D1155 Recommended value of designated acceleration gap frequency (-1~ - 32700 Hz)

2. Corresponding table of parameter D1144

Index Function

+0 Total segment number (n) (the maximum number is 10)

+1 Present execution segment (read only)

+2 Start frequency of first segment (SF1)

+3 Interval time of first segment (GT1)

+4 Interval frequency of first segment (GF1)

+5 Target frequency of first segment (TF1)

+6 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of first segment output pulse

+7 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of first segment output pulse

+8 Start frequency of second segment (SF2)

+9 Interval time of second segment (GT2)

+10 Interval frequency of second segment (GF2)

+11 Target frequency of second segment (TF2)

+12 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of second segment output pulse

+13 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of second segment output pulse

: :

+n*6+2 Start frequency of nth segment (SFn)

+n*6+3 Interval time of nth segment (GTn)

+n*6+4 Interval frequency of nth segment (GFn)

+n*6+5 Target frequency of nth segment (TFn)

+n*6+6 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of nth segment output pulse

+n*6+7 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of nth segment output pulse

2 DVP-PLC Function


3. Function Explanation:

This function can only be used for Y1 output point and the timing will be as follows. After

filling parameter table, set M1144 to start (it should be used in RUN mode)

SF2

TF2

SF3TF3

TF4SF4TF1

SF1

GF

GT

GT

GFFrequency(Hz)

Time(ms)

1st sectionpulse number (SE1)

2nd sectionpulse number (SE2)

3rd sectionpulse number (SE3)

4th sectionpulse number (SE4)

4. Usage rule and restriction:

The minimum frequency of start frequency and target frequency should be equal to or

greater than 200Hz. If it is less than 200Hz, it means finish executing or not to execute.

The maximum frequency of start frequency of target frequency is 32700Hz. It will

execute in 32700Hz as it is greater than 32700Hz.

The interval time range is 1~32767ms and its unit is ms.

The interval frequency range in acceleration segment is 1Hz~32700Hz and in

deceleration segment is -1~-32700Hz. If it is set to 0Hz, the executed segment can’t be

up to target frequency, but it will tansfer to execute next segment after reaching target

number.

Target number of segment pulse output should be greater than ((GF*GT/1000)*

((TF-SF)/GF). Refer to example 1 for detail. Once Target number of segment pulse

output isn’t greater than ((GF*GT/1000)* ((TF-SF)/GF), this function can’t be used. The

improve method is to add interval time or add target number of pulse output.

If there is Y1 output designated by high-speed command in RUN mode, Y1 output

command will be started as high priority.

2 DVP-PLC Function


After starting to execute M1144, if M1148 outputs without attaining completed function

flag and M1144 is closed, this function will start deceleration function. If designated

acceleration function flag M1154 is Off, it will reduce 200Hz per 200ms and stop output

pulse till output frequency is less than 200Hz and set M1147 to deceleration flag. But if

designated deceleration flag M1154 is On, it will be executed by interval time and

frequency that defined by user. And interval time can’t be less than or equal to 0 (if it is

less than or equal to 0, factory setting will be set to 200ms). Interval frequency can’t be

greater than or equal to 0 (factory setting will be set to -1KHz when it is equal to 0 and

factory setting will be added negative sign automatically when it is greater than 0.)

When M1148 attains completed function flag and M1144 is closed, this function won’t

start deceleration function and it will clear M1148 flag. Once M1144 is closed, it will

clear M1149 flag.

The execution segment of this function will execute by total segment number. The

maximum segment is 10 segments.

The acceleration/deceleration of this function will execute by start frequency of the

next segment, i.e. when target frequency of execution segment is less than start

frequency of the next segment, the next segment is acceleration and the target

frequency of the next segment must be greater than start frequency of the next

segment. When target frequency of execution segment is greater than the next

segment frequency, the next segment is deceleration, therefore, target frequency of

the next segment must be less than start frequency of the next segment. If user can’t

set it by this way, we can’t ensure that you can get correct output pulse.

When STOP RUN, M1144~M1149 will be cleared to Off. When RUN STOP, M1144

will be cleared and M1145~M1149 won’t be cleared. D1144 will be cleared to 0 when it

is from Off On and unchanged in other case.

The usage parameter range of EP/SA series is D0~D999 and D2000~D4999. It won’t

execute this command and close M1144 if parameter is out of range (includes all

usage segment parameter).

5. Example 1: calculate output number of acceleration/deceleration of each segment and

target frequency

If setting start frequency of segment to 200Hz, segment interval time to 100ms, segment

gap frequency to 100Hz, segment target frequency to 500Hz and target number of segment

pulse is 1000 pulses. The calculation will be in the following:

Output pulse number at start acceleration/deceleration is 200*100/1000 = 20 pulses

Output pulse number of the first acceleration interval is 300*100/1000 = 30 pulses

Output pulse number of the second acceleration interval is 400*100/1000 = 40 pulses

Output pulse number of target frequency is 1000 − (40+30+20) = 910 pulses

(NOTE: it is recommended to set this number to be greater than 10)

2 DVP-PLC Function


Output time of target frequency is 1 / 500 * 910 = 1820 ms

Total time of this segment is 1820 + 3*100 = 2120 ms

6. Example 2: simple acceleration/deceleration pulse output program of a segment

acceleration and a segment deceleration

M1002

MOV K2 D200

MOV K200

MOV K250 D202

MOV K500 D203

MOV K250 D204

MOV D205

D206

MOV K750 D208

MOV K500 D209

MOV K-250 D210

MOV K250 D211

K200 D212

END

M0

7. Example 3: pulse output program of a segment acceleration/deceleration with direction

2 DVP-PLC Function


TF1

TF2

TF2

TF1

SF2

SF2

SF1

SF1X0=ON

Y7=OFF

Position

Zero point

Y7=On Explanation:

Acceleration/deceleration setting is as example 2.

Figure above is the example of position movement. When X0 contact is On, it will start

to move and it will stop when X0 contact is Off. (Y7 is for direction setting)

Program is shown in the following.

M1002RST M0

SET

END

RST M1

SET M0

ALT M1

Y7

RST

RST

X0

X0 M0

M1

M1

M1

M1148

M0

X0

8. Example 4: apply acceleration and deceleration of a segment to zero point return program.

Relative flag timing chart is shown in the following.

2 DVP-PLC Function


M1149

M1148

M1144

X0Stop returning to zero point

Stop pulse output

Acceleration for returning to zero point

Deceleration for returning to zero point

The relation between frequency and position are shown in the following.

Frequency(Hz)

Acceleration forreturning to zero point

Deceleration forreturning to zero point

zero point

Position

Number setting of acceleration/deceleration, frequency and pulse are shown in the

following. (correspond to component D)

Started number of D

+ index Settings

+0 2

+2 250(Hz)

+3 100(ms)

+4 500(Hz)

+5 10000(Hz)

+6, +7 10(pulse)

+8 9750(Hz)

+9 50(ms)

+10 -500(Hz)

+11 250(Hz)

+12, +13 30000(pulse)

Program is shown in the following: (it assumes contact X7 to be start reset trigger switch)

2 DVP-PLC Function


X7SET

END

SETX0

RSTX0

SET

RST

Explanation:

After contact X7 is triggered, M1144 will set to start acceleration and set M1149 not to

count pulse number. And it will send 10 pulses once deceleration switch X0 is

triggered and then enter deceleration segment.

To set M1148 to end pulse output by manual and close this function once X0 is closed.

Note: This example is just an application method that user should adjust parameters settings

used in acceleration/deceleration segment according to actual machine characteristics

and limitation.

Single StepExecutionFunction

M1170, M1171

D1170

1. The definition of special D and special M of EH series single step execution function

Device Function explanation

M1170 Start flag of single step function

M1171 Single step execution flag

D1170 STEP number of present PLC execution command


Execution time: this flag is valid when PLC is at RUN mode.

Action Steps:

A. Start M1170 to enter single step execution mode. PLC will stay at specific

command which the STEP is saved in D1170 and execute that command one

time.

B. When Forcing M1171 to be On, PLC will execute the next command and stop at

the next command, at the same time, PLC will force M1171 to be Off. D1170 will

display present STEP value.

2 DVP-PLC Function


3. Note:

Those commands that will be affected by scan time will be incorrect due to single STEP

execution. Example: when HKY command is executed, it needs 8 scan time to get a valid input

value of a button. Thus, single step execution will have faults.

Some commands like Pulse input/output, high-speed comparison command, won’t be

affected by single STEP due to hardware start.

2-phase PulseOutput Function

M1172~M1174

D1172~D1177

1. For EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of 2-phase output function:

Device Function Explanation

M1172 2-phase pulse output switch

M1173 On is continuous output switch

M1174 Output pulse number attained flag

D1172 2-phase output frequency (12Hz~20KHz)

D1173 2-phase output mode selection (k1and k2)

D1174 Lower bit of 32-bit of 2-phase output pulse target number

D1175 Upper bit of 32-bit of 2-phase output pulse target number

D1176 Lower bit of 32-bit of 2-phase present output pulse number

D1177 Upper bit of 32-bit of 2-phase present output pulse number


Output frequency = 1/T as shown in the figure below. There are two output modes, k1 and

k2, k1 means A phase gets ahead of B phase and k2 means B phase gets ahead of A phase.

Output number calculation adds 1 once there is a phase difference, such as figure below, there

are 8 output pulses. When output numbers attains, M1174 will be On and if you want to clear

M1174, you should close M1172.

1 2 7 8

Y0(A)

Y1(B)

T

2 DVP-PLC Function


Output frequency, output target number and mode selection can be modified when

M1172=On and M1174=Off. The modification of output frequency and output target number

won’t affect present output pulse number but mode selection modification will clear present

output pulse number to 0. Present output pulse number will be updated once scan time

updates and it will clear to 0 when M1172 is from Stop Run, and keep that last output number

when M1172 is from Run Stop.

3. Note:

This function just can be used at RUN mode and can exist in program with PLSY

command. But if command PLSY is executed first, this function can’t be used, and vice versa.

VR Potentiometer

M1178~M1179

D1178~D1179

1. For EH/EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of built-in 2 points VR

potentiometer function:

Device Function

M1178 Start potentiometer VR0 M1179 Start potentiometer VR1 D1178 VR0 value D1179 VR1 value

2. Function explanation:

This function only can be used at RUN mode. When M1178=On, the variational value of

VR 0 will be converted to digit 0~255 to save in D1178. When M1179=On, the variational value

of VR 1 will be converted to digit 0~255 to save in D1179.

3. Please refer to command API 85 VRRD for detail.

MODEMConnection

Function M1184~M1188

1. System connection

PC

WPLSoft is executing

DVP-EP/EH series MPU

DVP-F232 interface

MODEM

MODEM

telecommunication network

2. EP/EH series special M definition for MODEM connection:

Device Function Explanation Remark

M1184 Start-up MODEM When M1184=On, following actions are valid.

M1185 Start-up MODEM initialization

This flag will be Off after finishing initialization.

M1186 Fail to initial MODEM When M1185=On, M1186=Off. M1187 Succeed to initial MODEM When M1185=On, M1187=Off.

M1188 Display if MODEM is connected or not On means in connection

NOTE: special M is always valid no matter PLC is RUN or STOP.

2 DVP-PLC Function


3. Operation: (Please operate by following steps)

(a) Setting M1184=On on PLC side (start-up MODEM)

(b) STEP 2: Setting M1185=On (start-up PLC’s MODEM initialization)

(c) STEP 3: Check the result of MODEM initialization: M1186=On means succeed to

initial. M1187=On means fail to initial.

(d) STEP 4: After initialing successful, WPL software can be ready for connection on

remote PC side. WPL connection method: setting -> modem connection (you need to

install modem’s driver first) -> to get dial connection dialog box and then fill in dial

information as following.

4. Caution:

(a) It must use with RS-232 card when connecting MODEM on PLC side. If not, above

special M are invalid.

(b) You must set M1185=On to initial MODEM after MODEM start-up (M1184=On). If not,

it can’t start-up MODEM auto dial function on PLC side.

(c) MODEM will enter auto dial mode after initialization.

(d) MODEM will enter to ready for dial mode on PLC side after remote PC stops

connection. If user turn MODEM power off now, it should need to initial at the next time

when turning on MODEM.

(e) MODEM connection baud rate on PLC side is fixed to 9600bps and can’t be modified.

Besides, MODEM speed must be 9600bps and faster.

(f) The initial format that used to MODEM on PLC side are ATZ and ATS0=1.

Power LossLatched Range

Setting

D1200~D1219

1. For EH/EP/SA series to set latched range. The latched range will be from start address

number to end address number.

2. Please refer to chapter 2.1 for detail.

Input Point Xcan force to be

ON/OFF

M1304

1. For EP/SA series, When M1304=On, input point X (X0-X17) of MPU can force to be On-Off

by using peripheral WPLSoft and HPP.

2. For EH series, When M1304=On, input point X of MPU can force to be On-Off by using

peripheral WPLSoft and HPP.

2 DVP-PLC Function


Special ExtensionModule ID

D1320~D1327

For EH series, it will display expansion module ID in D1320~ D1327 by order when connecting to special expansion module. Special expansion module ID of EH series:

Expansion Module Name Expansion Module ID Expansion Module

Name Expansion Module ID

DVPEH04AD H’0400 DVPEH01PU H’0110 DVP04DA-H H’0401 DVPEH01HC H’0120 DVPEH04PT H’0402 DVPEH02HC H’0220 DVPEH04TC H’0403 DVPEH01DT H’0130 DVPEH06XA H’0604 DVPEH02DT H’0230 DVPEH06RT H’0405

Easy PLCLink

M1350-M1352

M1360-M1439

D1355-D1370

D1415-D1465

D1480-D1991

1. Explanation of Special D and special M explanation of EH series EASY PLC LINK ID1–ID8:

MASTER PLC SLAVE ID

1 SLAVE ID

2 SLAVE ID

3 SLAVE ID

4 SLAVE ID

5 SLAVE ID

6 SLAVE ID

7 SLAVE ID

8 readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

D1480 │

D1495

D1496 │

D1511

D1512 │

D1527

D1528 │

D1543

D1544 │

D1559

D1560│

D1575

D1576│

D1591

D1592│

D1607

D1608│

D1623

D1624│

D1639

D1640│

D1655

D1656 │

D1671

D1672 │

D1687

D1688 │

D1703

D1704│

D1719

D1720│

D1735

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

D1434 D1450 D1435 D1451 D1436 D1452D1437 D1453 D1438 D1454 D1439 D1455 D1440 D1456 D1441 D1457

Device Communication Address

D1355 D1415 D1356 D1416 D1357 D1417 D1358 D1418 D1359 D1419 D1360 D1420 D1361 D1421 D1362 D1422

If there is LINK in SLAVE PLC M1360 M1361 M1362 M1363 M1364 M1365 M1366 M1367

Action indication flag for master PLC do to slave PLC

M1376 M1377 M1378 M1379 M1380 M1381 M1382 M1383

Read/write error flag

M1392 M1393 M1394 M1395 M1396 M1397 M1398 M1399

Read completed flag (Whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)

M1408 M1409 M1410 M1411 M1412 M1413 M1414 M1415

Write completed flag (whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)

M1424 M1425 M1426 M1427 M1428 M1429 M1430 M1431

SLAVE ID 1

SLAVE ID 2

SLAVE ID 3

SLAVE ID 4

SLAVE ID 5

SLAVE ID 6

SLAVE ID 7

SLAVE ID 8

read out

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

D100 │

D115

D200 │

D215

D100 │

D115

D200 │

D215

D100 │

D115

D200│

D215

D100│

D115

D200│

D215

D100│

D115

D200│

D215

D100│

D115

D200 │

D215

D100 │

D115

D200 │

D215

D100│

D115

D200│

D215

Factory setting of Communication address for reading is H1064 (D100).

Factory setting of Communication address for writing is H10C8 (D200).

2 DVP-PLC Function


2. Explanation of Special D and special M explanation of EH series EASY PLC LINK ID9–ID16:

MASTER PLC SLAVE ID

9 SLAVE ID

10 SLAVE ID

11 SLAVE ID

12 SLAVE ID

13 SLAVE ID

14 SLAVE ID

15 SLAVE ID

16 readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

D1736 │

D1751

D1752 │

D1767

D1768 │

D1783

D1784 │

D1799

D1800│

D1815

D1816│

D1831

D1832│

D1847

D1848│

D1863

D1864│

D1879

D1880│

D1895

D1896 │

D1911

D1912 │

D1927

D1928 │

D1943

D1944│

D1959

D1960│

D1975

D1976│

D1991

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number

Item number


Device Communication Address


If there is LINK in SLAVE PLC M1368 M1369 M1370 M1371 M1372 M1373 M1374 M1375

Action indication flag for master PLC do to slave PLC

M1384 M1385 M1386 M1387 M1388 M1389 M1390 M1391

Read/write error flag

M1400 M1401 M1402 M1403 M1404 M1405 M1406 M1407

Read completed flag (Whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)

M1416 M1417 M1418 M1419 M1420 M1421 M1422 M1423

Write completed flag (whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)

M1432 M1433 M1434 M1435 M1436 M1437 M1438 M1439

SLAVE ID 9

SLAVE ID 10

SLAVE ID 11

SLAVE ID 12

SLAVE ID 13

SLAVE ID 14

SLAVE ID 15

SLAVE ID 16

read out

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

readout

Write in

D100 │

D115

D200 │

D215

D100 │

D115

D200 │

D215

D100│

D115

D200│

D215

D100│

D115

D200│

D215

D100│

D115

D200│

D215

D100 │

D115

D200 │

D215

D100 │

D115

D200│

D215

D100│

D115

D200│

D215

Factory setting of Communication address for reading is H1064 (D100).

Factory setting of Communication address for writing is H10C8 (D200).

3. Explanation:

The basic communication protocol for EASY PLC LINK is MODBUS

When connecting to RS-485, the baud rate for all slave peripheral and communication

format should be the same as master PLC, such as set D1120 for PLC. When EP MPU

is used to be slave, only ASCII mode can be used. When EH MPU is used to be slave,

ASCII mode and RTU mode can be used.

All communication format used to connect to PLC should be the same (set D1120 for

PLC) and it supports ASCII and RTU mode.

2 DVP-PLC Function


The maximum slave PLCs for a master PLC to connect is 16 slave PLCs.

The ID of slave PLC should be fixed to 1~16 and each slave ID can’t be repeated.

RS-232, RS-485 and RS-422 can be used in one-to-one connection. When slave PLC

uses RS-232, only ASCII mode can be used and communicatioin format is (7, E, 1).

One to multiple connection can connect to RS-485 in series

4. Operation:

Setting Master PLC ID by D1121 and slave ID first. ID can’t be repeated.

Setting read/write items of slave (the maximum is 16 items). (refer to special D for

detail)

Setting device communication address to read/write to slave. (refer to Special D

explanation above for special D setting. Factory setting of communication address for

reading is H1064 (D100) and writing is H10C8 (D200).

Setting PLC LINK automatically (M1351)

Setting PLC LINK manually (M1352)

Start MASTER PLC LINK (M1350)

5. Master PLC action explanation:

Slave ID detection: When M1350=On, Master PLC is started and then detect slave

number to record number in D1433.

You can see if there is slave PLC by M1360-M1375 which save slave ID 1-16

separately. On means exist.

If detection of slave PLC number is 0, M1350 will be Off and stop Link at the same

time. PLC will only detect slave PLC number only at start that M1350=On.

Read/write of master and slave PLC: After finishing detecting slave, master PLC will

read/write to each slave. The slave that master can do read/write is slave ID got after

detecting slave ID. Once slave PLC is added after detecting, master can’t do read/write

to it till the next detection.

Master PLC will read first and the maximum range is 16 slave PLCs start from D100.

After reading, PLC will write and the maximum range is 16 slave PLCs start from D200.

Master PLC will read/write to slave PLC in order, i.e. it will read/write to the next slave

after finishing a slave.

6. Automatic/ Manual model explanation:

Automatic mode: it should set M1351 to Off. Master PLC will read/write to slave till

M1350 is Off.

2 DVP-PLC Function


Manual mode: It needs to set times of read to D1431. One time means finish all Slave

read/write. When PLC starts Link, D1432 will start to count times of

Link. When D1431 = D1432, PLC will stop Link and force M1351 to be

Off at the same time. If M1351 is forced to be On, PLC will start to link

according to D1431 value automatically.

Caution:

1. Automation mode M1351 and manual mode M1352 can’t be On at the same

time.

2. For EH modes, it need to clear M1350 first befor switching auto/manual

mode. For EP modes, it is unnecessary.

3. Please clear M1350 first before switching automation/manual mode.

4. Communication time-out can be set by D1129. The setting range is from 300

to 3000. When it is out of range, it will be regarded as 300 when it is less

than 300 and regarded as 3000 when it is larger than 3000. Besides, this

setting is valid when it is set before linking.

5. PLC LINK function is only valid when baud rate is larger than 1200 bps.

When baud rate is less than 9600 bps, please set communication time-out to

more than 1 second.

6. It won’t communicate when write/read item is 0.

7. It doesn’t allow 32-bit counter read/write in.

2 DVP-PLC Function


2.12 Fault Code Information

If the PLC ERROR LED is flashing or special relay M1004=On after writing program in PLC, the problem may be

an invalid operand or error grammar. You can get fault code saved in special register D1004 to check in following

table to get error message and error address is saved in D1137. (D1137 will be invalid if it is general loop error)

Please refer to chapter 2.1 for each model usage range. Fault Code Description Fault Code Description

0001 Operand bit device S exceeds the usage range 0F06 SFTR misuse operand

0002 Label P exceeds the usage range or duplicated 0F07 SFTL misuse operand

0003 Operand KnSm exceeds the usage range 0F08 REF misuse operand

0102 Interrupt pointer I exceeds the usage range or duplicated 1000 ZRST misuse operand

0202 Command MC exceeds the usage range C400 An unrecognized command code is being used

0302 Command MCR exceeds the usage range C401 Loop error

0401 Operand bit device X exceeds the usage range C402 LD / LDI continuously use more than 9

times 0403 Operand KnXm exceeds the usage range C403 MPS continuously use more than 9 times

0501 Operand bit device Y exceeds the usage range C404 FOR-NEXT exceeds 6 levels

0503 Operand KnYm exceeds the usage range C405 STL/RET used between FOR-NEXT SRET/IRET used between FOR-NEXT

0601 Operand bit device T exceeds the usage range MC/MCR used between FOR-NEXT

END / FEND used between FOR-NEXT

0604 Operand word device T register usage exceeds limit C407 STL continuously use more than 9 times

0801 Operand bit device M exceeds the usage range C408 Use command MC/MCR in STL

Use I/P in STL

0803 Operand KnMm exceeds the usage range C409 Use STL/RET in subroutine Use STL/RET in interrupt program

0D01 DECO misuse operand 0D02 ENCO misuse operand C40A Use MC/MCR in subroutine

Use MC/MCR in interrupt program 0D03 DHSCS misuse operand 0D04 DHSCR misuse operand C40B MC/MCR doesn’t start from N0 or

discontinuously 0D05 PLSY misuse operand 0D06 PWM misuse operand C40C MC/MCR corresponding value N is

different 0D07 FROM/TO misuse operand C40D Use I/P incorrectly 0D08 PID misuse operand

0E01 Operand bit device C exceeds the usage range

C40E IRET doesn’t follow by the last FEND command SRET doesn’t follow by the last FEND command

0E04 Operand word device C register usage exceeds limit

0E05 DCNT misuse operand CXXX C41C The number of input/output points of I/O

expansion unit exceeds usage range

0E18 BCD conversion error 0E19 Division error (divisor=0) C41D Special expansion module exceeds usage

range

0E1A Component exceeds usage range (includeE and F error) C41E Hardware setting of special expansion

module error

0E1B It is negative number after radical expression C41F Data write in memory failure

0E1C FROM/TO communication error C4FF Invalid command (no this command)

0F04 Operand word device D register usage exceeds limit C4EE No END command in program

0F05 DCNT misuse operand DXXX

3 Basic Commands


3.1 Summary of Basic Command and Step Ladder Command

Basic Commands

Execution speed (us) Command Code Function Operands

ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP Page

LD Load contact A X, Y, M, S, T, C 5.6 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3

LDI Load contact B X, Y, M, S, T, C 5.68 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3

AND Series connection with A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.8 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3

ANI Series connection with B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.88 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-4

OR Parallel connection with A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.8 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-4

ORI Parallel connection with B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.88 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-5

ANB Series connects the circuit block None 4.4 0.24 1~3 3-5

ORB Parallel connects the circuit block None 4.4 0.24 1~3 3-5

MPS Save the operation result None 4.64 0.24 1~3 3-6

MRD Read the operation result (the pointer not moving) None 4 0.24 1 3-6

MPP Read the result None 4.4 0.24 1 3-6

Output commands



OUT Drive coil Y, S, M 6.4 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-7

SET Action latched (ON) Y, S, M 5.04 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-7

RST Clear the contacts or the registers Y, M, S, T, C, D, E, F 7.6 0.24(0.56) 3 3-7

Timers, Counters

Execution speed (us) API Command

Code Function Operands ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH

STEP Page

96 TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D 9.6 25 4 3-8

97 CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D（16 bits） 12.8 30 4 3-8

97 DCNT 32-bit counter C-K or C-D（32 bits） 14.32 50 6 3-9

Main control commands



MC Connect the common series connection contacts N0~N7 5.6 20 3 3-10

MCR Disconnect the common series connection contacts N0~N7 5.76 15 3 3-10

3 Basic Commands


Rising-edge/falling-edge detection commands of contact



STEP Page

90 LDP Rising-edge detection operation starts S, X, Y, M, T, C 8.16 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11

91 LDF Falling-edge detection operation starts S, X, Y, M, T, C 8.32 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11

92 ANDP Rising-edge detection series connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.68 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11

93 ANDF Falling-edge detection series connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.76 0.56(0.88) 3 3-12

94 ORP Rising-edge detection parallel connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.68 0.56(0.88) 3 3-12

95 ORF Falling-edge detection parallel connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.76 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13

Rising-edge/falling-edge output commands



STEP P a g e

89 PLS Rising-edge output Y, M 9.92 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13

99 PLF Falling-edge output Y, M 10.16 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13

End command


ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP P a g e

END Program end none 7.44 0.24 1 3-14

Other commands



STEP P a g e

NOP No function none 3.52 0.16 1 3-14

98 INV Inverting operation none 3.92 0.24 1 3-15

P Pointer P0~P255 －－ 1 3-15

I Interrupt pointer I□□□ －－ 1 3-15

Step ladder commands

Command Code Function Operands STEP P a g e

STL Step transition ladder start command S 1 4-1

RET Step transition ladder return command none 1 4-1

Note: The value wrote in () in the column of execution speed of EH series is the execution speed of specific

operand M1536~M4095.

3 Basic Commands


3.2 Basic Commands Explanations

Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHLD Load A contact

X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand －

CommandExplanation

The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A

contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present

contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative

register.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0 X1Y1

Command Code:

LD X0 AND X1 OUT Y1

Command code explanation:

Load contact A of X0 Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive Y1 coil

Command Functions Adaptive model

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHLDI Load B contact

X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand

－

CommandExplanation

The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B

contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present

contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative

register.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0 X1Y1

Command Code:

LDI X0 AND X1 OUT Y1


Load contact B of X0 Connect to contact A of X1 in seriesDrive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHAND Series connection-a contact


－

3 Basic Commands


CommandExplanation

The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the

command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,

and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the

contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0X1Y1

Command Code:


Command code explanation: Load contact B of X1 Connect to contact A of X0 in seriesDrive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHANI Series connection-b contact


－

CommandExplanation

The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the

command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,

and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the

contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0X1Y1

Command Code:

LD X1 ANI X0 OUT Y1

Command code explanation: Load contact A of X1 Connect to contact B of X0 in series Drive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHOR Parallel connection-a contact

X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand －

CommandExplanation

The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the

command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and

then to perform the “OR” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts,

thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0

X1Y1

Command Code:

LD X0 OR X1 OUT Y1

Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0 Connect to contact A of X1 in parallel Drive Y1 coil

3 Basic Commands


Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHORI Parallel connection-b contact

X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand －

CommandExplanation

The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the

command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and

then to perform the “OR” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts,

thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0

X1Y1

Command Code:

LD X0 ORI X1 OUT Y1

Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0 Connect to contact B of X1 in parallel Drive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHANB Series connection (Multiple Circuits)

Operand none

CommandExplanation

To perform the “AND” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and

contents of the accumulative register.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0

X2Y1

X1

X3

ANB

Block A Block B

Command Code:

LD X0 ORI X2 LDI X1 OR X3 ANB OUT Y1

Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0 Connect to contact B of X2 in parallel Load contact B of X1 Connect to contact A of X3 in parallel Connect circuit block in seriesDrive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHORB Parallel connection (Multiple circuits)

Operand None

CommandExplanation

To perform the “OR” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and

contents of the accumulative register.

3 Basic Commands


ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0

X2Y1

X1

X3ORB

Block A

Block B

Command Code:

LD X0 ANI X1 LDI X2 AND X3 ORB OUT Y1

Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0 Connect to contact B of X1 in series Load contact B of X2 Connect to contact A of X3 in series Connect circuit block in parallelDrive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHMPS Store the operation result

Operand None

CommandExplanation

To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result

operation pointer pulses 1)


ES/EX/SS EP EHMRD Reads the operation result

Operand None

CommandExplanation

Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of

operation result doesn’t move)


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHMPP Reads, then clears the operation result

Operand None

CommandExplanation

To retrieve the previous reserved logic calculation result from the operation result and

save it into the accumulative register. (the pointer of result operation minus 1)

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0Y1

X1

M0X2

Y2

ENDMPP

MRD

MPS

Command Code:

LD X0 MPS AND X1 OUT Y1 MRD AND X2 OUT M0 MPP OUT Y2 END

Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0 Save to stack Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive M0 coil Read from stack Drive Y2 coil Program end

3 Basic Commands



ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHOUT Output coil


－－－－

CommandExplanation

Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device.

Motion of coil contact:

OUT command

Contact Operation result Coil

A contact (normally open) B contact (normally close)

FALSE OFF Non-continuity Continuity TRUE ON Continuity Non-continuity

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0 X1Y1

Command Code:


Command code explanation: Load contact B of X0 Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive Y1 coil

Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHSET Latch（ON）

X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand －－－－

CommandExplanation

When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be “ON,” which will keep

“ON” whether the SET command is still driven. You can use the RST command to set

the device to “OFF”.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0 Y0Y1SET

Command Code:

LD X0 ANI Y0 SET Y1

Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0Connect to contact B of Y0 in series Y1 latch (ON)


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHRST Clear the contact or the register

X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 E, FOperand

－

3 Basic Commands


CommandExplanation

When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows: Device Status

S, Y, M Coil and contact will be set to “OFF”.

T, C Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil and contact will be set to “OFF.”

D, E, F The content value will be set to 0.

If the RST command is not executed, status of specific device will not be changed.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0Y5RST

Command Code:

LD X0 RST Y5


Load contact A of X0

Clear contact Y5


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHTMR 16-bit timer

T-K T0~T255, K0~K32,767 Operand

T-D T0~T255, D0~D9,999

CommandExplanation

When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to

count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value), the

contact will be as following:

NO(Normally Open) contact Open collector NC(Normally Closed) contact Close collector

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0T5TMR K1000

Command Code:

LD X0 TMR T5 K1000


Load contact A of X0T5 timer Setting is K1000

Footnote

Please refer to the specification of every model for the operand T usage.


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHCNT 16-bit counter

C-K C0~C199, K0~K32,767 Operand

C-D C0~C199, D0~D9,999

3 Basic Commands


CommandExplanation

When the CNT command is executed from OFF ON, which means that the counter

coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter’s value; when the counter

achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the contact

is as follows:

NO(Normally Open) contact Continuity NC(Normally Closed) contact Non-continuity

If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the conatcts and the counting

values will be un unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use

the RST command.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0C20CNT K100

Command Code:

LD X0 CNT C20 K100

Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0C20 counter Setting is K100


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHDCNT 32-bit counter

C-K C200~C254，K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647 Operand

C-D C200~C254, D0~D9,999

CommandExplanation

DCNT is the startup command for the 32-bit high-speed counter that is utilized

especially in counters C232 to C255.

For general addition/subtraction counter C200~C234, the present value will count up

(add 1) or count down (subtract 1) when command DCNT is from Off→On.

When specific high-speed counter pulse input of high-speed addition/subtraction

counters C235~C254 is from Off→On, it will execute counting. If counter trigger input

keeps being On or Off, the counter value will be unchanged. See chapter 2.7 timer

number and function for high-speed pulse input terminals (X0~X17) and counting

(count up (add 1) and count down (subtract 1)).

When DCNT command is OFF, the counter will stop counting, but the counting values

will not be cleared. Users can use RST C2XX command to remove the counting values

and the contacts. High-speed addition/subtraction counters C235~C254 can use

external specific input point to remove the counting values and the contacts.

ProgramExample

LadderDiagram: M0

C254DCNT K1000

Command Code: LD M0 DCNT C254 K1000 LD M0 DCNT C254 K1000

Command code explanation: Load contact A of M0 and C254 counter Setting is K1000

3 Basic Commands


Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHMC / MCR Master control Start/Reset command

Operand N0~N7

CommandExplanation

MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the

execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC

command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described

as follows:

Timer The counting value is set back to zero, the coil and the contact are both turned OFF

Accumulative timer The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the contact stay at their present condition

Counter The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the contact stay at their present condition

Coils driven up by the OUT command All turned OFF

Devices driven up by the SET and RST commands Stay at present condition

Application commands All of them are not acted

MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the main-control

program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command.

Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program supports the nest program structure,

with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~ N7, and refer

to the following:

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0

Y0

MC N0

X1

X2

Y1

MC N1

X3

MCR N1

MCR N0X10

MC N0

Y10X11

MCR N0

Command Code Explanation LD X0 Load A contact of X0 MC N0 Enable N0 common series

connection contact LD X1 Load A contact of X1 OUT Y0 Drive Y0 coil

: LD X2 Load A contact of X2 MC N1 Enable N1 common series


: MCR N1 Disable N1 common series

connection contact :

MCR N0 Disable N0 common series connection contact

: LD X10 Load A contact of X10 MC N0 Enable N0 common series


: MCR N0 Disable N0 common series

connection contact

3 Basic Commands



ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHLDP Rising-edge detection operation


CommandExplanation

Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is

different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the

detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0 X1Y1

Command code:

LDP X0 AND X1 OUT Y1


Start X0 rising-edge detection Series connection A contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil

Footnote

Please refer to the specification of every model for the operand usage.

If specific rising-edge contact state is On before PLC is power on, rising-dedge contact

will be True after PLC is power on.

Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHLDF Falling-edge detection operation

X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand －

CommandExplanation

Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is

different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the

detection status of the acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0 X1Y1

Command code:

LDF X0 AND X1 OUT Y1


Start X0 falling-edge detection Series connection A contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHANDP Series connection command for the riding-edge detection operation


3 Basic Commands


CommandExplanation

ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X1X0Y1

Command Code:

LD X0 ANDP X1 OUT Y1


Load A contact of X0 X1 rising-edge detection in series connection Drive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHANDF Series connection command for the falling-edge detection operation


－

CommandExplanation

ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X1X0Y1

Command Code:

LD X0 ANDF X1 OUT Y1


Load A contact of X0 X1 falling-edge detection in series connection Drive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHORP Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection operation


CommandExplanation

The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s rising-edge

detection.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0

X1Y1

Command Code:

LD X0 ORP X1 OUT Y1

Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0 X1 rising-edge detection in parallel connection Drive Y1 coil

3 Basic Commands


Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHORF Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection operation

X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand －

CommandExplanation

The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge

detection.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0

X1Y1

Command Code:

LD X0 ORF X1 OUT Y1

Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0 X1 falling-edge detection in parallel connection Drive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHPLS Rising-edge output


－－－－－

CommandExplanation

When X0=OFF→ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will

send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram: X0

M0PLSM0

Y0SET

Timing Diagram: X0

M0

Y0

a scan time

Command Code:

LD X0 PLS M0 LD M0 SET Y0

Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0M0 rising-edge outputLoad the contact A of M0

Y0 latched (ON)

Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHPLF Falling-edge output

X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999

Operand －－－－－

3 Basic Commands


CommandExplanation

When X0= ON→OFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0 will

send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram: X0

M0PLFM0

Y0SET

Timing Diagram:

a scan time

X0

M0

Y0

Command Code:

LD X0 PLF M0 LD M0 SET Y0

Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0M0 falling-edge outputLoad the contact A of M0

Y0 latched (ON)

Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHEND Program End

Operand None

CommandExplanation

It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command

program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after executing it will return

to address 0 to scan again.


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHNOP No operation

Operand none

CommandExplanation

This is a no-operation command and has no effect on the previous operation. NOP is

used in the following cases: To delete a command without changing the number of

steps. (Overwrite with NOP)

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0Y1NOP

Command NOP will be omittedwhen ladder diagram displays.

Command Code:

LD X0 NOP OUT Y1

Command code explanation: Load B contact of X0 No operation

Drive Y1 coil

3 Basic Commands


Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHINV Inverting Operation

Operand None

CommandExplanation

Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram: X0

Y1

Command Code:

LD X0 INV OUT Y1

Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0 Inverting the operation result Drive Y1 coil


ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHP Pointer

Operand P0~P255

CommandExplanation

Pointers are used with the jump commands (CJ, CALL) in two different ways as follows.

But a number cannot be used repeatedly.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

X0

Y1

CJ P10

X1P10

Command Code:

LD X0 CJ P10

: P10 LD X1 OUT Y1

Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0 Jump from command CJ to P10

Pointer P10 Load a contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil

Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHI Interrupt Pointers (I)

Operand I00□, I10□, I20□, I30□, I40□, I50□, I6□□, I7□□, I8□□ I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I110, I120, I130, I140

CommandExplanation

Interrupt programs should begin with interrupt pointer （ I□□□）and ends with

application command to be as interrupt end and return. It must use with application

commands API 03 IRET, API 04 EI, API 05 DI.

3 Basic Commands


ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram:

Y1

EI

X1

I 001

DI

FEND

Y2X2

IRET

range for inserting program interrupt

program interrupt insert into subroutine

interruptServiceprogrampointer

Command Code: Command code explanation:

EI Interrupt Enable LD X1 Load A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil

: DI Interrupt Disable

: FEND Program end I001 Insert point LD X2 Load A contact of X2 OUT Y2 Drive Y2 coil

: IRET Interrupt and return

Footnote

The number of interrupt pointer I of ES / EX / SS series:

There are four external interrupts (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2) and (I301, X3).

The number of interrupt pointer I of EP series:

1. There are 6 external interrupt points: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3),

(I401, X4) and (I501, X5). (□＝1 means interrupt in rising-edge, □＝0 means interrupt

in falling-edge)

2. There are two time interrupt points: I6□□, I7□□. (□□＝10~99ms)

3. There are six high-speed counter attained interrupt points: I010 (use with C235,

C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, C252, C254), I020(use with C236), I030 (use

with C237, C242), I040(use with C238), I050(use with C239), I060 (use with C240).

(use with command API 53 DHSCS to produce interrupt signal)

The number of interrupt pointer I of EH series:

1. There are six interrupt points of external interrupt: (I00□, X0), (I10□, X1), (I20□,

X2), (I30□, X3), (I40□, X4), (I50□, X5). (□＝1 means interrupt in rising-edge, □＝0

means interrupt in falling-edge)

2. There are three time interrupt points: I6□□, I7□□, I8□□. (□□＝10~99ms)

3. There are six points of high-speed counter attained interrupt: I010, I020, I030, I040,

I050, I060. (use with API 53 DHSCS command to produce interrupt signal)

4. Pulse wave output interrupts I110, I120 (they are triggered at the end of pulse wave.

I130, I140 (they are triggered at the beginning of first pulse wave).

4 Step Ladder Commands


4.1 Step Ladder Command [STL], [RET]

Common Function Operand Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHSTL Step Transition Ladder Start Command S0~S1023

CommandExplanation

The step ladder command, STL Sn, has constituted the stepping point, and when the

STL command showed up in the program, it implies that the program is now at the step

ladder diagram condition that is controlled by the step procedure. The step ladder

command RET represents the end of the step ladder diagram (from S0~S9) that is to

return to the BUS command. The SFC diagram is represented through the step ladder

diagram composed of STL/RET. The number of step point S can’t be repeated.

Common Function Operand Adaptive model

ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHRET Step Transition Ladder Return Command None

CommandExplanation

At the end of the step procedure, be sure to write in the RET command; the RET

command indicates the end of the step procedure. Maximum is 10 step procedures

(S0~S9) for a PLC program and it should have RET command at the end of each step

procedure.

ProgramExample

Ladder Diagram: M1002

ZRST S0 S127

SET S0

SET S20

Y0

SET S30

Y1

SET S40

Y2

S0

RET

END

X0S0S

S20S

X1

S30S

X2

S40S

X3

SFC:

S0

S20

S30

S40

S0

M1002

X0

X1

X2

X3

Y0

Y1

Y2

4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC)

In automatic control field, it often needs to cooperate with electric control and mechanical control to reach the

goal. SFC can be divided into several serial STEP (i.e. several phases). Each STEP should finish its actions. It

usually has transition to transfer from each step to the next step. That is the design concept of Sequential Function

Chart to have transition to end the action of the previous step and start the action of the next step (the previous step

will be clear at this time).



Features:

1. You don’t need to do SFC design for constant state step. PLC will execute the

action of interlock and double output between each state. It is only needed do

simple SFC design for each state and make machine works.

2. The action is easy to understand and easy to adjust initial PLC start-up, detect

and maintain.

3. SFC edition theory is made by IEC1131-3. It is figure edition mode and the

structure looks like flow chart. Each PLC internal step relay S is used to be step

point and also equal to each step of flow chart. After finishing present step, it

will transfer to the next step, i.e. next step point S, by setting condition. By

repeating this way, it can reach the result that user needs.

4. Explanation of right side SFC figure: each step has its own transition condition

to move from one step to the next step. In this figure, primary step point S0 will

move to step point S21 once this transition condition X0 is established, and

S21 can move to S22 or S24 by transition condition X1 or X2 and S25 will

move to S0 to finish a whole procedure once transition condition X6 is

established. By this way, it can circulate control with repeat again and again.

SFC:

S0

S21

S24

S25

S0

X0

X1

X5

X6

X2S22

X4

X3

S24

It is used for ladder step mode. This figure means internal edition program is a general step ladder diagram not step ladder program.

It is for primary step point. This double-frame is used for SFC primary step point and the usage devices are S0~S9.

It is used for general step point and the usage devices are S10~S1023.

It is JUMP step point that used to move from step point to another which is not next to it. (it can be used to disconnected jump up or jump down in the same program procedure, return to primary step point or jump between different program procedure.

It is the transition condition of step point that used to move between each step point.

It is alternative divergence that used for a step point to move to different corresponding step point by different transition condition.

It is alternative convergence that used for two step points and above to move to the same step point according to transition condition.

It is simultaneous divergence that used for a step point move to two step points and above by the same transition condition.

It is simultaneous convergence that used for two step points and above to move to the same step point with the same transition condition when the condition is established at the same time.

4.3 Step Ladder Command Explanation

STL command: this command is used in the syntax design for the Sequential Function Chart (SFC). This

command helps the program designer to have clearer ideas on the program procedure, and thus the procedure will

be more readable. As shown in the following diagrams, we could switch our procedure diagram from the left

diagram to the right PLC structure diagram.



At the end of the step procedure, be sure to write in the RET command; the RET command indicates the end of

the step procedure. Several step procedures could be written in to the same program, just make sure to write in the

RET command at the end of the step procedure. There is no limitation to the usage of the RET command, and this

command should match up with the usage of the step points (S0~S9).

If the RET command is not written in at the end of the step procedure, this error will be detected by the editing

device.

S0

S21

S22

S23

M1002S0

SET

SET S22

S0

RET

S21S

S22S

SET

S21S0S

S23S

SET S23

M1002 primary pulse

1. Step Ladder Action:

The step ladder is made up of numerous step points; each step point represents one control procedure action,

and each step point needs to execute following three missions:

A. drive output coil

B. specific transition condition

C. designate what step point is to be appointed to take over the control power of the present step point

Example:

SET Y1

Y0

SET S20

Y10

SET S30

S10S

X0

S20S

X1

SET Y1

Y0

SET S20

Y10

SET S30

S10S

X0

S20S

X1

When X0=ON,S20=On,S10=Off.

Explanation:

When S10=ON, Y0 and Y1 are ON. When X0=ON, S20=ON and Y10 is ON, too.

And when S10 is OFF, Y0 will be OFF, but Y1 is ON. (Since Y1 uses the SET command, it will keep in ON status)

2. Step ladder timing: when state contact Sn is On, circuit will be activated and circuit won’t be activated when

state contact Sn is Off. (Above action will be executed after delaying a scan time)

3. The repeated usage of the output coil:



1. Output coils of the same number could be used in different step points.

2. Such as right diagram, there is the same output deviceY0 in the different state. No matter S10 or S20 is On, Y0 will be On.

3. Y0 will be close during the transition from S10 to S20 and output Y0 after S20 is On. Thus in this case, Y0 will be On no matter S10 or S20 is On.

4. For general ladder diagrams, repeated usages of the output coils should be avoided. Output coil number used in step point should be avoided to use after returning to general ladder diagram.

SET Y1

Y0

SET S20

SET S30

S10S

X0

S20S

X1Y0

4. Repeated usage of the timer:

Same as general output points, the timer could be used

repeatedly for different step points. (this is one feature of step

ladder diagram, but for general ladder diagrams, repeated

usages of the output coils should be avoided. Output coil

number used in step point should be avoided to use after

returning to general ladder diagram.)

Note: as right diagram, ES/EX/SS/EP/SA series timer only

used repeatedly in disconnected step point.

S20

S30

S40

X1

X2

TMR T1 K10

TMR T2 K20

TMR T1 K30

5. Transfer of the step point:

SET Sn and OUT Sn commands are both used to start (or to transfer to) another step point, and the occasions to

use these commands could be different: when the controlling power is transferred to another step point, the status of

the original step point S and the action of the output point would all be erased. Due to that numerous step control

procedures could exist at the same program simultaneously (take S0~S9 as the starting and ending points to lead the

step ladder diagram), the transfer of steps could thus be on the same step procedure or could be transferred to

different step procedures. And thus, the transfer commands, SET Sn and OUT Sn, of the step point might vary

somewhat in usage; please refer to the following explanations:

SET Sn Within the same procedure,

it is used to drive up the next

status step point, and after

the status is transferred,

outputs of previous action

status points will be clear.

Y10

SET S12

SET S14

S10S

X0

S12S

X1Y11

When executing ET S12?　status step point moves from S12 to S10 and clear S10 andall outputs (Y10).

OUT Sn Within the same procedure, transfer of the simultaneous convergence point and different procedures

are used to drive up separate step points, and after the status is transferred, outputs of previous action

status points will be clear.



Within the same

procedure, it is used to

return to primary step

point.

Within the same

procedure, it is used for

the step points to jump

up or down between

disconnected step point.

SFC diagram: Ladder diagram:

S0

S21

S24

S25X7

X2

OUT

OUT

S24

S21S

S0S

S23S

X2

S24S

S25S

S0X7

RET

Drive jump step point

return to primary step point

S25 uses OUT to returnto primary step point S0

Using OUT S24

Using OUT S0

At different procedures, it

is used to drive up

separate step points.

SFC figure: ladder diagram:

S0

S21

S23

X2OUT

OUTS1

S41

S43

OUT

S42

S42

S21S

S0S

S1S

X2

S42S

S43S

RET

S23S

RET

Drive separate step point

step procedureinducted by S0

step procedureinducted by S1

Using OUT S42

S0 and S1 two different step proceduresS23 return to primary step pointS0 by using OUT

S43 return to primary step pointS1 by using OUT

6. Notice of Driving Output Points:

As in the following left diagram, after the LD or LDI command is written in the second line of BUS beyond the step

point, output coil can’t be connected from BUS directly. There will be error when compiling. It is needed to modify to

following middle and left diagram to correct diagram.

Y0SS

Y1

Y2

M0

nY0

SS

Y2

Y1

n

M0

Y0SS

Y1

Y2

M0

n

M1000

BUS

modify position

or

normally open contactin RUN mode

7. Usage restrictions for partial commands:

Program of every step point is identical to the general ladder diagram, and every kind of series and parallel

connection circuits or application commands could all be utilized, however, part of the commands are under certain

restrictions, please refer to the following descriptions:



Basic commands that are to be used within the step point

Basic command Step point

LD/LDI/LDP/LDF AND/ANI/ANDP/ANDF

OR/ORI/ORP/ORF INV/OUT/SET/RST

ANB/ORB MPS/MRD/MPP MC/MCR

Primary step point/ General step point Yes Yes No General output Yes Yes No Diverging step point/

Converging step point Step point transfer Yes No No

※ MC/MCR commands are not to be used within the step point.

※ The STL command could not be used in general sub-programs and the interruption service sub-program.

※ Use of the CJ command is not prohibited within the STL command, however, it will complicate the action and

should thus be avoided.

※ MPS/MRD/MPP command position:

Step Ladder Diagram:

Y1SS

M0

Y2

X2

n

X3

X1X0

MPP

MRD

MPS

BUS

LD X0

Command code:

STL Sn LD X0 MPS AND X1 OUT Y1 MRD AND X2 OUT M0 MPP AND X3 OUT Y2

Explanation:

The BUS of step point can’t use

commands MPS / MRD / MPP

directly. It needs to use command

LD or LDI before using

commands MPS / MRD / MPP.

8. Other Notice:

For general, commands (SET S□ or OUT S□) that used to transfer to next state are better to use after finishing

all relative outputs and actions.

In the following figure, they are the same after executing by PLC. If there are many conditions or actions in S10, it

is recommended to execute SET S20 after modifying from left figure to right figure and finishing all relative outputs

and actions. In this way, the procedure is clear and easy to maintain.

SET

Y0S10S

S20S Y2

S20

Y1 SET

Y0S10S

S20S Y2

S20

Y1



It is needed to add RET command after finishing step

ladder program and RET command is also needed to add

after STL as shown in right figure.

S0S20S

RET

X1

S0S20S

RET

X1

4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder Program

1. The step point up front in SFC is called the primary step point, S0~S9. Utilize the primary step point to be the start

of the procedure, and use the RET command as the end to construct a complete procedure.

2. If the STL command is not in use, S could be served as general auxiliary relay.

3. The number for the step point, S, could not be used repeatedly.

4. Categories of procedures:

Single procedure: there is only a procedure in a program (the alternative diverge and converge, the simultaneous

diverge and converge aren’t included)

Complicated single procedure: there is only a procedure in a program and it includes alternative diverge,

alternative converge procedures, Simultaneous diverge and simultaneous converge procedures.

Combination procedure: there are numerous single procedures in a program and maximum is 10 (S0~S9)

procedures.

5. Procedure separation: it is allowed to write in numerous procedures within one step ladder diagram

There are two single procedures S0 and S1 at the right

diagram; procedure of the program is to write in S0 ~S30 first,

and then S1~S43.

Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one

specified step point on other procedures.

Once the condition below S21 at the right diagram is held, it

could jump to the specified S42 step point on the S1 procedure;

this motion is called the separate step point.

S0

S21

S30

OUT

OUTS1

S41

S43

OUT

S42

6. Restrictions on the diverging procedure: (See following examples)

A. Up to 8 diverging step points could be used within a diverging procedure.

B. Up to 16 loops could be used in the combination of plural diverging or simultaneous converging procedures.

C. Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one specified step point on other procedures.

7. Reset of the step point and the output prohibition:

A. Use the ZRST command to Reset a section f step points to be OFF.



B. Use the output Y prohibition of PLC (M1034=ON).

8. Retaining step point:

When PLC encountered power failure, the retaining step point will memorize the ON/OFF status, and go on

with the execution before the power failure after the power is turned back on. S0~S127 are currently the retaining

step points.

9. Special auxiliary relay and special register: refer to chapter 4.6 IST command for detail.

Device Description

M1040 Step transition inhibits. When M1040 is On, all movement of step point are inhibited.

M1041 Step transition start. Flag for IST command.

M1042 Start pulse. Flag for IST command.

M1043 Origin reset completed. Flag for IST command.

M1044 Origin condition. Flag for IST command.

M1045 All outputs clear inhibit. Flag for IST command.

M1046 STL state setting. Once there is a step point On, M1046 is On.

M1047 STL monitor enable

D1040 ON state number 1 of step point S








4.5 Categories of Procedures

A. Single procedure: the basic step action is single procedure control action.

The first step point of step ladder diagram is called primary step point and the number is S0~S9. Those step points

after primary step point are called general step point and the number are S10~S1023. S10~S19 will be used as origin

reset step points once use command IST.

A-1 Single Procedure without Divergence and Convergence

After finishing a procedure, transferring control power of step point to primary step point.



M1002ZRST S0 S127

SET S0

SET S20

Y0

SET S30

Y1

SET S40

Y4

S0

RET

END

X0S0S

S20S

X1

S30S

X2

S60S

X5

Y2

SET S50

S40S

X3

Y3

SET S60

S50S

X4

Step Ladder Diagram

S0

S20

S30

S40

S0

M1002

X0

X1

X2

X5

Y0

Y1

Y2

SFC diagram

S50

X3

Y3

S60

X4

Y4



A-2 JUMP Procedure

1. Transfer control power of step

point to upper certain step

point.

2. Transfer control power of step

point to step point of other

procedure.

S0

S21

S42

S43

OUT

OUT

S0

S21

S41

OUT

OUTS1

S41

S43

OUT

S42

A-3 Reset Procedure

At the right diagram, S50 will Reset itself and end the

procedure when condition is held. S0

S21

S50RST

B. Complicated single procedure: it includes alternative diverge, alternative converge procedures,

Simultaneous diverge and simultaneous converge procedures.

B-1 Structure of simultaneous divergence

The situation that transfers to many states when present condition is held is called structure of simultaneous

divergence as shown in following. When X0=On, S20 will transfer to S21, S22, S23 and S24 at the same time.

Ladder diagram of simultaneous divergence:



X0SET

SET S22

S21S

SET S23

S20

SET S24

SFC diagram of simultaneous divergence:

S20

S21 S22 S23 S24

B-2 Structure of the alternative divergence

The situation that transfers to individual state when individual condition of present state is held is called structure of

alternative divergence as shown in following. S20 will transfer to S30 when X0=On, S20 will transfer to S31 when

X1=On and S20 will transfer to S32 when X2=On.

Ladder diagram of alternative divergence:

X0SET

SET S31

S30S

SET S32

S20

X1

X2

SFC diagram of alternative divergence:

S20

S30 S31 S32

X0 X1 X2

B-3 Structure of the simultaneous convergence

The situation that transfers to next state when continuous states are held at the same time is called simultaneous

convergence.



Ladder diagram of simultaneous convergence: X2

SET S50SS40

SS41

SS42

SFC diagram of simultaneous convergence:

S40

S50

S41 S42

X2

B-4 Structure of the alternative convergence

The following ladder diagram is alternative convergence. That means it will transfer to S60 once one of S30, S40 and

S50 is held.

Ladder diagram of alternative convergence: X0

SET

SET S60

S60S

SET S60

S30

X1

X2

SS40

SS50

SFC diagram of alternative convergence:

S30

S60

S40 S50X0 X1 X2



Example of the alternative divergence and alternative convergence procedures

M1002ZRST S0 S127

SET S1

SET S20

Y0

SET S30

Y1

SET S40

Y2

END

X0S1S

S20S

X1

S30S

X2

S40S

X3

SET S31X4

SET S32X7

SET S50

Y3S31

SX5

SET S41

Y4S41

SX6

SET S50

Y5S32

SX10

SET S42

Y6S42

SX11

SET S50S50

ST1

SET S60

TMR T1 K10

Y7S60

SX12

RET

S1

S1

S20

S30

S40

S1

M1002

X0

X1

X2

X12

Y0

Y1

Y2

S50

X3

S60

T1

Y7

S31

S41

X4

X5

Y3

Y4

X6

TMR T1 K10

S32

S42

X7

X10

Y5

Y6

X11



Example of the simultaneous divergence and simultaneous convergence procedures

M1002ZRST S0 S127

SET S3

SET S20

Y0

SET S30

Y1

SET S40

Y2

END

X0S3S

S20S

X1

S30S

X2

S40S

SET S31

SET S32

Y3S31

SX3

SET S41

Y4S41

S

Y5S32

SX4

SET S42

Y6S42

S

X5SET S50

S50S

T1SET S60

TMR T1 K10

Y7S60

SX6

RET

S3

S40S

S41S

S42S

S3

S20

S30

S40

S3

M1002

X0

X1

X2

X6

Y0

Y1

Y2

S50

X5

S60

T1

Y7

S31

S41

X3

Y3

Y4

TMR T1 K10

S32

S42

X4

Y5

Y6



Example of the simultaneous divergence and alternative convergence procedures

S127

K10

M1002ZRST S0

SET S4

SET S20

Y0

SET S30

Y1

SET S40

Y2

END

X0S4S

S20S

X1

S30S

X2

S40S

X3

SET S31

SET S32

SET S50

Y3S31

SX4

SET S41

Y4S41

SX5

SET S50

Y5S32

SX6

SET S42

Y6S42

SX7

SET S50S50

ST1

SET S60

TMR T1

Y7S60

SX6

RET

S4

S4

S20

S30

S40

S4

M1002

X0

X1

X2

Y0

Y1

Y2

S50

X3

S60

T1

Y7

S31

S41

X4

Y3

Y4

TMR T1 K10

S32

S42

X6

Y5

Y6X5 X7



Combination example 1: (includes the alternative divergence and convergence, the simultaneous divergence

and convergence)

S127M1002

ZRST S0

SET S0

Y1

SET S30

Y2

SET S40

Y3

SX1

S30S

X4

S31S

X5

SET S31

SET S32

SET S40

Y5S40

SX7

SET S50

Y7S50

SX11

SET S60

Y13S60

S

SET S51

X2

X3

S20

Y0

SET S20

SX0

S0

END

Y10S51

SX12

SET S61S61

SX15

SET S70

Y14

Y17S70

SX17

RET

S0

S60S

S61S

Y4S32

SX6

SET S41

Y6S41

SX10

SET S52

SET S53

Y12S63

SX14

SET S63

Y15S62

S

Y16S63

SX16

S0S62

SS63

S

Y11S52

SX13

SET S62

S0

S20

S30

S40

S0

M1002

X0

X1

X4

X17

Y1

Y2

Y5

S50

X7

S70 Y17

S51

S61

X12

Y10

Y14

S52

S62

X13

Y11

Y15

X11

X15

S60 Y13

Y0

Y7

S31 Y3

X5

X2

S32 Y4

X6

X3

S41 Y6

X10

X16

S53

S63

Y12

Y16

X14

S0



Combination example 2: (includes the alternative divergence and convergence, the simultaneous divergence

and convergence)

S127M1002

ZRST S0

SET S0

SET S30

Y0

SET S31

Y1

SET S33

Y2

END

X0S0S

S30S

X1

S31S

X2

S32S

X3

SET S32

SET S33

Y3S33

SX4

SET S34

Y4S34

SX5

SET S35

Y6S36

SX6

SET S37

Y7S37

S

S0S35

S

RET

X1

SET S36

Y5S35

S

X7S37S

S0

S30

S31

S33

M1002

X0

X1

X2

Y0

Y1

Y3

S34

X4

S36

S37

X6

Y6

Y7

X5

S35 Y5

Y4

S32 Y2

X3

X1

S0

X7

Restrictions on the divergence procedure:

1. Up to 8 divergence step points could be used in a divergence procedure. In following diagram, maximum

divergence step points after step point S20 are 8 (S30 - S37).

2. Up to 16 loops could be used in the combination of plural divergence or simultaneous convergence procedures. In

following diagram, 4 step points after step point S40, 7 step points after step point S41 and 5 step points after step

point S42. In this procedure, maximum is 16 loops. 3. Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one specified step point on other procedures.

Y26S60X26

X41

S0

S20

S30

S40

S0

M1002

X0

X1

X11

X51

Y0

Y1

Y11

S50

X20

S80 Y41

S51

S71

X33

Y15

Y33

S53

S73

X35

Y17

Y35

X32

X44

S70 Y32

Y14

S31 Y2

X12

X2

S32 Y4

X15

X4

S41 Y12

X21

X52

S54 Y20

S0SET

S32 Y3

X14

X3

S52

S72

X34

Y16

Y34

S0SETX13

S20OUT

S20OUT

S81

X45

Y42

SET

S34 Y5

X15

X5

S35

X15

X6

S55

S74

X36

X22

X46

Y27S61X27

X42

Y30S62X30

Y31S63X31

Y40S76X43

X50

Y6 S36

X16

X7

Y7

Y21

Y36

S56 Y22 S57 Y23 S20

X23OUT

RST

S36

Y10

Y13

Y25

Y37

S58

X37

X24

Y24

RST

S58

S37

S42

S59

S75

X40

X47

X10

X17

X25

SETS0 OUT

S42



4.6 IST command

API Applicable models ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH60

IST Manual/Auto Control

Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F

S D1 D2 Note: Operand S will occupy 8 continuous devices.

The usage range of operand D1 and D2 is S20~S899 and D2＞D1. IST command only can be used one time in program. Refer to each model specification for usage range.

16-bit command (7 STEPS)

IST Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1040~M1047.

Refer to following for detail.

CommandExplanation

: The starting input number of specific operation mode. : The smallest

number for the specific status step point under the auto mode. : The greatest number for the specific status step point under the auto mode.

The IST is a convenient command made specifically for the initial state of the step

ladder control procedure to accommodate the special auxiliary relay to the convenient

auto control command.

M1000IST X10 S20 S60

X10: Individual operation (Manual operation)

X11: Zero point return X12: Step operation X13: One cycle operation

X14: Continuous operation X15: Zero point return start switchX16: Start switch X17: Stop switch

When the IST command is executed, the following special auxiliary relay will switch

automatically.

M1040: Movement inhibited M1041: Movement start M1042: Status pulse M1047: STL monitor enable

S0: Manual operation/initial state step point S1: Zero point return/initial state step point S2: Auto operation/initial state step point

ProgramExample

1

When IST command is used, S10~S19 are for zero point return operation and the step

point of this state can’t be used as general step point. However, when using S0~S9 step

points, S0 initiates “manual operation”, S1 initiates “zero point return operation” and S2

initiates “auto operation”. Thus, there should be three circuits of these three initial state

step points first written in program.

When switching to S1 (zero point return mode), zero point return won’t have any actions

once one of S10~S19 is On.

When switching to S2 (auto operation mode), auto operation won’t have any actions

once one of between to is On or M1043=On



ProgramExample

2

Example: the Robot arm control (use IST command):

Motion request: In the example, two kinds of balls (big and small) are separated and

moved to different boxes. Distribute the control panel for the control.

Motion of the Robot arm: lower robot arm, collect balls, raise robot arm, shift to right,

lower robot arm, release balls, raise robot arm, shift to left to finish motion in order.

I/O Device:

Y0

Y1Y2Y3

Left-limit X1

Upper-limit X4

Upper-limit X5

Right-limit X2(big balls)

Right-limit X3(small balls)

Big SmallBig/smallsensor X0

Control panel

X15 X16

X17

X20

X21

X22

X23

X24

X25

Step X12

One cycleoperation X13

Continuousoperation X14

Manualoperation X10

Zero return X11

Power start

Power stop

Zero return Auto start

Auto stop

Shiftto right

Shiftto left

Releaseballs

Collectballs

Lowerrobot arm

Raiserobot arm

Big/small sensor X0.

The left-limit of the robot arm X1, the right-limit X2 (big balls), the right-limit X3

(small balls), the upper-limit X4, and the lower-limit X5.

Raise robot arm Y0, lower robot arm Y1, shift to right Y2, shift to left Y3, and

collect balls Y4.

START circuit:

M1000IST X10 S20 S80

X0M1044

X1 Y4



Manual operation mode:

X20SET

RST Y4

Y4SS0

X21

X22 Y1Y0

X23 Y0Y1

X24 X4Y2

Y3

X25 X4Y3

Y2

Collect balls

Release balls

Lower robot arm

Raise robot armCondition interlock

Shift to right

Shift to left

Condition interlockRaise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)

Zero point return mode:

SFC figure:

S1

S10

X15

S11

X4

S12

X1

RST Y4

RST Y1

Y0

RST Y2

Y3

SET M1043

RST S12

Release balls

Stop lowering robot arm

Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)

Stop shifting to right

Shift to left and shift tothe left-limit (X1 is On)

Start zero return completed flag

Zero return operation completed



Ladder Diagram: X15

SET S10SS1

RST Y4SS10

RST Y1

Y0X4

SET S11

RST Y2SS11

Y3X1

SET S12

SET M1043SS12

RST S12

Enter zero return operation mode

Release balls







Auto operation (step/one-cycle/continuous operation modes):

SFC figure:

S2

S20

S30

S31

M1044

X5

T0

Y1

SET

Y0

S32

X4

X2

S50 Y1

Y2

S2

X1

M1041

X0Y4

TMR T0 K30

S60 RSTX5

Y4

TMR T2 K30

S70

T2

Y0

S80

X4

Y3X1

S40

S41

X5

T1

SET

Y0

S42

X4

X3

Y2

X0Y4

TMR T1 K30

X3X2



Ladder Diagram:

SET S20

SET S30

SET Y4

Y0

END

X5

S31S

X4

TMR T0

SET S32

S2S

M1041 M1044

S20S

S30S

Y1X0

SET S40X5 X0

SET S31T0

K30

Y2S32

SX2

SET S50

X2

SET Y4

TMR T1

S40S

SET S41T1

K30

Y0S41

SX4

SET S42

Y2S42

SX3

SET S50

X3

Y1S50

SX5

SET S60

RST Y4

TMR T2

S60S

SET S70T2

K30

Y0S70

SX4

SET S80

Y3S80

SX1

X1

RET

S2

Enter auto operation mode

Collect balls

Release balls

Lower robot arm

Shift to right



Collect balls


Shift to right

Lower robot arm


5 Application Commands


5.1 Summary of Parameters

Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification AP I

16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function

ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage

00 CJ – Conditional jump 3 – 6-1 01 CALL – Call subroutine 3 – 6-5 02 SRET – – Subroutine return 1 – 6-5 03 IRET – – Interrupt return 1 – 6-7 04 EI – – Enable interrupts 1 – 6-7 05 DI – – Disable interrupts 1 – 6-7 06 FEND – – First end 1 – 6-1107 WDT – Watchdog timer refresh 1 – 6-1208 FOR – – Start of FOR-NEXT loop 3 – 6-14

Loop

Con

trol

09 NEXT – – End of FOR-NEXT loop 1 – 6-1410 CMP DCMP Compare 7 13 6-1711 ZCP DZCP Zone compare 9 17 6-1812 MOV DMOV Data Move 5 9 6-1913 SMOV – Shift move – 11 – 6-2014 CML DCML Compliment 5 9 6-2215 BMOV – Block move 7 – 6-2316 FMOV DFMOV Fill move 7 13 6-2417 XCH DXCH Data exchange 5 9 6-2518 BCD DBCD Convert BIN data into BCD 5 9 6-26

Tran

smis

sion

C

ompa

rison

19 BIN DBIN Convert BCD data into BIN 5 9 6-2720 ADD DADD Perform the addition of BIN data 7 13 6-29

21 SUB DSUB Perform the subtraction of BIN data 7 13 6-30

22 MUL DMUL Perform the multiplication of BIN data 7 13 6-31

23 DIV DDIV Perform the division of BIN data 7 13 6-3224 INC DINC Perform the addition of 1 3 5 6-3425 DEC DDEC Perform the subtraction of 1 3 5 6-34

26 WAND DAND Perform the logical product (AND) operation 7 13 6-35

27 WOR DOR Perform the logical sum (OR) operation 7 13 6-36

28 WXOR DXOR Perform the exclusive logical add (XOR) operation 7 13 6-37Fo

ur F

unda

men

tal O

pera

tions

of

Arith

met

ic

29 NEG DNEG Negation 3 5 6-3830 ROR DROR Rotate to the right 5 9 6-4131 ROL DROL Rotate to the left 5 9 6-42

32 RCR DRCR Rotate to the right with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-43

33 RCL DRCL Rotate to the left with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-44

34 SFTR – Shift the data of device specified to the right 9 – 6-45

35 SFTL – Shift the data of device specified to the left – 9 – 6-46

36 WSFR – Shift the register to the right – 9 – 6-4737 WSFL – Shift the register to the left – 9 – 6-4838 SFWR – Shift register write – 7 – 6-49

Rot

atio

n an

d D

ispl

acem

ent

39 SFRD – Shift register read – 7 – 6-50

40 ZRST – Resets a range of device specified 5 – 6-51

41 DECO – 8 → 256 bits decoder 7 – 6-53




16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


42 ENCO – 256 → 8 bits encoder 7 – 6-5443 SUM DSUM Sum of ON bits 5 9 6-5644 BON DBON Check specified bit status 7 13 6-5645 MEAN DMEAN Mean value 7 13 6-5746 ANS – – Alarm device output – 7 – 6-5847 ANR – Alarm device reset – 1 – 6-5848 SQR DSQR Square root of BIN 5 9 6-60D

ata

Ope

ratio

n

49 FLT DFLT Convert BIN integer to binary floating point 5 9 6-61

50 REF – I/O refresh 5 – 7-1

51 REFF – Refresh and adjust the response time of input filter – 3 – 7-2

52 MTR – – Input matrix – 9 – 7-3

53 – DHSCS – High speed counter comparison SET – 13 7-6

54 – DHSCR – High speed counter comparison RESET – 13 7-15

55 – DHSZ – Zone comparison (High-speed counter) – – 17 7-17

56 SPD – – Speed detection – 7 – 7-2457 PLSY DPLSY – Pulse output 7 13 7-2558 PWM – – Pulse width modulation output 7 – 7-30

Hig

h Sp

eed

Proc

essi

ng

59 PLSR DPLSR – Pulse wave output with acceleration/deceleration speed 9 17 7-31

60 IST – – Manual/Auto control 7 – 7-3661 SER DSER Search a data stack – 9 17 7-4262 ABSD DABSD – Absolute drum sequencer – 9 17 7-4363 INCD – – Increment drum sequencer – 9 – 7-4464 TTMR – – Teaching timer – 5 – 7-4665 STMR – – Special timer – 7 – 7-4866 ALT – – On/Off alternate command 3 – 7-4967 RAMP – – Ramp signal – 9 – 7-50

Con

veni

ence

Com

man

d

69 SORT – – Data sort – 11 – 7-5270 TKY DTKY – 10-key keypad input – 7 13 7-5471 HKY DHKY – 16-key keypad input – 9 17 7-5672 DSW – – Digital Switch input – 9 – 7-5873 SEGD – Decode the 7-step display panel 5 – 7-6074 SEGL – – 7-step display scan output 7 – 7-6175 ARWS – – Arrow keypad input – 9 – 7-6576 ASC – – ASCII code conversion – 11 – 7-6677 PR – – Print – 5 – 7-6778 FROM DFROM Read special module CR data 9 17 7-69

Exte

rnal

I/O

Dis

play

79 TO DTO Special module CR data write in 9 17 7-6980 RS – – Serial data communication 9 – 7-74

81 PRUN DPRUN Octal number system transmission – 5 9 7-87

82 ASCII – Convert HEX to ASCII 7 – 7-8883 HEX – Convert ASCII to HEX 7 – 7-9284 CCD – Check code – 7 – 7-9585 VRRD – Potentiometer read – 5 – 7-97

Seria

l I/O

86 VRSC – Potentiometer scale – 5 – 7-9987 ABS DABS Absolute value 3 5 7-100

88 PID DPID – PID calculation 9 – 7-100




16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


89 PLS – – Rising-edge output 3 – 3-1390 LDP – – Rising-edge detection operation 3 – 3-1191 LDF – – Falling-edge detection operation 3 – 3-11

92 ANDP – – Series connection command for the rising-edge detection operation

3 – 3-11

93 ANDF – – Series connection command for the falling-edge detection operation

3 – 3-12

94 ORP – – Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection operation

3 – 3-12

95 ORF – – Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection operation

3 – 3-13

96 TMR – – Timer 4 – 3-8 97 CNT DCNT – Counter 4 6 3-8 98 INV – – Inverting operation 1 – 3-15

Basi

c C

omm

and

99 PLF – – Falling-edge output 3 – 3-13100 MODRD – – MODBUS data Read 7 – 8-1 101 MODWR – – MODBUS data write in 7 – 8-5

102 FWD – – VFD-A series drive forward command 7 – 8-8

103 REV – – VFD-A series drive reverse command 7 – 8-9

104 STOP – – VFD-A series drive stop command 7 – 8-9

105 RDST – – VFD-A series drive status read 5 – 8-11

106 RSTEF – – VFD-A series drive abnormal reset 5 – 8-13

107 LRC – LRC error check – 7 – 8-13Com

mun

icat

ion

com

man

d of

D

elta

AC

Mot

or D

rives

108 CRC – CRC error check – 7 – 8-15

109 SWRD – Digital switch read – 3 – 8-18110 – DECMP Binary floating point comparison – 13 8-19

111 – DEZCP Binary floating point zone comparison – 17 8-20

116 – DRAD Degree Radian – – 9 8-21117 – DDEG Radian Degree – – 9 8-21

118 – DEBCD Convert binary floating point to decimal floating point – 9 8-23

119 – DEBIN Convert decimal floating point to binary floating point – 9 8-23

120 – DEADD Binary floating point addition – 13 8-24121 – DESUB Binary floating point subtraction – 13 8-25

122 – DEMUL Binary floating point multiplication – 13 8-26

123 – DEDIV Binary floating point division – 13 8-27

124 – DEXP Perform exponent operation of binary floating point – 9 8-28

Floa

ting

Ope

ratio

n

125 – DLN Perform natural logarithm operation of binary floating point – 9 8-29

126 – DLOG Perform logarithm operation of binary floating point – 13 8-30

127 – DESQR Square root of binary floating point – 9 8-31




16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


128 – DPOW Perform power operation of binary floating point – 13 8-32

129 INT DINT Convert binary floating point to BIN integer 5 9 8-33

130 – DSIN Sine operation of binary floating point – 9 8-34

131 – DCOS Cosine operation of binary floating point – 9 8-36

132 – DTAN Tangent operation of binary floating point – 9 8-37

133 – DASIN Arcsine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-39

134 – DACOS Arccosine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-40

135 – DATAN Arctangent operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-41

136 – DSINH Hyperbolic sine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-42

137 – DCOSH Hyperbolic cosine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-42

Floa

ting

Ope

ratio

n

138 – DTANH Hyperbolic tangent operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-43

144 GPWM – – General pulse width modulation output – – 7 8-44

145 FTC – – Fuzzy temperature control – – 9 8-45147 SWAP DSWAP Swap high/low byte 3 5 8-48148 MEMR DMEMR Data backup MEMORY read – 7 13 8-49149 MEMW DMEMW Data backup MEMORY write in – 7 13 8-50150 MODRW – – MODBUS data read/write in 11 – 9-1 151 PWD – – Input pulse width detection – – 5 – 9-11

152 RTMU – – Start to measure the execution time of I interrupt – – 5 – 9-11Ad

ditio

nal C

omm

and

153 RTMD – – End to measure the execution time of I interrupt – – 3 – 9-12

154 RAND – – Random value – 9 – 9-13155 ABSR DABSR – ABS current value read – – 7 13 9-14156 ZRN DZRN – Zero point return – – 9 17 9-18157 PLSV DPLSV – Variable speed pulse output – – 7 13 9-21158 DRVI DDRVI – Drive to increment – – 9 17 9-22Po

sitio

ning

C

ontro

l

159 DRVA DDRVA – Drive to absolute – – 9 17 9-26160 TCMP – Time compare – 11 – 9-35161 TZCP – Time zone compare – 9 – 9-36162 TADD – Time addition – 7 – 9-37163 TSUB – Time subtraction – 7 – 9-38166 TRD – Time data read – 3 – 9-40167 TWR – Time data write in – 3 – 9-42

Perp

etua

l C

alen

dar

169 HOUR DHOUR – Hour meter – 7 13 9-44170 GRY DGRY Convert BIN to Gray code – 5 9 9-44

Gra

y C

ode

171 GBIN DGBIN Convert Gray code to BIN – 5 9 9-45180 MAND – Matrix AND – – 9 – 9-47181 MOR – Matrix OR – – 9 – 9-49182 MXOR – Matrix XOR – – 9 – 9-50183 MNOR – Matrix NOR – – 9 – 9-51

184 MINV – Matrix inverse – – 7 – 9-52




16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


185 MCMP – Matrix compare – – 9 – 9-52186 MBRD – Matrix bit read – – 7 – 9-54187 MBWR – Matrix bit write – – 7 – 9-55188 MBS – Matrix bit shift – – 7 – 9-56189 MBR – Matrix bit rotate – – 7 – 9-58

Mat

rix H

andl

ing

190 MBC – Matrix bit state count – – 7 – 9-59196 HST DHST High speed counter – – 3 – 9-60

197 PLST DPLST – Multi-frequency variable pulse output – – 9 9 6-8

198 PLSK DPLSK – Multi-frequency fixed pulse output – – 9 9 6-9

Hig

h-le

vel

Com

man

d

199 PLSA DPLSA – Multi-step pulse slope output – – 11 11 6-10

215 LD& DLD& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-1

216 LD| DLD| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-1

217 LD^ DLD^ – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-1

218 AND& DAND& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-2

219 AND| DAND| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-2

220 AND^ DAND^ – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-2

221 OR& DOR& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-3

222 OR| DOR| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-3

Con

tact

Typ

e Lo

gic

Ope

ratio

n

223 OR^ DOR^ – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-3

224 LD= DLD= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-4

225 LD> DLD> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-4

226 LD< DLD< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-4

228 LD<> DLD<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-4

229 LD<= DLD<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-4

230 LD>= DLD>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-4

232 AND= DAND= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-5

233 AND> DAND> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-5

234 AND< DAND< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-5

236 AND<> DAND<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-5

237 AND<= DAND<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-5

238 AND>= DAND>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-5

Con

tact

Typ

e C

ompa

re C

omm

and

240 OR= DOR= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-6




16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


241 OR> DOR> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-6

242 OR< DOR< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-6

244 OR<> DOR<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-6

245 OR<= DOR<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-6

246 OR>= DOR>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-6

Note 1: Applicable models ES series above includes EX and SS series; EP includes SA series.

Note 2: Above commands for ES/EX/SS models don’t possess pulse execution command (P command).



5.2 Application Command Structure

Many commands may be divided into an command and a operand as follows:

Command : Indicates the executive functions of the command

Operand : Indicates the device that calculates the operand

A command usually allows one step to be used and an operand usually allows two or four steps to be used based on the command is a 16-bit or 32-bit command.

Explanation of the format of application command:

41 PDECO 8 to 256 bit EncoderAPI

ES/EX/SS EP EH

SDn

X Y M S K H T C D E F

1

9

11

S D n

151413

12

2 3 4 5 6 7

8

10

Applicable models

Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEPS)

DECO Continuousexecution DECOP Pulse

execution

32-bit command

Flag: NoneNote: When D is a bit device, n=1~8 When D is a word device, n=1~4 Please refer the general specifications of each seriesmodels to see the usage range of each device.

API number for application command Upper row indicates 16-bit command. If the border of the row is dotted line, it means it is not available

in 16-bit command. Lower row indicates 32-bit command. If the border of the row is dotted line, it means it is not available

in 32-bit command. A “D“ is added to the head of the mnemonic code to indicate 32-bit command. (For example: API 12 DMOV)

The mnemonic code of application command A symbol “☺” in the upper row indicates the command is generally applied by using pulse

execution command. A “P“ in the lower row indicates the command is used with the pulse execution command. (For

example: API 12 MOVP) The operand format of application command The description of application command function Applicable models of DVP series PLC The step numbers occupied by the command in 16-bit operation, the name of continuous execution

command and pulse executive command The step numbers occupied by the command in 32-bit operation, the name of continuous execution

command and pulse execution command The related flag of the application command A symbol “＊” is the device can use index register.

Note A symbol “＊” is given to device which can be used for this operand

Device name Device type



Application Commands Input

Some application commands are only combined by command codes API, but most of them are combined by

command codes API and several operands.

The application commands of DVP-Series PLC are controlled by command codes API 00 to API 246. Each

command code has its own meaning, for example, API 12 stands for MOV (move data). When using ladder

diagram editor to input programs, you will need to type in the command “MOV”. If using the HPP to input the

program, we will have to enter the API command codes. Each application command has its unique operand.

X0MOV K10 D10

command operand

This command is to move the value of operand to the appointed operand.

Source operand: if there is more than 1 source operand, then we use , … to display.

Destination operand: if there is more than one operand, then we use , …. to display.

If the operand may only be represented as a constant K, H or register then we will use , , , , , to display.

The Length of Operand (16-bit or 32-bit command)

The length of operand can be divided into two groups: 16-bit and 32-bit to process different length data.

A ”D” before a command separates 32-bit from 16-bit commands.

16-bit MOV command

X0

MOV K10 D10

When X0=On, K10 has been sent to D10.

32-bit DMOV command

X1

D10 D20

When X1=On, Data of (D11, D10) have been

sent to (D21, D20)

Continuous execution command and Pulse execution command

The execution type of command can be divided into two types: continuous execution command and pulse

execution command. Due to the execution time is shorter when the commands have not been executived,

please use the pulse execution command as far as possible to reduce the scan cycle of programming. A “P” to

be added directly after the command, which is pulse execution commands. Most used commands usually



use pulse execution commands for application, for example, INC, DEC and MOV etc. related commands.

Therefore, pulse execution commands are identified by the symbol ☺ on the right top of the command.

Pulse execution command

X0

D10 D12

When X0 goes from OFF→ON, the MOVP command

will be executed one time and command cannot be

re-executed again in the scan of program scan. This

is called pulse execution command.

Continuous execution command

X1

MOV D10 D12

When X1=ON, the MOV command can be

re-executed again in every scan of program. This is

called continuous execution command.

The above figures show that when X0, X1=OFF, the command will not be executed and the contents of

the destination operand “D” will retmain unchanged.

The Assigned Devices of Operands

1. Bit device such as X, Y, M, S can be combined together and are defined as the WORD device. In

application commands, the bit device can serve as the word device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS) to store the

numeric values to operate.

2. Data register D, Timer T, Counter C and Index Register E, F are all assigned devices of operands.

3. A data register is usually a 16-bit register and it is also a register D. Hence, assigning a 32-bit register also

means assigning two register D with continuous numbers.

4. If the operand of 32-bit command assign D0, the 32-bit data register which is combined by D1 and D0 will

be occupied. D1 is the upper 16-bit and D0 is the lower 16-bit. The using rule of timer T and 16-bit

Counter(C0~C199) is the same.

5. When the 32-bit counter(C200~C255) is used as Data register, one point indicates 32-bit length. Only the

operand of 32-bit command can be assigned, the operand of 16-bit command can not be assigned.

Operand Data format

1. X, Y, M, S are only be single point ON/OFF, these are defined as a bit device.

2. However, 16-bit (or 32-bit) device T, C, D, E, F are data registers and are defined as Word device.

3. We also can add Kn in front of X, Y, M and S to be defined as word device, whereas n=1 means 4-bit. So

16-bit can be described from K1 to K4, and 32-bit can be described from K1 to K8. For example, K2M0

means there are 8-bit from M0 to M7.



X0MOV K2M0 D10

When X0=On, move the contents of M0 to M7 to D10

segments 0 to 7, and segments 8 to 15 are set to 0.

Specified Number of Digits

16-bit command 32-bit command

Specified Number of Digits (16-bit command):

K-32,768~K+32,767

Specified Number of Digits (32-bit command):

K-2,147,483,648~K+2,147,483,647

16-bit command: (K1~K4) 32-bit command: (K1~K8)

K1 (4 points) 0~15 K1 (4 points) 0~15

K2 (8 points) 0~255 K2 (8 points) 0~255

K3 (12 points) 0~4,095 K3 (12 points) 0~4,095

K4 (16 points) -32,768~+32,767 K4 (16 points) 0~65,535

K5 (20 points) 0~1,048,575

K6 (24 points) 0~167,772,165

K7 (28 points) 0~268,435,455

K8 (32 points) -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647

Flags

1. General Flags

For the operation result of application commands, there are following flags of DVP series PLC:

Example : M1020 : Zero flag M1022 : Carry flag M1021 : Borrow flag

M1029 : Command execution completed flag

When executing the command, all flags will be turned to ON or OFF by the operation result of

application commands. However, when the command has not been executed, the ON/OFF state of

the flags will remain. Therefore, please notice that the above flags may not only be in connection with

specified commands but also many commands.

The program example of command execution completed flag , i.e. M1029

When the conditional contact is ON, the digital switch input command (DSW) will specify 4 output

points with 0.1 second frequency and circulate in order automatically to read the values of DSW.

During the intermediate period of operation, if the conditional contact is OFF, the DSW command is

suspended and the above-mentioned command will be re-executed from the beginning of the

program cycle.When the conditional contact is ON again, please refer the circuit below if you desire

to stop the interrupt.



X0SET M0

M0DSW X10 Y10 D0 K0

RST M0M1029

When X0=ON, DSW command is activated.

When X0=OFF, wait for the program cycle of DSW command being completed, after M1029=ON, then M0 will be OFF.

2. Error Operation Flags

If the combination of the application command is error and/or the assigned devices of operands are out of

range, errors will occur and the error flags and numbers in the following table will be shown during the

excution of the application commands.

M1067

D1067

D1069

When error operations occur, M1067=On, D1067 will show the error number and D1069 will

show the error address.

If other errors occur, the contents of D1067 and D1069 will be refreshed. (when the error is

resetd, M1067=Off)

M1068

D1068

When error operations occur, M1068=On, D1068 will show the error address.

If other errors occur, the contents of D1068 will not be refreshed, M1068 must use RST

command to reset to OFF, otherwise the error will remain.

3. Flags for Extending Functions

Some application commands can extend the functions by using some special flags.

Example: command RS can switch transmission mode 8-bit and 16-bit by using M1161.

The Limited Using Times for Executing Commands:

Some commands can be used several times in the program, but some of them only can be used twice or even

once in the program. However, these commands can be modified by index register to extend more functions of

the commands in the operands.

1. Only can be used once in the program:

API 58 (PWM) (ES/EX/SS models) API 60 (IST) (ES/EX/SS/EP/SA/EH models) API 74 (SEGL) (ES/EX/SS models) API 88 (PID) (ES/EX/SS/EP/SA models)

2. Only can be used twice in the program:

API 57 (PLSY) (ES/EX/SS models) API 59 (PLSR) (ES/EX/SS models) API 74 (SEGL) (EH models) API 77 (PR) (EP/SA/EH models)

3. Only can be used four times in the program:

API 169 (HOUR) (EP/SA models)

4. Only can be used eight times in the program:

API 64 (TTMR) (EP/SA models)



5. API 53 (DHSCS) and API 54 (DHSCR), these commands only can be executed simultaneously less than four

times in the program of DVP-ES/EX/SS models.

6. API 53 (DHSCS), API 54 (DHSCR), API 55(DHSZ) these commands only can be executed simultaneously

less than six times in the program of DVP-EP/SA models.

The Limited Using Times for Executing Commands Simultaneously:

There is no limited using time for executing the same command in the program. However, there are limited

using times for executing the commands simultaneously. 1. API 52 (MTR), API 56 (SPD), API 62 (ABSD), API 63 (INCD), API 69 (SORT), API 70 (TKY), API 71

(HKY), API 72 (DSW) (EP models), API 74 (SEGL)(EP models), API 75 (ARWS), API 80 (RS), API 100

(MODRD), API 101 (MODWR), API 102 (FWD), API 103 (REV), API 104 (STOP), API 105 (RDST), API

106 (RSTEF), API 150 (MODRW), API 151 (PWD), these commands only can be executed simultaneously

once in the program.

2. API 57 (PLSY), API 58 (PWM), API 59 (PLSR), API 72 (DSW) (EH models), these commands only can be

executed simultaneously twice in the program.

3. API 169 (HOUR) (EH models) only can be executed four times in the program.

4. API 64 (TTMR) (EH models) only can be executed eight times in the program.

5. In the program of DVP EH models, there is no limited using time for hardware high speed counter related

commands, like DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ. However, there are limited using times for executing the

commands simultaneously. DHSCS, DHSCR command will use one memory unit and DHSZ command will

use two memory units. When these commands are executed simultaneously, the total used memory units

can not exceed eight memory units. If exceeding eight memory units, system will totalize the used memory

units of the commands which have been scanned and executed first, the others will be ignored.

5.3 Handling of Numeric Values

Device such as X, Y, M, S are bit devices and there are only two state, ON and OFF. However, T, C, D, E,

F are data registers and are defined as word devices. Although bit device can only be single point

ON/OFF but it can be used as numeric value in the operands of application commands if adding the

specified bit device in front. The “specified bit device” is the “specified number of digit” and it would look

like Kn where “n” can be a number from the range of 0 to 8.

16-bit can be described from K1 to K4, and 32-bit can be described from K1 to K8. For example, K2M0

means there are 8-bit from M0 to M7.



M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M0M1

transmit

equal to

clear to 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0000 1 1 1 1

11111111

D1

low byte

low byteD1 1111 000000000000

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b0b1

00000000

valid data

Transmit K1M0, K2M0, K3M0 to 16-bit registers and insufficient upper bit data have not been transmitted.

It’s the same as sending K1M0, K2M0, K3M0, K4M0, K5M0, K6M0, K7M0 to 32-bit registers and the

insufficient upper bit data have not been transmitted also.

The insufficient upper bit will be defined as 0 if the content of the operand assign K1 to K3 in 16-bit

operation or assign K4 to K7 in 32-bit operation. Therefore, it means the operation result is positive.

M0

BIN K2X4 D0 The BCD value combined by X4 to X13 will be converted to

D0 as BIN value.

The numbers of Bit device can specify freely. However, it is recommended to use 0 in the lowest digit

decimal place of X and Y devices (X0, X10, X20…Y0, Y10, Y20). For M and S Series, it is recommended

to use the multiple 8 but the use of 0 is the most device efficient, like M0, M10, M20…etc.

Assign Continuous Numbers

For example , like D date register, the continuous numbers of D are D0, D1, D2, D3, D4…etc.

For the bit device, the continuous numbers are shown as follows:

K1X0 K1X4 K1X10 K1X14……

K2Y0 K2Y10 K2Y20 Y2X30……

K3M0 K3M12 K3M24 K3M36…….

K4S0 K4S16 K4S32 K4S48…….

The bit device numbers are all of the above. To avoiding errors, please do not skip over the continuous

numbers. Furthermore, if K4Y0 is used in 32-bit operation, the upper 16bit is defined as 0. Therefore, it is

recommended to use K8Y0 in 32bit operation.

Floating Point Operation

The internal operation of DVP series PLC usually is operated by “BIN integer” format. When performing integer

division operation, the decimal point will be discarded. For example: 40 ÷ 3 = 13, remainder is 1 and the

decimal point will be discarded. But if use floating point operation, the decimal point can be given.



The application commands related to floating point operation are shown in the following table.

API 49 (FLT), API 110 (D ECMP), API 111 (D EZCP), API 116 (D RAD),

API 117 (D DEG), API 118 (D EBCD), API 119 (D EBIN), API 120 (D EADD),

API 121 (D ESUB), API 122 (D EMUL), API 123 (D EDIV), API 124 (D EXP),

API 125 (D LN), API 126 (D LOG), API 127 (D ESQR), API 128 (D POW)

API 129 (INT) API 130 (D SIN) API 131 (D COS) API 132 (D TAN)

API 133 (D ASIN) API 134 (D ACOS) API 135 (D ATAN) API 136 (D SINH)

API 137 (D COSH) API 138 (D TANH)

Binary Floating Point

DVP PLC represents floating point number with 32-bit number by IEEE754 and the format is in the following:

S exponent mantissa

8-bit 23-bit

b31 b0

Sign bit0: positive1: negative

Equation ( ) 127;.121 =××− − BMBES

Therefore, the range of 32-bit floating is from ±2-126 to ±2+128, i.e. from ±1.1755×10-38 to ±3.4028×10+38.

Example 1: using 32-bit floating point to represent decimal number 23

Step 1: convert 23 to binary number: 23.0=10111

Step 2: Normalizing the binary: 10111=1.0111 × 24, 0111 is mantissa and 4 is an exponent.

Step 3: get exponent: E∵ -B=4 →E-127=4 E=131=10000011∴ 2

Step 4: We can now combine the sign, exponent, and normalized mantissa into the binary IEEE short real

representation.

0 10000011 011100000000000000000002=41B8000016

Example 2: using 32-bit floating point to represent decimal number –23

The conversion steps are the same as decimal number 23. Only need to modify sign bit from 0 to 1 to get value

1 10000011 011100000000000000000002=C1B8000016

DVP PLC also uses two registers with continuous number to store binary floating point. The following is the example

that uses register (D1, D0) to store binary floating point.

S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0

b0b1b2b3b4b5b6b20b21b22b23b24b28b29b30b31

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 27 6 5 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 -22 -23

D1(b15~b0) D0(b15~b0)

E0~E7=0 or 1 A0~A22=0 or 18 bits of exponent 23 bits of constant

sign bit (0: positive 1:negative)When b0~b31 is 0, the content is 0.



Decimal Floating Point

The binary floating point is not accepted by most people. Therefore, binary floating point format can be converted

to decimal floating point format for people to perform the operation of decimal numbers. However, the DVP series

PLC use binary floating point to perform the operation of decimal numbers.

Decimal floating point is stored in the register with 2 continuous numbers. The register with small number stores

constant and the register with larger number stores exponent.

For example, using register (D1, D0) to store a decimal floating point.

Decimal floating point = [constant D0] X 10 [exponent D1 ]

constant D0 = ±1,000~±9,999

exponent D1 = - 41~+35

the most significant bit of (D1, D0) is symbol bit.

Besides, constant 100 doesn’t exist in D0 due to 100 will be shown with 1,000×10-1.

The range of decimal number is from ±1175×10-41 to ±3402×10+38.

Decimal floating point can be used in the following commands.

The conversion command for Binary floating point Decimal floating point (D EBCD)

The conversion command for Decimal floating point Binary floating point (D EBIN)

Zero flag (M1020), Borrow flag (M1021) and carry flag (M1022)

The flags that corresponds to the floating command are:

Zero flag: when the result is 0, M1020=On.

Borrow flag: when the result is least than the minimum unit, M1021=On

Carry flag: when the absolute value of result exceeds usage range, M1022=On

5.4 Index register E, F

The index register is 16-bit register. There are 2 devices for ES/EX/SS models (E and F), 8 devices for EP

models (E0~E3, F0~F3) and 16 devices for EH models (E0~E7, F0~F7).

E0 F0

F0E0

16-bit 16-bit

32-bit

lower bitupper bit

E and F are also 16-bit register just the same as general

register. It can be wrote/read freely.

If using a 32-bit register, you should specify E. In this

condition, F will be covered by E and cannot be used

anymore; otherwise the contents of E will become incorrect.

(When PLC start-up, it is commended to use MOVP

command to clear the contents of F and reset it to 0)

When using 32-bit index register, the combination of E, F are

as follows. (E0, F0), (E1, F1), (E2, F2)…(E7, F7).



MOV K20E0 D10F0

E0=8 F0=1420+8=28 10+14=24K28 D24 transmit

As the left figure shown, the contents of operand will change

according to the contents of E, F. and we name this kind of

modification as “Index”.

For example, E0=8 and K20E0 all represent constant

K28(20+8). If the contact is ON, constant K28 will be

transmitted to register D24.

Devices can use Index register to modify in ES/EX/SS Series are: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D.

Devices can use Index register to modify in EP Series are: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D

Devices can use Index register to modify in EH Series are: P, I, X, Y, M, S, K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D

The above device can use index register E, F to modify. However, index register E, F cannot modify itself,

either Kn. (K4M0E0 is available, K0E0M0 is not available). In each application command, if the symbol “＊” is

added in the table of operand, it means the device can use index register E, F to modify.

Index register E, F can be used to modify P, I, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D these devices under

certain condition. Two devices, E or F can be specified when using 16-bit register. If using index register E, F to

modify constant K, H in 32-bit command, only one device, E can be specified.

When constant (K,H) is used to be index function in WPLSoft command mode, it needs to use symbol

“@”.

Example: ”MOV K10@E0 D0F0”

The program example of index:

DVP - PLC

The digit switch input X3~X0,which be selected by Timer T

The 7-step display output Y17~Y0, which beused to display the present value of Timer T

5

T0 can use index register F0 to shorten the program and

display the 7 present value of T0~T9 on the external 7-step

display panel.

M1000BIN K1X0

BCD T0F0 K4Y0

F0

(X3~X0)BCD (F0)BIN

(T0F0)BIN (Y17~Y0)BCD

When F0=0~9, T0F0=T0~T9.

There are limited using times of some commands. If using the index register E, F to modify, the final result can

be the same as the operation result of using the same command repeatedly.



5.5 Index for Commands • Sort by Characters

Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API

16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


87 ABS DABS Absolute value 3 5 7-10062 ABSD DABSD – Absolute drum sequencer – 9 17 7-43155 ABSR DABSR – ABS current value read – – 7 13 9-1420 ADD DADD Perform the addition of BIN data 7 13 6-2966 ALT – – On/Off alternate command 3 – 7-49

218 AND& DAND& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-2

220 AND^ DAND^ – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-2

219 AND| DAND| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-2

234 AND< DAND< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-5

237 AND<= DAND<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-5

236 AND<> DAND<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-5

232 AND= DAND= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-5

233 AND> DAND> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-5

238 AND>= DAND>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-5

93 ANDF – – Series connection command for the falling-edge detection operation

3 – 3-12

92 ANDP – – Series connection command for the rising-edge detection operation

3 – 3-11

47 ANR – Alarm device reset – 1 – 6-5846 ANS – – Alarm device output – 7 – 6-5875 ARWS – – Arrow keyboard input – 9 – 7-6576 ASC – – ASCII code conversion – 11 – 7-6682 ASCII – Convert HEX to ASCII 7 – 7-88

133 – DASIN Arcsine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-39

134 – DACOS Arccosine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-40

A

135 – DATAN Arctangent operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-41

18 BCD DBCD Convert BIN data into BCD 5 9 6-2619 BIN DBIN Convert BCD data into BIN 5 9 6-2715 BMOV – Block move 7 – 6-23

B

44 BON DBON Determine the ON bits 7 13 6-5601 CALL – Call subroutine 3 – 6-5 84 CCD – Check code – 7 – 7-9500 CJ – Conditional jump 3 – 6-1

C

14 CML DCML Compliment 5 9 6-22




16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


10 CMP DCMP Compare 7 13 6-1797 CNT DCNT – Counter 4 6 3-8

131 – DCOS Cosine operation of binary floating point – 9 8-36

137 – DCOSH Hyperbolic cosine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-42

C

108 CRC – CRC error check – 7 – 8-1525 DEC DDEC Perform the subtraction of 1 3 5 6-3441 DECO – 8 → 256 bits decode 7 – 6-53117 – DDEG Radian → Degree – – 9 8-2105 DI – – Disable interrupts 1 – 6-7 23 DIV DDIV Perform the division of BIN data 7 13 6-32159 DRVA DDRVA – Data backup MEMORY write in – – 9 17 9-26158 DRVI DDRVI – Drive to increment – – 9 17 9-22

D

72 DSW – – Digital Switch input – 9 – 7-58120 – DEADD Binary floating point addition – 13 8-24

118 – DEBCD Convert binary floating point to decimal floating point – 9 8-23

119 – DEBIN Convert decimal floating point to binary floating point – 9 8-23

110 – DECMP Binary floating point comparison – 13 8-19123 – DEDIV Binary floating point division – 13 8-2704 EI – – Enable interrupts 1 – 6-7

122 – DEMUL Binary floating point multiplication – 13 8-26

42 ENCO – 256 → 8 bits encode 7 – 6-54

127 – DESQR Square root of binary floating point – 9 8-31

121 – DESUB Binary floating point subtraction – 13 8-25

124 – DEXP Convert binary floating point to perform exponent operation – 9 8-28

E

111 – DEZCP Binary floating point zone comparison – 17 8-20

06 FEND – – First end 1 – 6-11

49 FLT DFLT Convert BIN integer to binary floating point 5 9 6-61

16 FMOV DFMOV Multiple devices movement 7 13 6-2408 FOR – – Start of FOR-NEXT loop 3 – 6-1478 FROM DFROM Read special module CR data 9 17 7-69

102 FWD – – VFD-A series drive forward command 7 – 8-8

F

145 FTC – – Fuzzy temperature control – – 9 8-45

144 GPWM – – General pulse width modulation output – – 7 8-44

171 GBIN DGBIN Convert Gray code to BIN – P P 5 9 9-45G

170 GRY DGRY Convert BIN to Gray code – P P 5 9 9-4483 HEX – Convert ASCII to HEX P P 7 – 7-92H 71 HKY DHKY – 16-key keyboard input – P P 9 17 7-56




16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


169 HOUR DHOUR – Hour meter – P P 7 13 9-44

54 – DHSCR – High speed counter comparison RESET P P – 13 7-15

53 – DHSCS – High speed counter comparison SET – 13 7-6

196 HST DHST High speed counter – – 3 – 9-60

H

55 – DHSZ – Zone comparison (High-speed counter) – – 17 7-17

24 INC DINC Perform the addition of 1 3 5 6-3463 INCD – – Increment drum sequencer – 9 – 7-44

129 INT DINT Convert binary floating point to BIN integer 5 9 8-33

98 INV – – Inverting operation 1 – 3-1503 IRET – – Interrupt return 1 – 6-7

I

60 IST – – Manual/Auto control 7 – 7-36

215 LD& DLD& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-1

217 LD^ DLD^ – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-1

216 LD| DLD| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-1

226 LD< DLD< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-4

229 LD<= DLD<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-4

228 LD<> DLD<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-4

224 LD= DLD= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-4

225 LD> DLD> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-4

230 LD>= DLD>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-4

91 LDF – – Falling-edge detection operation 3 – 3-1190 LDP – – Rising-edge detection operation 3 – 3-11

125 – DLN Convert binary floating point to perform natural logarithm operation

– 9 8-29

126 – DLOG Convert binary floating point to perform logarithm operation – 13 8-30

L

107 LRC – LRC error check – 7 – 8-13180 MAND – Matrix AND – – 9 – 9-47190 MBC – Matrix bit state count – – 7 – 9-59189 MBR – Matrix bit rotate – – 7 – 9-58186 MBRD – Matrix bit read – – 7 – 9-54188 MBS – Matrix bit shift – – 7 – 9-56187 MBWR – Matrix bit write – – 7 – 9-55185 MCMP – Matrix compare – – 9 – 9-5245 MEAN DMEAN Mean value 7 13 6-57

M

148 MEMR DMEMR Data backup MEMORY read – 7 13 8-49




16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


149 MEMW DMEMW MEMORY write in – 7 13 8-50184 MINV – Matrix inverse – – 7 – 9-52183 MNOR – Matrix NOR – – 9 – 9-51100 MODRD – – MODBUS data Read 7 – 8-1 150 MODRW – – MODBUS data read/write in 11 – 9-1 101 MODWR – – MODBUS data write in 7 – 8-5 181 MOR – Matrix OR – – 9 – 9-4912 MOV DMOV Data Move 5 9 6-1952 MTR – – Input matrix – 9 – 7-3

22 MUL DMUL Perform the multiplication of BIN data 7 13 6-31

M

182 MXOR – Matrix XOR – – 9 – 9-5029 NEG DNEG Negation 3 5 6-38N 09 NEXT – – End of FOR-NEXT loop 1 – 6-14

221 OR& DOR& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-3

O 223 OR^ DOR^ – Comparison contact is ON when

S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-3

222 OR| DOR| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-3

242 OR< DOR< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-6

245 OR<= DOR<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-6

244 OR<> DOR<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-6

240 OR= DOR= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-6

241 OR> DOR> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-6

246 OR>= DOR>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-6

95 ORF – – Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection operation

3 – 3-13

O

94 ORP – – Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection operation

3 – 3-12

88 PID – – PID calculation 9 – 7-10099 PLF – – Falling-edge output 3 – 3-1389 PLS – – Rising-edge output 3 – 3-13

59 PLSR DPLSR – Pulse wave output with acceleration/deceleration speed 9 17 7-31

157 PLSV DPLSV – Variable speed pulse output – – 7 13 9-2157 PLSY DPLSY – Pulse output 7 13 7-25

128 – DPOW Convert binary floating point to perform power operation – 13 8-32

77 PR – – Print – 5 – 7-67

P

81 PRUN DPRUN Octal number system transmission – 5 9 7-87




16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


151 PWD – – Input pulse width detection – – 5 – 9-11P 58 PWM – – Pulse width modulation output 7 – 7-30116 – DRAD Degree → Radian – – 9 8-2167 RAMP – – Ramp signal – 9 – 7-50154 RAND – – Random value – 9 – 9-13

33 RCL DRCL Rotate to the left with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-44

32 RCR DRCR Rotate to the right with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-43

105 RDST – – VFD-A series drive status read 5 – 8-11

R

50 REF – I/O refresh 5 – 7-1

51 REFF – Refresh and adjust the response time of input filter – 3 – 7-2

103 REV – – VFD-A series drive reverse command 7 – 8-9

31 ROL DROL Rotate to the left 5 9 6-4230 ROR DROR Rotate to the right 5 9 6-4180 RS – – Serial data communication 9 – 7-74

106 RSTEF – – VFD-A series drive abnormal reset 5 – 8-13

153 RTMD – – End to measure the execution time of I interrupt – – 3 – 9-12

R

152 RTMU – – Start to measure the execution time of I interrupt – – 5 – 9-11

73 SEGD – Decode the 7-step display panel 5 – 7-6074 SEGL – – 7-step display scan output 7 – 7-6161 SER DSER Search a data stack – 9 17 7-4239 SFRD – Shift register read – 7 – 6-50

35 SFTL – Shift the data of device specified to the left – 9 – 6-46

34 SFTR – Shift the data of device specified to the right 9 – 6-45

38 SFWR – Shift register write – 7 – 6-49

130 – DSIN Sine operation of binary floating point – 9 8-34

136 – DSINH Hyperbolic sine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-42

13 SMOV – Shift move – 11 – 6-2069 SORT – – Data sort – 11 – 7-5256 SPD – – Speed detection – 7 – 7-2448 SQR DSQR Square root of BIN 5 9 6-6002 SRET – – Subroutine return 1 – 6-5 65 STMR – – Special timer – 7 – 7-48

104 STOP – – VFD-A series drive stop command 7 – 8-9

21 SUB DSUB Perform the subtraction of BIN data 7 13 6-30

S

43 SUM DSUM Sum of ON bits 5 9 6-56




16 bits 32 bits

P Command Function


147 SWAP DSWAP Swap high/low byte 3 5 8-48S 109 SWRD – Digital switch read – 3 – 8-18

162 TADD – Real time clock data addition – 7 – 9-37

132 – DTAN Tangent operation of binary floating point – 9 8-37

138 – DTANH Hyperbolic tangent operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-43

160 TCMP – Time compare – 11 – 9-35

70 TKY DTKY – 10-key keyboard input – 7 13 7-5496 TMR – – Timer 4 – 3-8 79 TO DTO Special module CR data write in 9 17 7-69166 TRD – Time data read – 3 – 9-40

163 TSUB – Time subtraction – 7 – 9-38

64 TTMR – – Teaching timer – 5 – 7-46167 TWR – Time data write in – 3 – 9-42

T

161 TZCP – Time zone compare – 9 – 9-3685 VRRD – Potentiometer read – 5 – 7-97V 86 VRSC – Potentiometer scale – 5 – 7-99

26 WAND DAND Perform the logical product (AND) operation 7 13 6-35

07 WDT – Watchdog timer refresh 1 – 6-12

27 WOR DOR Perform the logical sum (OR) operation 7 13 6-36

37 WSFL – Shift the register to the left – 9 – 6-4836 WSFR – Shift the register to the right – 9 – 6-47

W

28 WXOR DXOR Perform the exclusive logical add(XOR) operation 7 13 6-37

X 17 XCH DXCH Data exchange 5 9 6-2511 ZCP DZCP Zone compare 9 17 6-18

156 ZRN DZRN – Zero point return – – 9 17 9-18Z 40 ZRST – Resets a range of device

specified 5 – 6-51

Note 1: Applicable models ES series above includes EX and SS series; EP includes SA series.

Note 2: Above commands for ES/EX/SS models don’t possess pulse execution command (P command).

6 Application Commands API 00-49


API Applicable modelsES EP EH 00

CJ

P Conditional Jump

Bit devices Word devices

X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: Operand S can assign P

P can be modified by Index register E, F ES Series models: Operand S can assign P0~P63 EP / EH Series models: Operand S can assign P0~P255 ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (CJP)


CJ Continuous execution CJP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: The destination pointer of conditional jump CJ command can be used in the following conditions:

1. In order to shorten the program scan time when user do not want to execute some

unnecessary parts of PLC program.

2. In double or dual coils designation.

When the program that pointer P indicats is before CJ command, please note that the

error of WDT exceeding time. If PLC stop running, please use carefully.

CJ command can assign the same pointer P repeatedly. However, CJ command and

CALL command cannot assign the same pointer P, otherwise the error will occur.

The explanation of each device when executing the CJ command:

1. Y, M, S remains its previous state before the condition jump occurs.

2. The timer 10ms, 100ms that execute the counting will stop.

3. The timer T192~T199 that execute the subroutine program will continue and the

output contact will execute normally.

4. The high-speed counter that executes the counting will continue and the output

contact will execute normally.

5. The general counter will stop.

6. If the reset command of the accumulative type timer is activated before the condition

jump is activated, the device will be still in the reset state when condition jump is

executing.

7. The general application commands will not be executed.

8. The executing application commands, i.e. API 53 DHSCS, API 54 DHSCR, API 55

DHSZ, API 56 SPD, API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59 PLSR, API 157 PLSV, API

158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA, will continue executing.



ProgramExample

1

When X0=On, the program will skip from address 0 to N (label P1) automatically and keep on executing. But the area between address 0 and N will be skipped and will not be executed.

When X0=Off, as usual, the program will keep on executing from address 0. CJ command will not be executed.

X0

X1

X2

CJ P1

Y1

Y2

0

NP1

P***(CJ command)

ProgramExample

2

There are five situations that the CJ command can be executed between the commands MC and MCR.

1. Out of MC~MCR.

2. Valid in the loop P1 in the following chart.

3. In the same level N, inside of MC~MC .

4. Inside of MC, out of MCR.

5. Jump from this MC~MCR to another MC~MCR. (1)

(1) This function is only provided in V4.9 (included) or higher version of ES series models and EP/EH series models.

The execution explanations of V4.7(included) or lower version of ES series models: CJ command is used between MC and MCR command but It is only used in the range

out of MC~MCR or in the same level N inside the MC~MCR. CJ command can not be used to jump from this range of MC~MCR to another range of MC~MCR, otherwise the error will occur. CJ command can execute correctly in the above-mentioned condition 1 and 3 but the error will occur if it is not used in other conditions.

X0

MC N0X2

X3

X1

M1000

M1000

P1

P0

CJ

CJ

MC N1

N1

N0

P1

P0

Y1

Y0

MCR

MCR



ProgramExample

3

The states of each device are shown in the following:

Device The contact

state before CJ execution

The contact state during CJ execution

The output coil state during CJ execution

M1, M2, M3 Off

M1, M2, M3 Off On Y1 (note1), M20, S1 Off

Y, M, S M1, M2, M3 On

M1, M2, M3 On Off Y1 (note1), M20, S1 On

M4 Off M4 Off On Timer is not activated 10ms, 100ms Timer

(ES/EP/EH) M4 On M4 On Off The interrupt of timer latched. Keep on counting after M0 is off.

M6 Off M6 Off On Timer (T240) is not activated 1ms, 10ms,

100ms Timer (for accumulative)

EP/EH M6 On M6 On Off

All accumulative timers will stop but latched once executing command CJ. When M0 is from On Off, T240 will be unchanged.

M7, X10 Off M10 On/Off trigger Timer does not count

C0~C234 M7 Off, X10 On/Off trigger

M10 On/Off trigger

The interrupt of counter latched. Keep on counting after M0 is off.

M11 Off M11 Off On Application commands won’t be executed.

Application command M11 On M11 On Off

Do not execute the skipped application command but API 53~59, API 157~159 keep executing.

Note 1: Y1 is dual output. When M0 is Off, it is controlled by M1. when M0 is On, it is

controlled by M12.

Note 2: When timer that subroutine used (T192~T199, for EP/EH) executes CJ command, it

will keep counting. After timer attains, output contact of timer will be On.

Note 3: When high-speed counters (C235~C255) execute CJ command, it will kekep counting

and output point will also continue act.



Y1 is double or dual coil designation. When M0=Off, it is controlled by M1. When M0=On,

it is controlled by M12.

CJ P0M0

M1

M2

M17

M3

M4

M5

M6

M7

M1

M11

M0

M12

M13

END

RST

RST

RST T127

C0

D0

Y1

CJ P0

CJ P63

S1

TMR T0 K10

TMR

RST

RST

CNT

MOV

T127

T127

C0

C0

D0K3

K20

Y1

M20

K1000

P0

P63




CALL P Call Subroutine


Note: Operand S can assign P. P can be modified by Index register E, F. ES Series models: operand S can assign P0~P63. EP / EH Series models: operand S can assign P0~P255. ES Series models do not support the pulse execution command (CALLP).


CALL Continuous execution CALLP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－

Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: The desinition pointer of call subrountine. Program continues in the subroutine after the FEND command.

Subroutine pointers of CALL command and the pointers of CJ command are not

allowed to coincide.

If only using CALL command, it can call subrountine of the same pointer number with

no limit of times.

Subroutine can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL command. (If entering

the six level, the subroutine won’t be executed.) API Applicable models

ES EP EH 02 SRET

Subroutine Return


Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary.


SRET Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: None

CommandExplanation

Indicates the end of subroutine program.

The subroutine will return to main program by SRET after the termination of subroutine

and execute the sequence program located at the next step to the CALL command.

ProgramExample

1

When X0 = ON, then start CALL command, jump to P2 and run subroutine. When run

SRET command, it will jump back to address 24 and keep running.



X0

X1CALL P2

Y1

20P***

24

FEND

SRET

P2 Y0

Y0Subroutine P2subroutine

subroutine return

call subroutine P***

ProgramExample

2

When X10 is the rising-edge triggered CALL P10 command that goes from Off to On,

jump to P10 and run subroutine.

When X11 is On, execute CALL P11, jump to P11 and run subroutine.



When X14 is On, execute CALL P14, jump to P14 and run subroutine. When run SRET

command, it will jump back to the last P*** subroutine and keep running.

Run SRET command in the P10 subroutine and return to the main program.

X0

X10

INC D0

Y0

CALL P10X0

INC D1

Y1

FEND

INC D10X2

P10

Y4

X2

X11CALL P11

INC D11

Y5

SRET

INC D20X2

P11

Y6X12

CALL P12X2

INC D21

Y7

SRET

X2

X13

X2

X2

X2

X14

X2

P13

P14

P12 INC D30

Y10

CALL P13

INC D31

Y11

SRET

INC D40

Y12

CALL P14

INC D41

Y13

SRET

INC D50

Y14

SRET

END

MainProgram Main

Program

subroutine

subroutine

subroutine

subroutine

subroutine




IRET

Interrupt Return


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand

The command driven by contact is not necessary.


IRET Continuous execution －－

32-bit command


CommandExplanation

IRET denotes the interrupt of subroutine program.

Terminate the processing of interrupt program and return to the main program by IRET

command. Execute the original program to produce the next interrupt command. API Applicable models

ES EP EH 04 EI

Enable Interrupts


Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary. The pulse width of interrupt signal should be higher than 200us. Please refer to the footnote of DI command to see the range of numbers of each model.


EI Continuous execution －－


Flag: M1050~M1059, M1280~M1294 (Please refer to the footnote of DI command)

API Applicable models

ES EP EH05 DI

Disable Interrupts




DI Continuous execution －－


CommandExplanation

EI command enables interrupt subroutine to be processed in the program, e.g. External

interrupt, Time interrupt, High-speed counter interrupt.

In the program, using interrupt subroutine between EI and DI command is allowed.

However, it is not allowed to use DI command if there is no disable interrupt period

during the program.



Even in the interrupt allowed range when interrupting special the auxiliary relay M1050

to M1059 in ES / EP series models and M1280 to M1294 in EH series models, the

corresponding interrupting request will not be activated.

Interrupting cursor ( I ) must be used after the FEND command.

Other interrupts are not allowed to occur during executing the interrupt routine

program.

When most interrupts occur, priority is given to the interrupt occuring first. If the

interrupts occur simultaneously, the interrupt with the lower pointer number will be

given the higher priority.

Any interrupt request occuring between DI and EI commands cannot be executed

immediately. The request will be memorized and execute the subroutine in the enabling

range of the interrupt.

When using the interrupt pointer, please do not repeatly use the high-speed counter

driven by the same X input contact.

When the interrupt routine program is running and the I/O is immediately activated, the

state of I/O can be refreshed by writing REF command in the program.

ProgramExample

During the PLC operation, the program scans the commands between EI and DI, if X1

or X2 are ON, the subroutine A or B will be interruptted. When IRET is reached, the

main program will resume.

I 101

I 201

Y1

EI

FEND

X0

DI

IRET

IRET

Y0

Y0

EIDisabled interrupt

Enabled interrupt

Enabled interrupt

Interrupt subroutine A

Interrupt subroutine B



Footnote

Interrupt pointer I numbers of ES series models:

1. External interrupts: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3) 4 points.

2. Time interrupts: I6□□, 1 point (□□＝10~99, time base=1ms) (support for

V5.7)

3. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150) (support for

V5.7)

Interrupt pointer I numbers of EP series models:

1. External interrupts: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3), (I401, X4),

(I501, X5) 6 points.

2. Time interrupts: I6□□, I7□□ 2 points. (□□＝1~99ms, time base=1ms)

3. High-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53

DHSCS command and interrupt signal occurs)

4. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150)

5. The order of interrupt point I: high-speed counter interrupt, external interrupt,

time interrupt and communication interrupt for specific characters received.

Interrupt pointer I Number of EH series models:

1. External interrupts: (I00□, X0), (I10□, X1), (I20□, X2), (I30□, X3), (I40□, X4),

(I50□, X5) 6 points. (□＝0 indicates the interrupt of falling-edge, □＝1 indicates

the interrupt of rising-edge)

2. Time interrupts: I6□□, I7□□, 2 points. (□□＝1~99ms, time base=1ms) I8□□

1 point. (□□＝1~99ms, time base=0.1ms)

3. High-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53

DHSCS command and interrupt signal occurs)

4. The interrupt, start and end of pulse output interrupt should be used with API 57

PLSY command. I130, I140 are triggered at the beginning of the pulse output by

the start-arranged flag of pulse output command M1342, M1343. Then, M1340,

M1341 will trigger I110, I120 at the end of pulse output command to interrupt the

executing program and jump to the assigned interrupt subroutine to execute .

5. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150)

6. The order of the interrupt pointer I : External interrupts, time interrupts, high-speed

counter interrupts, and pulse output interrupts.

Interrupt Inhibit Flag of ES series models:

Flag Function M1050 External interrupt, I 001 masked M1051 External interrupt, I 101 masked M1052 External interrupt, I 201 masked M1053 External interrupt, I 301 masked



Interrupt Inhibit Flag of EP series models:

Flag Function M1050 External interrupt, I 001 masked M1051 External interrupt, I 101 masked M1052 External interrupt, I 201 masked M1053 External interrupt, I 301 masked M1054 External interrupt, I 401 masked M1055 External interrupt, I 501 masked M1056 Time interrupt, I6□□ masked M1057 Time interrupt, I7□□ masked M1059 High-speed counter interrupt, I010~I040 masked

Interrupt Inhibit Flag of EH series models:

Flag Function

M1280 External interrupt, I00□masked M1281 External interrupt, I10□masked M1282 External interrupt, I20□masked M1283 External interrupt, I30□masked M1284 External interrupt, I40□masked M1285 External interrupt, I50□masked M1286 Time interrupt, I60□masked M1287 Time interrupt, I70□masked M1288 Time interrupt, I80□masked M1289 High-speed counter interrupt, I010 masked M1290 High-speed counter interrupt, I020 masked M1291 High-speed counter interrupt, I030 masked M1292 High-speed counter interrupt, I040 masked M1293 High-speed counter interrupt, I050 masked M1294 High-speed counter interrupt, I060 masked M1295 Pulse output interrupt insert I110 masked M1296 Pulse output interrupt insert I120 masked M1297 Pulse output interrupt insert I130 masked M1298 Pulse output interrupt insert I140 masked M1299 Pulse output interrupt insert I150 masked M1340 After CH0 pulse is transmitted, I110 interrupt occur M1341 After CH1 pulse is transmitted, I120 interrupt occur M1342 CH0 pulse is transmitted; meanwhile, I130 interrupt occur simultaneouslyM1343 CH1 pulse is transmitted; meanwhile, I140 interrupt occur simultaneously




FEND

First End


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand

The command driven by contact is not necessary.


FEND Continuous execution －－


CommandExplanation

This command denotes the end of the main routine program. It has the same function

as END command during PLC operation.

CALL must follow right after FEND command and add SRET command at the end of

the subroutine. Interrupt commands also have to follow after FEND command and add

IRET command at the end of the service program.

If using several FEND commands, please place the subroutine and interrupt service

programs between the last FEND and END command.

After CALL command is executed, the program error will occur when execute the FEND

command before SRET command is executed.

After FOR command is executed, the program error will occur when execute the FEND

command before NEXT command is executed.

CJ CommandProgramFlow

X1CALL P63

P0

P63

CJ P0

I301

X0

0The program flowwhen X0=off, X1=off main

program

mainprogram

mainprogram


command CALL subroutine

The program flow when X0=Onprogram jumps to P0



CALL CommandProgramFlow

X1CALL P63

P0

P63

CJ P0

I301

X0

0The program flowwhen X0=off, X1=off main

program

mainprogram

mainprogram


command CALL subroutine

The program flow when X0=Off, X1=On.


ES EP EH07 WDT

P Watchdog Timer Refresh


Note: No operand ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (WDTP).


WDT Continuous execution WDTP Pulse

execution


Flag: None



CommandExplanation

WDT (Watch Dog Timer) is used to monitor the PLC operation in the DVP series PLC

system.

The WDT command can be used to reset the Watch Dog Timer. If the PLC scanning

time (from step 0 to END or FEND command) is more than 200ms, the ERROR LED will

flash. The user will have to turn the PLC off and then back ON to clear the fault. PLC will

determine the status of RUN/STOP according to RUN/STOP switch. If there is no

RUN/STOP switch, PLC will return to STOP automatically.

When to use WDT:

When error occur in PLC system.

When the executing time of the program is too long to cause the scanning time to

exceed the content value of D1000. It can be modified by using the following two

methods. Use WDT command

T1 t2

STEP0 END(FEND)WDT

Use the set value of D1000 (default is 200ms) to change the watchdog time.

ProgramExample

If the program scanning time is over 300ms, users can divide the program into 2 parts.

Insert the Watchdog Timer in between, so both programs’ scanning time will be less

than 200ms.

X0

END

END

WDT

300ms program

150ms program

150ms program

Dividing the program to two partsso that both parts?scan time areless than 200ms.

Watchdog timer reset



API Applicable modelsES EP EH08

FOR Start of FOR-NEXT Loop


S Note: The contact execution command is not necessary

Refer to each model specification for usage range.


FOR Continuous execution －－

32-bit command


CommandExplanation

: The number of repeats for the nested loop


ES EP EH09 NEXT

End of FOR-NEXT loop




NEXT Continuous execution －－

32-bit command


CommandExplanation

FOR and NEXT commands are used when “n” nested loops are needed.

“N” may be within the range of K1 to K32767. If the range N≦K1, N will always be K1.

When it is not desired to execute the FOR to NEXT commands, use the CJ command.

Error will occur in the following conditions: NEXT command is before FOR command. With FOR command, without NEXT command. There is a NEXT command after the FEND or END command. The numbers of FOR to NEXT commands are different.

The FOR to NEXT loop can be nested for five levels but please notice that if there are

too many loops, the PLC scanning time will increase and it may cause the watchdog

timer to be activated and result in error. User can use WDT command to modify.



ProgramExample

1

After loop A operate 3 times, the program after the NEXT command will resume. For

every completed cycle of loop A, loop B will completely executed for 4 times, therefore,

the total number of times that loop B operate will be 3 ×4＝12 times.

FOR K3

FOR K4

NEXT

NEXT

AB

ProgramExample

2

Program which executes the FOR to NEXT commands when X7 is off. It does not

execute the FOR to NEXT commands when X7 is on and CJ command jump to P6.

X7

M0

M0

P6

MOV

FOR

MOV D0

D0

K3

K0

Y10

INC

MEXTX10

D0

D1

CJ P6



ProgramExample

3

When the FOR to NEXT command are not executed, CJ command can be used to

jump. When the most internal loop of FOR to NEXT, X1 will be ON and CJ command

will jump to P0 and not be executed.

X0TMR T0 K10

P0

FOR K4X100X0

INC D0

K2X0

D1

K3X0

D2

K4X0

WDT

D3X1

CJ P0

FOR K5X0X0

INC D4

NEXT

NEXT

NEXT

NEXT

NEXT

END

FOR

INC

FOR

INC

FOR

INC



API Applicable modelsES EP EH10 D

CMP P Compare


S1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit

command. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (CMPP, DCMPP).


CMP Continuous execution CMPP Pulse

execution


DCMP Continuous execution DCMPP Pulse

execution Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: First comparison value : Second comparison value : Comparison result.

The contents of the comparison source and are compared and denotes the compare result.

Two comparison values are compared algebraically and this function compares the two

values that are considered binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit command or b31=1 in 32-bit

command, the comparison will regard the value as the negative of the binary value.

If is set to Y0, then Y0, Y1, Y2 will work as the program example as below. When X10=On, CMP command is driven and one of Y0, Y1, Y2 is On. When X10=Off,

CMP command is not driven and Y0, Y1, Y2 remain in the previous status.

The comparison result of ≧, ≦, ≠ commands can be got by the parallel connection of

Y0~Y2.

X10

Y0

Y1

Y2

CMP K10 D10 Y0

If K10>D10, Y0 = On

If K10=D10, Y1 = On

If K10<D10, Y2= On

Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the comparison result.

ProgramExample

X10RST M0

RST

RST

M1

M2

X10ZRST M0 M2




ZCP P Zone Compare


S1 S2 S D Note: If operand S1, S2, S use with device F, it is only available in

16-bit command. Operand S1 should be less than Operand S2. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (ZCPP, DZCPP).


ZCP Continuous execution ZCPP Pulse

execution


DZCP Continuous execution DZCPP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: First comparison value (Minimum) : Second comparison value

(Maximum) : Comparison value : Comparison result.

is compared with its limits and and denotes the compare result.

When ＞ , set as the limit to compare.

Two comparison values are compared algebraically and this function compares the two

values that are considered binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit command or b31=1 in 32-bit

command, the comparison will regard the value as the negative of the binary value.

ProgramExample

If is set to M0, then M0, M1, M2 will work as the program example as below. When X0=On, ZCP command is driven and one of M0, M1, M2 is On. When X0=Off,

ZCP command is not driven and M0, M1, M2 remain in the previous status. X0

M0

M1

M2

ZCP

If C10 < K10, M0 = On

If K10 < C10 < K100, M1 = On

If C10 > K100, M2 = On

X0K10 C10 M0K100

= =

Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the comparison result.

X0

RST M0

RST

RST

M1

M2

X0ZRST M0 M2




MOV P Data Move


S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit

command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (MOVP, DMOVP)


MOV Continuous execution MOVP Pulse

execution


DMOV Continuous execution DMOVP Pulse


CommandExplanation

S : Data source : Data move destination When the MOV command is driven, the data of is moved to without any

change. If the MOV command is not driven, the content of remain unchanged. If the calculation result is a 32-bit output, (i.e. the application MUL) and the data of a

32-bit high-speed counter, users will have to use DMOV command.

ProgramExample

MOV command is used in 16-bit command to move data. When X0=Off, the content of D10 remain unchanged. If X0=On, the data of K10 is

moved to D10 data register. When X1=Off, the content of D10 remain unchanged. If X1=On, the data of T0 is

moved to D10 data register. DMOV command is used in 32-bit command to move data

When X2=Off, the content of (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) remain unchanged. If X2=On, the data of (D21, D20) is moved to (D31, D30) data register. Meanwhile, the data of C235 is moved to (D41, D40) data register.

X0

X1

X2

MOV K10 D0

MOV T0 D10

DMOV D20 D30

DMOV C235 D40




SMOV P Shift Move

－


S m1 m2 D n Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=1~ 4

The usage range of operand m2: m2=1~ m1 The usage range of operand n: n=m2 ~ 4 Refer to each model specification for usage range.


SMOV Continuous execution SMOVP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1168 (mode setting operation

of SMOV) When M1168=On, BIN mode. When M1168=Off, BCD mode.

CommandExplanation

: Data movementsource : Source position of the first digit to be moved

: Number of source digits to be moved : Data destination of movement

: Destination position for the first digit This command can arrange or combine the data.

ProgramExample

1

When M1168=Off, X0=On, assign the content of the two digits from the 4th digit

(thousands’ place digital) of D10 (decimal number) and move the assigned data to the

two digits from the 2nd digit (hundreds' place digits) of D20 (decimal number). Then, the

content of 103 and 100 of D20 remain unchaged after SMOV command is executed.

When BCD number is higher than 9,999 or be negative (outside range of 0 to 9,999), an

operation error will occur in PLC. Then, the command will not be executed and M1067,

M1068 will be On, D1067 record error code “0E18” (hexidecimal number).

SMOV

M1168

D10 K2 D20 K3K4

103 102 101 100

103 102 101 100

No variation No variation

D10(BIN 16bit)

D10(BCD 4 digits)

D20(BIN 16bit)

D20(BCD 4 digits)

Shift move

Auto conversion

Auto conversion

M1001

X0

If D10=H1234，D20=H5678 before executing, D10 won’t change and D20=H5128 after finishing execution.

ProgramExample

2

When M1168=On, if use SMOV command, the D10 and D20 do not move data in BCD

format. However the data is moved as a 4 digit BIN number.



SMOV

M1168

D10 K2 D20 K3K4

No variation No variation

D10(BIN 16bit)

D20(BIN 16bit)

Shift move

M1000

X0

Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1

Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1

ProgramExample

3

Digit switch connected to the interrupted number inputs can use SMOV command to

combine.

Move the right second digit switch to the right second digit of D2 and move the left first

digit switch to the right first digit of D1.

Use SMOV command to move the first digit to the third digit of D2 and combine these

two digit switches into one group. 101 100102

6 4 2

PLC

X13~X10 X27~X20

8 88

M1000BIN K2X20 D2

D1

SMOV D1 K1 D2 K3K1

K1X10BIN

(X20~X27)BCD

(X10~X13)BCD

2 digits D2(BIN)

1 digit D1(BIN)

M1001M1168




CML P Compliment



command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse executioncommand (CMLP, DCMLP)


CML Continuous execution CMLVP Pulse

execution


DCML Continuous execution DCMLP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Transfer data source : Transfer destination device

Counter phase the contents of (0→1, 1→0) and have the contents transferred to

. If the content is Constant K, this Constant K will be converted to the BIN value automatically.

ProgramExample

1

This command can be used during the counter-phase output.

When X10=ON, contents of D1, b0~b3, will be counter transferred to K1Y0. X10

CML K1Y0D1

b 0b 1b 2b 3b 15

D1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0Symbol bit (0=positive, 1=negative)

0 1 0 1

No variation Transfer thecounter-phase data

ProgramExample

2

The left loop shown below can be displayed as the right program example by using CML

command. X000

M0X001

M1X002

M2X003

M3

X000M0

X001M1

X002M2

X003M3

M1000CML K1M0K1X0

Normal on contact




ES EP EH15 BMOV

P Block Move


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: The usage range of operand n=1~ 512

Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (BMOVP).


BMOV Continuous execution BMOVP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: Head source device : Head destination device : Block of multiple data

This command is used to move an assigned block of multiple data to a new destination.

Move the contents of the register, with this register obtained from counting

the registers within the -assigned numbers, to the register within the

-assigned number. If the -assigned points exceed the usage range of this device, only those that are within the enabled range will be moved.

ProgramExample

1

When X10=On, move the contents of the four registers D0~D3 to their corresponding

registers D20~D23. X10

D20 K4 D0D1D2D3

D20D21D22D23

n=4

ProgramExample

2

If move the specified bit device, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, the digit numbers of and

should be the same and this also means the number of n should be the same. ES series models do not support KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS devices.

M1000D0 D20 K4 M0

M1M2M3

M4M5M6M7

M8M9M10

n=3

M11

Y10Y11Y12Y13



ProgramExample

3

The BMOV command has built the automatic movement as the program example below

to prevent overwriting errors from occurring when the specified numbers of and

coincide.

When > , the BMOV command is processed in the order as 1→2→3

When < , the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1.

But, be sure to avoid the specified number being continuous when < in ES series models. Otherwise, the execution result will be the same value. For

example, when the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1, the

content value of D11 to D13 will all be the content value of D10.

X10BMOV D20 D19 K3 D19

D20D21

D11

D13

X11BMOV D10 D11 K3

D20D21D22

D10D11D12

1

2

3

1

2

3


ES EP EH16 D FMOV

P Fill Move


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit

command. The usage range of operand n: n=1~ 512(16-bit command), n=1~ 256 (32-bit command) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (FMOVP, DFMOVP)


FMOV Continuous execution FMOVP Pulse

execution 32-bit command (13 STEPS)

DFMOV Continuous execution DFMOVP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Source device : Head destination device : A quantity of multiple devices

The data stored in the source device is moved to every device within the range of

destination device. Move the contents of to the register, with this

register obtained from counting the registers within the -assigned numbers. If the

-assigned devices exceed the usage range, only those that are within the enabled range will be moved.

ES series models do not support KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS devices.



ProgramExample

When X0=ON, move Constant K10 to the continuous five registers (D10~D14) starting

from D10. X10

D10 K5FMOV K10

K10

K10

K10

K10

K10

K10 D10

D11

D12

D13

D14

n=5

API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH 17 D

XCH P Data Exchange


D1 D2 Note: If operand D1, D2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit

command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (XCHP, DXCHP).


XCH Continuous execution XCHP Pulse

execution


DXCH Continuous execution DXCHP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: First exchange data : Second exchange data

Exchange the contents of and with each other. This command is usually pulse execution (XCHP).

ProgramExample

1

When X0=Off→On, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other.

X0D40XCHP D20

Beforeexecution

Afterexecution

120

12040

40D20

D40

D20

D40



ProgramExample

2

When X0=Off→On, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other.

Beforeexecution

Afterexecution

4020

D100

D101

D100

D101

X0D200D100

2040

D200

D201

D200

D201

Footnote

In 16-bit command, when the devices specified by and are the same and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of that specified devices will exchange.

In 32-bit command, when the devices specified by and are the same and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of that 32-bit devices will exchange.

When X0=On and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of D100, D0101 will

exchange.

X0M1303

9

20

8

40

D100L

D100H

8

40

9

20

D101L

D101H

D100L

D100H

D101L

D101H

DXCHP D100 D100

Beforeexecution

Afterexecution


BCD P Converts BIN Data into BCD



command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (BCDP, DBCDP)


BCD Continuous execution BCDP Pulse

execution


DBCD Continuous execution DBCDP Pulse

execution Flag: M1067 (operation error)

M1068 (operation error) D1067 (error code)

CommandExplanation

Converts BIN data (0 to 9999) of the source device into BCD and transfers the

result to the device . If the BCD conversion result is outside the range of 0 to 9999, an operation error occurs,

the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code “0E18”

(hexadecimal number).



If the DBCD conversion result is outside the range of 0 to 99,999,999, an operation error

occurs, the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code “0E18”

(hexadecimal number).

The operation value of four fundamental operations (+, −, ×, ÷), INC and DEC command

in PLC are executed in BIN format. This command can be used to output BIN format

data in BCD format value directly to a seven segment display.

ProgramExample

When X0=ON, the binary data D10 is converted into BCD number, and stored at K4Y0

(Y0~Y3).

X0BCD D10 K1Y0

When D10=001E (Hex)=0030 (decimal number), the execution result will be

Y0~Y3=0000(BIN).


ES EP EH19 D BIN

P Converts BCD Data into BIN


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit

command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (BINP, DBINP)


BIN Continuous execution BINP Pulse

execution


DBIN Continuous execution DBINP Pulse

execution Flag: M1067 (operation error)

M1068 (operation error) D1067 (error code)

CommandExplanation

: Data source : Converted result

Converts BCD data (0 to 9,999) of the source device into BIN and transfers the

result to the device .

The enabled range of source device : BCD (0 to 9,999), DBCD (0 to 99,999,999)

If the content of source device is not BCD value (each digit of which is indicated as HEX being outside the range of 0 to 9), an operation error will occur, the

error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 records error code “0E18”.

Constant K and H is automatically converted into the BIN data. There is no necessity for

constant to use this command.

ProgramExample

When X0=ON, the BCD data K1X0 is converted to BIN data, and stored the result at

D10. X0

BIN D10K1X0



Footnote

The application explanation of BCD and BIN command:

The BIN command is used to covert the source data into BIN data and store in the

PLC when PLC read a BCD format digit switch from external equipment.

The BCD command is used to convert the stored data into BCD data and transmit it

to the 7-segment display when PLC display the stored data on a BCD format

7-segment display from external equipment.

When X0=On, convert K4X0(BCD data) into BIN data and transmit it to D100. Then,

convert BIN data of D100 into BCD data and transmit it to K4Y20. X0

BIN D100K4X0

BCD D100 K4Y20

101 100102

6 4 2

X17 X0

8 8 8

103

6

8

4 digit BCD format switch

4 digit BCD format7-segment display

Y37 Y20

4 digit BCD value

use the BIN command tostore BIN value into D100

use the BCD command toconvert the BIN value in D100

convert to be 4 digit BCD value




ADD P Perform the Addition of BIN Data


S1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in

16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (ADDP, DADDP).


ADD Continuous execution ADDP Pulse

execution


DADD Continuous execution DADDP Pulse

execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)

M1021 (Borrow flag) M1022 (Carry flag)


CommandExplanation

: Augend : Addend : Addition result

+ = . Performs the addition on BIN data and the BIN data

, and stores the addition result into the device . The most significant bit are the symbolic bit 0 and 1. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates

negative. All calculation are algebraically processed, i.e. 3 + (-9) = -6.

Flag changes of binary addition

16-bit command:

If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.

If the operation result exceeds -32,768, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.

If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.

32-bit command:

1. If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.

2. If the operation result exceeds -2,147,483,648, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.

3. If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.

ProgramExample

1

16-bit command: When X0 is ON, the data contained within the augend D0 and addend D10 is combined and the total is stored in the result device D20.

X0ADD D0 D10 D20

(D0) + (D10) = (D20)

ProgramExample

2

32-bit command:

When X0 is ON, the data contained within the augend (D31, D30) and addend (D41, D40) is combined and the total is stored in the result device (D51, D50). (D30, D40, D50 is the lower 16-bit data, and D31, D41, D51 is the higher 16-bit data)

X10DADD D30 D40 D50

(D31, D30) + (D41, D40) = (D51, D50)



Footnote

Flag operations:

-2 -1 0 -32,768B B B B B-1 0 1 32,767 0 1 2B B B

-2 -1 0 -2,147,483,648B B B B B-1 0 1 2,147,483,647 0 1 2B B B

16-bit command: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag

Borrow flag the most significant bit becomes ? ?(negative)

32-bit command: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag

the most significant bit becomes ? ?(positive) Carry flag

Borrow flag the most significant bit becomes ? ?(negative)

the most significant bit becomes ? ?(positive) Carry flag


ES EP EH21 D SUB

P Perform the Subtraction of BIN Data



16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (SUBP, DSUBP).


SUB Continuous execution SUBP Pulse

execution


DSUB Continuous execution DSUBP Pulse


M1021 (Borrow flag) M1022 (Carry flag)

Please refer to the command explanation of ADD command

CommandExplanation

: Minuend : Subtrahend : Subtraction result

− = . Performs the subtraction of BIN data and the BIN data

, and stores the subtraction result into the device . The most significant bit are the symbolic bit 0 and 1. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates

negative. All calculation are algebraically processed.

Flag changes of binary subtraction

16-bit command: If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON. If the operation result exceeds –32,768, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON. If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.

32-bit command: . If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON. . If the operation result exceeds –2,147,483,648, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON. . If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.



The flag operations of SUB command please refer to the flag operations of ADD

command on the previous page.

ProgramExample

1

16-bit command:

When X0 is ON, the data contained within the subtrahend D10 is subtracted from the data

contained within the minuend D0 and the result of this calculation is stored in the result

device D20. X0

SUB D0 D10 D20

(D0) − (D10) = (D20)

ProgramExample

2

32-bit command:

When X0 is ON, the data contained within the subtrahend (D41, D40) is subtracted from

the data contained within the minuend (D31, D30) and the result of this calculation is

stored in the result device (D51, D50). (D30, D40, D50 is the lower 16-bit data, and D31,

D41, D51 is the higher 16-bit data) X10

DSUB D30 D40 D50

(D31, D30) − (D41, D40) = (D51, D50) API Applicable models

ES EP EH22 D MUL

P Perform the Multiplication of BIN Data


S1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in

16-bit command. If operand D use with device E, it is only available in 16-bit command. In 16-bit command, operand D occupies 2 continuous devices. In 32-bit command, operand D occupies 4 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution Command (MULP, DMULP).


MUL Continuous execution MULP Pulse

execution


DMUL Continuous execution DMULP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Multiplicand : Multiplier : Multiplication result

× = . Performs the Multiplication of BIN data and the BIN data

, and stores the multiplication result into the device . Please pay careful

attention to the polarity display of the operation result of , and in the 16-bit and 32-bit command.

16-bit command:



b15................ b00

X =b15................ b00 b31............ b16 b15.............b00

+1

b15 is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit D+1) (b15 of

b15=0,S is a positive value1

b15=1,S is a negative value1





When is bit device, it can specify K1~K4 and produce a 16-bit result. Then, the flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code “0E19”. 32-bit command:

b31.. b16

X =

+1

b31 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit b63 is a symbol bit ) (b15 of D+1

b31=0,S (S +1) are positive value1 1

b31=1,S (S +1) are negative value1 1

b31=0,S (S +1) are positive value2 2

b31=1,S (S +1)2 2 are negative value

b63=0, D1(D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3) are positive valueb63=1, D1(D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3) are negative value

b15.. b00 b31.. b16 b15.. b00

+1

b63. b48 b47. b32 b31. b16 b15. b00

+3 +2 +1

When is bit device, it can specify K1~K8 and produce a 32-bit result. The

destination device is used to store low 32-bit data only.

ProgramExample

16-bit command: A 16-bit data source, D10 is multiplied by another 16-bit data source, D0 and the total is a 32-bit result, D20. The upper 16-bit data is stored in D21 and the lower one is stored in D20. The polarity of the result is indicated by the OFF/ON of the most significant bit. OFF indicates the value of positive 0 and ON indicates the value of negative 1.

X0MUL D0 D10 D20

MUL D0 D10 K8M0

(D0) × (D10) = (D21, D20) 16-bit × 16-bit = 32-bit


ES EP EH23 D DIV

P Perform the Division of BIN Data


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in

16-bit command. If operand D use with device E, it is only available in 16-bit command. In 16-bit command, operand D occupies 2 continuous devices. In 32-bit command, operand D occupies 4 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution Command (ADDP, DADDP).


DIV Continuous execution DIVP Pulse

execution


DDIV Continuous execution DDIVP Pulse




CommandExplanation

: Dividend : Divisor : Quotient and Remainder

÷ = . Performs the division of BIN data and the BIN data

, and stores the result into the device . Please pay careful attention to the

polarity display of the operation result of , and in the 16-bit and 32-bit command.

This command is not executed when the divisor is “0”. Then, the flag M1067, M1068 will

be On and D1067 record error code “0E19”.

16-bit command:

+1

=/

Quotient Remainder

When D is bit device, it can specify K1~K4 to produce a 16-bit result and occupies 2 continuous groups. In regards to the operation result, the quotient and remainder are stored.

32-bit command:

+1

/ =

+1 +1 +3 +2

Quotient Remainder

When D is bit device, it can specify K1~K8 and produce a 32-bit result. In regards to the operation result, only the quotient is stored.

ProgramExample

When X0 is ON, the primary source D0 (divisor) is divided by the second source D10

(dividend). The quotient is specified to be stored in D20 and the remainder is specified to

be stored in D21. The polarity of the result is indicated by the OFF/ON of the most

significant bit. OFF indicates the value of positive and ON indicates the value of

negative.

X0DIV D0 D10 D20

D0 D10 K4Y0DIV



API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH24 D

INC P Perform the Addition of 1


D

Note: If operand D use with device F, it is only available 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution (INCP, DINCP).


INC Continuous execution INCP Pulse

execution


DINC Continuous execution DINCP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Destination device If the command is not the pulse execution command, “1” is added to the value of

destination device on every execution of the command. This command is usually pulse execution (INCP, DINCP).

In 16-bit command, when +32,767 is reached, “1” is added and it will write a value

of –32,768 to the destination device. In 32-bit command, when +2,147,483,647 is

reached, “1” is added and it will write a value of -2,147,483,648 to the destination device.

Flag M1020~M1022 won’t be influenced by the operation result of this command.

ProgramExample

When X0 is ON, the content of D0 will perform the addition of 1. X0

INCP D0


DEC P Perform the Subtraction of 1


D

Note: If operand D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse the execution (DECP, DDECP).


DEC Continuous execution DECP Pulse

execution


DDEC Continuous execution DDECP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Destination device If the command is not the pulse execution command, “1” is subtracted to the value of

destination device on every execution of the command. This command is usually pulse execution (INCP, DINCP).

In 16-bit command, when –32,768 is reached, “1” is subtracted and it will write a value of

+32,767 to the destination device. In 32-bit command, when -2,147,483,648 is reached,

“1” is subtracted and it will write a value of +2,147,483,647 to the destination device.



Flag M1020~M1022 won’t be influenced by the operation result of this command.

ProgramExample

When X0 is ON, the content of D0 will perform the subtraction of 1. X0

DECP D0

API W Applicable models

ES EP EH26 D AND

P Perform the Logical Product (AND) Operation



16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution(WANDP, DANDP)


WAND Continuous execution WANDP Pulse

execution


DAND Continuous execution DANDP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: First data source device : Second data source device

: Operation result

Performs the logical product of the data source device and , and stores the

operation result into the device . General operation rule: If one of the bit contained within the data source devices is “0”,

then the operation result is also “0”.

ProgramExample

1

When X0 is ON, the 16-bit data source device D0 and D2 are analyzed and the

operation result of the logical WAND command is stored in the device D4.

WAND D0 D2 D4

X0

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1

WAND

b15 b00

Beforeexecution

Afterexecution

D0

D2

D4



ProgramExample

2

When X1 is ON, the 32-bit data source device (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed

and the operation result of the logical DAND command is stored in the device (D41,

D40). X1

DAND D10 D20 D40

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1

DAND

b31

Beforeexecution

Afterexecution

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1

b15 b0

D11 D10

D21 D20

D41 D40

API W Applicable modelsES EP EH27 D

OR P

Perform the Logical Sum (OR) Operation



16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution (WORP, DORP)


WOR Continuous execution WORP Pulse

execution


DOR Continuous execution DORP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: First data source device : Second data source device

: Operation result

Performs the logical sum of the data source device and , and stores the

operation result into the device . General operation rule: If one of the bit contained within the data source devices is “1”,

then the operation result is also “1”.

ProgramExample

1


operation result of the logical WOR command is stored in the device D4.

WOR D0 D2 D4X0

WOR D0 D2 D4X0

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1

0 0 0 01 1 1

WOR

b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Beforeexecution

Afterexecution

D0

D2

D4

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1

0 0 0 01 1 1

b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1

0 0 0 01 1 1

WOR

b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Beforeexecution

Afterexecution

D0

D2

D4

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1

0 0 0 01 1 1

b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1



ProgramExample

2


and the operation result of the logical DOR command is stored in the device (D41, D40).X1

DOR D10 D20 D40

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1

0 0 0 01 1 1

b310 0 0 0 0 01 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Beforeexecution

Afterexecution

D11 D100 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1

0 0 0 01 1 1

DOR

b0 0 0 0 0 01 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1

0 0 0 01 1 1

b15 b00 0 0 0 0 01 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

D21 D20

D41 D40 API W Applicable models

ES EP EH28 D XOR

P Perform the Exclusive Logical Add (XOR) Operation



16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution (WXORP, DXORP).


WXOR Continuous execution WXORP Pulse

execution


DXOR Continuous execution DXORP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: First data source device : Second data source device : Operation result

Performs the exclusive logical add of the data source device and , and

stores the operation result into the device . General operation rule: If both of the bit contained within the two data source devices are

the same, then the operation result is “0”. But if both of the bit contained within the two

data source devices are different, then the operation result is “1”.

ProgramExample

1


operation result of the logical WXOR command is stored in the device D4.

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1

0 0 0 01 1 0

WOR

b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

WXOR D0 D2 D4X0

Beforeexecution

Afterexecution

D0

D2

D4

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1

0 0 01 1

b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1

0 1 1 1 0 1

1 1 1 1 1 1



ProgramExample

2


and the operation result of the logical DXOR command is stored in the device (D41,

D40). X1

DXOR D10 D20 D40

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 00 1 1 1

1 1 1 10 0 0

b311 1 1 1 1 10 0

1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

Beforeexecution

Afterexecution

D11 D100 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1DXOR

b

1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

D21 D20

D41 D40

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 00 1 1 1

1 1 1 10 0 0

b151 1 1 1 1 10 0

1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1

0 0 1 11 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 01 1 11

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

b0

API ☺ Applicable models

ES EP EH29 D NEG

P Negation


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FD

Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (NEGP, DNEGP).


NEG Continuous execution NEGP Pulse

execution


DNEG Continuous execution DNEGP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Once the command is executed, the specified device, , will be served as the complement of 2.

This command can convert the negative BIN value to the positive number, and that is, to

get its absolute value.

This command is usually pulse execution (NEGP, DNEGP).

ProgramExample

1

When X goes from OFF → ON, every bit of the D10 contents will be countered (0→1,

1→0) and be added with 1, and will then be saved in the original register, D10. X0

NEGP D10

ProgramExample

2

Obtaining the absolute value of a negative value: 1. When the 15th bit of D0 is “1”, M0 is ON. (D0 is a negative value). 2. When M0 is ON, the absolute value of D0 can be obtained using the NEG command.

M1000BON D0 K15M0

M0NEGP D0

Normal ON contact



ProgramExample

3

Obtaining the absolute value by the result of the subtraction 1. When D0>D2, M0=ON. 2. When D0=D2, M1=ON. 3. When D0<D2, M2=ON. 4. Then D4 can be obtained and it will be a positive value.

X0CMP D0 D2 M0

M0SUB D0 D2 D4

M2SUB D2 D0 D4

M1



Footnote

Indication of the negative value and absolute value The content of the most significant bit of the register indicates the positive and

negative value. It is a positive value when the content is “0” and it is a negative value when the content is “1”.

If it is a negative value, the absolute value can be obtained by using the NEG command (API 29).

0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 10 0

0 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 0

0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 0

(D0=2)

(D0=1)

(D0=0)

1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1(D0=-1)

0 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 0(D0)+1=1

1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 0(D0=-2)

0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 10 0(D0)+1=2

1 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1(D0=-3)

0 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 10 0(D0)+1=3

1 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 0(D0=-4)

0 0 1 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 0(D0)+1=4

1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 01 1 1 1 1 1(D0=-5)

0 0 1 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 0(D0)+1=5

1 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 1(D0=-32,765)

1 1 1 11 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 01 1(D0)+1=32,765

1 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0(D0=-32,766)

1 1 1 01 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 11 1(D0)+1=32,766

1 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 1(D0=-32,767)

1 1 1 11 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 11 1(D0)+1=32,767

1 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0(D0=-32,768) (D0)+1=32,768

1 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0

Max. absolute value is 32,767




ROR P Rotate to the Right


D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit

command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid. Essential condition: 1≤n≤16 (16-bit), 1≤n≤32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (RORP, DRORP).


ROR Continuous execution RORP Pulse

execution


DROR Continuous execution DRORP Pulse

execution Flag: M1022 (Carry flag)

CommandExplanation

: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places of one time rotation

The bit pattern of device is rotated bit places to the right on every operation of the command.

This command is usually pulse execution (RORP, DRORP).

ProgramExample

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10 will rotate 4 bits to the right, as

shown in the diagram, and b3 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the

carry flag (CY) M1022.

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 11 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 111 1 00 1 0 0

upper bit lower bit

upper bit lower bit

*

X0RORP D10 K4

Rotate to the right

16 bits

Carryflag

Carryflag

After one rotationto the right

D10

D10




ROL P Rotate to the Left



command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid. Essential condition: 1≤n≤16 (16-bit), 1≤n≤32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (ROLP, DROLP).


ROL Continuous execution ROLP Pulse

execution


DROL Continuous execution DROLP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places of one time rotation

The bit pattern of device is rotated bit places to the left on every operation of the command.

This command is usually pulse execution (ROLP, DROLP).

ProgramExample

When X0 goes from OFF → ON, the 16 bit data of D10 will rotate 4 bits to the left, as

shown in the diagram, and b12 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the

carry flag (CY) M1022. X0

D10 K4

1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 01 1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 100 11 0 11 1

16 bits

Rotate to the left

After one rotationto the left

Carryflag

Carryflag

D10

D10upper bit

upper bit lower bit

lower bit




RCR P

Rotate to the Right with the Carry flag



command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) are valid. Essential condition: 1≤n≤16 (16-bit), 1≤n≤32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (RCRP, DRCRP).


RCR Continuous execution RCRP Pulse

execution


DRCR Continuous execution DRCRP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places after one time rotation

The bit pattern of device with the attached carry flag (M1022) is rotated bit places to the right on every operation of the command.

This command is usually pulse execution (RCRP, DRCRP).

ProgramExample

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10, including the attached carry

flag (M1022), will rotate 4 bits to the right, as shown in the diagram, and b3 that

located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag M1022, and that the

original contents of the carry flag M1022 will be moved to the bit of b12.

0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 00 1 0 0 1

1 0 0 0 1 1 0 011 1 00 0 0 01

X0D10 K4

Rotate to the right

16 bitsCarryflag

Carryflag

After one rotationto the right lower bit

lower bitupper bit

upper bit

1D10

D10




RCL P

Rotate to the Left with the Carry flag Attached



command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid. Essential condition: 1≤n≤16 (16-bit), 1≤n≤32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (RCLP, DRCLP).


RCL Continuous execution RCLP Pulse

execution


DRCL Continuous execution DRCLP Pulse

execution Flag：M1022 (Carry flag)

CommandExplanation

: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places after one time rotation

The bit pattern of device with the attached carry flag (M1022) is rotated bit places to the left on every operation of the command.

This command is usually pulse execution (RCLP, DRCLP).

ProgramExample

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10, including the attached carry

flag (M1022), will rotate 4 bits to the left, as shown in the diagram, and b12 that

located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag M1022, and that the

original contents of the carry flag M1022 will be moved to the bit of b3. X0

RCLP D10 K4

1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 01 1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 100 00 11 1 1

16 bits

Rotate to the left

After one rotationto the left

Carryflag

Carryflag

upper bit lower bit

upper bit lower bit

D10

D10



API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH34

SFTR P

Shifts the Data of Device Specified to the Right


S D n1 n2 Note: Essential condition: 1≤n1≤1024, 1≤ n2≤n1

In ES series models: 1≦n2≦n1≦512 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFTRP).


SFTR Continuous execution SFTRP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of

specified shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length

: Bit places after one time shift

Shifts data bits of device to the right by bits. bits, which

begin with , are shifted to the right. This command is usually pulse execution (SFTRP).

ProgramExample

When X0 is in the rising-edge, the 16 bit data of M0~M15 will shift 4 bits to the right.

Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFTR command of one time scan.

M3~M0 → carry

M7~M4 → M3~M0

M11~M8 → M7~M4

M15~M12 → M11~M8

X3~X0 → M15~M12 complete X0

SFTR X0 M0 K16 K4

X3 X2 X1 X0

M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

1234

5

4 bits in a group shift to the right

carry




SFTL P

Shifts the Data of Device Specified to the Left


S D n1 n2 Note: Essential condition: 1≤n1≤1024, 1≤ n2≤n1

In ES series models: 1≦n2≦n1≦512 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFTLP).


SFTL Continuous execution SFTLP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation



: Bits after one time shift

Shifts data bits of device to the left by bits. bits, which

begin with , are shifted to the left. This command is usually pulse execution (SFTLP).

ProgramExample

When X0 is in the rising-edge, the 16 bit data of M0~M15 will rotate 4 bits to the left.

Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFTL command of one time scan.

M15~M12 → carry

M11~M8 → M15~M12

M7~M4 → M11~M8

M3~M0 → M7~M4

X3~X0 → M3~M0 complete

X0SFTR X0 M0 K16 K4

X3 X2 X1 X0

M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

1 2 3 4

5

4 bits in a group shift to the left

carry




WSFR P Shift the Register to the Right

－


S D n1 n2 Note: When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D

(destination) the specified device must be equal, for example, one kind is the KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS and the other kind is T, C, D. When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D (destination) the Kn value must be equal. Essential condition: 1≤n1≤512, 1≤ n2≤n1 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (WSFR, WSFRP).


WSFR Continuous execution WSFRP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation



: Words after one time shift

Shifts data words of device to the right by words. words,

which begin with , are shifted to the right. This command is usually pulse execution (WSFRP).

ProgramExample

1

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 register data of D20~D35 are paralleled a shift

area and shift 4 register to the right.

Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFR command of one times.

D23~D20 → carry D27~D24 → D23~D20 D31~D28 → D27~D24 D35~D32 → D31~D28 D13 ~D10 → D35~D32 complete

X0WSFRP D10 K16D20 K4

D13 D12 D11 D10


1234

54 registers in one group shift to the right

Carry



ProgramExample

2

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the word register data of Y10~Y27 are paralleled a

shift area and shift 2 digits to the right.

Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFR command of one time shift.

Y17~Y10 → carry

Y27~Y20 → Y17~Y10

X27~X20 → Y27~Y20 complete

X0WSFRP K1X20 K4 K2

X27 X26 X25 X24

Y27 Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10

12

32 digits shift to the right

Carry

K1Y10

When using Kn device, the specified value must be equal

X23 X22 X21 X20


WSFL P Shift the Register to the Left

－


S D n1 n2 Note: When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D

(destination) the specified device must be equal, for example, one kind is the KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS and the other kind is T, C, D. When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D (destination) the Kn value must be equal. Essential condition: 1≤n1≤512, 1≤ n2≤n1 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (WSFL, WSFLP)


WSFL Continuous execution WSFLP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of specified

shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length : Words after one time shift

Shifts data words of device to the left by words. words, which

begin with , are shifted to the left. This command is usually pulse execution (WSFLP).



ProgramExample

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 register data of D20~D35 are paralleled a shift area

and shift 4 register to the right.

Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFL command of one time shift.

D35~D32 → carry

D31~D28 → D35~D32

D27~D24 → D31~D28

D23~D20 → D27~D24

D13~D10 → D23~D20 complete

1 3 4

5

2

4 registers in one group shift to the left

Carry

X0WSFLP D10 K16D20 K4

D13 D12 D11 D10



ES EP EH38 SFWR

P Shift Register Write －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: Essential condition: 2≤n≤512

Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFWR, SFWRP).


SFWR Continuous execution SFWRP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1022 (Carry flag)

CommandExplanation

: Source device which the data is written in : Head address device : Data length

is the length of the First-in/First-OUT stack and the destination device is the head address device of the First-in/First-OUT stack. Use the first number device

as the pointer and add 1 to the content value of the pointer when executing this

command. The contents of the devices specified by are written into the position

specified by the pointer of the First-in/First-OUT stack. If the contents of the

pointer exceed the value “n-1”, the insertion into the First-in/First-OUT stack will stop and the carry flag M1022 will be turned ON.

This command is usually pulse execution (SFWRP).

ProgramExample

First, reset the content of D0 to 0. When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the content of D0

becomes 1 when the content of D20 is created and built in D1. After changing the

content of D20, X0 is executed to goes from OFF to ON again, then the content of D0

becomes 2 when the content of D20 is created and built in D2.



Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFWR command.

The content of D20 is created and built in D1. The content of D0 becomes 1.

X10RST D0

D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0D20

X0SFWRP D20 -K10D0

reset the content of D0 to 0 (zero) previously

pointer

n = 10 points

D0 = 3 2 1

Footnote

This API 38 SFWR command can be used with the API 39 SFRD command to execute

the Write-in/Read Control of the First-in/First-OUT stack.


SFRD P Shift Register Read

－


S D n Note: Essential condition: 2≤n≤512

Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFRD, SFRDP).


SFRD Continuous execution SFRDP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)

CommandExplanation

: Head address device : destination device : Data length

is the length of the First-in/First-OUT stack and the source device is the

head address device of the First-in/First-OUT stack. Use the first number device as the pointer and subtract 1 to the content value of the pointer when executing this

command. The contents of the devices specified by are written into the position specified by the pointer of the First-in/First-OUT stack. If the contents of the pointer

are equal to 0 (zero), the First-in/First-OUT stack will be empty and the carry flag M1022 will be turned ON.

This command is usually pulse execution (SFRDP).



ProgramExample

When X1 goes from OFF to ON, D9~D2 are all shifted one register to the right and the

content of D0 is substracted by 1 when the content of D1 is read and moved to D21.

Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFRD command.

The content of D1 is read and moved to D21.

D9~D2 are all shifted one register to the right.

The content of D0 is substracted by 1.

D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D21

X0SFRDP D0 K10D21

n = 10 points

data read

pointer

Footnote

This API 38 SFWR command can be used with the API 39 SFRD command to execute

the Write-in/Read Control of the First-in/First-OUT stack.


ZRST P Resets a Range of Device Specified


D1 D2 Note: Essential condition: D1 must be less than or equal to (≦) D2.

Operand D1 and D2 must be in the same category. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ZRSTP).


ZRST Continuous execution ZRSTP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: First destination device : Second destination device For ES series models, standard and High speed counters cannot be mixed.

For EH/EP series models, standard and High speed counters can be mixed use.

When > , then only device is reset. This command is usually pulse execution (ZRSTP).



ProgramExample

When X0 is ON, M300 to M399 (auxiliary relays) will be reset to OFF.

When X1 is ON, C0 to C127 (16-bit counter) will all be reset. (0 is written in and

contact and coil will be reset to OFF)

When X10 is ON, T0 to T127 (timer) will all be reset. (0 is written in and contact and

coil will be reset to OFF)

When X2 is ON, the status of S0 to S127 will be reset to OFF.

When X3 is ON, the data of D0 to D100 (data register) will be reset to 0.

When X4 is ON, C235 to C254 (32-bit counter) will all be reset. (0 is written in and

contact and coil will be reset to OFF)

ZRST M300 M399

ZRST C0 C127

ZRST T0 T127

ZRST S0 S127

ZRST D0 D100

ZRST C235 C254

X0

X1

X10

X2

X3

X4

Footnote

The RST command can be independently used in the bit device, i.e. Y, M, S and in

word device, i.e. T, C, D.

API 16 FMOV command can also be used to transmit the data of K0 to word device,

i.e. T, C, D or to bit register, i.e. KnY, KnM, KnS, just as RST command.

RST M0X0

RST T0

RST Y0

FMOV K0 D10 K5




DECO P 8 → 256 Bits Decoder


S D n Note: When operand D is bit device, n=1~8

When operand D is word device, n=1~4 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DECOP).


DECO Continuous execution DECOP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: Decode source device : Destination device for storing the encode result

: Decode data length

Decodes the data of lower “n” bit of source device and stores the result of “2 n”

bit at device . This command is usually pulse execution (DECOP).

ProgramExample

1

is used in case of a bit device, 0<n≦8. But if n=0 or n>8, the calculation error

will occur.

When n=8, the maxium decoded data is 2 8, equal 256 points. (Must notice the range

of the stored device after decoding. Please do not use repeatly.)

When X10 goes from Off → On, the data of X0~X2 will be decoded to M100~M107.

If data source is 1+2=3, M103 at the third position from M100 turns ON and is set to 1.

After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF. The device which have been

decoded is still action.

DECOP X0 K3M100X10

X2 X1 X0

M107 M106 M105 M104 M103 M102 M101 M100

0 1 1

10 0 0 0 0 0 037 6 5 4 2 1 0

4 12

3



ProgramExample

2

is used in case of a bit device, 0<n≦4, but if n=0 or n>4, the calculation error will

occur.

When n=4, the maxium decoded data is 2 4, equal 16 points.

When X10 goes from Off → On, the data in D10 (b2 to b0) will be decoded and stored

at D20 (b7 to b0). The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b8) will be all set to 0.

Decodes three lower bits in D10 and stores at eight lower bits in D20 (one bit will be 1)

and the content of eight upper bits are all 0.

After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF. The device which have been

decoded is still action.

X10DECOP D10 D20 K3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1111111

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

01234567

124

b15

b15 b0

b0D10

D20

all be 0 (zero)

When 3 is specifiedat b2 to b0 of D10

result after decoding

When 3 is specified as effectivebits, 8 points are occupied.b3 at the third position from

b0 turns ON and is set to 1


ENCO P 256 → 8 Bits Encoder


S D n Note: When operand S is bit device, n=1~8

When operand S is word device, n=1~4 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ENCOP).


ENCO Continuous execution ENCOP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: Encode source device : Destination device for storing encode data

: Encode data length

Encodes the data of lower “2 n” bit in source device and stores the result at

device .

If the source device is a multiple bit and its value is 1, processing is performed for the last bit position.

This command is usually pulse execution (ENCOP).



ProgramExample

1

is used in case of a bit device, 0<n≦8. But if n=0 or n>8, the calculation error

will occur.


When X0 goes from Off → On, the data of 2 3 (M0 to M7) will be decoded and stored

at three lower bits of D0 (b2 to b0). The unused bits in D0 (b15 to b3) will be all set to

0.

After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF and the data in remain unchanged.

ENCOP M0 K3D0X0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100124

b15 b0D01

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 07 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00

all be 0 (zero)

When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied.

result after encoding

Which point, counting from M0, is ON and stored in BIN.

ProgramExample

2

is used in case of a word device, 0<n≦4. But if n=0 or n>4, the calculation error

will occur.


When X0 goes from Off → On, the data of 2 3 (b0 to b7) in D10 will be decoded and

stored at three lower bits (b2 to b0) at D20. The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b3) will be

all set to 0. (b8 to b15 in D10 is not available)

After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF and the data in remain unchanged.

ENCOP D10 K3D20

X0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100b15 b0D20

1

6 5 4 3 2 1 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 01 0 0111

b15

b0

7D10

all be 0 (zero)

Data inactivated

result after encoding

When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied.




SUM P Sum of ON Bits


S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in

16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (SUMP, DSUMP).


SUM Continuous execution SUMP Pulse


DSUM Continuous execution DSUMP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Source device : Destination device for storing counted number If the contents of these 16 bits are all “0”, the “Zero” flag, M1020=ON.

will occupy two registers when using in 32-bit command.

ProgramExample

When X10 is ON, all the bits that with “1” as its content within D0 will be counted and have this counted number stored in D2.

X10SUM D0 D2

0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 10 0 0 00 0 3

D2D0


ES EP EH44 D BON

P Check Specified Bit Status


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: If operand S uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit

command. Essential condition: n=0~15 (16-bit), n=0~31 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (BONP, DBONP).

16-bit command (7 STEP)

BON Continuous execution BONP Pulse

execution


DBON Continuous execution DBONP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Source device : Result device for storing determined bit : Specified determined bit

ProgramExample

When X0 is ON, and if the 15th bit of D0 is “1”, M0 is ON. But if the 15th bit of D0 is “0”,

M0 is OFF.

Once X0 is switched to OFF, M0 will stay at its previous ON/OFF status.



.

X0BON D0 M0

0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 10 0 0 00 0D0

K15

b0M0=Off

b15

1 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 10 0 0 00 0D0

b0M0=On

b15


ES EP EH 45 D MEAN

P Mean Value


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in

16-bit command. Essential condition: n=1~64 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (MEANP, DMEANP).


MEAN Continuous execution MEANP Pulse


DMEAN Continuous execution DMEANP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Starting device for taking mean value : Destination device for storing

the mean value : Device number for taking mean value

Add the contents of registers specified by , and have the sum divided by

to take a mean value. To save this mean value in the designated . If there is remainder in this calculation, ignore the remainder.

If the specified device number exceeds the normal usable range, only those that within

the range could be processed.

If the value of is out of the stated range (1~64), an “operation error” will be generated.

ProgramExample

When X10 is ON, add up the contents of the three registers starting from D0 (specified

by this command), and divide the sum by three to take the mean vlaue. Then store this

mean value in the specified device D10 and ignore the remainder.

MEAN D0 K3D10X10

(D0+D1+D2)/D3 D10

D0

D1

D2

K100

K113

K125

K112 D10

reminder = 3, be ignored




ANS Alarm Device Output

－


S m D Note: Operand S available range: for EP series: T0~T191

for EH series: T0~T199. Operand m available range: K0~K32,767, in units of 100 msOperand D available range: S900~S1023 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ANS).


ANS Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1048 (Alarm point is activated)

M1049 (Monitor is valid) Refer to following for detail.

CommandExplanation

: A timer which detect alarm : Time setting : Alarm device ANS command is used to drive the output alarm device.

If alarm device S999=On when X3 is On for more than 5 seconds, S999 will keep

being On afterward even X3=Off later. (but T10 will be reset to Off, present value=0)

ProgramExample

X3ANS T10 K50 S999


ES EP EH47 ANR

P Alarm Device Reset

－


Note: No operand ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ANR, ANRP).


ANR Continuous execution ANRP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

ANR command is used to reset alarm device.

When several alarm devices are ON, the lower number of alarm device will be reset.

This command is usually pulse execution (ANRP).

ProgramExample

When X10 and X11 are simultaneously ON more than 2 seconds, the alarm device

S910 is ON. Then even if X10 and X11 are changed to OFF, the alarm device S910

will still remain ON. (But T10 will reset to OFF, present value is 0.)

When X10 and X11 are simultaneously ON less than 2 seconds, the present value of

T10 is reset to 0.



When X3 goes from Off → On,

for EP series, the activated alarm device S896~S1023 will be reset.

for EH series, the activated alarm device S899~S1023 will be reset.

When X3 goes from Off → On again, the second lower alarm device will be reset. X10

ANS T10 K20 S910X11

X3ANRP

Footnote

Flag:

1. M1048 (Alarm device is activated): When M1049 is driven to be ON, if any one alarm

device of S899~S1023 (in EP series)/ S899~S1023 (in EH series) outputs, M1048 is

ON.

2. M1049(Monitor is valid): When M1049 is driven to be ON, D1049 will automatically

display the lowest number during the execution of this command.

Application of alarm device: I/O devices arrangement: X0: forward switch, X1: backward switch, X2: front location switch, X3: back location

switch, X4: alarm device reset button, Y0: forward, Y1: forward, Y2: alarm indicator,

S910: forward alarm device, S920: backward alarm

Y0ANS T0 K100 S910

X2

X4ANRP

M1000M1049

Y1ANS T1 K200 S920

X3

X0Y0

X2

M1048Y2

Y0

X1Y1

X3

Y1



1. When M1049=On, M1048, D1049 is valid. 2. If Y0=ON more than 10 seconds and not reach the front location X2, S910=ON. 3. If Y1=ON more than 20 seconds and not reach the back location X3, S920=ON. 4. When backward switch X1=ON, backward device Y1=ON and the signal reach

the back location switch X3, Y1 is switched to be OFF. 5. If there is a driven alarm device, alarm indicator Y2=ON. 6. The alarm device which have been activated will be reset one by one, each time

the reset button X4 of alarm device is ON during the execution of this command. The lower activated alarm device is reset on every execution of this command.


SQR P Square Root of BIN

－


S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in

16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (SQR, SQRP, DSQR, DSQRP).


SQR Continuous execution DSQR Pulse

execution


SQRP Continuous execution DSQRP Pulse


M1021 (Borrow flag) M1067 (Operation error)

CommandExplanation

: Source device : Destination device which store the result

This command performs a square root operation on source device and stores

the result at the destination device .

only can be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a negative value will result in an “operation error” this command will not be

executed.The error flag M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 records error code

“0E1B” (hexadecimal).

The operation result of is calculated as the integer only, decimal is ignored. If there is decimal ignored, the Borrow flag M1021=ON.

When operation result of is 0, the Zero flag M1020=On.

ProgramExample

When X10=On, the content of D0 will be stored in D12 after the operation of square

root. X10

SQR D0 D12

D0 D12




FLT P

Convert BIN Integer to Binary Floating Point

－－


S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.

ES series models do not support pulse execution command (FLT, FLTP, DFLT, DFLTP).


FLT Continuous execution DFLT Pulse

execution


FLTP Continuous execution DFLTP Pulse

execution Flag: M1081 (FLT command function

exchange)

CommandExplanation

: Source device : Destination device which store the converted result When M1081 is OFF, the source data is converted from BIN integer to binary floating

point. At this time, source device of 16-bit command FLT occupies 1 register

and Destination device occupies 2 registers. If absoluted value of conversion result is larger than max. floating value, carry flag

M1022=On.

If absoluted value of conversion result is less than min. floating value, carry flag

M1021=On.

If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.

When M1081 is ON, the source data is converted from binary floating point to BIN

integer. (ignore the decimal) At this time, source device of 16-bit command FLT

occupies 2 registers and Destination device occupies 1 register. The action is the same as command INT.

If conversion result exceeds BIN integer range of (16-bit is -32,768~32,767 and 32-bit is -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647), it wil be represented with max. value or min.

value. Then carry flag will be set to M1022=On.

If the decimal of conversion result is ignored, borrow flag M1021=On.


After conversion, is saved by 16 bits.

ProgramExample

1

When M1081 is OFF, the source data is converted from BIN integer to binary floating

point.

When X10 is ON, D0 (BIN integer) is converted to D13, D12 (binary floating point).

When X11 is ON, D1, D0 (BIN integer) are converted to D21, D20 (binary floating

point).

If D0=K10, X10 will be On. 32-bit of floating point after conversioin will be H41200000

and it will be saved in 32-bit register D12(D13).

If 32-bit register D0(D1)=K100,000, X11 will be On. 32-bit of floating point after

conversioin will be H4735000 and it will be saved in 32-bit register D20(D21).



M1002RST M1081

X10FLT D0 D12

X11DFLT D0 D20

ProgramExample

2

When M1081 is On, the source data is converted from binary floating point to BIN

integer. (ignore the decimal)

When X10 is ON, D0 and D1(binary floating point) are converted to D12 (BIN integer).

If D0(D1)=H47C35000, the floating point is 100,000. The execution result will be

D12=K32,767, M1022=On due to the value exceeds max. value of 16-bit register D12.

When X11 is ON, D1, D0 (binary floating point) are converted to D21, D20 (BIN

integer). If D0(D1)=H47C35000, the floating point is 100,000. The result will be saved

in 32-bit register D20(D21). M1002

SET M1081

X10FLT D0 D12

X11DFLT D0 D20

ProgramExample

3

Please use this application command to complete the following operation.

(D10) (X7~X0) K61.516 BIN bit 2 bit BCD

(D21,D20)

(D101,D100) (D200) BIN

(D203,D202)

(D301,D300)

(D401,D400)

(D31,D30)

(D41,D40)

1 2

3

45

6

7

8

binary floating point

binary floating pointbinary floating point



decimal floating point (for monitor)

32 integer bit



M1000

FLT D10 D100

BIN K2X0 D200

FLT D200 D202

DEDIV K615 K10

DEDIV D100 D202

DEMUL D400 D300

DEBCD D20 D30

DINT D20 D40

D300

D400

D20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 1. Covert D10 (BIN integer) to D101, D100 (binary floating point).

2. Covert the value of X7~X0 (BCD value) to D200 (BIN value).

3. Covert D200 (BIN integer) to D203, D202 (binary floating point).

4. Save the result of K615 ÷ K10 to D301, D300 (binary floating point).

5. The division of binary floating point:

Save the result of of (D101, D100) ÷ (D203, D202) to D401, D400 (binary floating

point).

6. The multiplication of binary floating point:

Save the result of (D401, D400) × (D301, D300) to D21, D20 (binary floating point).

7. Covert binary floating point (D21, D20) to decimal floating point (D31, D30).

8. Covert binary floating point (D21, D20) to BIN integer (D41, D40).


DVP-PLC Application Manual

7-1


REF P I/O Refresh Immediately


D n Note: Operand D should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30…

etc., so it should be X0, X10, Y0, Y10… etc., please refer to the command explanation. Essential condition: n=8~256, and should be a multiple of 8, i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32…etc. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (REFP).


REF Continuous execution REFP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: Starting device of I/O refresh : Refreshed I/O number The state of all PLC inputs and outputs will be refreshed after scanning to END. The

state of inputs is read from external inputs to save in inputs memory. The output

terminals send outputs memory to output device after END command. Therefore, this

command can be used during algorithm process when need to input/output the newest

data.

The state of all inputs and outputs may change immediately after they are scanned.

If the user does not want to wait for the next scan time, the REF command may be

used.

should always be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30… etc., so it should be X0,

X10, Y0, Y10… etc. should always be a multiple of 8, i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32…etc.

and its available range is 8~256. If the value of is out of the stated range (8~256) or not a multiple of 8, an “operation error” will be generated. The usage range

may be different by various models, please refer to the footnote for detail.

ProgramExample

1

When X0 = ON, PLC will read the state of X0~X7 input points immediately and

refreshed. There is no input delay occurs. X0

REF X0 K16



ProgramExample

2

When X0 = ON, the output signal Y0~Y7 (8 points) are sent to output terminal

immediately and refreshed. It desn’t need to output till END command. X0

REF Y0 K8

Footnote

For ES and EP series models, the input and output points processed by this command

are the I/O points of MPU: X0~X17, Y0~Y17 and n=K8 or K16.


REFF P

Refresh and Adjust the Response Time of Input Filter

－


n Note: None


REFF Continuous execution REFFP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: Response time setting, in units of ms. PLC is provided with the input filter to prevent the noises or interferences. The input

filters of X0~X17 inputs of DVP series PLC are digital filters and using REFF

command can adjust the response time of the input filters. Command will set in D1020 and D1021 directly and adjust reaction time of X0~X7 and X10~X17

separately.

The operation rules when the input filters of X0~X17 inputs of DVP series PLC adjust

the response time:

When the power of PLC turns from Off to On or execute to END command,

response time is decided by the content value of D1020 and D1021.

During the program, the setting value can be moved to D1020 and D1021by using

MOV command.

The response time can be changed by using REFF command in the execution of

the program. At this time, the response time specified by REFF command will be

moved into D1020, D1021and it will be adjusted again in the next scan.



7-3

ProgramExample

When the power of PLC turns from Off to On, the

response time of X0~X17 inputs is decided by the

content value of D1020 and D1021.

When X20=On, REFF K5 command is executed,

respone time is changed to 5 ms and and it will

be adjusted again in the next scan.

When X20=Off, the REFF command will not be

executed, the response time is changed to 20ms

and it will be adjusted again in the next scan.

X20REFF K5

X0Y1

X20REFF K20

X1Y2

END

Footnote

When using the interrupt parameters, or high-speed counter, or SPD command (API

56), the response time of corresponding input terminals won’t delay and its action has

no ralation with this command. API Applicable models

ES EP EH52 MTR

Input Matrix －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D1 D2 n Note: Operand S should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30…

etc., so it should be X0, X10… etc. and occupies 8 continuous devices. Operand D1 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30… etc., so it should be Y0, Y10… etc. and occupies n continuous devices Operand D2 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30… etc., so it should be Y0, M0, S0… etc. Essential condition: n=2~8 Refer to each model specification for usage range.


MTR Continuous execution －－

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag

CommandExplanation

: Head address of input matrix : Head address of output matrix :

Corresponding head address of matrix scan : Number of banks for the matrix

is the head address that specify all inputs of the matrix. Once the input is specified, a selection of 8 continuous input devices is called as “input matrix”.

is the head address of transister output Y of the matrix.



This command allows a selection of 8 continuous input devices (head address )

to be used multiple ( ) times. Each input has more than one and different signal being processed. Each set of 8 input signals are grouped into a “bank” and

there are number of banks. Each bank is selected by the quantity of outputs

from , used to achieve the matrix are equal to the number of banks . The

result is stored in a matrix-table which starts at corresponding head address . The maximum inputs can achieve 64 inputs (8 inputs’ 8 banks).

When this command is used on an interrupt format, processing each bank of inputs

every 25msec. This would result in an 8 bank matrix, i.e. 64 inputs (8 inputs’ 8 banks)

being read in 200msec. Hence, this command is not available for the input signal

which its On/Off speed is over than 200ms.

It is recommended to use special auxiliary relay M1000, normally open contact.

After the completion of performing MTR command, the command execution completed

flag M1029 is turned ON and this flag is automatically reset when the MTR command

is turned OFF.

This command can only be used ONCE.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, MTR command starts to execute. The external 2 banks, total 16

devices are read by order and the result are stored in the internal relay M10~M17,

M20~M27. M1000

MTR X40 Y40 M10 K2

The figure below is an example wiring diagram for the operation of MTR command.

The external 2 banks consist of X40~47 and Y40~41 and total 16 devices correspond

to the internal relay M10~M17, M20~M27 are used with MTR command. For a general

precaution to aid successful operation, diodes should be placed after each input

devices. These diodes should have a rating of 0.1A, 50V.



7-5

COM X40 X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X47X46

COM Y40 Y41 Y42 Y43 Y44 Y45 Y47Y46

M10

X41

M20

M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17

X42 X43 X44 X45 X46 X47

M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27

Diode0.1A/50V

Input devices

When output Y40 is ON, only those inputs in the first bank are read. These result are

stored in auxiliary coils M10~M17. The second step involves Y40 going OFF and Y41

coming ON and this time only inputs in the second bank are read. These results are

stored in M20~M27.

2 4Y41

Y40

25ms

1 3

Read input signal in the first bank

Read input signal in the second bank

Processing time of each bank is about 25ms




HSCS

High-speed Counter Comparison SET


S1 S2 D Note: Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244,

C246~C249, C251~C254 or available high-speed counters, please refer to the footnote for details. The usage range of operand D: I010 to I060 can be set, also can use index register E, F to modify. There is no 16-bit command for API 53, only 32-bit command DHSCS is available. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES and EP series models, operand S2 and D cannot use index register E, F to modify.

16-bit command

－－－－


DHSCS Continuous execution －－

Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the footnote for details. M1289~M1294. High-speed counter interrupt disabled flags in EH series models. Refer to the program example 3 below.

CommandExplanation

: Compare value : Numver of high-speed counter : Compare result

All high-speed counters use an interrupt process, therefore, all compare result devices

are updated immediately. HSCS command compares the current value of the selected high-speed counter

against a selected comapre value . When the counters currrent value

changes to a value equal to , the device specified as is set ON. Even if

the compare result is unequal, the status of device will still be ON.

If the devices specified as the device are Y0~Y17, when the compare value and the present value of high-speed counter are equal, the compare result will

immediately output to the external inputs Y0~Y17, and other Y devices will be affected

by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are immediate output, not being affected by

the scan cycle.

ProgramExample

1

After PLC perform the RUN command, if M0=On, DHSCS command starts to operate.

Y10 will ON immediately when C235’s present value stepped from 99→100 or 101→

100 and be ON constantly. M1000

DCNT C235 K1000

M0DHSCS K100 C235 Y10 On immediately



7-7

ProgramExample

2

Difference between Y output of DHSCS command and general Y output:

When C249’s value stepped from 99→100 and 101→100, Y10 output of DHSCS

command immediately output to the external output by using interrupt process so it

is irrelevant to the program scan time. However, there will still be a delay due to the

output of module relay (10ms) or transistor (10us).

When the present value of high-speed timer C249 changes from 99 to 100, C249

will be activated, and Y17 will be ON after END command due to the program scan

time. M1000

DCNT C249 K100

SET Y17C249

DHSCS K100 C249 Y10 ON immediately

ProgramExample

3

High-speed counter interrupt:

ES series models do not support high-speed counter interrupt function.

The limit when EP series models using high-speed counter interrupt

When using DHSCS command to specify I interrupt, the specified high-speed

counter can not be use in other DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ command. If using it, it

will result in error.

The interrupt pointers I010 to I060 can be used as D operand of DHSCS command

and this enables the interrupt routine to be executed when the value of the

specified high-speed counter reaches the value in DHSCS command.

In EP series models, there are six high-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030,

I040, I050, I060 6 points can be used. I010 is used with C235, C241, C244, C246,

C247, C249, C251, C252, C254. I020 is used with C236; I030 is used with C237,

C242; I040 is used with C238; I050 is used with C239 and I060 is used with C240.

When the present value of C251 changes from 99→100and 101→100, the

program will jump to the interrupt pointer I010 to execute the interrupt routine.



M1000DCNT C251 K1000

FEND

DHSCS K100 C251 I010

M1000Y1

IRET

END

I010

In EP series models, M1059 is high-speed counter interrupt inhibit flag.

In EH series models, M1289~M1294 are high-speed counter interrupt inhibit flag, I010

to I060 masked. For example, when M1294 is On, Interrupt pointer I060 masked. Interrupt pointer

I Number interrupt inhibit

flag Interrupt pointer

I Number interrupt inhibit flag

I010 M1289 I040 M1292 I020 M1290 I050 M1293 I030 M1291

I060 M1294

Footnote

The ouput contact of high-speed counter and the compare output of DHSCS (API 53)

command, DHSCR (API 54) command and DHSZ(API 55) command are all activated

when there are counted inputs. If using data operation command, such as DADD,

DMOV…etc. commands to change the present value of high-speed counter equal to

the setting value, there is comparsion will be set or output because there is no counted

inputs.

High-speed counter provided in ES series models: total counting frequency is 30 KHz.1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Type

Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254

X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A X1 U/D R R D D D B B B X2 U/D U/D R R R R X3 U/D R S S S

U: Increasing input A: A phase input S: Start input D: Decreasing input B: B phase input R: Reset input

1. Input point X0 and X1 can plan to be higher speed counter and 1-phase can be up

to 30KHz. But total counting frequency of these input points should be less than or

equal to total frequency 30KHz. If counting input is A/B phase signal, frequency will

be four times of counting frequency. Therefore, counting frequency of A/B phase is

almost 7KHz.

2. In ES series models, DHSCS and DHSCR command can not be used more than 4

times.



7-9

High-speed counter provided in EP series models:

1-phase high-speed counter: total counting frequency is 30 KHz.

1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Type

Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254

X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A AX1 U/D R R D D D B B BX2 U/D U/D R R R RX3 U/D R S S SX4 U/D X5 U/D


1. Input point X0 and X1 can plan to be higher speed counter and 1-phase can be up

to 30KHz. But total counting frequency of these input points should be less than or

equal to total frequency 30KHz. If counting input is A/B phase signal, frequency will

be four times of counting frequency. Therefore, counting frequency of A/B phase is

almost 7KHz.

2. Input X5 has two functions.

• When M1260=Off, C240 is general U/D high-speed counter.

• When M1260=On, X5 is the global reset of C235~C239. 3. In EP series models, DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ command can not be used more

than 6 times. High-speed counter provided in EH series models:

1. Program interrupt type 1-phase high-speed counter, C235~C240: general counting

frequency is up to 10KHz, maximum total counting frequency is 20 KHz.

2. DVP-EH series has four Hardware high-speed counter (hereinafter referred to as

HHSC), HHSC0~3 and available device number for HHSC0~3 are C241~ C254.

Pulse output frequency of each group can reach 250 KHz.

Available device number for HHSC0: C241, C246, C251




• Each HHSC can only be specified one time for one device number. Use

DCNT command to specify the HHSC.

• Available counter modes of each HHSC:

1). 1-phase 1 input, also called as Pulse/Direction mode

2). 1-phase 2 inputs, also called as CW/CCW mode.

3). 2-phase 2 inputs, also called as AB phase mode.



3. Please refer to the following table for the available high-speed counters:

Counter Type

Program interrupt type 1-phase high-speed counter Hardware high-speed counter

1-phase 1 input 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase input Type

Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254

X0 U/D U/D U A X1 U/D D B X2 U/D R R R X3 U/D S S S X4 U/D U/D U A X5 U/D D B X6 R R R X7 S S S X10 U/D U A X11 D B X12 R R R X13 S S S X14 U/D U AX15 D BX16 R R RX17 S S S


4. In the program of DVP EH series models, there is no limited using time for

hardware high-speed counter related commands, like DHSCS, DHSCR and

DHSZ. However, there are limited using times for executing the commands

simultaneously. DHSCS, DHSCR command will use one group setting and DHSZ

command will use two groups settings. When these commands are executed

simultaneously, the total used groups settings can not exceed eight groups

settings. If exceeding eight groups settings, system will totalize the used memory

units of the commands which have been scanned and executed first, the others will

be ignored.

5. System structure of hardware high-speed counter:



7-11

HHSC0

HHSC1

HHSC2

HHSC3

M1265

M1273

M1267

M1275

M1269

M1277

M1271

M1279

X3 X7 X17X13

M1272 M1274 M1276 M1278

M1264 M1266 M1268 M1270X2 X6 X12 X16

M1241 M1242 M1243 M1244C241 C242 C243 C244

D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228

X1 X5 X11 X15

X14X10X4X0







M1246

M1247

M1248

M1249 M1254

M1253

M1252

M1251

DHSCS

DHSCR

DHSCZ

SET/RESETI 060 interruptcounting value reset010 ~ I

I 010I 020I 030I 040I 050I 060

M1289M1290M1291M1292M1293M1294M1294

HHSC0

HHSC1

HHSC2

HHSC3

DHSCS occupies one group setting valueDHSCR occupies one group setting valueDHSCZ occupies two groups setting value

ANDOR

Reset signal R

ANDOR

U/D mode setting flag

Counting modeselection

U/DUA

BD

Counting up/down flag

Setting value:0~3 respectivelyrepresent Mode 1~4(1~4 ) frequency mode

Counting pulse

Counting pulse

Comparator

Current valueof counter

Start signal S

Interrupt inhibit flag

High speedcompar isoncommand

Comparison valuereached operation

Comparison valuereached output

Comparison valuereached setting

6. HHSC0~3 all have reset and start signal of external input. Reset signal (R) can be

set by M1272/M1274/M1276/M1278 (belong to HHSC0 ~3) and start signal can be

set by M1273/M1275/M1277/M1279 (belong to HHSC0 ~3). When using

high-speed counter, if do not use the external signal input of R and S, you can set

M1264/M1266/M1268/M1270 and M1265/M1267/M1269 /M1271 as TRUE. Close

the operation of the input signal and the corresponding external inputs can be used

as general inputs. Please refer to the above example figure for usage.

7. Select counter modes

High-speed conter of ES / EP series is 2-phase 2 inputs counter mode and set by

special device D1022 with four double frequency modes. The content value of

register D1022 is loaded at the first scan time when PLC controller switch from

Stop to Run status. (Only V5.5 and above of DVP-ES series MPU support this

function) Device No. Function Explanation

D1022 Use counting method of counter to set double frequency

D1022=K1 Select (normal frequency) mode D1022=K2 Select (double frequency) mode D1022=K4 Select (4 times frequency) mode



Double frequency mode: Counter mode Signal Diagram

1(normal frequency)

A-phase

B-phase


2(double frequency)

A-phase

B-phase


2-phase 2 inputs

4(four times frequency)

A-phase

B-phase


According to the different type of counter modes, HHSC 0~3 of EH series models can set

normal, double, thriple and four times these four frequency modes by using special

device D1225 to D1228:

Counter mode Signal Diagram

Type Setting value of special D Counting up(+1) Counting down(-1)

0 (normal

frequency)

U/D

U/D FLAG 1-phase1 input 1

(double frequency)

U/D

U/D FLAG 0

(normal frequency)

U

D 1-phase2 inputs 1

(double frequency)

U

D



7-13

Counter mode Signal Diagram

Type Setting value of special D Counting up(+1) Counting down(-1)

0 (normal

frequency)

A

B 1

(double frequency)

A

B 2

(triple frequency)

A

B

2-phase 2 inputs

3 (four times frequency)

A

B

U/D FLAG are special M device, M1241~M1244 and each indicates the setting flag of

C241~C244 counting up and down. Related flags and special register of high-speed counter:

Flag Function Explanation

M1150 Announce that DHSZ command is used as multi groups setting value compare mode

M1151 DHSZ command multi groups setting value compare mode execution completed

M1152 Announce that DHSZ command is used as frequency control mode

M1153 Frequency control mode execution completed

M1235 ~ M1244Specify counting direction of C235 ~ C244 high-speed counter When M12□□=Off, C2□□ counting up When M12□□=On, C2□□ counting down

M1246 ~ M1249M1251 ~ M1254

Monitor counting direction of C246~C249, C251~C254 high-speed counter When C2□□ counting up, M12□□=Off. C2□□ counting down, M12□□=On.

M1260 X5 is the reset input signal of all high-speed counters M1261 High-speed compare flag of DHSCR command

M1264 HHSC0 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disable




M1265 HHSC0 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disableM1266 HHSC1 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disableM1267 HHSC1 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disableM1268 HHSC2 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disableM1269 HHSC2 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disableM1270 HHSC3 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disableM1271 HHSC3 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disableM1272 HHSC0 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact M1273 HHSC0 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact M1274 HHSC1 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact M1275 HHSC1 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact M1276 HHSC2 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact M1277 HHSC2 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact M1278 HHSC3 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact M1279 HHSC3 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact M1289 High-speed counter interrupt, I010 masked M1290 High-speed counter interrupt, I020 masked M1291 High-speed counter interrupt, I030 masked M1292 High-speed counter interrupt, I040 masked M1293 High-speed counter interrupt, I050 masked M1294 High-speed counter interrupt, I060 masked M1312 C235 Start input control M1313 C236 Start input control M1314 C237 Start input control M1315 C238 Start input control M1316 C239 Start input control M1317 C240 Start input control M1320 C235 Reset input control M1321 C236 Reset input control M1322 C237 Reset input control M1323 C238 Reset input control M1324 C239 Reset input control M1325 C240 Reset input control M1328 C235 Start/Reset enable control M1329 C236 Start/Reset enable control M1330 C237 Start/Reset enable control M1331 C238 Start/Reset enable control M1332 C239 Start/Reset enable control M1333 C240 Start/Reset enable control



7-15

Special register Function Explanation

D1022 Double frequency selection of AB phase counter in ES/EP series models

D1150 DHSZ command for table counting register of multi-group setting comparison mode

D1151 DHSZ command for table counting register of frequency control mode D1152

(lower-bit) D1153

(upper-bit)

DHSZ command saves table counting register value that read in sequence from pulse output frequency of each group in D1153 and D1152.

D1225 First counter counting method setting, C241, C246, C251 counter mode D1226 Second counter counting method setting, C242, C247, C252 counter modeD1227 Third counter counting method setting, C243, C248, C253 counter mode D1228 Forth counter counting method setting, C244, C249, C254 counter mode

D1225 ~ D1228

Counter mode of Hardware high-speed counter, HHSC0~HHSC3 of EH series model When setting value is 0, it is normal frequency counter mode. When setting value is 1, it is double frequency counter mode. When setting value is 2, it is triple frequency counter mode. When setting value is 3, it is four times frequency counter mode.


ES EP EH54 D HSCR

32-bit High-speed Counter Comparison Reset


S1 S2 D Note: Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244,

C246~C249, C251~C254. Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for details. Operand D uses the same counter as S2 operand. There is no 16-bit command for API 54, only 32-bit command DHSCR is available. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES and EP series models, D operand cannot use C device. In ES and EP series models, S2, D operand cannot use index register E, F to modify.

16-bit command

－－－－

32-bit command (13STEPS)

DHSCR Continuous execution －－

Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for details. M1261. High-speed counter external reset mode selection. ES and EP series models doesn’t support. Refer to the footnote for details.

CommandExplanation

: Compare value : Numver of high-speed counter : Compare result

HSCR command compares the current value of the selected high-speed counter

against a selected comapre value . When the counters currrent value

changes to a value equal to , the device specified as is set Off. Even if the

compare result is unequal, the status of device will still be Off.



If the devices specified as the device are Y0~Y17, when the compare value and the present value of high-speed counter are equal, the compare result will

immediately output to the external inputs Y0~Y17 (specified Y output will be reset),

and other Y devices will be affected by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are

immediate output, not being affected by the scan cycle.

ProgramExample

1

When M0=On and C251’s present value stepped from 99→100 or 101→100, Y10 will

be set Off.

When C251’s present value change from 199 to 200, the contact C251 will be On and

force Y0=On, but there will still be a program scan time delay output.

Y10 is status immediately reset device when specified counter reach. It also can be

used to specify the same number high-speed counter. Please refer to the program

example 2. M1000

DCNT C251 K200

M0DHSCR K100 C251 Y10

C251SET Y0

ProgramExample

2

When specifing the same number high-speed counter, the current value of high-speed

counter C251 will change from 999 1000 or 1001 1000 and C251 contact will be

reset to Off. M1000

DCNT C251 K200

DHSCR K1000 C251 C251

1000

200

C251outputcontact

affect by scan time

it doesn affect by scan time　

Footnote

Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for the high-speed counters

and their usage range provided in each series models.

For EH series, M1261 is used to specify the external reset mode of high-speed

counter. Some high-speed counters provide input points for external reset. When

these input points being On, the corresponding current value of high-speed counter

will all be reset to 0 and the output contacts will turn Off. Therefore, user must use flag

M1261 to specify the external reset mode of high-speed counter and force the external

output being executed.



7-17

The function limit of M1261: Only can be used in hardware high-speed counters

C241~C254.

The followings are the using example: The input point of external reset of C251 is X2. If Y10=On. When M1261=Off, X2=On, the current value of C251 is reset to 0 and its contact

turns Off. When DHSCR command has been executed, there is no counter input and the compared result does not output. Therefore, Y10=On will remain unchaged. When M1261=On, X2=On, the current value of C251 is reset to 0 and its contact

turns Off. When DHSCR command has been executed, although there is no counter input, but compared result will still output. Therefore, the content of Y10 will be reset. M1000

DCNT C251 K1000

DHSCR K0 C251 Y10

X10M1261


HSZ

Zone Comparison (High-speed Counter)

－


S1 S2 S D Note: Operand S1 should be equal to or smaller than operand S2

(S1 ≤ S2) Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244, C246~C249, C251~C254. Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for details. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. There is no 16-bit command for API 55, only 32-bit command DHSZ is available. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In EP series models, operand D cannot use index register E, F to modify.

16-bit command

－－－－


DHSZ Continuous execution －－

Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command.

M1150, M1151. DHSZ command execute multi devices comparison mode. Refer to the program 3 below. EP series models do not support these flags. M1152, M1153 DHSZ command has been used as frequency control mode. Refer to the program 4 below. EP series models do not support these flags.

CommandExplanation

: Lower-limit value of zone comparison : Upper-limit value of zone

comparison : Number of high-speed counter : compared result

should be equal to or smaller than (S1 ≦ S2).

Output operation won’t be affected by the scan time.

All outputs and zone comparison all use interrupt operation.



ProgramExample

1

The specified device is Y0, then Y0~Y2 will be occupied automatically.

When DHSZ command has been executed and high-speed counter C246 is counting,

if the upper- and lower limit value is reached, one of Y0~Y2 will be On. M1000

DCNT C246 K20000

DHSZ K1500 K2000 C246

Y0

Y0

Y1

Y2

When current value of C246 < K1500, Y0On

When K1500 < current value of C246 < K2000, Y1=On

When current value of C246 > K2000, Y2=On

ProgramExample

2

When using DHSZ command to control and stop high/low speed, C251 is AB phase

high-speed counter. There will be comparison value output of DHSZ command only

when counting pulse is stored in C251. Therefore, even the counting current value is

0, Y10 will not be On.

When X10=On, DHSZ command force Y10=On when counting current value ≦

K2,000. In order to improve this problem, use DZCPP command to compare C251

against and K2,000 when the program RUN at the beginning. When counting current

value ≦ K2,000, Y10=On and DZCPP command is Pulse execution command.

Command DZCPP only can be executed ONCE in program and Y10 will be still be On.

When drive contact X10=Off, Y10~Y12 will be reset to Off. X20

RST C251

ZRST Y10 Y12

M1000DCNT C251 K10000

X10DZCPP K2000 K2400 C251 Y10

DHSZ K2000 K2400 C251 Y10



7-19

Timing diagram

2000 2400

0

X10

Y10

Y11

Y12

0

high speedforward

low speedforward

Stop

current value ofC251 counter

Speed of variablespeed rotationalequipment

ProgramExample

3

When using the multi groups setting value comparison mode of DHSZ command, if

of DHSZ command is specified as special auxiliary relay M1150, it can execte a current value of high-speed counter and has the function which can compare and

output multi groups setting value.

Under this mode, is defined as starting device of comparison table. It only can be data register D and can be modified by index register E, F. But the number modified

by index register E, F is unchanged after the command has been executed. is defined as the data groups of comparison data. It only can be K1~K128 or H1~H80

and also can be can be modified by index register E, F. After the command has been

executed, it is disabled to change this value. is defined as the number of

high-speed counter and it should be C235~C254. is defined as mode setting. It only can be M1150 and can be modified by index register E, F. But if it is not M1150,

then will be disabled. The comparison table of high-speed counter consists of the head number of register

specified by and bank numbers (groups number) specified by . Please input the setting value of each register before the command being executed.

When current value of C251 high-speed counter specified by is equal to the setting value of (D1, D0), output Y specified by D2 will be reset to Off (D3=K0) or On

(D3=K1) and latched. All of output Y use interrupt operation.



When the current value of C251 is equal to the setting value of the first groups in the

comparison table, D1150=K1. If the current value of C251 is equal to the setting value

of the second groups, D1150=K2. Then the comparison will continute to execute in the

above described order. After the comparison operation of all groups are completed,

M1151=On for one scan cycle and D1150 will be reset to 0, then jump back to the first

groups to execute.

When the drive contact X10 turns Off, the operation of the command will be

interruptted and the content of table counting register D1150 will be reset to 0. But the

ON/OFF state is unchanged at that time.

When this command command has been executed and first scan to END command,

all setting value inside of the diagram are valid.

This function of this command only can be used ONCE in program. In EP series

models, this function does not provided.

This function of this command only can be used in hard ware high-speed counter

C241~C254. X10

DHSZ D0 K4 C251 M1150

Comparison table 32-bit comparison data

High word Low word Number of output

Y On/Off

indication Table counting register D1150

D1 (K0) D0 (K100) D2 (K10) D3 (K1) 0 D5 (K0) D4 (K200) D6 (K11) D7 (K1) 1 D9 (K0) D8 (K300) D10 (K10) D11 (K0) 2 D13 (K0) D12 (K400) D14 (K11) D15 (K0) 3

K10:Y10 K11:Y11

K0:Off K1:On

0→1→2→3→0Cyclic scan

M1151

D1050

Y11Y10

100

200

300

400

C251

01

23

0

current value



7-21

Related flags and special register of high-speed counter:


M1150 Announce that DHSZ command is used as multi groups setting value compare mode

M1151 For DHSZ command, Multi groups setting value compare mode execution completed


D1150 For DHSZ command, Table index of DHSZ Y output

ProgramExample

4

Frequency control operation (Combined DHSZ and DPLSY command): When of DHSZ command is special auxiliary relay M1152, it can execte a current value of

high-speed counter and has the function which can control pulse output frequency of

DPLSY command.

Under this mode, is defined as starting device of comparison table. It only can be data register D and can be modified by index register E, F. But the number modified

by index register E, F is unchanged after the command has been executed. is defined as the data groups of comparison data. It only can be K1~K128 or H1~H80

and also can be can be modified by index register E, F. After the command has been

executed, it is disabled to change this value. is defined as the number of

high-speed counter and it should be C235~C254. is defined as mode setting. It only can be M1152 and can be modified by index register E, F. But if it is not M1152,

then will be disabled. This function of this command only can be used ONCE in program. In EP series

models, this function does not provided. For EH series models, it only can be used in

hardware high-speed counters C241~C254. Please input the setting value of each

register before the command being executed.

When the current value of C251 specified by is within the range between the upper- and lower-limit of (D1, D0), the setting value of (D3, D2) will be converted to

pulse output frequency of DPLSY command. Then, the second groups in the

comparison table will continue to execute. After the comparison operation of all groups

are completed, M1153=On for one scan cycle and D1151 will be reset to 0, then jump

back to the first groups to execute.

If desiring to stop the execution at the last group, Please set the content of the last

group as KO.

When the drive contact X10 turns Off, the operation of the command will be

interruptted and the content of table counting register D1151 will be reset to 0.



X10DHSZ D0 K5 C251 M1152

PLS M0

DPLSY D1152 K0 Y0M0

Comparison table

32-bit comparison data High word Low word

Pulse output frequency 0~250KHz

Table counting register D1151

D1 (K0) D0 (K100) D3, D2 (K5,000) 0 D5 (K0) D4 (K200) D7, D6 (K10,000) 1 D9 (K0) D8 (K300) D11, D10 (K15,000) 2 D13 (K0) D12 (K400) D15, D14 (K6,000) 3 D17 (K0) D16 (K0) D19, D18 (K0) 4

0→1→2→3→4 Cyclic scan

D1051 01

20

34

0

5000

10000

15000

M1153

0

100

200

300

400

500

(Hz)

pulse output frequency

C251current value

Related flags and special register of high-speed counter:


M1152 Announce that DHSZ command is used as frequency control mode

M1153 For DHSZ command, frequency control mode execution completed


D1151 Table index changed by DHSZ D value

D1152 (low word)

D1153 (high word)

DHSZ command saves table counting register value that read in sequence from pulse output frequency of each group in D1153 and D1152.

D1336 (low word) D1337 (high word) Pulse numbers of DPLSY command output



7-23

The completed program is shown below: X10

DMOVP K5000 D2

DHSZ D0 K5 C251 M1152

DMOVP K10000 D6

DMOVP K15000 D10

DMOVP K6000 D14

DMOVP K0 D18

DMOVP K100 D0

DMOVP K200 D4

DMOVP K300 D8

DMOVP K400 D12

DMOVP K0 D16

PLS M0

M0DPLSY D1152 K0 Y0

frequency pulsenumber

output

Please do not change the setting value in this comparison table during the execution

of DHSZ command.

When the program has been executed to END command, the specified data will be

operated shown as the above example program. Therefore, DPLSY command should

be executed after the execution of DHSZ command.




SPD Speed Detection


S1 S2 D

Note: The usage of Operand S1: In ES and EP series models, operand S1 only can be specified as X1~X2. In EH series models, operand S1 only can be specified as X0~X3. Operand D occupies 5 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


SPD Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1100. SPD command sampling one time flag

CommandExplanation

: External pulse input : Pulse reveived time(ms) : Detection result

: Specify the input of external pulse Pulse inputs of each series models

Models ES series models (V5.7 and above) and EP series models EH series models

Available inputs X1, X2 X0~X3

Count the number of pulse received at the inputs specified by during the time

specified by (unit is ms) and store te result in the register specified by .

occupies 5 registers, +1, indicate the detection value of previous

pulse, +3, +2 indicate the present accumulated count value of pulse and

+4 indicates the remaining count time, the max. can be 32767ms. Measured pulse frequency:

Pulse speed of each series models

Models ES series models (V5.7 and above) and EP series models EH series models

Max. measured frequency

X1(30KHz), X2(10KHz) Total frequency is less than 30KHz

X0/X1 (250KHz) X2/X3 (10KHz)

When using this command in EH series models, the pulse frequency of external input

X0~X3 and the frequency of hardware high-speed counter are the same and both of

them all can reach 250KHz.

This command is mainly used to obtain a proportional value of rotation speed. The

result and rotation speed are in proportion. The following equation can used to obtain the rotation speed of motor.

N: Rotation speed

n: The number of pulses per rotation of rotation equipment

N=( ) ( )rpmntD 310060

×

t: Detection time specified by (ms) If one of X0~X3 is specified, the specified device can not be used as the pulse input of

high-speed counter or external interrupt signal.



7-25

When SPD command has been executed and M1100 (SPD command sampling one

time flag)=On, SPD command will execute sampling one time. SPD command will

collect data one time when the movement of M1100 turning from Off to On, then stop.

If desiring to continue the collection, be sure to turn M1100 Off and execute SPD

command again.

ProgramExample

When X7=On, D2 will count the high-speed pulse input from X1. After 1,000ms, it will

stop counting automatically and store the result in D0.

After 1000ms counting completed, the content of D2 will be reset to 0. When X7 turns

On again, D2 will recount. X7

SPD X1 K1000 D0

X7

X1

1000

1000ms 1000ms

D4: content value

D2: currentvalue

D2: contentvalue

D0: detectionvalue

D4:remaining time (ms)

Footnote

In ES series models (V5.7 and above), if X1 or X2 is used in SPD command, then the

related high-speed counters or external interrupts I101, I201 can not be used.


ES EP EH57 D PLSY

Pulse Output


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer to

the command explanation for details. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES series models, PLSR command can be used twice but the output cannot be repeat.


PLSY Continuous execution －－


DPLSY Continuous execution －－

Flag: M1010~M1345. Refer to the footnote.



CommandExplanation

: Pulse output frequency : Pulse output number : Pulse output device (Please use the transistor output as output module)

specified as the pulse output frequency Output frequency range of each series models

Models ES series models EP series models EH series

Output frequency range 1~10,000Hz 1~32,000Hz 1~200,000Hz

specified as the pluse output number. 16-bit command: 1~32,767. 32-bit command: 2,147,483,647.

Numbers of continuous pulses of each series models

Models ES series models and EP series models

EH series models (TR models)

Specified method of continuous pulses

M1010（Y0） ON M1023（Y1） ON

Designated pulse output number is set to K0

If designated pulse output number is set to “0” (zero) in EH series models, it means

that unlimit numbers of pulses will continuously output. M1010(Y0) or M1023(Y1)

should be On when unlimt numbers of pulse continuously output .

specified as the pulse output device. In EH series models, only Y0 and Y2 can be specified. In EP/ES series models, only Y0 and Y1 can be specified.

When PLSY command has been executed, a specified quantity of pulses will

be output through pulse output device at the specified pulse output frequency

. When using PLSY command in progam, the outputs of PLSY command, API 58 PWM

command and API 59 PLSR command cannot be the same.

In EP/ES series models, after Y0 pulse output completed, M1029 will be turned On,

after Y1 pulse output completed, M1030 will be turned On. When PLSY command is

Off, M1029 or M1030 will be turned Off.

In EH series models, Y0 and Y1 pulse output completed, M1029 will be turned On,

after Y2, Y3 pulse output completed, M1030 will be turned On. When PLSY command

is Off, M1029 or M1030 will be turned Off.

The execution completed flag M1029, M1030 should be clear by user after the

execution of the command has been completed.

When command PLSY has been executed, Y start to output pulse. At this time, the

output will not be affected if is changed. If desiring to change pulse output number, stop command PLSY, then change the pulse number.

can be changed when command PLSY has been executed. It can change the

effective time. is changed when the program is executed to the executed command PLSY.

The ratio of Off TIME and On TIME of the pulse output is 1:1.



7-27

The actual output pulse numbers are stored in special registers D1336~D1339 when

the program is executed to the command PLSY. Refer to the footnote for details.

The special register D and M which are allowed to be changed during the execution of

the command. Refer to the footnote for details.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, the pulse of 1KHz for 200 times is generated from output Y0, after the

pulse has been completed, M1029=On trigger Y10=On.

When X0=Off, pulse output Y0 immediately stop. When X0 turns On again, the first

pulse start to output. X0

PLSY K1000 K200 Y0

M1029Y100

1 2 3 200Output Y0

0.5ms

1ms

Footnote

Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse

while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off. In EP/ES series MPU, when M1010=On, Y0 can output limitless continuous pulses. When M1010=Off, the pulse output numbers of Y0 are decided by

. M1023: In EP/ES series MPU, when M1023=On, Y1 can output limitless continuous

pulses. When M1023=Off, the pulse output numbers of Y1 are decided by .

M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after Y0, Y1 pulse output complete. In EP/ES series MPU, M1029= On after Y0 pulse output complete. M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after Y2, Y3 pulse output complete. In EP/ES series MPU, M1030= On after Y1 pulse output complete. M1078: In EP/ES series, Y0 pulse output stop. M1079: In EP/ES series, Y1 pulse output stop. M1258: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y0, Y1 pulse output signal exchange. M1259: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y2, Y3 pulse output signal exchange. M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output stop. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output stop. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output indication flag. M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output indication flag. M1338: In EH series MPU, CH0 offset pulse start flag. M1339: In EH series MPU, CH1 offset pulse start flag. M1340: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I110) occur after CH0 pulse output complete. M1341: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I120) occur after CH1 pulse output complete.

M1342: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I130) occur simultaneously when CH0 pulse transmit.

M1343: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I140) occur simultaneously when CH1 pulse transmit.

M1344: In EH series MPU, CH0 compensation pulse start flag. M1345: In EH series MPU, CH1 compensation pulse start flag.



Special registers description of EP series MPU: D1030: Present total pulse numbers of first output group Y0 (LOW WORD). D1031: Present total pulse numbers of first output group Y0 (HIGH WORD). D1032: Present total pulse numbers of second output group Y1 (LOW WORD). D1033: Present total pulse numbers of second output group Y1 (HIGH WORD). Special registers description of EH series MPU:

D1220: The phase setting of the first output group Y0, Y1: determine by the last two bits of D1220, other bits are invalid.

1. K0: Y0 output 2. K1: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, A leads B 3. K2: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, B leads A 4. K3: Y1 output

D1221: The phase setting of the second output group Y2, Y3: determine by the last two bits of D1221, other bits are invalid.


D1328: CH0 offset pulse number (Low word) D1329: CH0 offset pulse number (High word) D1330: CH1 offset pulse number (Low word) D1331: CH1 offset pulse number (High word) D1332: CH0 remaining pulse number (Low word) D1333: CH0 remaining pulse number (High word) D1334: CH1 remaining pulse number (Low word) D1335: CH1 remaining pulse number (High word) D1336: Present total output pulse numbers of first output group (Y0, Y1) (LOW WORD). D1337: Present total output pulse numbers of first output group (Y0, Y1) (HIGH WORD). D1338: Present total output pulse numbers of second output group(Y2,Y3)(LOW WORD). D1339: Present total output pulse numbers of second output group(Y2,Y3)(HIGH WORD). D1344: CH0 compensation pulse number (Low word) D1345: CH0 compensation pulse number (High word) D1346: CH1 compensation pulse number (Low word) D1347: CH1 compensation pulse number (High word)

When several high-speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) use Y0 to

output pulse in one program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning

cycle, PLC will perform the command which has fewest step numbers.

The explanation of PLSY pulse output command and related devices of EH series

MPU: Explanation of PLSY command

Operand S1 S2 D Explanation Frequency setting Pulse quantity Output device

16-bit 0~32,767Hz 0~32,767 Range

32-bit 0~200KHz 0~2,147,483,647 Y0~Y3

Definition K0: No output Kn: Specified frequency output

K0: Continuous pulse output Kn: Specified pulse output

Refer to the setting of D1220, D1221



7-29

Explanation of the related device of PLSY command (Special D)

Device No. Data format Attribute Initial

value Content

D1220 16-bit R/W K0 The phase setting of the first output pulse group

D1221 16-bit R/W K0 The phase setting of the second output pulse group

D1328 Low word D1329 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The offset pulse number of the first pulse

group D1330 Low word D1331 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The offset pulse number of the first pulse

group D1332 Low word D1333 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The remaining pulse number of the first

pulse group D1334 Low word D1335 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The remaining pulse number of the second

pulse group D1336 Low word

D1337 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The current value of the first pulse group (The accumulated value of pulse output numbers)

D1338 Low word

D1339 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The current value of the second pulse group (The accumulated value of pulse output numbers)

D1341 Low word D1342 High word 32-bit R/W K200000 Max. output frequency

D1344 Low word D1345 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The compensation pulse number of the

first pulse group D1346 Low word D1347 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The compensation pulse number of the

second pulse group

Explanation of the related device of PLSY command (Special M) Device

No. Attribute Content Related setting device

M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously M1029 R End indication flag of the first pulse group M1030 R End indication flag of the second pulse group M1334 R/W Pulse output stop of the first pulse group M1335 R/W Pulse output stop of the second pulse group M1336 R Output indication flag of the first pulse group M1337 R Output indication flag of the second pulse group

M1338 R/W OFFSET start flag of the first pulse group D1328, D1329

M1339 R/W OFFSET start flag of the second pulse group D1330, D1331

M1340 R/W Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output complete. I110




M1344 R/W Compensation start flag of the first pulse group D1344, D1345M1345 R/W Compensation start flag of the second pulse group D1346, D1347M1347 R/W Auto interrupt reset flag of the first pulse group M1348 R/W Auto interrupt reset flag of the second pulse group




PWM Pulse Width Modulation Output


S1 S2 D Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer

to the command explanation. The content value of operand S1 should be smaller than the content value of S2. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES / EP series models, command PWM only can be used ONCE in program.


PWM Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1010~M1337. Refer to the footnote.

CommandExplanation

: Pulse output width : Pulse output cycle : Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as the output module)

is specified as pulse output width as t:0~32,767ms.

is specified as pulse output cycle as T:1~32,767ms, ≦ .

is specified as pulse output device. In EH series MPU, can be specified

as Y0, Y2. In EP/ES series models, can be specified as Y1. Modulated pulse output of each series models

Models ES/EX series models and EP series models EH series models

PWM output Y1 Y0, Y2

PWM command can be used TWICE in the program of EH series models. PWM

command can be used ONCE in the program of EP/ES series models.

The output cannot be the same as the output of API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR command

while PWM command is used in program.

When PWM command has been executed, the pulse output width and pulse

output cycle is output through pulse output device .

If > , an operation error will occur, M1067 =On. When is 0, there is

no pulse output from the pulse output device. When = , the pulse output device will be always On.

, can be changed during the execution of PWM command.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, Y1 output the following pulse. When X0=Off, output Y1 will also turn

Off. X0

PWM K1000 K200 Y1

Output Y1

t=1000ms

T=2000ms



7-31

Footnote

Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse

while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off.

M1067: In EH series MPU, when operand is error, M1067=On. M1070: In EP/ES series MPU, When PWM command output Y1, the pulse unit will

exchange. When M1070=On, the pulse unit is 100µs, when M1070=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms.

In EH series MPU, when the first pulse output group of PWM command output Y0, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1070=On, the pulse unit is 100µs, when M1070=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms.

M1071: In EH series MPU, when the first pulse output group of PWM command output Y2, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1071=On, the pulse unit is 100µs, when M1071=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms.

M1258: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y0, Y1 pulse output signal exchange.M1259: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y2, Y3 pulse output signal exchange.M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output stop. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output stop. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output indication flag. M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output indication flag.




Functions of EH series MPU

Explanation of PWM command and the related device of EH series models. Device

No. Data

Format Attribute Related setting device

M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously M1070 R/W Y0 and Y1 PWM pulse time unit exchange M1071 R/W Y2 and Y3 PWM pulse time unit exchange M1258 R/W Y0 and Y1 PWM pulse output signal exchange M1259 R/W Y2 and Y3 PWM pulse output signal exchange M1334 R/W Pulse output stop of the first pulse group M1335 R/W Pulse output stop of the second pulse group M1336 R Output indication flag of the first pulse group M1344 R/W Output indication flag of the second pulse group D1344, D1345


ES EP EH59 D PLSR

Pulse Wave Output with Acceleration/Deceleration Speed


S1 S2 S3 D

Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer to the command explanation. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES series models, PLSR command can be used TWICE in program but the output can not be the same.


PLSR Continuous execution －－


DPLSR Continuous execution －－

Flag: M1029, M1030. Execution Completed flag.



CommandExplanation

: Maximum speed (HZ) : Content of the pulse output quantity (PLS)

: Acceleration/Deceleration time (ms) : Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as output module)

: the maximum frequency (Hz) of output pulse. Settings: In 16-bit command: 10 to 32,767 Hz. In 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000 Hz. The maximum speed is deemed

to be the multiples of 10, if not, the first unit will be discarded automatically. 1/10 of the

maximum speed is the one time variation of the accel/decel speed. Note that the

condition meets the acceleration requirement of the step motor and would not result in

the step motor crash..

: Content of the pulse output quantity (PLS). Settings: In 16-bit command: 110~32,767 (PLS). In 32-bit command: 110~2,147,483,647(PLS). If the setting is

below 110, the pulse cannot output normally.

: Acceleration/Deceleration time (ms). Settings: below 5,000ms. The accel time and the decel time have to be the same and cannot be set without one another.

1. The accel/decel time has to be over 10 times the maximum scan time (contents of

D1012). If the setting is below 10 times, the slope of the accel/decel speed will be

inaccurate.

2. Minimum setting of the accel/decel time could be obtained from the following

equation. 90000

If the setting is smaller than the result of the above-mentioned equation, the

acceleration/deceleration time will be greater, and if the setting is smaller than the

9000/ , the result value of 9000/ will be treated as its regular setting. 3. Maximum setting of the accel/decel time could be obtained from the following

equation.

818

4. Number of the accel/decel speed variation steps is fixed to be 10. If the input acceleration/deceleration time is greater than the maximum setting, the maximum

setting will be treated as its regular setting. If the setting is smaller than the

minimum setting, the minimum setting will be treated as its regular setting.



7-33

PLSR command is the pulse output command with the accel/decel speed function.

The acceleration is conducted when the pulse wave goes from the static status to

reaching its targeted speed, and getting faster when the targeted speed is to be

reached. The pulse wave will stop its output once the targeted distance is reached.

When PLSR command has been executed, after set the maximum frequency , a

quantity of total pulse numbers and accel/decel time , then output them through

pulse output device . The output frequency is first raised up in 1/10 of the

maximum frequency /10 and the time of each output frequency is fixed as 1/9 of

.

Even user change , or when PLSR command has been executed, the output will not be affected.

After the pulse numbers of the first output pulse group (Y0, Y1) set by has been completely output, M1029=On. After the pulse numbers of the second output pulse

group (Y0, Y1) set by has been completely output, , M1030=On. When the command PLSR is activated again, M1029 or M1030 will turn to 0, then turn to 1 after

the PLSR command has been completed.

The output pulse of the first output group (Y0, Y1) and the cueent value of he second

output group (Y2, Y3) are stored in the special regisers D1336~D1339.

During the acceleration of each step, the pulse numbers (each frequency x time) may

not all be integer, but the output operation of PLC is conducted in whole integer

number. Therefore, the time of each interval may not be the same and has some

deviation. The offset is determined by the frequency value and the discarding decimal

point value. In order to ensure the output pulse numbers are correct, PLC will fill the

insufficiency pulse numbers to the last interval.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, the maximum frequency of command PLSR is 1,000Hz. The quantity of

total pulse numbers D10, accel/decel time is 3,000ms and pulses output from output

Y0. The pulses are output and the output frequency is 1,000/10 Hz every time. The

time of output pulse of each frequency is fixed as 3,000/9.

When X10 is OFF, output will be interrupted, and when turned ON again, counting of

the pulse will be counted from 0. X0

PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0



Outputs: Y0 or Y2

Pulse speed(Hz)

Targeted speed: 10~200,000Hz

Time(Sec)Decel timebelow 5000ms

Accel timebelow 5000ms

16-bit command:110~32,767PLS32-bit command:110~2,147,483,647PLS

1 122

3 344

5 566

7 788

9 91010

Output pulses

The time interval of theone time pulse output is 1/9 of

The max. speed of theone time speed variation is 1/10 of

10-stepvariations

10-stepvariations

Footnote

The output cannot be the same as the output of API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM command

while PLSR command is used in program.




Functions of EH series MPU

Explanation of the command and related devices in EH series MPU X0

PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0

The speed range for the pulse of this command is 10~200,000Hz. And if the settings

for the high speed and the accel/decel time exceed this range, use the allowable

setting within this range for operation. Command Explanation

Operand S1 S2 S3 D

Explanation Max. frequency Total pulse quantity Accel/Decel Time Output device

16-bit 10~32,767Hz 110~32,767 Range 32-bit 10~200KHz 110~2,147,483,647 1~5000ms Y0~Y3

Definition K0: No output Kn: Specified frequency output

K0: Continuous pulse output Kn: Specified pulse output

Flag: M1067 M1068

Refer to the setting of D1220, D1221

1~5000ms 1~5000ms

16-bit command: 110~32,767PLS

16-bit command: 110~2,147,483,647PLS

Frequency F

Maximum speed: 10~200,000Hz

Decel timeAccel time

F0Start

frequency

Total output pulses



7-35

Explanation of the related device of PLSR command (Special D)

Device No. Data forma

t Attribute Initial

value Content

D1220 16-bit R/W K0 The phase setting of the first output pulse group

D1221 16-bit R/W K0 The phase setting of the second output pulse group

D1336 Low word

D1337 High word32-bit R/W K0

The current value of the first pulse group (The accumulated value of pulse output numbers)

D1338 Low word

D1339 High word32-bit R/W K0

The current value of the second pulse group (The accumulated value of pulse output numbers)

D1340 16-bit R/W K200 Start frequency D1341 Low wordD1342 High word 32-bit R/W K200000 Max. output frequency

Explanation of the related device of PLSR command (Special M) Device

No. Attribute Content Related setting device

M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously M1029 R End indication flag of the first pulse group M1030 R End indication flag of the second pulse group M1334 R/W Pulse output stop of the first pulse group M1335 R/W Pulse output stop of the second pulse group M1336 R Output indication flag of the first pulse group M1337 R Output indication flag of the second pulse group M1067 R/W Program execution error flag M1068 R Execution error latch D1068

In EH series models, if the acceleration/deceleration time cannot reach the maximum

acceleration frequency, the acceleration/deceleration time and maximum frequency

will be adjusted automatically. The related functions are listed as follows: Step 1: First, use the following equations to obtain the result of (1), (2) and (3) to adjust

acceleration time.

13400 DF = if 10 60 SF >+ or 00 =F ⇒ 60S1

0 =F …………..(1)

( )( )10

23 2930

30SF

SS×+×

×< ……………..(2)

03

600000F

S ≥ ……………………….….(3)

Step 2: Calculates the interval of the acceleration of each step, FG by using the following

equation. The interval of each step are the same:59

1SFG = …..(4)



Step 3: Calculates the max. output pulse numbers of acceleration/ deceleration

time: 22

2 −=SPG ……(5)

Step 4: Set the following variables. Fi: The frequency of each acceleration/deceleration interval, i = 1~59,

GFFF += 01 , Gii FFF += −1 ……(6) TG: The acceleration/deceleration time of each acceleration/deceleration

interval 59

3STG = ………… (7)

Step 5: Entering the result of (5), (6), (7) to the following equation can get the result as

follows:∑=

≤×59

0iGGi PTF …………….. (8)

Step 6: In the equation of (8), if the value of the calculation result has been greater than the PG value before item 59 has been calculated.

In EH series models, the commands that are related to acceleration and deceleration

all can use the above equations.

The parameters of command PLSR must be input before the command has been

executed.

All acceleration and deceleration commands are with brake function. When the PLC

acceleration is executed but the switch contact is Off suddenly, the brake function is

activated and PLC will decelerate in the same slope of acceleration speed.

S1

F0

Time T

Frequency F

Origin acceleration path

Brake path


IST Manual/Auto Control


S D1 D2 Note: Operand S will occupy 8 continuous devices.

The usage range of operand D1 and D2 is S20~S899 and D2＞D1. IST command only can be used one time in program. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


IST Continuous execution －－

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1040~M1047.




7-37

CommandExplanation

: The starting input number of the designated operation mode. : The

smallest number for the designated-status step point under the auto mode. : The greatest number for the designated-status step point under the auto mode.

The IST is a convenient command made specifically for the initial state of the step

ladder control procedure to accommodate the special auxiliary relay to the convenient

auto control command.

M1000IST X10 S20 S60

X10: Individual operation (Manual operation)

X11: Zero point return X12: Step operation X13: One cycle operation

X14: Continuous operation X15: Zero point return start switchX16: Start switch X17: Stop switch

When the IST command is executed, the following special auxiliary relay will switch

automatically.

M1040: Movement inhibited M1041: Movement start M1042: Status pulse M1047: STL monitor enable

S0: Manual operation/initial state step point S1: Zero point return/initial state step point S2: Auto operation/initial state step point

ProgramExample

1

When IST command is used, S10~S19 are for zero point return operation and the step

point of this state can’t be used as general step point. However, when using S0~S9

step points, S0 initiates “manual operation”, S1 initiates “zero point return operation”

and S2 initiates “auto operation”. Thus, there should be three circuits of these three

initial state step points first written in program.

When switching to S1 (zero point return mode), zero point return won’t have any

actions once one of S10~S19 is On.

When switching to S2 (auto operation mode), auto operation won’t have any actions

once one of between to is On or M1043=On

ProgramExample

2

Example: the Robot arm control (use IST command): Motion request: In the example, two kinds of balls (big and small) are separated and

moved to different boxes. Distribute the control panel for the control. Motion of the Robot arm: lower robot arm, collect balls, raise robot arm, shift to right,

lower robot arm, release balls, raise robot arm, shift to left to finish motion in order. I/O Device:

Y0

Y1Y2Y3

Left-limit X1

Upper-limit X4

Upper-limit X5

Right-limit X2(big balls)

Right-limit X3(small balls)

Big SmallBig/smallsensor X0



Control panel

X15 X16

X17

X20

X21

X22

X23

X24

X25

Step X12

One cycleoperation X13

Continuousoperation X14

Manualoperation X10

Zero return X11

Power start

Power stop

Zero return Auto start

Auto stop

Shiftto right

Shiftto left

Releaseballs

Collectballs

Lowerrobot arm

Raiserobot arm

Big/small sensor X0. The left-limit of the robot arm X1, the right-limit X2 (big balls), the right-limit X3 (small balls), the upper-limit X4, and the lower-limit X5. Raise robot arm Y0, lower robot arm Y1, shift to right Y2, shift to left Y3, and collect balls Y4.

START circuit:

M1000IST X10 S20 S80

X0M1044

X1 Y4

Manual operation mode:

X20SET

RST Y4

Y4SS0

X21

X22 Y1Y0

X23 Y0Y1

X24 X4Y2

Y3

X25 X4Y3

Y2

Collect balls

Release balls

Lower robot arm

Raise robot armCondition interlock

Shift to right

Shift to left

Condition interlockRaise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)

Zero point return mode:

SFC figure:

S1

S10

X15

S11

X4

S12

X1

RST Y4

RST Y1

Y0

RST Y2

Y3

SET M1043

RST S12

Release balls









7-39

Ladder Diagram: X15

SET S10SS1

RST Y4SS10

RST Y1

Y0X4

SET S11

RST Y2SS11

Y3X1

SET S12

SET M1043SS12

RST S12

Enter zero return operation mode

Release balls







Auto operation (step/one-cycle/continuous operation modes):

SFC figure:

S2

S20

S30

S31

M1044

X5

T0

Y1

SET

Y0

S32

X4

X2

S50 Y1

Y2

S2

X1

M1041

X0Y4

TMR T0 K30

S60 RSTX5

Y4

TMR T2 K30

S70

T2

Y0

S80

X4

Y3X1

S40

S41

X5

T1

SET

Y0

S42

X4

X3

Y2

X0Y4

TMR T1 K30

X3X2



Ladder Diagram:

SET S20

SET S30

SET Y4

Y0

END

X5

S31S

X4

TMR T0

SET S32

S2S

M1041 M1044

S20S

S30S

Y1X0

SET S40X5 X0

SET S31T0

K30

Y2S32

SX2

SET S50

X2

SET Y4

TMR T1

S40S

SET S41T1

K30

Y0S41

SX4

SET S42

Y2S42

SX3

SET S50

X3

Y1S50

SX5

SET S60

RST Y4

TMR T2

S60S

SET S70T2

K30

Y0S70

SX4

SET S80

Y3S80

SX1

X1

RET

S2

Enter auto operation mode

Collect balls

Release balls

Lower robot arm

Shift to right



Collect balls


Shift to right

Lower robot arm




7-41

Footnote

Flag explanation:

M1040: step point movement inhibited. When M1040=ON, all movements of the step point

are inhibited.

1. Manual operation mode: M1040 keeps being ON.

2. Zero point return mode/one cycle operation mode: During the time of pressing

STOP button and pressing START button again, M1040 will keep being ON.

3. Step operation mode: M1040 keeps being ON, and will only be OFF when the

START button is pressed.

4. Continuous operation mode: When PLC goes from STOP→RUN, M1040 keeps

being ON, and will be OFF when the START button is pressed.

M1041: Step point movement start: the special auxiliary relay that reflects the movement of

the primary step point (S2) to the next step point. 1. Manual operation mode/Zero point return mode: M1041 keeps being OFF. 2. Step operation mode/One cycle operation mode: M1041 will only be OFF when

the START button is pressed. 3. Continuous operation mode: Keeps being ON when the START button is pressed,

and keeps being OFF when the STOP button is pressed. M1042: START pulse: Only one pulse will be sent out when the button is pressed.

M1043: Zero point return complete: Once M1043 =ON is driven, it means that the RESET

motion has been executed.

M1044: Conditions of the origin: Under the continuous operation mode, conditions of the

origin, M1044, have to be driven to ON to execute the motion of initial step point (S2)

moving to the next step point.

M1045: All output reset inhibit.

If executing conditions: A. from manual control S0 to zero point return S1

B. from auto operation S2 to manual operation S0

C. from auto operation S2 to zero point return S1 1. When M1045=Off and one of S of D1~D2 is ON, step point of SET Y output and

actions will be cleared to Off. 2. When M1045 =On, SET Y output will be reserved and step point during action will

be cleared to Off.

3. If executing from zero point return S1 to manual operation S0, no matter

M1045=On or M1045=Off, SET Y output will be reserved and step point action will

be cleared to Off.

M1046: Setting STL state to On: If one of step point S is On, M1046=On. After M1047 forces

to be On, M1046 will be On once one of S is On. Besides, 8 points numbers before S

is on will be recorded in D1040~D1047.

M1047: STL monitor enabled. When IST command starts executing, M1047 will be forced to

be On and it will be forced to On for each scan time once IST command is still On.

This flag is used to monitor all S. D1040~D1047: ON state number 1-8 of step point S.



API Applicable models ES EP EH 61 D

SER P Search a Data Stack

－


S1 S2 D N Note: If operand S2 uses with device F, it is only available in

16-bit command. Operand D occupies 5 continuous devices. The usage of operand n: n=1~256 (16-bit command), n=1~128 (32-bit command) Refer to each model specification for usage range.


SER Continuous execution －－


DSER Continuous execution －－

Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: Starting device of data stack for multiple devices comparison : Value

data for comparison : Starting device for storing compared result : Data stack length for comparison

specify the numbers of compared registers and specify the compared

numbers. The specified data is compared against the data specified by and the

compared result is stored in several registers specified by .

When using 32-bit command to designate registers, , , and specify 32-bit register.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, the data stack consist of D10~D19 are compared against D0 and the

result is stored in D50~D54. If the equal value does not exist, the content of D50~D52

will all be 0.

The data is compared in algebra formate. (-10＜2)

The largest value of all compared data will be record in D53 and the samllest value of

all compared data will be record in D54. When the numbers of largest value and

smallest are more than one, only the numbers of largest value will be recorded. X0

SER D10 D0 D50 K10

Content value Compared data Data number Result D10 88 0 D11 100 1 Equal D12 110 2 D13 150 3 D14 100 4 Equal D15 300 5 D16 100 6 Equal D17 5 7 Smallest D18 100 8 Equal

n

D19 500

D0=K100

9 Largest



7-43

Content value Explanation

D50 4 The total data numbers of equal value D51 1 The number of the first equal value D52 8 The number of the last equal value D53 7 The number of the smallest value D54 9 The number of the largest value


ES EP EH62 D ABSD

Absolute Drum Sequencer －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D n Note: When operand S1 is specified as KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, K4

should be specified in 16-bit command and K8 should be specified in 32-bit command. The usage range of n: n=1~64 Refer to each model specification for usage range.


ABSD Continuous execution －－


DABSD Continuous execution －－

Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: Starting device of the compared data table : Number of counter :

Starting number of compared result : Groups of multi-step comparison The ABSD command is a multi-step comparison command and usually used in

absolute cam control.

of DABSD command can specify high-speed counter. However, when the current value of high-speed counter is compared against the setting value, the result

can not output immediately because it is influenced by the scan time. If immediate

output is desired, please use the DHSZ command, the specific comparison command

for high-speed counter.

ProgramExample

Before executing the ABSD command, use MOV command to write each setting value

into D100~D107 in advance. The content of the even number D is the lower-limit value

and the content of the odd number D is the upper-limt value.

When X0=On, the current value of counter C10 is compared against the upper- and

lower-limit value of D100~D107 four groups. The compared result is showed in

M10~M13.

When X10=Off, the origin On/Off state of M10~M13 will not be changed. X10

ABSD D100 C10 M10 K4

C10RST C10

X11CNT C10 K400

X11



M10~ M13 will be On when the current value of C10 is equal to or higher than the

lower-limit value and equal to or lower than the upper-limit value.

Lower-limit value Upper-limit value Current value of C10 Output

D100= 40 D101=100 50≦C10≦100 M10=On

D102=120 D103=210 120≦C10≦210 M11=On

D104=140 D105= 170 140≦C10≦170 M12=On

D106=150 D107=390 150≦C10≦390 M13=On

When the lower-limit value is higher than the upper-limit value, if the current value of

C10 is higher than the lower-limit value and lower than the upper-limit value

(C10>140), M12=On.

Lower-limit value Upper-limit value Current value of C10 Output

D100= 40 D101=100 50≦C10≦100 M10=On

D102=120 D103=210 120≦C10≦210 M11=On

D104=140 D105= 60 60≦C10≦140 M12=Off

D106=150 D107=390 150≦C10≦390 M13=On

4002000

40 100

120 210

60 140

150 390

M0

M1

M2

M3


ES EP EH63 INCD

Increment Drum Sequencer －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D N Note: When operand S1 is specified as KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, K4

should be specified. In 16-bit command, operand S2 should be C0~C198 and will occupy 2 continuous counters. The usage range of operand n: n=1~64 Refer to each model specification for usage range.

16-bit command ( 9 STEPS)

INCD Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1029 execution completed flag



7-45

CommandExplanation

: Starting device of the compared data table : Number of counter :

Starting number of compared result : Groups of multi-step comparison The INCD command is a multi-step comparison command and usually used in relative

cam control.

The current value of is compared against the setting value of . Once the

current value is equal to the setting value, the current value of will be reset to 0

and be compared again. The return times will be stored in +1.

When the comparison of groups data has been completed, the execution completed falg M1029 will On one scan cycle.

ProgramExample

Before executing the INCD command, use MOV command to write each setting value

into D100~D104 in advance. D100=15, ,D101=30, D102=10, D103=40, D104=25.

The current value of counter C10 is compared against the setting value of

D100~D104. Once the current value is equal to the setting value, the current value of

C10 will be reset to 0 and be compared again.

The return times will be stored in C11.

When the content of C11 increase 1, M10~M14 will also change in response. Please

refer to the following timing diagram.

When the comparison of 5 groups data has been completed, the execution completed

falg M1029 will On one scan cycle.

When X0 turns from On to Off, C10 and C11 will all bereset to 0 and M10~M14 all turn

Off. When X0 turns On again, this command will be executed again from the

beginning.

INCD D100 C10 M10 K5

X0CNT C10 K100

M1013

X0

M10

M12

M11

M13

M14

M1029

15 10 15 153030

4025

1110 0 02 3 4

C10

C11

Current value

Current value




TTMR Teaching Timer

－


D n Note: Operand D will occupy 2 continuous devices.

The usage range of operand n: n=0~2 Refer to each model specification for usage range. It only can use TTMR command eight times in program.


TTMR Continuous execution －－

32-bit command


CommandExplanation

: Device number for storing the On duration of the button switch : Multiple setting

The On duration of external button switch is measured and stored in the number of

+1, the measured unit is 100ms periods. The content of +1 in seconds is

multiplied by and stored in .

When multiple setting n=0, the measured unit of is in seconds. When n=1, the

measured unit of is 100ms periods (is multiplied by 10). When n=2, the

measured unit of is 10ms periods (is multiplied by 100).

ProgramExample

1

The time that the button switch X0 is pushed (On duration of X0) will be stored in D1, n

is used to specify the multiple of the time and the total bit time is stored in D0. Then the

button switch can be used to adjust the setting value of timer.

When X0 turns Off, the content of D1 will be reset to 0 but the content of D0 is

unchanged. X0

TTMR D0 K0

X0

D1D0

D0D1

T Tpushed time (sec) pushed time (sec)

If On duration of X0 is T seconds, the relation between D0, D1 and n are shown as the

table below.

n D0 D1(unit: 100 ms) K0 (unit: s) 1×T D1=D0×10 K1 (unit: 100 ms) 10×T D1=D0 K2 (unit: 10 ms) 100×T D1=D0/10



7-47

ProgramExample

2

Using TTMR command to write 10 groups setting time.

Write the setting value into D100~D109 in advance.

The measured unit of the following timers T0~T9 is 0.1 second and the measured unit

of the alternate is 1 second.

Connect one bit digital switch to X0~X3 and use BIN command to convert the setting

value of digital switch to BIN value and store in E.

The On duration (in sec) of X10 is stored in D100.

M0 is the pulse of one time scan cycle generated when the alternate timer button is

released.

Use the setting number of digital switch as the pointers of index register, and then

transmit the content of D100 to D200E (D200~D209). M10

TMR T0 D100

M11TMR T1 D101

M19TMR T9 D109

M1000BIN K1X0 E

X10TTMR D200 K0

X10PLF M0

M0MOV D100 D200E

Footnote

For EP series models, it can only use TTMR command eight times in program. If used

in subroutine or interrupt subroutine, it only can use ONCE.

For EH series models, the maximum TTMR command groups it can only use at the

same time is eight groups.




STMR Special Timer

－


S M D Note: The operand S: EP series models can use T0~T191, EH

series models can use T0~T199 The usage range of operand m: m=1~32767 Operand D occupies 4 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


STMR Continuous execution －－

32-bit command


CommandExplanation

: Number of timer : Setting value of timer, unit is 100ms : Starting device of output device

STMR command is a command which provides Off-delay, one shot and flash loop.

The number of timer specified by STMR command can not be reapeat.

ProgramExample

When X10=On, the settting value of the timer T0 specified by STMR command is 5

seconds.

Y0 is the contact of Off-delay: When X10 turns from Off to On, Y0= On. When X10

turns On to Off and delay 5 seconds, Y0=Off.

When X10 turns from On to Off, Y1= On output one time for 5 seconds.

When X10 turns from Off to On, Y2=On output one time for 5 seconds.

When X10 turns from Off to On, Y3= On after delay 5 seconds. When X10 turns from

On to Off, Y3=Off after delay 5 seconds. X10

STMR T0 K50 Y0

X10

Y0

Y1

Y2

Y3

5 sec 5 sec

5 sec5 sec

5 sec

5 sec



7-49

Add a b contact of Y3 after the drive contact X10, ans then Y1, Y2 can be used as the

output of flash loop. When X10 turns Off, Y0, Y1 and Y3 will be Off and the content of

T10 will be reset to 0. X10

STMR T10 K50 Y0Y3

X10

Y1

Y2 5 sec 5 sec


ALT P ON/OFF Alternate


D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.

ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ALTP).


ALT Continuous execution ALTP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: Dentisation device This command is usually pulse execution command (ALTP).

ProgramExample

1

When X0 turns from Off to On for the first time, Y0=ON. When X0 turns from Off to On

for the second time, Y0=OFF. X0

ALTP Y0

X0

Y0



ProgramExample

2

The ALT command is a command, which use one switch to control start and stop mode.

In the beginning, M0=Off, so Y0=On, Y1=Off. When X10 is activated for the first time,

M0=ON, Y1=ON and Y0=OFF. When X10 is activated for the second time, M0=OFF,

Y0=ON, Y1=OFF. X10

ALT M0M0

Y0M0

Y1

ProgramExample

3

Output Y will flash. When X10= On, T0 will generate a pulse every two seconds and

output Y0 will be switching between On and Off mode depending on the pulse of T0. X10

TMR T0

ALTP Y0

K20T0

T0


ES EP EH67 RAMP

Ramp Signal －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D N Note: The usage range of operand n: n=1~32767



RAMP Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1026 Starting mode (Please

refer to the footnote) M1029 Execution completed flag

CommandExplanation

: Start setting of ramp signal : End setting of ramp signal : Current

value of ramp signal : Scan times This command is used to get a ramp signal. A ramp signal has a strong connection

with linear and scan time. Therefore, must fix the scan time before using this RAMP

command.

Write the start setting value of ramp signal to D10 and end setting value of ramp signal

to D11 in advance. When X0 is On, the setting value is forwarding from D10 to D11

(setting value in D10 will be increased) and the proceeding time (n= 100 times scans)

is stored in D12.



7-51

The scan time can be fixed if set M1039=On in the program previously. Then, using

MOV command to write the setting value of the fixed scan time into special register

D1039. Take the above program as an example, if the setting value is 30ms and

n=K100, the time between D10 and D11 is 3 second (D3: 30ms×100).

During the execution of this command, when starting signal X10 turns Off, this

command will stop the operation. When X10 turns On again, the content value of D12

will be reset to 0(zero) and calculated again.

After the execution of this command has been completed, M1029= On and the

content value of D12 will be reset to the setting value of D10.

Using this command with analog signal output can execute the operation of Sort

Start/Stop.

If start PLC from STOP to RUN when X10= On, please reset the content value of D12

to 0(zero) in the beginning of the program. (If D12 is a latched area.)

X10RAMP D10 D11 D12 K100

D10

D12

D11

D11D12

D10

D10<D11 D10 D11>?times scans　 ?times scans

The scan times is stored in D13

Footnote

On/Off condition of starting mode flag M1026 and the change of the content value in

D12 are shown below:

D11

D10D12

M1029

M1026=ON

X10

D11

D10D12

M1029

M1026=OFF

Starting signalX10 Starting signal




SORT Data Sort

－


S m1 m2 D n Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1 =1~32

The usage range of operand m2: m2 =1~6 The usage range of operand n: n=1~ m2 Refer to each model specification for usage range.


SORT Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag

CommandExplanation

: Starting device of source data table : Sort data grops : Column

numbers of each data : Starting device for storing sort data : Reference value of sort data

The resulting sorted data is stored in the m1 × m2 registers counted from the starting

device specified by . Therefore, if the device and specify the same register, the resulting sorted data will be the same as the content of source device

.

An ideal most right number of the head number specified by is 0. The data sort will be completed after the SORT command being processed m1 times.

Once the SORT command has been completed, the Flag M1029= On.

ProgramExample

When X0 is On, it starts to sort specified data. After the data sort is completed,

M1029= On. During the execution of the SORT command, do not change the sort

data. If user want to re-sort the data, be sure to turn X0 from Off to On again. X0

SORT D0 K5 K5 D50 D100



7-53

Example table of data sort Data numbers: m2

Data Column 1 2 3 4 5 Column

Row Students

No. Chinese English Mathematics Physis and Chemistry

1 （D0）1 （D5）90 （D10）75 （D15）66 （D20）79

2 （D1）2 （D6）55 （D11）65 （D16）54 （D21）63

3 （D2）3 （D7）80 （D12）98 （D17）89 （D22）90

4 （D3）4 （D8）70 （D13）60 （D18）99 （D23）50

Dat

a nu

mbe

rs: m

1

5 （D4）5 （D9）95 （D14）79 （D19）75 （D24）69

Sort data table when D100=K3. Data numbers: m2


Row

Students No. Chinese English Mathematics Physis and

Chemistry

1 （D50）4 （D55）70 （D60）60 （D65）99 （D70）50

2 （D51）2 （D56）55 （D61）65 （D66）54 （D71）63

3 （D52）1 （D57）90 （D62）75 （D67）66 （D72）79

4 （D53）5 （D58）95 （D63）79 （D68）75 （D73）69

Dat

a nu

mbe

rs: m

1

5 （D54）3 （D59）80 （D64）98 （D69）89 （D74）90

Sort data table when D100=K5. Data numbers: m2


Row

Students No. Chinese English Mathematics Physis and

Chemistry

1 （D50）4 （D55）70 （D60）60 （D65）99 （D70）50

2 （D51）2 （D56）55 （D61）65 （D66）54 （D71）63

3 （D52）5 （D57）95 （D62）79 （D67）75 （D72）69

4 （D53）1 （D58）90 （D63）75 （D68）66 （D73）79

Dat

a nu

mbe

rs: m

1

5 （D54）3 （D59）80 （D64）98 （D69）89 （D74）90




TKY 10-Key Keyboard Input

－


S D1 D2 Note: Operand S occupies 10 continuous devices

Operand D2 occupies 10 continuous devices Refer to following for detail.


TKY Continuous execution －－


DTKY Continuous execution －－

Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: Head input device : Destination device for storing key input value

: Key input signal

This command can specify ten external input devices from and these ten external input devices is identified as decimal value of 0 to 9. These ten external input

devices are connected to ten keys respectively. When one of the ten keys is pressed,

the value of decimal numbers from 0 to 9,999 (max. 4 digits in 16-bit command) or from

0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits in 32-bit command) can be inputted and stored in

destination device . The device is used to store the condition of that key has been pressed.

ProgramExample

Using this command can specify ten input terminals from X0 to connect to ten keys

which number is from 0 to 9. When X20=On, the command is executed and it will store

the BIN value which is inputted by keys into D0 and M10~M19 is used to store the

condition of that key has been pressed. X20

TKY X0 D0 M10

PLC

0 1 32 4 5 6 7 8 9

X3X2X1X0S/S X6X5X4 X10X7 X11+24V0V

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

D0

103

102

101

100

number key

BCD value one digit number BCD code

BIN value

overflow

BCD value



7-55

As the time chart shown below, the four keys are connected to X5, X3, X0, X1 of

number keyboard. After pressing the four keys in that order of 1234 and the number

5,301 will be entered into D0. The max. number which can be entered in D0 is 9,999 i.e.

4 digits. If the entered number exceeds the above allowable range, the highest digits will

overflow.

After X2 is pressed, M12=On untill other keys are pressed. The situation of other press

keys are the same.

When any key of X0~X11 is pressed, one device of M10~M19 will be On.

If any key is pressed, M20=On.

When the drive contact X20 turns Off, the previous value do not change but M10~M20

all turns Off.

X0

X1

X3

X5 j

k

l

m

j k l m

M10

M11

M13

M15

M20

Key outputsignal




HKY 16-Key Keyboard Input

－


S D1 D2 D3

Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices Operand D1 occupies 4 continuous devices Operand D3 occupies 8 continuous devices Refer to each model specification for usage range.


HKY Continuous execution －－


DHKY Continuous execution －－

Flag: M1029 execution completed flagM1167 HKY input mode switch Please refer to the footnote

CommandExplanation

: Head scan input device : Head scan output device : Destination

device for storing key input value : Key input signal This command can create a 16-key keyboard which is a multiplex of 4 continuous

external input devices from and 4 continuous external output devices from

by matrix scan. The key input value will be stored in and is used to store the condition of that key has been pressed.

When this command is executed every time, the execution completed flag M1029 will

be On for the duration of that key pressed (one scan cycle).

If two or more keys are pressed at the same time, only the key activated first is

effective.

When HKY command is used in 16-bit command, can store numbers from 0 to

9,999 (max. 4 digits). When DHKY command is used in 32-bit command, can store numbers from 0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits). If the entered number exceeds the

above allowable range, the highest digits will overflow.

ProgramExample

Using this command to create a 16-key keyboard which is a multiplex of 4 continuous

external input devices X10~X13 and 4 continuous external output devices Y10~Y13.

When X4=On, the command is executed and it will store the BIN value which is

inputted by keys into D0 and M0~M7 is used to store the condition of that key has been

pressed.

X4HKY X10 Y10 D0 M0



7-57

Number input:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

D0

103

102

101

100

number key

one digit number BCD codeBCD value

BCD value

BIN value

overflow

Function key input:

When press A key, M0=On and latch. Next, press D key and then M0=Off, M3=On and latch.

If two or more keys are pressed at the same time, only the key activated first is effective.

F E D C B A

M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 Key output signal:

When any key of A to Fis pressed, M6=On one time. When any key of 0 to 9 is pressed, M7=Onone time.

When the drive contact X4 turns Off, the previous value do not change but M0~M7 all

turns Off.

External wiring:

Y13Y12Y11Y10COM

X13X12X11X10COM

C D E F

8 9 A B

4 5 6 7

0 1 2 3

PLC( )Transistor output



Footnote

When this command is executed, 8 times scan cycles is required to read the input

value of keys sucessfully. If the scan cycle is too long or too short, it may cause the key

to input incorrectly. Therefore, user can use the following command to avoid it.

When the scan cycle is too short, the I/O may not response in time and can not

read the key input correctly. At this time, user can fix the scan time to avoid it.

When the cycle is too long, the response of key may become slow. User can avoid

this by writing this command in a time interrupt subroutine and executing this

command in the fix time.

The function of flag M1167:

When M1167=On, HKY command can input hexadecimal value of 0~F.

When M1167=Off, A~F of HKY command are used as function keys.


ES EP EH72 DSW

Digital Switch Input －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D1 D2 n

Note: The usage range of operand n: n=1~2 Refer to each model specification for usage range.


DSW Continuous execution －－

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag

CommandExplanation

: Head input device : Head output device : Destination device for

storing the setting value : Number of digits This command is used to read one or two groups of 4 digits switch through 4 or 8

continuous external input devices from and 4 continuous external devices from

and store the setting value in destination device . When is 1, only

one group of digital switches is read. When is 2, two groups of digital switches are read.

ProgramExample

The first group of switches consists of X20~X23 and Y20~Y23. The second group of

switches consists of X24~X27 and Y20~Y23. When X10=On, the command starts to

execute. The setting value of the first group of switches are read and converted to BIN

value and stored in D20. The setting value of the second group of switches are read

and converted to BIN value and stored in D21. X10

DSW X20 Y20 D20 K2



7-59

When X10=On, Y20~Y23 will be On and scan in circles automatically. After the

completion of each circle scan, execution completed falg M1029=ON is a scan period

after a circle scan.

Outputs Y20~Y23 please use transistor output. Besides, please make sure that every

1, 2, 4, 8 terminal should connect a diode (0.1A/50V) to the inputs of PLC in serial as

shown in the example below.

X10

Y20

Y21

Y22

Y23

M1029

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s

0.1s 0.1s

interrupt

execution completed

operation start

Wiring diagram of digital switch

S/S X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27

Y23Y22Y21Y20C

1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8

PLC

10 10 10 100 1 2 3

100 101 102 103

0V +24V

BCD digitalswitches

should connecta diode (1N4148)in serial

The first group The second group



Footnote

When the scan terminals are relay outputs, the following program technique is used

with this command to operate successfully:

When X10=On, DSW command is executed. When X10 turns Off, M10 will be On

until the scan terminals of DSW command complete one output scan cycle. Then,

M10 will turn Off.

If the drive contact X10 use button switch, every time when X10 is pushed, M10,

the scan terminals specified by DSW command, will be reset to Off after the

completion of one output scan cycle. Then, the command will stop executing, the

data of digital switch will be read completely and the scan terminals will be activated

while the button switch is pushed. Therefore, even relay output is used in this

situation, the relay can be used for long because the operation of relay is not

frequent.

M10DSW X20 Y20 D20 K2

X10SET M10

M1029RST M10


ES EP EH73 SEGD

P Decode the 7-segment Display Panel


S D

Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (SEGDP)


SEGD Continuous execution SEGDP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: Source device for decoding : Output device after decoding

ProgramExample

When X10=On, contents (0~F: 16 bits) of the lower 4 bits (b0~b3) of D10 will be

decoded as readable in the 7-segment display panel for output. The decoding results

will be stored in Y10~Y17. X10

SEGD D10 K2Y10



7-61

Decoding Chart of the 7-segment Display Panel:

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F 1111

1110

1101

1100

1011

1010

1001

1000

0111

0110

0101

0100

0011

0010

0001

0000 ON OFFON ON ON ON ON

OFFOFFOFFOFF OFFON ON

ON ON ON ONOFF OFF ON

ON ON ON ON ONOFFOFF

OFFOFF OFFON ON ON ON

ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON

OFF ON ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON OFFOFF OFF

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON ON ONOFF

ON ON

OFF OFF ON ON ON

OFF ONON

ON OFF ON

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF OFF

a

c

b

d

g

ON

ON

ONON ONON OFF

ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF

OFF ON ON ON

ON ON ON

ON

ON

16bits

BitCombi-nation

Compositionof the 7-Step

Display Panel

Status of Every Step DataDisplayed


ES EP EH74 SEGL

7-segment Display Scan Output


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: The usage range of operand n: n=0~7. Please refer to

the footnote. In EH series models, SEGL command can only be used twice. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


SEGL Continuous execution －－

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1029 execution completed flag

CommandExplanation

: Display source device of 7-segment display : Start device of

7-segment display scan output : Polarity setting of output signal and scan signal

8 or 12 continuous external output points that start from this command can be regarded as display and scan signal output of 1 or 2 groups of 4 digits of 7-segment

display. 7-segment display module has function to convert input BCD code to

7-segment display and has control signal to latch or not.



will decide the numbers of groups of 4 digits of 7-segment display and also indicate the polaritys of PLC output terminal and 7-segment display input terminal.

The points number of 7-segment display output command that a group of 4 digits use

is 8 points and 2 groups of 4 digits use are 12 points.

Scan output terminal will circulate in sequence when this command executes. The

drive contact will be changed from Off to On and scan output execute again.

ProgramExample

When X10=ON, command will start to execute. 7-segment display scan loop is

composed of Y10~Y17. The value of D10 will be converted to BCD code and send to

the first group of 7-segment display to display. The value of D11 will be converted to

BCD code and send to the second group of 7-segment display to display. If any value

of D10 or D11 is greater than 9999, operation error will occur. X10

SEGL D10 Y10 K4

When X10=ON, Y14~Y17 will scan in circles automatically. Each circle scan needs 12

scan time. M1029=ON is a scan period after a circle scan.

4 digits of a group, n=0~3. After the terminal of 1, 2, 4, 8 of decoded 7-segment display connects itself in

parallet, they should connect to Y10~Y13 of PLC. Latch terminal of each number connects to Y14~Y17 of PLC individually. When X10=ON, the content of D10 will be transmitted to 7-segment display to

display in sequently according to Y14~Y17 circulates in sequence 4 digits of 2 groups, n=4~7.

After the terminal of 1, 2, 4, 8 of decoded 7-segment display connects itself in parallet, they should connect to Y20~Y23 of PLC. Latch terminal of each number and the first group share Y14~Y17 of PLC. The content of D10 will be transmitted to the first group of 7-segment display and

the content of D11 will be transmitted to the second group of 7-segment display to display. If D10=K1234 and D11=K4321, the first group will display １２３４ and the second group will display will display ４３２1.

7-segment display scan output wiring

COM Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23COM COM

1 2 4 8 100

101

102

103

103

102

101

100

V+10

310

210

110

0

V+1248

1248

The first group The second group



7-63

Footnote

The V4.9 and above of ES series provide this command (SEGL).

Version 4.9 of ES series only provide a group of 4 digits of 7-segment display and use

8 points to output. SEGL command only can be used once in the program and the

usage range of operand n is 0 to 3.

Scan time must be longer than 10ms while this command is executed. If scan time is

shorter than 10ms, please use fixed scan time function to fix scan time on 10ms.

Please use suitable 7-segment display for the transistor that PLC uses to output.

Settings of n: it is used to set the polarity of transistor output loop. It can be set to

positive polarity or negative polarity. What 7-segment display it connects is a group of

4 digits or two groups of 4 digits.

PLC transistor output is NPN type and it is open collect output. When wiring,

output should connect a step up resistor to VCC (less than 30VDC). Therefore,

when output point Y is On, output will be low potential.

On

PLC

VCC

Y

step up resistor

signal output

Y drive

Output loop of PNP transistor: when inner signal is “1”, it will output high potential.

This logic is called positive polarity.

PLC

Logic 1

On

+24V

HIGH

positive

Step downresistor



Positive logic (Negative polarity) output of BCD code

BCD value Y output (BCDcode) Signal output

b3 b2 b1 b0 8 4 2 1 A B C D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

Negative logic (Positive polarity) output of BCD code

BCD value Y output (BCDcode) Signal output

b3 b2 b1 b0 8 4 2 1 A B C D 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

Display scan (latch) signal

Positive logic (Negative polarity) output

Negative logic (Positive polarity) output

Y output (Latch) Output control signal Y output (Latch) Output control

signal 1 0 0 1

Parameter n settings:

groups number of 7-segment display A group Two groups

Y of BCD code outputs ＋－＋－

Display scan latch signal ＋－＋－＋－＋－

n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

’＋’: Positive logic (Negative polarity) output ‘－’: Negative logic (Positive polarity) output

The combination of output polarity of PLC transistor and input polaity of 7-segment

display can be set by settings of n.



7-65


ARWS Arrow Keyboard Input

－


S D1 D2 n

Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices The usage range of operand n: n=0~3 (Refer to API 74 SEGL footnote). ARWS command only can be used once in the program. In EP series models, operand D2 do not provide index register E, F to modify and it only can be specified as a multiple of 10, e.g. Y0, Y10…etc.


ARWS Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: None Refer to each model specification for

usage range. Output point that designated by this

command should use transistor to output. When using this command, please fix

scan time or put this command into time interrupt subroutine (I6□□~I8□□) to execute.

CommandExplanation

: Start device of key input : Display device on 7-segment display

: Scan output start device of 7-segment display : Polarity setting of output signal and scan signal

ProgramExample

When the command is executed, X20 is defined as the down key, X21 is defined as

the up key, X22 is defined as the right key and X23 is defined as the left key. These

keys are used to edit and display the external setting value. The setting value is stored

in D20 and its setting range is from 0 to 9,999.

When X10=On, 103 is a effective setting digit number. If pressing left key, the effective

setting digit number will be displayed and jump by the direction from 103→100→101

→102→103→100.

If pressing the right key, the effective setting digit number will be displayed and jump

by the direction from 103→102→101→100→103→102. Meanwhile, the digit position

LED connected from Y24 to Y27 will also be Onto indicate the effective setting digit

number.

If pressing the up key to increase , the effective number will change from 0→1→2→…

8→9→0→1. If pressing the down key, the effective number will change from 0→9→8

→…1→0→9, meanwhile, the changed value will be displayed on the 7-segment

display. X10

ARWS X20 D20 Y20 K0



1248

10 10 10 103 2 1 0

Y20Y21Y22Y23

Y27Y26Y25Y24

LED

Digitposition

7-step display which displays setting value (4 digits data)

X21

X20

X22X23

Increase digit value

decrease digit value

moveto

the left

moveto

the right

The 4 switches is used to movedigit position to the left or to theright and increase or decrease the setting value of the digits


ASC ASCII Code Conversion

－


S D Note: Operand S is 8 alphanumeric character string inputted by

WPLSoft software from PC, or ASC II code inputted by HPP02. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


ASC Continuous execution －－

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1161 8/16 mode exchange

CommandExplanation

: The alphanumeric character which can be converted to its ASC II code : The destination device for storing ASC II code.

The alphanumeric character can be used to display error message directly if connect

7-segment display when using this command.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, A~H is converted to ASCII code and stored in D0~D3. X0

ASC A B C D E F G H D0

D0

D1

D2

b15 b042H (B) 41H (A)

44H (D) 43H (C)

46H (F) 45H (E)

D3 48H (H) 47H (G)

low bytehigh byte When M1161=On, the ASCII code converted from every character will occupy lower

8-bit (b7~b0) of one register. The high byte will be invalid and its content is filled as 0.

This also means that one register only can be used to store one character.



7-67

b15 b0D0

D2

D4

D6

D1

D3

D5

D7

00 H00 H00 H00 H00 H00 H00 H00 H

41H (A)42H (B)43H (C)44H (D)45H (E)46H (F)47H (G)48H (H)

low bytehigh byte API Applicable models

ES EP EH77 PR

Print －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices.

Operand D occupies 10 continuous devices. PR command only can be used twice in the program. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In EP series models, operand D does not provide index register E, F to modify.


PR Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1029 execution completed flag

M1027

CommandExplanation

: The device for storing ASCII code : The external output device which outputs ASC II code.

This command will output ASCII codes stored in 4 registers from device in

order of the output devices specified by .

ProgramExample

1

First, using API 76 ASC command convert A~H to ASCII code and store them in

D0~D3. Then, using this command output them in the order of A~H.

When M1027=Off, X10 turns from Off to On, the command is executed, Y10(low byte)

to Y17(high byte) is specified as the data output devices, Y20 is specified as scan

signal and Y21 is specified as the monitor signal while the command being executed.

This mode can execute 8 character string output operation.

If X10 turns from Off to On while the command being executed, the data output will be

interrupt. When X10 is On once more, the data will be sent again.

X10PR D0 Y10



T T TT (ms) : scan time

X10 start signal

Y10~Y17 data

Y20 scan singal

Y21 being executed

A B C D H

ProgramExample

2

PR command provide 8 serial string output operation. When M1027=Off, maximum 8

character string can be outputted in serial. When M1027=On, 1 to 16 character string

output operation can be executed.

When M1027=On, X10 turns from Off to On, Y10(low byte) to Y17(high byte) is

specified as the data output devices, Y20 is specified as scan signal and Y21 is

specified as the monitor signal while the command being executed. This mode can

execute 16 character string output operation.

If the character string 00H (NUL) has been sent, it means the end of the character

string and the operation of PR command won’t be continous.

The drive contact X10 is always On but it will automatically stop after one time

operation of data output. However, if X0 is always On, M1029 won’t be activated.

X10PR D0 Y10

M1002SET M1027

T T T

M1029 execution is completed

X10 start signal

Y10~Y17 data

Y20 scan singal

Y21 being executed

last characterfirst character

T : scan time or interrupt time

Footnote

This command should only use transistor output.

When using this command, please fix the scan time or execute this command in a time




7-69


FROM P Read Special Module CR Data


m1 m2 D n Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=0~7

The usage range of operand m2: m2=0~48 The usage range of operand n: n =1~(49- m2) Refer to each model specification for usage range. For ES series, it doesn’t support pulse execution command (FROMP, DFROMP).


FROM Continuous execution FROMP Pulse

execution


DFROM Continuous execution DFROMP Pulse

execution Flag: When M1083=On, it allows to

insert interrupt during command FROM/TO. Refer to following explanation for detail.

CommandExplanation

: Number for special module : Number of CR (Control Register) of

special module that will be read : Location to save reading data : Data number of reading one time

DVP PLC uses this command to read CR data of special module.

When indicates bit operand, you can use K1~K4 for 16-bit command and K5~K8 for 32-bit command.

Please refer to the following footnote to see the detail of the numbering rule of special

module.

ProgramExample

To read the content of CR#29 of special module#0 to D0 of PLC and to read the

content of CR#30 of special module#0 to D1 of PLC. It can read 2 data at one time

(n=2).

The command will be executed when X0=ON. The command won’t be executed when

X0=OFF and the content of previous reading data won’t change. X0

FROM K0 K29 D0 K2


ES EP EH79 D TO

P Special Module CR Data Write in


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E Fm1 m2 S n Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=0~7

The usage range of operand m2: m2=0~48 The usage range of operand n: n =1~(49- m2) Refer to each model specification for usage range. For ES series, it doesn’t support pulse execution command (TOP, DTOP)


TO Continuous execution TOP Pulse

execution


DTO Continuous execution DTOP Pulse

execution Flag: M1083 FROM/TO mode

exchange Refer to following for detail.



CommandExplanation

: Number of special module : Number of CR (Control Register) of special

module that will be wrote in : Data to write in CR : data number to write in one time.

When assigns bit operand, K1~K4 can be used for 16-bit command and K1~K8 can be used for 32-bit command.

DVP-series PLC uses this command to write data into CR of special module.

ProgramExample

Using 32-bit command DTO, program will write D11 and D10 into CR#13 and CR#12 of

special module#0. It only writes a group of data at one time (n=1)

The command will be executed when X0=ON and it won’t be executed when X0=OFF.

The data that wrote in previous won’t have any change. X0

DTO K0 K12 D10 K1

The rule of command operand: m1: arrangement number of special module. The number of special module that

connects to PLC MPU. The numbering rule of special module from the near to the distant of MPU is from 0 to 7. The maximum is 8 special modules and won’t occupy I/O point. m2: the number of CR. Built-in 16-bit of 36 groups memory of special module is

called CR (Control Register). The number of CR uses decimal digits (#0~#35). All running status and setting values of special module have included.

Footnote

If using FROM/TO command, the unit of read/write of CR is one number for one time. If using DFROM/DTO command, the unit of read/write of CR is two numbers in one time.

CR #10 CR #9

Upper 16-bit Lower 16-bit

Specified CR number The number of transmission groups n. The meaning of n=2 of 16-bit command and

n=1 of 32-bit are the same.

D0D1D2D3D4D5

CR #5CR #6CR #7CR #8CR #9CR #10

D0D1D2D3D4D5

CR #5CR #6CR #7CR #8CR #9CR #10

Specified device Specified CR Specified device Specified CR

16-bit command when n=6 32-bit command when n=3

In ES series models, flag M1083 is not provided. When FROM/TO command is executed,

all interrupts (including external or internal interrupt subroutines) will be disabled. All

interrupts will be executed after FROM/TO command is completed. Besides, FROM/TO

command also can be executed in the interrupt subroutine.



7-71

The function of the flag M1083 (FROM/TO mode exchange) provided in EP/EH series

models:

1. When M1083=Off, FROM/TO command is executed, all interrupts (including external

or internal interrupt subroutines) will be disabled. All interrupts will be executed after

FROM/TO command is completed. Besides, FROM/TO command also can be

executed in the interrupt subroutine.

2. When M1083=On, if a interrupt occurs while FROM/TO command has been

programmed, FROM/TO command will be interruptted to execute the interrupt.

However, FROM/TO command cannot be executed in the interrupt subroutine

Application program example of FROM/TO command:

Example 1: Adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of DVP-04AD by setting

OFFSET value of CH1 to 0V(=K0LSB) and GAIN value of CH1 to 2.5V(=K2000LSB).

M1002TO K0 K1 H0 K1

TO K0 K33 H0 K1

X0TO K0 K18 K0 K1

TO K0 K24 K2000 K1

1. Write H0 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 0 and set CH1 to mode 0 (voltage

input : -10V to +10V).

2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 to CH4.

3. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, K0LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in CR#18

and K2000LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#24.

Example 2: Adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of DVP-04AD by setting

OFFSET value of CH2 to 2mA(=K400 LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to 18

mA(=K3600LSB).

M1002TO K0 K1 H18 K1

TO K0 K33 H0 K1

X0TO K0 K19 K400 K1

TO K0 K25 K3600 K1



1. Write H18 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 0 and set CH2 to mode 3 (current

input : -20mA to +20mA).

2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 to CH4.

3. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, K400LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in

CR#19 and K3600LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#25.

Example 3: Adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of DVP-02DA by setting

OFFSET value of CH2 to 0mA(=K0LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to

10mA(=K1000LSB). M1002

TO K1 K1 H18 K1

TO K1 K33 H0 K1

X0TO K1 K22 K0 K1

TO K1 K28 K1000 K1

1. Write H18 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 1 and set CH2 to mode 3

(current input : 0mA to +20mA).

2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 and CH2.



Example 4: Adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of DVP-02DA by setting

OFFSET value of CH2 to 2mA(=K400LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to

18mA(=K3600LSB).

M1002TO K1 K1 H10 K1

TO K1 K33 H0 K1

X0TO K1 K23 K400 K1

TO K1 K29 K3600 K1

1. Write H10 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 1 and set CH2 to mode 2

(current input : +4mA to +20mA).

2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 and CH2.





7-73

Example 5: Program example when DVP-04AD and DVP-02DA module are used

together

M1000FROM K0 K0 D0 K1

TO K0 K1 H3030 K1LD= H88 D0

TO K0 K2 K32 K2

FROM K0 K6 D20 K4

M1000FROM K1 K0 D0 K1

CMP H49 D0 M0

M1013INC D100

ADD D101 K5 D101

RST D100LD= K4000 D100

RST D101LD= K4000 D101

M1TO K1 K1 H10 K1

M1TO K1 K10 D100 K2

END

1. Read the data of model type from expansion module K0 and distinguish if the data is

H88 (DVP-04AD model type).

2. If the model type is DVP-04AD, the drive contact M1 is on and set input mode CR#1:

(CH1, CH3)= mode 0, (CH2, CH4)= mode 3.

3. Set the mode of CR#2 and CR#3. The average times of CH1 and CH2 is K32.

4. Read the input signal average value of CH1~CH4 (4 data) from CR#6~CR#9 and

store them in D20 to D23.

5. Read the data of model type from expansion module K1 and distinguish if the data is

H49 (DVP-02DA model type).

6. D100 will increase K1 and D101 will increase K5 every second.

7. When value of D100 and D101 attain to K4000, they will be reset to 0.

8. If the model type is DVP-04AD, the drive contact M1 is on and set input mode CR#1:

CH1 mode to 0, CH2 mode to 2.

9. Write output setting CR#10 and CR#11 to D100 and D101. Analog output will change

with D100 and D101 value.




RS Serial Data Communication


S m D n Note: Operand m available range: m=0~256

Operand n available range: n=0~256 Refer to following for detail.


RS Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1120~M1131,

M1140~M1143, M1161 Please refer to the footnote.

CommandExplanation

: Start device of transmitting data : Transmitting data group number

: Start device of receiving data : receiving data group number This command is a convenience command for MPU to use RS-485 to connect

communication interface in series. It stores words data in source data register

and sets length . It also can set to receive data register and length .

If it doesn’t need to transmit data, can be indicated to K0 and if it doesn’t need

to receive data, can be indicated to K0. RS command can be used in the program unlimitedly, but you can’t execute two or

more RS commands at the same time.

It is invalid to change transmitting data during executing RS command.

Use this RS command to transmit and receive data of PLC and external/peripheral

equipment (AC drive, etc.) when external/peripheral equipment has RS-485 serial

communication and communication format of this equipment is public.

If communication format of external/peripheral equipment corresponds with

communication format of MODBUS, DVP series PLC provides several convenience

communication commands, API 100 MODRD, API 101 MODWR and API 150

MODRW, for user to use. Please refer to individual command explanation for detail.

Please refer to following footnote for more information of special auxiliary relay

M1120~M1161 and special data register D1120~D1131 related to RS-485

communication command.

ProgramExample

1

Writing data into the register that starts from D100 and set M1122 (send request flag)

to ON.

If RS command is executed when X10=ON, PLC will in the state of waiting for

transmitting and receiving data. It will start to transmit 10 continuous data that start

from D100. M1122 will be set to OFF at the end of transmitting (Please do not use

program to execute RST M1122). After 1ms, it will start to receive external 10 data and

store them into continuous registers that start from D120.



7-75

When receiving data complete, M1123 will be set to ON. (Program will set M1123 to

OFF when receiving data complete and in the state of waiting for transmitting and

receiving data. Please do use not PLC program to execute RST M1123 continuously.

MOV D1120H86M1002

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV D1129K100

X10

M1123RST M1123

RS D100 K10 D120 K10

transmissionrequest

pulse

receivingcompleted

Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 7, E, 1

Communicationprotocol latched

Setting communicationtime out 100ms

write transmitting data in advance

sending request

Process of receiving data

receiving completedand flag reset

ProgramExample

2

8-bit mode (M1161=ON) / 16-bit mode (M1161=OFF) switch:

《8-bit mode》:

Head code and tail code of PLC transmission data will be set by using M1126 and M1130

according to D1124~D1126. After setting, PLC will send head code and tail code that set

by user automatically when executing RS command.

When M1161=ON, the conversion mode will be 8-bit. 16-bit data will be divided into high

byte and low byte. High byte will be ignored and low byte will be received and

transmitted.

M1000M1161

D100 D120K4 K7RSX0

Transmit data: (PLC → external equipment)

STX D100L D101L D102L D103L EXT1 EXT2

Headcode

source data register will start fromlow byte of D100

length = 4

Tail code1

Tail code2

Receive data: (external equipment → PLC)



D120L D122L D123L D124L D125L D126LD121L

Headcode

Tail code1

Tail code2

receive data register will start fromlow byte of D120

length = 7

PLC will receive all data that transmitted from external equipment, including head code

and tail code. Please pay attention on setting length .

《16-bit mode》:

Head code and tail code of PLC transmitting data is set by using M1126 and M1130 with

D1124~D1126. After complete the setting, PLC will send head code and tail code set by

user automatically when executing RS command.

When M1161=OFF, the conversion mode will be 16-bit. 16-bit data will be divided into high

byte and low byte for data transmitting and receiving.

M1001M1161

D100 D120K4 K7RSX0

Transmit data: (PLC → external equipment)

STX D100L D100L D101L D101L EXT1 EXT2

Headcode

source data register will start fromlow byte of D100

length = 4

Tail code1

Tail code2

Receive data: (external equipment → PLC)

D120L D120H D121L D121H D122L D122H D123L

Tail code1

Tail code2

receive data register will start fromlow byte of D120

length = 7

Headcode

PLC will receive all data that transmitted from external equipment, including head code and tail code. Please pay attention on setting length .



7-77

ProgramExample

3

When PLC connects to VFD-B series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143=OFF), (16-bit

Mode, M1161=OFF), it will transmit data to read 6 continuous data that start from

VFD-B parameter address H2101.

MOV D1120H86M1002

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV D1129K100

X10

M1123RST M1123

RS D100 K17 D120 K35

pulse

receivingcompleted





sending request


transmissionrequest


PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: “: 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF “

VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: “: 01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 3B CR LF “

PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages)

Register DATA D100 low byte ‘: ’ 3A H STX D100 high byte ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D101 low byte ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 ADR (1,0) is AC drive address

D101 high byte ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D102 low byte ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0 CMD (1,0) is command code

D102 high byte ‘2’ 32 H D103 low byte ‘1’ 31 H D103 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D104 low byte ‘1’ 31 H

Start data address


Number of data (count by word)

D106 high byte ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 D107 low byte ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0

LRC CHK (0,1) is error check code

D107 high byte CR A H D108 low byte LF D H END

PLC receiving data register (VFD-B response messages) Register DATA

D120 low byte ‘: ’ 3A H STX D120 high byte ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D121 low byte ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D121 high byte ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D122 low byte ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0 D122 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D123 low byte ‘C’ 43 H Number of data (count by byte)

D123 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D124 low byte ‘1’ 31 H D124 high byte ‘0’ 30 H

Content of address 2101 H



Register DATA

D125 low byte ‘0’ 30 H D125 high byte ‘1’ 31 H D126 low byte ‘7’ 37 H D126 high byte ‘6’ 36 H D127 low byte ‘6’ 36 H










D135 high byte ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1 D136 low byte ‘B’ 42 H LRC CHK 0 D136 high byte CR A H D137 low byte LF D H

END

ProgramExample

4

When PLC connects to VFD-B AC drive (RTU Mode, M1143=ON), (16-bit Mode,

M1161=ON), writing transmitting data, H12, in advance into VFD-B parameter address

H2000.

MOV D1120H86M1002

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV D1129K100

X10

M1123RST M1123

RS D100 K8 D120 K8

SET M1143

SET M1161

RTU Mode

8 bits Mode

receivingcompleted

sending request


transmissionrequest

pulse








7-79

PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages)

Register DATA D100 low byte 01 H Address D101 low byte 06 H Function D102 low byte 20 H D103 low byte 00 H Data address

D104 low byte 00 H D105 low byte 12 H Data content

D106 low byte 02 H CRC CHK Low D107 low byte 07 H CRC CHK High

PLC receiving data register (response messages of VFD-B)

Register DATA D120 low byte 01 H Address D121 low byte 06 H Function D122 low byte 20 H D123 low byte 00 H Data address

D124 low byte 00 H D125 low byte 12 H Data content

D126 low byte 02 H CRC CHK Low D127 low byte 07 H CRC CHK High



Footnote

RS-485 communication RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST /

RSTEF / MODRW commands relation flags:

Flag Function Explanation Action

M1120

Communication protocol holding. It is used to hold communication setting. PLC will reset communication protocol setting according to special data register D1120 after first program scan. When second program scan starts and RS command is executed, it will reset communication protocol setting according to special data register D1120. If communication protocol is fixed, M1120 can be set to ON. At this time, communication protocol setting won’t be reset as RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW is executed even if D1120 setting is changed.

User setting and clear

M1121 When it is off, RS-485 of PLC is sending communication information. System acts

M1122

Sending request. Users need to set M1122 to ON by pulse command when using RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW command to transmit and receive data. If above command starts to execute, PLC will transmit and receive data. M1122 will be reset after above commands complete transmitting.

User setting and system clears auto

M1123

Receiving completed. M1123 will be set to ON after RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW commands complete executing. User can process receiving data when M1123 is set to ON and reset M1123 to OFF when the process of receiving data is completed.

System auto setting

and user clear

M1124 Receiving wait. When M1124 is set to ON, it means PLC is waiting for receiving data. System acts

M1125 Communication reset. When M1125 is set to ON, the communication of PLC will be reset. After resetting, M1125 must be reset to Off.

M1126 STX/ETX selection. Please refer to the following table for selecting user/system definition and STX/ETX.

M1130 STX/ETX selection. Please refer to the following table for selecting user/system definition and STX/ETX.


M1127 Communication command finishes transmitting and receiving. RS command is not included.

M1129 Receiving time out. This flag will be activated if D1129 is set and the process of receiving data is not completed within the setting time. After resetting, M1129 should be reset to OFF.

System auto setting

and user clear

M1128 Transmitting/receiving indication

M1131 M1131=ON during MODRD / RDST / MODRW convert to HEX. Otherwise M1131 will be OFF.

M1140 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data received error

M1141 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW command error

M1142 VFD-A command data received error

System acts

M1143 ASCII / RTU mode selection, ON is RTU mode and OFF is ASCII mode. (use with MODRD / MODWR / MODRW commands)

M1161 8/16-bit mode setting. ON is 8-bit mode and OFF is 16-bit mode




7-81

Special register related to RS-485 communication RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD /

REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW command:


D1038 For ES/EP models, data response delay time setting when PLC MPU is slave. Time unit (0.1ms).

D1050~D1055 After executing MODRD/RDST command, PLC will convert ASCII data of D1070~D1085 to HEX and store hexadecimal data to D1050~D1055.

D1070~D1085

PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. Executing this command will receive feedback (return) messages from receiver. The messages will be stored at D1070~D1085. User can check return data by viewing the content of the register.

D1089~D1099

PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. The transmitting message will be stored in D1089~D1099 when this command is executed. Users can check if the command is correct by the content of the register.

D1120 Please refer to the following table for RS-485 communication protocol.

D1121 Communication address of PLC MPU when PLC MPU is slave.

D1122 Residual words of transmitting data.

D1123 Residual words of receiving data.

D1124 Start word definition (STX). Please refer to the table above.

D1125 First end word definition (ETX1). Please refer to the table above.

D1126 Second end word definition (ETX2). Please refer to the table above.

D1129

Communication time out is abnormal. Time unit (ms). It is used to set time of time out. If the value of the time is 0, it means there is no time out. PLC will set M1129 to be ON if receiving time of the first word or between any two words is more than setting after executing RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW commands to enter received mode when the value of the time is more than 0. User can use M1129 to handle communication time out but be sure to remember to reset M1129 after handling.

D1130 MODBUS return error code record.

D1256~D1295

PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command MODRW. The characters transmitted by this command will be stored in D1256~D1295 when this command is executed. User can check if the command is correct by the content of the registers.

D1296~D1311 PLC will automatically convert ASCII data in the receiving register specified by user to HEX, hexadecimal value.



D1120: RS-485 communication protocol. For the settings, please refer to following

table:

Content 0 1 b0 Data length 7 8

00 : None 01 : Odd b1

b2 Parity bits 11 : Even

b3 Stop bits 1 bit 2 bit 0001 (H1) : 110 0010 (H2) : 150 0011 (H3) : 300 0100 (H4) : 600 0101 (H5) : 1200 0110 (H6) : 2400 0111 (H7) : 4800 1000 (H8) : 9600 1001 (H9) : 19200 1010 (HA) : 38400 1011 (HB) : 57600 (only in EH/EP series models)

b4 b5 b6 b7

1100 (HC) : 115200 (only in EH/EP series models)

b8 Start word selection None D1124

b9 First end word selection None D1125

b10 Second end word selection None D1126

b15~b11 No definition Start word and end word of control characters will be defined in the communication

format of peripheral equipment when using RS command. Start word and end word

can be set in D1124~D1125 by user or defined by machine/equipment. When using

M1126, M1130, D1124~D1125 to set start and end word, b8~b9 of D1120 of RS485

communication protocol should be set to 1. For the settings, please refer to the

following table: M1130

0 1

0 D1124: user define D1125: user define D1126: user define

D1124: H 0002 D1125: H 0003 D1126: H 0000（no setting）

M11

26

1 D1124: user define D1125: user define D1126: user define

D1124: H 003A（’:’） D1125: H 000D（CR） D1126: H 000A（LF）

Example for communication format setting: Communication format: Baud rate 9600 7, N, 2

STX : “: “ ETX1 : “CR”

EXT2 : “LF”

You can get the communication format H788 via check with table and write into D1120.



7-83

b15 b0

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

7 8 8

D11200

Don t care

MOV H788 D1120M1002

When using STX, EXT1 and EXT2 should pay attention to the On/Off relationship between special auxiliary relay M1126 and M1130. M1143: ASCII / RTU mode selection. ON is RTU mode and OFF is ASCII mode.

Take standard MODBUS format to explanation: ASCII mode (M1143=Off):

STX Start word = ‘: ’ (3AH) Address Hi Address Lo

Communication address: 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes

Function Hi Function Lo

Function code: 8-bit function code consists of 2 ASCII codes

DATA (n-1)

…….

DATA 0

Data content: n × 8-bit data content consists of 2n ASCll codes

LRC CHK Hi LRC CHK Lo

LRC check sum: 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCll code

END Hi END Lo

End word: END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)

Communication protocol is made of MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). Each byte consists of 2 ASCII characters. For example: a 1-byte data 64 Hex shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex). The table below identifies the usable hexadecimal characters and their associated ASCII codes.

Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’

ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H

Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’ ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H

Start word (STX): ‘: ’ (3AH)

Communication address (Address):

‘0’ ‘0’: broadcast for all driver (Broadcast)

‘0’ ‘1’: toward the drive at the 01 address

‘0’ ‘F’: toward the drive at the 15 address

‘1’ ‘0’: toward the drive at the 16 address﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒and consequently, the Max. address

can be reached is 255 (‘F’ ‘F’). Function code (Function):

‘0’ ‘3’: read contents of many registers

‘0’ ‘6’: write one WORD into the register

‘1’ ‘0’: write contents of many registers



Data content: The content of transmitting data send by user

LRC check:

LRC check is the added sum from “Address” to “Data contents”. For example, the 01H +

03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, then take the complementary of 2, D7H. End word: END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH) For example: when the address of the drive is set as 01H, read 2 data contents that exist

successively within the register, as shown follows: the address of the start register is

2102H. Inquiry message: Response message:

STX ‘: ’ STX ‘: ’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Address ‘1’ Address ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Function ‘3’ Function ‘3’ ‘2’ ‘0’ ‘1’

Number of data (count by byte) ‘4’

‘0’ ‘1’

Start address ‘2’ ‘7’ ‘0’ ‘7’ ‘0’

Content of start address 2102H

‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’


‘2’ ‘0’ ‘D’ ‘0’ LRC Check ‘7’

Content of address 2103H

‘0’ CR ‘7’ END LF LRC Check ‘1’

CR END LF

RTU mode (M1143=On):

START Please refer to following explanation Address Communication address: 8-bit binary

Function Function code: 8-bit binary DATA (n-1)

……. DATA 0

Data content: n × 8-bit data

CRC CHK Low CRC CHK High

CRC check: 16-bit CRC consists of 2 8-bit binary

END Please refer to following explanation

START: ES / EP series: keep none input signal to be greater or equal to 10 ms EH series:

Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms)300 40 9600 2 600 21 19200 1 1200 10 38400 1 2400 5 57600 1 4800 3 115200 1



7-85

Communication Address (Address):

00 H: broadcast for all driver (Broadcast) 01 H: toward the drive at the 01 address

0F H: toward the drive at the 15 address

10 H: toward the drive at the 16 address﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒and consequently, the Max. address

can be reached is 255 (‘F’ ‘F’)

Function code (Function):

03 H: read contents of many registers

06 H: write one WORD into the register

01 H: write contents of many registers

Data content:

The content of transmitting data send by user

CRC check:

CRC check starts from “Address” and ends in “Data content”. Its calculation is as

follows:

Step 1: Load the 16-bit register (the CRC register) with FFFFH.

Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message command with the 16-bit CRC

register of the low byte, then store the result into the CRC register.

Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit.

Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from

step 3 into the CRC register, otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC

register, then store the result into the CRC register.

Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 and calculates the 8-bit.

Step 6: Repeat Steps 2~5 for the next 8-bit message command, till all the message

commands are processed. And finally, the obtained CRC register value is

the CRC check value. What should be noticed is that the CRC check must

be placed interchangeably in the check sum of the message command.

END:

ES / EP series: keep none input signal to be greater or equal to 10 ms

EH series: Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms)

300 40 9600 2 600 21 19200 1 1200 10 38400 1 2400 5 57600 1 4800 3 115200 1



For example: when the address of the drive is set as 01H, read 2 continuous data of the

register shown follows: the address of the start register is 2102H Inquiry message: Response message:

Address 01 H Address 01 H

Function 03 H Function 03 H

21 H Start data address 02 H Number of data (count by byte)

04 H

00 H 17 H Number of data (count by word) 02 H

Content of data address 8102H 70 H

CRC CHK Low 6F H 00 H CRC CHK High F7 H

Content of data address 8103H 00 H

CRC CHK Low FE H CRC CHK High 5C H

Timing chart of RS-485 communication program flag:

MOV D1120H86M1002

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV D1129K100

X10

M1123RST M1123

RS D100 K2 D120 K8





transmissionrequest

pulsesending request

receivingcompleted





7-87

Timing chart:

87

65

43

21

0

32

10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 2 3

SET M1122 X0

RS X10command executes

MODRD/RDST/MODRW datareceiving and conversion completed

M1127

Covert MODRD/RDST/MODRW to hexadecimal

M1131

Transmission ready M1121

Sending request M1122

Receiving completed M1123

Receiving wait M1124

Communication reset M1125

Transmitting and receiving M1128

Receiving time out M1129Receive time outtimer set by D1129

Residual words of transmitting data D1122

Residual words ofreceiving data D1123

Auto reset after transmitting data completed

Changedirectionimmediately

User must reset in program

User will reset to the transmitstandby status in program

ASCII data converted to hexadecimal,less than a scan period

It will be activated when receiving time out message

Stop to count time afterreceiving data completed

Conversion data


PRUN P

Octal Number System Transmission

－


S D Note: X, Y, M of word device KnX, KnY, KnM should be a multiple

of 10, e.g. X10, M10, Y10. When operand S is specified as KnX, operand D should be specified as KnM. When operand S is specified as KnM, operand D should be specified as KnY. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


PRUN Continuous execution PRUNP Pulse


DPRUN Continuous execution DPRUNP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Transmission source device : Transmission destination device

Transmit the the content of to in octal number system format.



ProgramExample

1

When X3=On, transmit the content of K4X10 to K4M10 in octal number system

format. X3

PRUN K4X10 K4M10

X27

M27

X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18

NO CHANGE

ProgramExample

2

When X2=On, transmit the content of K4M10 to K4Y10 in octal number system format.X2

PRUN K4M10 K4Y10

X27

M27

X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18

These two devices won be transmitted　


ASCI P Convert HEX into ASCII


S D n Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256

Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ASCIP)


ASCI Continuous execution ASCIP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting

CommandExplanation

: Start device of source data : Start device for storing converted result

: Converted digits

16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, read hexadecimal data characters

from the source devcie and convert the data into the ASCII code. Then, store

the result into high and low byte of device .

8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, read hexadecimal data characters

from the source devcie and convert the data into the ASCII code. Then, store

the result into low byte of device (high byte of device are all set to 0).



7-89

ProgramExample

1

When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode.

When X0=On, read four hexadecimal data characters from D10 and convert them into

ASCII codes. Then, store the converted data to the register started from D20.

X0ASCI D10 D20 K4

M1001M1161

Supposed condition:

(D10) = 0123 H ‘0’ = 30H ‘4’ = 34H ‘8’ = 38H (D11) = 4567 H ‘1’ = 31H ‘5’ = 35H ‘9’ = 39H (D12) = 89AB H ‘2’ = 32H ‘6’ = 36H ‘A’ = 41H (D13) = CDEFH ‘3’ = 33H ‘7’ = 37H ‘B’ = 42H

When n is 4, the bit structure is:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 2 3

D10=0123 H

D20

D21

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0

1 31H 0 30H

3 33H 2 32H

high byte low byte

high byte low byte


0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 11 0 0 0000

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 11 1 1 0

0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 00 1 1 0 1

0 1 2 3

D10 = H 0123

b15

b15

7 H 37 6 H 36

Convert to

b15

0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 01 1 0 0000

0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 00 1 1 1b15

3 H 33 2 H 32

D22

b15

b0

b0

b0

b0

b0

D11 = H 4567

4 5 6 7

D20

D21

1 H 31 0 H 30



When n = 1 to 16: n D K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8

D20 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” D20 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” D21 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” D21 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” D22 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” D22 high byte “3” “2” “1” D23 low byte “3” “2” D23 high byte “3” D24 low byteD24 high byte D25 low byteD25 high byte D26 low byteD26 high byte D27 low byteD27 high byte

no change

n D K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16

D20 low byte “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” “C” D20 high byte “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” D21 low byte “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” D21 high byte “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” D22 low byte “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” D22 high byte “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” D23 low byte “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” D23 high byte “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” D24 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” D24 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” D25 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” D25 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” D26 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” D26 high byte “3” “2” “1” D27 low byte “3” “2” D27 high byte

no change

“3”

ProgramExample

2

When M 1161=On, it is 8-bit conversion mode.

When X0=On, read four hexadecimal data characters from D10 and convert them into

ASCII codes. Then, store the converted data to the register started from D20.

X0ASCI D10 D20 K4

M1000M1161



7-91

Supposed condition: (D10) = 0123 H ‘0’ = 30H ‘4’ = 34H ‘8’ = 38H (D11) = 4567 H ‘1’ = 31H ‘5’ = 35H ‘9’ = 39H (D12) = 89AB H ‘2’ = 32H ‘6’ = 36H ‘A’ = 41H (D13) = CDEFH ‘3’ = 33H ‘7’ = 37H ‘B’ = 42H


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 2 3

D10=0123 H

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

3

3 3

210 0 0

10 0 0 0

ASCII code of D20=2 is 32H

ASCII code of D21=3 is 33H


0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 11 0 0 0000

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 1 1

0 0

0 1 2 3

D10 = H 0123

b15

b15

Convert to

b15

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1b15

3 H 33

2 H 32

D22b15

b0

b0

b0

b0

b0

D20

D21

1 H 31

D23

0 H 30

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 1 1



When n = 1 to 16: n D K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8

D20 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” D21 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” D22 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” D23 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” D24 “3” “2” “1” “0” D25 “3” “2” “1” D26 “3” “2” D27 “3” D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35

no change

n D K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16

D20 “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” “C” D21 “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” D22 “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” D23 “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” D24 “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” D25 “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” D26 “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” D27 “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” D28 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” D29 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” D30 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” D31 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” D32 “3” “2” “1” “0” D33 “3” “2” “1” D34 “3” “2” D35

no change

“3”


HEX P Convert ASCII to HEX


S D n Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256

Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (HEXP).


HEX Continuous execution HEXP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode

exchange

CommandExplanation

: Start device of source data : Start device for storing converted result n : number of converted ASCII codes.



7-93

16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Convert

16-bit ASCII code of (high and low byte) to hexadecimal data characters and

then transmit to per 4-bit for one time. Number of converted ASCII codes is set

by . 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, it is 16-bit conversion mode Convert 16-bit

ASCII code of (high and low byte) to hexadecimal data characters and then

transmit to low byte of . Number of converted ASCII codes is set by . (high

byte of are all 0)

ProgramExample

1


When X0=On, read ASCII bytes of the register started from D20 and convert them to

hexadecimal characters. Then, store the converted data to four registers started from

D10. (The converted data is four characters converted as one segment of data)

X0HEX D20 D10 K4

M1001M1161

Supposed condition:

S ASCII code HEX conversion

S ASCII code HEX conversion

D20 low byte H 43 “C” D24 low byte H 34 “4” D20 high byte H 44 “D” D24 high byte H 35 “5” D21 low byte H 45 “E” D25 low byte H 36 “6” D21 high byte H 46 “F” D25 high byte H 37 “7” D22 low byte H 38 “8” D26 low byte H 30 “0” D22 high byte H 39 “9” D26 high byte H 31 “1” D23 low byte H 41 “A” D27 low byte H 32 “2” D23 high byte H 42 “B” D27 high byte H 33 “3”


0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 01 1 0 0000

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 01 1 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 00 1 0 0 0

0 A B CD10

D20

D21

41H A

43H C

30H 0

42H B



When n = 1 to 16:

n D D13 D12 D11 D10 1 ***C H 2 **CD H 3 *CDE H 4

CDEF H 5 ***C H DEF8 H 6 **CD H EF89 H 7 *CDE H F89A H 8

CDEF H 89AB H 9 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H

10 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 11 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 12

The used registers which

are not specified are all

0

CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 13 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 5670 H 14 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 6701 H 15 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 7012 H 16 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 0123 H

ProgramExample

2

When M1161=On, it is 16-bit conversion mode.

X0HEX D20 D10 K4

M1000M1161

Supposed condition:

ASCII code HEX conversion ASCII code HEX

conversionD20 H 43 “C” D28 H 34 “4” D21 H 44 “D” D29 H 35 “5” D22 H 45 “E” D30 H 36 “6” D23 H 46 “F” D31 H 37 “7” D24 H 38 “8” D32 H 30 “0” D25 H 39 “9” D33 H 31 “1” D26 H 41 “A” D34 H 32 “2” D27 H 42 “B” D35 H 33 “3”

When n is 2, the bit structure is

0 0 01 1 0 00

0 1 0 0 10 0

0 0 0 0 1 1 00 0 0

0 AD10

D20

D21

4 1

3 0

0 0

0

00 0 0



7-95

When n = 1 to 16:

n D D13 D12 D11 D10 1 ***C H 2 **CD H 3 *CDE H 4

CDEF H 5 ***C H DEF8 H 6 **CD H EF89 H 7 *CDE H F89A H 8

CDEF H 89AB H 9 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H

10 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 11 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 12

The used registers which

are not specified are all

0

CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 13 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 5670 H 14 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 6701 H 15 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 7012 H 16 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 0123 H


ES EP EH84 CCD

P Check Code －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256

Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (CCD, CCDP)


CCD Continuous execution CCDP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode

exchange

CommandExplanation

: Start device of source data : Result device for storing check sum

: Number of data This command is used to check sum of words to ensure the truth of transmission data

during communication.

16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Check the

sum of words (8-bit in one byte) from the register specified by source devcie

and store the sum to the register specified by device while the parity bits

are stored in +1. 8-bit conversion mode : When M1161=On, it is 8-bit conversion mode. Check the sum

of words (8-bit in one byte, only low byte are available) from the register

specified by source devcie and store the sum to the register specified by device

while the parity bits are stored in +1.



ProgramExample

1


When X0=On, check sum of 6 words from the register specified by D0 (8-bit in one

byte, n=6 means to specify D0~D2) and store the sum in the register specified by

D100 while the parity bits are stored in D101.

X0CCD D0 D100 K6

M1000M1161

(S)

D0 low byte K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0D0 high byte K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1D1 low byte K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0D1 high byte K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0D2 low byte K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1D2 high byte K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1D100 K867 TotalD101 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

Content of data(words)

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 11 0 0 0010

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1

D100

D101 Parity

An even result is indicated by the use of 0(zero) An odd result is indicated by the use of 1(one)

ProgramExample

2


When X0=On, check sum of 6 words from the register specified by D0 (8-bit in one

byte, n=10 means to specify D0~D4) and store the sum in the register specified by

D100 while the parity bits are stored in D101.

X0CCD D0 D100 K6

M1000M1161

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 11 0 0 0010D1000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1D101 Parity

An even result is indicated by the use of 0(zero) An odd result is indicated by the use of 1(one)

(S)D0 low byte K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0D1 low byte K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1D2 low byte K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0D3 low byte K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0D4 low byte K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1D5 low byte K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1D100 K867 TotalD101 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

Content of data(words)



7-97


VRRD P Potentiometer Read

－


S D Note: Operand S available range: n=0~7

Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (VRRD, VRRDP)


VRRD Continuous execution VRRDP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1178 and M1179.

Please refer to following footnote.

CommandExplanation

: Potentiometer number : Destination device for storing read potentiometer

VRRD command is used to read the two potentiometers of PLC main processing unit

and the number is No.0 and No.1., or it is used to read the six potentiometers of

function card and the number is No.2 to No.7. The read data will be converted as value

from 0 to 255 and stored in destination device . If regarding the potentiometer as the setting value of timer, the setting time of timer

can be changed by truning VR. If desiring to get the value more than 255, please

multiply by some constant.

ProgramExample

1

When X0=On, the potentiometer of No.0 of VR specified by VRRD command will be

converted to BIN value (0~255) in an 8-bit format and stored in D0 temporarily.

When X1=On, timer T0 regards the content of D0 as the setting value of timer and

starts to count time.

X1TMR T0 D0

X0VRRD K0 D0

ProgramExample

2

Potentiometer read in order: S=K0 to K7 corresponding to the 8 potentiometers, No.0

to No.7. The following program example use E (E=0~7) to modify, K0E=K0 to K7.

The loop of timer convert the potentiometer scale 0~10 to 0~255. The time unit of T0

to T7 is 0.1 second, therefore, the setting value is 0 to 25.5 seconds.



M1000

RST E

FOR K8M1000

VRRD

INC E

D100E

NEXTX10

TMR D100T0T0

Y000

X11TMR D101T1

T7Y007

END

K 0E

Operation of FOR~NEXT command:

1. In FOR~NEXT command area, FOR command specify K8 indicates the loop

between FOR~NEXT command is executed 8 times repeatly. After 8 times of

execution, it will continue to execute.

2. Between FOR~NEXT command (INC E), the content of E will be 0, 1, 2…7 and

increased by 1(one). Therefore, 8 potentiometer scales will also show as VR0→

D100, VR1→D101, VR2→D102…VR7→D107 in order and be read into the

specified register.

Footnote

VR means VARIABLE RESISTOR SCALE.

For EP/EH models, built-in 2 points VR potentiometer can be used with special D and

special M. Device Function M1178 Start potentiometer VR0 M1179 Start potentiometer VR1 D1178 VR0 value D1179 VR1value



7-99


VRSC P Potentiometer Scale

－


S D Note: S operand available range: n=0~7

Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (VRSC, VRSCP).


VRSC Continuous execution VRSCP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation

: Potentiometer number : Destination device for storing potentiometer scale

VRRD command is used to read the potentiometer scale value of two potentiometers

on PLC main processing unit and the number is No.0 and No.1., or it is used to read

the potentiometer scale value of six potentiometers on function card and the number is

No.2 to No.7 (potentiometer scale value is from 0 to 10). The read data will be stored

in destination device as an integer from the range 0 to 10.

ProgramExample

1

When X0=On, the potentiometer scale value (0 to10) of No. 0 specified by VRSC

command is stored in device D10. X0

VRSC K0 D10

ProgramExample

2

Regrad as digital switch: Correspond potentiometer scale 0 to 10. Only one contact is

On between M10 to M20. Using DECO command (API 41) can decode the

potentiometer scale into M0~M15.

When X0=On, store the potentiometer scale value (0 to 10) of specified No. 1

potentiometer to D1.

When X1=On, use DECO command (API 41) to decode the potentiometer scale into

M10~M25. X0

VRSC K1 D1

X1DECO D1 M10 K4

M10

M11

M20

On when volume scale is 0






ABS P Absolute Value



ES series models do not support this command (ABSP, DABSP).


ABS Continuous execution ABSP Pulse

execution


DABS Continuous execution DABSP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Specified device for taking absolute value When the command is executed, take the absolute value of the specified device,

. This command is usually pulse execution (ABSP).

ProgramExample

When X0 goes from OFF→ON, take the absolute value of the D0 contents. X0

ABS D0


ES EP EH88 D PID

PID Calculation


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 S3 D Note: Operand S3 uses 14 continuous devices

Refer to each model specification for usage range. For the information of the PID usage times during the program, please refer to the footnote.


PID Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

DPID Continuous execution －－

Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: Target value (SV) : Present measured value (PV) : Parameter

: Output value (MV) Specific command for PID calculation control. This scan will execute PID operation

when sampling time reaches. PID means Proportion, Integration and Differential. PID

control is widely applied on many applications of machine equipments, pneumatic

equipments and electric equipments.



7-101

: Target value (SV), : Present measured value (PV), for 16-bit command:

~ +14, for 32-bit command: ~ +20: PID command will start to

execute after completing all parameters setting and the result will be stored in .

Please give no latch register area for content. (if you want to give content a latch register, please reset latch to 0 when program runs.)

ProgramExample

Please complete the parameter settings before executing PID command.

This command will be executed when X0=ON and the result will be stored in D150.

The command will not be executed when X0=OFF and the previous data won’t have

any change.

D150X0

D100D1D0PID

Footnote

PID command is only available in V5.7 and above of ES series models and it is not

available for other version.

There is no time limit for using PID command but the register number specified by

cannot be repeated.

For 16-bit commands, uses 15 registers. In above program, the parameter

setting area of PID command that indicates are D100~D114. You should use MOV command to transmit settings to the indication register to set before PID

command executes. If the registers that parameters indicate are latch area, please

use MOVP to execute transmitting.

Parameter table of 16-bit :

Device No. Function Setting range Explanation

: Sampling time (TS) (unit: 10ms) 1~2,000

(unit: 10ms)

If TS is less than one program scan time, PID command will execute one program scan time. If TS=0, PID command won’t be activated.

+1: Propotional gain (KP) 0~30,000(%)

+2: Integral gain (KI) 0~30,000(%)

+3: Differential gain (KD) 0~30,000(%)

When setting exceeds 30,000, setting will be regarded as 30,000.

+4: Control method (Dir) 0: normal control 1: Forward control (E=SV-PV) 2: Inverse control (E=PV-SV)

+5: The range that Error value (E) doesn’t work

0~32,767 For example: if the range of error value (E) is 5, output value MV of E between –5~5 is 0.

+6: Upper bound of saturated output (MV) -32,768~32,767

For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output (MV) is larger than 1000, it will output 1000. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S3+6 > S3+7.)

+7: Lower bound of saturated output (MV) -32,768~32,767

For example: if lower bound is set to –1000, once output (MV) is less than –1000, it will output –1000.




+8:

Upper bound of saturated integration -32,768~32,767

For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output is larger than 1000, it will output 1000 and doesn’t integrate. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S3+8 > S3+9.)

+9: Lower bound of saturated integration -32,768~32,767

For example: if lower bound is set to –1000, once output is less than –1000, it will output –1000 and doesn’t integrate.

+10, 11: Save accumulation integral value temporality

32-bit floating point range

For example: It is accumulated integration. It is usually for reference but user can clear or modify by requirement. (needs to modify by 32-bit floating point)

+12: Save previous PV value temporality －

For example: It is present measured value and usually for reference. But user can modify by requirement.

+13:

~

+14: For system use, please don’t use it.

When parameter setting is out of setting range, it will be set to upper bound or lower

bound. But if operation method is out of range, it will be set to 0.

PID commands can be used in interrupt subroutine, step point and CJ command.

Max. range of sampling error time TS is -（a scan time+1ms）~+（a scan time）. If error

value has influence on output, please keep the scan time fixable or execute PID

command in interrupt subroutine of timer.

If the settings of sampling time TS ≦ a scan time, CPU will have error code K6740

(PID operation error). At this time, CPU will reset TS = a scan time to execute PID

operand. In this situation, please execute PID command in time interrupt subroutine

(I6□□~I8□□).

The present measured value (PV) must be a stable value before the execution of PID

command. If using input value of DVP-04AD / DVP-04XA / DVP-04PT / DVP-04TC

these modules to perform the PID calculation, please pay attention to the A/D

conversion time of the above-mentioned modules.

32-bit command occupies 21 registers. If parameter setting area of PID

command that designated by is D100~D120, it needs to use MOV command to send setting to designated registers before executing PID command.



7-103

Parameter table of 32-bit :


: Sampling time (TS) (unit: 10ms)

1~2,000 (unit: 10ms)

If TS is less than one program scan time, PID command will execute one program scan time. If TS=0, PID command won’t be activated.

+1: Propotion gain (KP) 0~30,000(%)

+2: Integration gain (KI) 0~30,000(%)

+3: Differential gain (KD) 0~30,000(%)

When setting exceeds 30,000, setting will be regarded as 30,000.

+4: Control method (Dir) 0: normal control 1: Forward control (SV→PV) 2: Inverse control (PV→SV)

+5, 6: The range that 32-bit Error value (E) doesn’t work

0~2,147,483,647For example: if the range of error value (E) is 5, output value MV of E between –5~5 is 0.

+7, 8: Upper bound of 32-bit saturated output (MV)

-2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647

For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output (MV) is larger than 1000, it will output 1000. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S3+7, 8 > S3+9, 10.)

+9, 10: Lower bound of 32-bit saturated output (MV)

-2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647

For example: if lower bound is set to –1000, once output (MV) is less than –1000, it will output –1000.

+11, 12:

Upper bound of 32-bit saturated integrator

-2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647

For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output is larger than 1000, it will output 1000 and doesn’t integrate. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S3+11, 12 > S3+13, 14.)

+13, 14: Lower bound of 32-bit saturated integrator

-2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647

For example: if lower bound is set to –1000, once output is less than –1000, it will output –1000 and doesn’t integrate.

+15, 16: 32-bit temporary accumulation integral value

32-bit floating point range

For example: It is accumulated integration. It is usually for reference but user can clear or modify by requirement. (needs to modify by 32-bit floating point)

+17, 18: 32-bit save previous PV temporality －

For example: It is previous test value and usually for reference. But user can modify by requirement.

+19:

~

+20: For system uses, please don’t use it.

Explanation of 32-bit and 16-bit are almost the same. The different is

that capacity of +5 ~ +20.



PID Equations

This command executes PID calculation according to speed and differential type of

measured value.

PID operation has three control methods: normal, forward and inverse controls. The

control method is set by +4. Besides, the settings that have relation to PID

operation is set by ~ +5. PID equations:

( ) ( ) ( )StPVKS

tEKtEKMV DIP *1** ++=

Control Method PID Equations

Forward control, normal control

( ) PVSVtE −=

Inverse control

( ) SVPVtE −=

Besides, ( )StPV means the differential value of ( )tPV and ( )S

tE 1 means the

integral value of ( )tE .

You can know that this command is different from general PID command from above

equation. The difference is the change on differential usage. To avoid transient

differential value is too large when executing general PID command at the first time, this

command willl lower output (MV) value once the change of present measured value (PV)

is too large by monitoring differential value of present measured value (PV).

Symbols explanation:

MV : Output value

PK : Porprotional gain

( )tE : Error value. Forward control ( ) PVSVtE −= , Inverse control

( ) SVPVtE −=

PV : Present measured value

SV : Target value

DK : Differential gain

( )StPV : Differential value of ( )tPV

IK : Integral gain

( )S

tE 1 : Integral value of ( )tE



7-105

Control diagram:

G(s)

S

1/S K I

K P

K D

+ ++

+

In dotted-line is PID command

Note and suggestion:

1. When adjusting three major parameters, KP, KI and KD, please adjust KP first (set

by experience) and set 0 to KI and KD. When adjusting to control, adjust KI (order

from small to big) and KD (order from small to big). Refer to example 4 for adjusting.

If KP=100, it means 100%. When KP is less than 100%, error value will attenuate

and when KP is more than 100%, error value will amplify.

2. This command should be controlled with many parameters. Please follow setting

rule to avoid error occurs.

Example 1: block diagram for using PID command to control position (control method

S3+4 should be set to 0)

PID MV

Encoder

PV

Position command (SV) Plant

Example 2: block diagram for using PID command to control speed (control method

S3+4 should be set to 0)



PID

S+MV AC drive

speed detectionequipment (P)

actual accel/decel speed (PV=S-P)

Accel/Decelcommand (SV)

speed command (S)

Accel/Deceloutput (MV)

Example 3: block diagram for using PID command to control temperature (action

direction S3+4 should be set to 1)

temperature command (SV)

PID

add temperature (MV) heater

equipment

temperaturedetectionequipmentactual temperature(PV)

Example 4: suggested steps of PID adjustment

Consider that transfer function of plant ( )as

bsG+

= (most general AC drive model is this

function) in control system, command value SV is 1 and sampling time Ts is 10ms.

Suggested steps are in the following:

Step1: set KI and KD to 0 first, then set KP to 5, 10, 20 and 40 in order and record (SV)

and (PV) state. The result will be shown as following figure. 1.5

1

0.5

00 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1

K =40P

K =20P K =10P

SV=1

K =5P

Time (sec)



7-107

Step 2: In above figure, we will choose the situation when KP is 10. The reason is in the

following:

When KP is 40, response has overshoot situation. So we won’t use it.

When KP is 20, PV response is close to SV and won’t have overshoot but transient MV

will be great due to start-up too fast. We also won’t use it.

When KP is 10, PV response is close to SV and is smooth. So we consider to use it.

When KP is 5, the response is too slow. So we won’t use it.

Example 3: When deciding to use the curve KP=10, arrange KI in order from small to big

(such as 1, 2, 4, 8) and not to large than KP. Then arrange KD in order from small to big

(such as 0.01, 0.05, 0.1 and 0.2) and not to exceed 10% KP. Finally, you can get

following PV and SV relation figure. 1.5

1

0.5

00 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1

PV=SV

K =10,K =8,K =0.2P I D

Time (sec) Note: This example is only for reference. Therefore, user should adjust suitable control

parameters by himself according to real control system.

Applications

Application 1: using PID command in pressure control system. (use block diagram of

example 1)

Control destination: make control system reach pressure target value.

Control characteristics: this system should reach to control destination step by step,

therefore, it may cause system out of control or overload if reaching control destination

too fast.

Recommend solve method:

Method 1: reach by using long sampling time.

Method 2: reach by using delay command and its control block diagram is shown in the

following.



PID MVD5

SV

PVD1

D1110

0511

0

511

0V

10V

0rpm

rpm3000

D1116

0

255

0V

5V

ACDrive

pressurecommandvalue (D0)

pressure commanddelay

A wave B

wave

MVconvert to speed

speedconvert to voltage

voltage convert tocommand value

pressure meter

280

00

28025020015010050

tt

command value

command value

A wave B wave

D2 is command interval valueD3 is command interval timeuser can adjust by require

Program application of command delay is in the following:

M1002MOV K10 D3

M10

M0TMR T0 D3

T0RST T0

MOV K50 D2D1D0>

MOV K-50 D2D1D0<

MOV K0 D2D1D0=

ADD D2 D1 D1

CMP D2 K0 M10

D0D1< MOV D0 D1

M12D0D1> MOV D0 D1

M0PID D1 D1116 D10 D5



7-109

Application 2: speed control and pressure control system is controlled separately. (use

block diagram of example 2)

Control destination: Adding pressure control system (PID command) after using open

loop to control speed for a period time to reach pressure control.

Control characteristics: This architecture should use open loop to reach speed control

and then reach control target by close loop pressure control due to there is no relation

between speed and pressure of these two systems. Besides, you can add command

delay function of application 1 to avoid control command of pressure control system

changes too fast. Control block diagram is shown in the following.

D40

0255

0rpm3000rpm

D30D32 D1116

D31+

+

M3 M2=ON

PIDPV

MVD5D1SV

D0D1110

M0=ON

M1=ON

Speedcommand

speedconvert tovoltage

AC drive

MV convert toaccel/decel

pressurecommand

delay function(optional)

pressure meter

Partial program application is in the following:



M1MOV K0 D5

M3MOV D40 D30

M2

MOV K3000 D32K3000D32>

MOV K0 D32K0D32<

ADD D30 D31 D32

MOV D32 D1116

M1PID D1 D1110 D10 D5

M1002MOV K1000 D40

M0MOV D0 D1

DIV D32 K11 D32

MOV K255 D32K255D32>




MODRD MODBUS Data Read


S1 S2 n Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K255

Operand n available range: K1＜n≦K6 Refer to each model specification for usage range.


MODRD Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand

CommandExplanation

: Communication address. : Address for reading data : Read data length.

MODRD is a specific command for the MODBUS ASCII mode and RTU mode

communication. The RS-485 communication build-in Delta VFD series drives (except

VFD-A series) all have MODBUS communication. Therefore, MODRD command can be

used to read communication data from Delta VFD series AC drives. Please refer to the

Delta VFD series manual for more details.

is the address for reading data. If the address setting is illegal, the user will be informed by an error message. The error code will be stored in D1130, while M1141 turn

to be ON.

The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to D1085.

After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all feedback

(return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1140 will be ON.

If using ASCII mode, PLC will convert the data to value and store them in D1050 to

D1055 because the feedback (return) data are all ASCII characters. D1050 to D1055 will

be invalid if using RTU mode.

After M1140 or M1141 is On, a correct data will be transmit to peripheral equipment

again. If the feedback (return) data are all correct, then the flag M1140, M1141 will be

clear.

ProgramExample

1

Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off)

MOV D1120H87M1002

SET M1120

MOV D1129K100

M1127RST M1127receiving

completed





receiving completed and flag reset

SET M1122 Setting transmission flagX1

X0MODRD K1 H2101 K6

Setting communication command:device address 01data address H2101data length 6 words

PLC will convert the receiving data storedin D1070~D1085 from ASCII character tovalue and store the value in D1050~D1055.



PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: “01 03 2101 0006 D4” VFD-S PLC , PLC receiving: “01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 0000 3B”

PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)

Register DATA D1089 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1089 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0

ADR (1,0) is AC drive address

D1090 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1090 high ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0

CMD (1,0) is command code

D1091 low ‘2’ 32 H D1091 high ‘1’ 31 H D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H D1092 high ‘1’ 31 H

Starting data address



D1095 low ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 D1095 high ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0


PLC receiving data register (response messages)

Register DATA D1070 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1070 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D1071 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1071 high ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0 D1072 low ‘0’ 30 H D1072 high ‘C’ 43 H Number of data (count by byte)



PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1050 = 0100 H
















D1085 low ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1 D1085 high ‘B’ 42 H LRC CHK 0



ProgramExample

2

Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (RTU Mode, M1143=On)

MOV D1120H83M1002

SET M1120

MOV D1129K100

M1127RST M1127receiving

completed






SET M1122 Setting transmission flagX1

The receiving data in HEX valueformat is stored in D1070~D1085.

SET M1143 Setting as RTU mode

X0MODRD K1 H2102

Setting communication command:device address 01data address H2102data length 2 words

K2

PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 03 2102 0002 6F F7

VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 03 04 1700 0000 FE 5C PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)

Register DATA D1089 low 01 H Address D1090 low 03 H Function D1091 low 21 H D1092 low 02 H Starting data address

D1093 low 00 H D1094 low 02 H Number of data (count by word)

D1095 low 6F H CRC CHK Low D1096 low F7 H CRC CHK High

PLC receiving data register (response messages) Register DATA

D1070 low 01 H Address D1071 low 03 H Function D1072 low 04 H Number of data (count by byte) D1073 low 17 H D1074 low 70 H Content of address 2102 H

D1075 low 00 H D1076 low 00 H Content of address 2103 H

D1077 low FE H CRC CHK Low D1078 low 5C H CRC CHK High

ProgramExample

3

PLC connects to VFD-S series AC drive (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off). When

communication is time-out, retry when error occurs during receiving data or sending

address.

When X0=On, read data from address H2100 of device 01 (VFD-S) and save in

D1070~D1085 with ASCII format. PLC will auto convert its content to numeral to save in

D1050~D1055.



Flag M1129 will be On when communication is time-out and program will send request

from M1129 and ask M1122 to read again.

Flag M1140 will be On when receive error and program will send request from M1140

and ask M1122 to read again.

Flag M1141 will be On when received address error and program will send request from

M1141 and ask M1122 to read again.

M1002MOV H87 D1120

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV K100 D1129

RST M1127

M1127

X0

MODRW K1 H2100 K 6X0

M1129

M1140

M1141

RST M1129

Setting communication protocolto 9600, 8, E, 1

Communication protocol latched

Setting communicationtime-out to 100ms

Setting communication command:device address 01,data address

H2101

data length 6 words

Setting transmission request

Communication time-out Retry

data receive error Retry

sending address error Retry

receiving completed

handle received data

The receiving data in ASCIIformat stored in D1070-D1085.PLC will convert to numeraland save into D1050-D1055automatically.


communication time-out and flag reset

Footnote

Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF)

can’t be used before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION

CODE H03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will

be incorrect.




MODWR MODBUS Data Write In





MODWR Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143


CommandExplanation

: Communication address, K0~K255 : Address for writing data : Write data

MODWR is a specific command for the MODBUS ASCII mode and RTU mode

communication. The RS-485 communication build-in Delta VFD series drives (except

VFD-A series) all have MODBUS communication. Therefore, MODWR command can

be used to read communication data from Delta VFD series AC drives. Please refer to

the Delta VFD series manual for more details.

is the address for reading data. If the address setting is illegal, the user will be informed by an error message. The error code will be stored in D1130, while M1141

turn to be ON. For example, 4000H is an illegal address to VFD-S, then M1141 will turn

ON, D1130=2. For the information of error codes, please refer to VFD-S series user

manual.

The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to

D1076. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all

feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1140 will be ON.

After M1140 or M1141 is On, a correct data will be transmit to peripheral equipment

again. If the feedback (return) data are all correct, then the flag M1140, M1141 will be

clear.

ProgramExample

1

Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143= Off)

MOV D1120H87M1002

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV D1129K100X0

M1123RST M1123

MODRW K1 H0100 H1770

receivingcompleted




Setting transmission flag



X1

Setting communication command:device address 01data address H0100data H1770

The receiving data in ASCII character format is stored in D1070~D1085



PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”

VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”


Register DATA D1089 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1089 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0


D1090 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1090 high ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 CMD (1,0) is command code


Data address


Data contents

D1095 low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1095 high ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0


PLC receiving data register (response messages)

Register DATA D1070 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1070 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D1071 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1071 high ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 D1072 low ‘0’ 30 H D1072 high ‘1’ 31 H D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H D1073 high ‘0’ 30 H

Data address


Data content

D1076 low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1076 high ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0

ProgramExample

2

Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (RTU Mode, M1143=On)

MOV D1120H87M1002

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV D1129K100

M1123RST M1123

receivingcompleted







X1

The receiving data in HEX valueformat is stored in D1070~D1085.

SET M1143 Setting as RTU modeX0

MODRW K1 H2000Setting communication command:device address 01data address H2000write in data H12

H12



PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)

Register DATA D1089 low 01 H Address D1090 low 06 H Function D1091 low 20 H D1092 low 00 H Data address

D1093 low 00 H D1094 low 12 H Data content

D1095 low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1096 low 07 H CRC CHK High


D1070 low 01 H Address D1071 low 06 H Function D1072 low 20 H D1073 low 00 H Data address


D1076 low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1077 low 07 H CRC CHK High

ProgramExample

3

PLC connects to VFD-S series AC drive (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off). When

communication is time-out, retry when error occurs during receiving data or sending

address.

When X0=On, PLC will write data H1770(K6000) into address H0100 of device 01

(VFD-S).

Flag M1129 will be On when communication is time-out and program will send request

from M1129 and ask M1122 to read again.

Flag M1140 will be On when receive error and program will send request from M1140

and ask M1122 to read again.

Flag M1141 will be On when received address error and program will send request from

M1141 and ask M1122 to read again.



M1002MOV H87 D1120

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV K100 D1129

RST M1123

M1123

X0

MODRW K1 H0100 H1770X0

M1129

M1140

M1141

RST M1129

Setting communication protocolto 9600, 8, E, 1


Setting communicationtime-out to 100ms

Setting communication command:device address 01,data address

H0100

data H1770

Setting transmission request

Communication time-out Retry

data receive error Retry

sending address error Retry

receiving completed

handle received data The receiving data in ASCIIformat stored in D1070-D1085.


communication time-out and flag reset

Footnote

For detail information of the related flags and special registers, please refer to the

footnote of API 80 RS command.

If using rising-edge (LDP, ANDP, ORP)/falling-edge (LDF, ANDF, ORF) before API 101

MODWR and API 150 MODRW (Function Code H06 and H10), it needs to start

transmission request M1122 to act correct.


FWD

VFD-A Series Drive Forward Command



Operand n available range: n=K1or K2 Refer to each model specification for usage range.


FWD Continuous execution －－

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand




REV

VFD-A Series Drive Reverse Command





REV Continuous execution －－


Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand


ES EP EH104 STOP

VFD-A Series Drive Stop Command





STOP Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand.

CommandExplanation

: Communication address. : AC drive master frequency. : Command object.

FWD/REV/STOP are communication commands for Delta A/H series drive, make sure

to use the communication overtime setting (D1129) when applying these commands.

indicates AC drive master frequency. AC drive master frequency setting for VFD-A series, K0000 to K4000, represents 0.0Hz to 400.0Hz. For H series AC drive,

the setting of K0000 to K1500 represent 0Hz to 1500Hz.

command object, n=1 is for one drive. n=2 communicates to all drives connected.

The feedback (return) data from perpherial equipment will be stored in D1070 to

D1080. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all

feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1142 will be ON. If n = 2,

PLC will not receive the data.



ProgramExample

Communication between PLC and VFD-A series AC drives, retry for communication

time-out and received data error.

receiving completed

Setting communicationprotocol 4800, 8, O, 1


Setting communicationtime-out 100ms


Setting communication command:device address 0frequency setting is 500HzK1 is the AC drive for designated address

The receiving data in ASCII character format is stored in D1070~D1085

M1002MOV H0073 D1120

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV K100 D1129

RST M1123

M1123

X0FWD K0 K500 K1

M1129

M1142

X0



communication time-out Retry

received data error Retry

PLC VFD-A, PLC transmitting: “C ♥ ☺ 0001 0500 ” VFD-A PLC, PLC receiving: “C ♥ ♠ 0001 0500 ” PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)

Register DATA D1089 low ‘C’ 43 H Command starting word D1090 low ‘♥’ 03 H Check sum D1091 low ‘☺’ 01 H Command object D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H D1093 low ‘0’ 30 H D1094 low ‘0’ 30 H D1095 low ‘1’ 31 H

Communication address

D1096 low ‘0’ 30 H D1097 low ‘5’ 35 H D1098 low ‘0’ 30 H D1099 low ‘0’ 30 H

Operation command


D1070 low ‘C’ 43 H Command starting word D1071 low ‘♥’ 03 H Check sum D1072 low ‘♠’ 06 H Reply authorization (correct: 06H,

error: 07 H) D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H D1074 low ‘0’ 30 H D1075 low ‘0’ 30 H D1076 low ‘1’ 31 H

Communication address


Operation command




RDST VFD-A Series Drive Status Read


S1 n Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K31

Operand n available range: n=K0~ K3 Refer to each model specification for usage range.


RDST Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143


CommandExplanation

: Communication address, K0~K31 : Status object RDST is a specific communication convenience command for Delta VFD-A series AC

drives and used to read the execution status of AC drive.

: Status object n = 0 Frequency command n = 2 Output current n = 1 Output frequency n = 3 Operation command

The feedback (return) data stored in the low byte of address D1070 to D1080 are total

11 words (please refer to VFD-A series manual). ”Q, S, B, Uu, Nn, ABCD”

feedback (return) Explanation Data storage

Q Starting word: ’Q’ (51H). D1070 low S Checksum code: 03H. D0171 low B Command authorization. correct: 06H, error: 07H. D1072 low U D1073 low u

Communication address (address: 00~31). ”Uu” = (“00”~”31”) indicated by ASCII. D1074 low

N D1075 low n Status object (00~03).”Nn” = (“00~03”) indicated by ASCII. D1076 low A D1077 low B D1078 low C D1079 low D

Status data. The content of ”ABCD” will be different according to the status objects (00~03). 00~03 indicate frequency, current and operation mode respectively. Please refer to the explanation shown below for details. D1080 low

Nn = “00” Frequency command = ABC.D（Hz） Nn = “01” Output command = ABC.D（Hz） Nn = “02” Output current = ABC.D（A）

PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ”ABCD” to value and store the value in D1050. For example, if ”ABCD” = “0600”, PLC will automatically convert ASCII word to the value of K0600 (0258 H) and store it in the special register in D1050.

Nn = “03” Operation command



‘A’ = ‘0’ Stop, ‘5’ JOG(FWD) ‘1’ FWD operation, ‘6’ JOG(REV) ‘2’ Stop, ‘7’ JOG(REV)

‘3’ REV operation, ‘8’ Abnormal

‘4’ JOG(FWD),

PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ”A” to value and store the value in D1051. For example, if ”A” = “3”, PLC will automatically convert ASCII word to the value of K0003 (03 H) and store it in the special register in D1051.

‘B’ = b7 b6 b5 b4 Operation command source 0 0 0 0 Digital keypad 0 0 0 1 1st Step Speed 0 0 1 0 2nd Step Speed 0 0 1 1 3rd Step Speed 0 1 0 0 4th Step Speed 0 1 0 1 5th Step Speed 0 1 1 0 6th Step Speed 0 1 1 1 7th Step Speed 1 0 0 0 JOG frequency 1 0 0 1 Analog signal frequency command 1 0 1 0 RS-485 communication interface 1 0 1 1 Up/Down control b3 = 0 No DC braking stop 1 DC braking stop b2 = 0 No braking startup 1 DC braking startup b1 = 0 FWD, 1 REV b0 = 0 Stop, 1 Operation

PLC will store the value of ”B” in special auxiliary relays M1168(b0)~M1175(b7)

“CD” = “00” No abnormal record “10” OcA “01” oc “11” Ocd “02” ov “12” Ocn “03” oH “13” GFF “04” oL “14” Lv “05” oL1 “15” Lv1 “06” EF “16” cF2 “07” cF1 “17” bb “08” cF3 “18” oL2 “09” HPF “19”

PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ”CD” to value and store the value in D1052. For example, if ”CD” = “06”, PLC will automatically convert ASCII word to the value of 0006 H and store it in the special register in D1052.

Footnote

Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF)

before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE 03)

these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be incorrect.




RSTEF VFD-A Series Drive Abnormal Reset


S1 n Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K31

Operand n available range: n=K1 or K2 Refer to each model specification for usage range.


RSTEF Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand.

CommandExplanation

: Communication address. : Command object. RSTEF is a specific communication convenience command for Delta VFD-A series AC

drives and used to reset the AC drive after an abnormal execution.

: Command object, n=1 is for one drive. n=2 communicates to all drives connected.

The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to

D1089. If n = 2, there is no feedback (return) data.

Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF,

ORF)before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE

H03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be

incorrect.

Footnote

For detail information of the related flags and special registers, please refer to the

footnote of API 80 RS command.


LRC P LRC Error Check

－


S n D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.

ES series models do not support this command (LRC, LRCP)


LRC Continuous execution LRCP Pulse

execution




CommandExplanation

: Starting device for the operation of sum check (ASCII mode) : Operand

numbers : Starting device for storing the operation result. LRC check: please refer to the footnote.

: operand numbers should be even and range is from K1~K256. If it is out of range, error will be occurred and commond won’t be executed. At this time, M1067 and

M1068 will be On and error code 0E1A will be record in D1067.

16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, hexadecimal data that start from the source

devcie will be divided into upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit and perform the operation

of LRC command on numbers. Then, store the result into upper and lower 8-bit

of device . 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, divide hexadecimal data that start from the

source devcie into upper 8-bit (invalid data) and lower 8-bit and perform the

operation of LRC command on numbers. Then, store the result into lower 8-bit

of device and it will use two resisters (upper 8-bit of all be zero (0)).

ProgramExample

Communication between PLC and VFD-B series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143= Off),

(8-bit Mode, M1161=On), writing transmitting data in advance to read six data from

VFD-B parameter address H2101.

MOV D1120H86M1002

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV D1129K100

X10

M1123RST M1123

RS D100 K17 D120 K35

transmissionrequest

pulse

receivingcompleted





sending request



PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: “: 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF ”


Register DATA D100 low ‘: ’ 3A H STX D101 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D102 low ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0


D103 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D104 low ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0


D105 low ‘2’ 32 H D106 low ‘1’ 31 H D107 high ‘0’ 30 H D108 low ‘1’ 31 H

Starting data address





Register DATA

D113 low ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 D114 low ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0


D115 low CR A H D116 low LF D H END

The LRC CHK (0,1) above is error check code and it can be calculated by LRC command

(8-bit Mode, M1161=On).

M1000LRC D101 K12 D113

LRC check: 01 H + 03 H + 21 H + 01 H + 00 H + 06 H = 2C H, then take the complementary

of 2, D4H. At the time, ‘D’(44 H) is stored in the lower 8-bit of D113 and ‘4’ (34 H) is stored in

the lower 8-bit of D114.

Footnote

ASCII mode of communication data, the format is listed below: STX ‘: ’ Start word = ‘: ’ (3AH)

Address Hi ‘ 0 ’ Address Lo ‘ 1 ’

Communication: 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCll codes

Function Hi ‘ 0 ’ Function Lo ‘ 3 ’

Function code: 8-bit function consists of 2 ASCll codes

‘ 2 ’ ‘ 1 ’ ‘ 0 ’ ‘ 2 ’ ‘ 0 ’ ‘ 0 ’ ‘ 0 ’

DATA (n-1) …….

DATA 0

‘ 2 ’

Data content: n × 8-bit data content consists of 2n ASCll codes

LRC CHK Hi ‘ D ’ LRC CHK Lo ‘ 7 ’

LRC check: 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCll codes

END Hi CR END Lo LF

End word: END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)

Communication protocol is made of MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for

Information Interchange). Each byte consists of 2 ASCII characters.

LRC check is the added sum from “Address” to “Data contents”. For example, 01H +

03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, then take the complementary of 2, D7H.


ES EP EH108 CRC

P CRC Error Check －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS n D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.

ES series models do not support this command (CRC, CRCP)


CRC Continuous execution CRCP Pulse

execution




CommandExplanation

: Starting device for the operation of sum check (RTU mode) : Operand

numbers : Starting device for storing the operation result. CRC check: please refer to the footnote.

: range is from K1~K256. If it is out of range, error will be occurred and commond won’t be executed. At this time, M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code 0E1A will

be record in D1067.

16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, hexadecimal data that start from the source

devcie will be divided into high byte and low byte. To perform the operation of

CRC command on numbers and store the result into upper and lower 8-bit of

device . 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, divide hexadecimal data that start from the

source devcie into high byte (invalid data) and low byte. To perform the

operation of CRC command on numbers and store the result into low byte of

device and it will use two resisters (upper 8-bit of all be zero (0)).

ProgramExample

When PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive (RTU Mode, M1143=ON), (16-bit Mode,

M1161=ON), writing transmitting data, H12, in advance into VFD-S parameter address

H2000

MOV D1120H87M1002

SET M1120

SET M1122

MOV D1129K100

X10

M1123RST M1123

RS D100 K8 D120 K8

SET M1143

SET M1161

RTU Mode

8-bit Mode

receivingcompleted

sending request


transmissionrequest

pulse






PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07



PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages)

Register DATA D100 low 01 H Address D101 low 06 H Function D102 low 20 H D103 low 00 H Data address


D106 low 02 H CRC CHK 0 D107 low 07 H CRC CHK 1

The CRC CHK (0,1) above is error check code and it can be calculated by CRC command

(8-bit Mode, M1161=On). M1000

CRC D100 K6 D106

CRC check: At the time, 02 H is stored in the lower 8-bit of D106 and 07 H is stored in the

lower 8-bit of D107.

Footnote

RTU mode of communication data, the format is listed below: START Please refer to the following explanation Address Communication address: 8-bit binary

Function Function code: 8-bit binary DATA (n-1)

……. DATA 0

Data content: n × 8-bit data

CRC CHK Low CRC CHK High

CRC check: 16-bit CRC check sum consists of 2 8-bit binary

END Please refer to the following explanation

CRC check:

CRC check starts from “Address” and ends in “Data content”. CRC check starts from

“Address” and ends in “Data content”. Its calculation is as follows:

Step 1: Load the 16-bit register (the CRC register) with FFFFH.

Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message command with the 16-bit CRC

register of the low byte, then store the result into the CRC register.

Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit.

Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from

step 3 into the CRC register, otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC

register, then store the result into the CRC register.

Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 and calculates the 8-bit.

Step 6: Repeat Steps 2~5 for the next 8-bit message command, till all the message

commands are processed. And finally, the obtained CRC register value is

the CRC check value. What should be noticed is that the CRC check must

be placed interchangeably in the check sum of the message command.




SWRD P Digital Switch Read

－



ES series models do not support this command (SWRD, SWRDP)


SWRD Continuous execution SWRDP Pulse

execution 32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1104~M1111 Digital switch

status

CommandExplanation

: Device for storing read value

Store the value that read from digital switch function card into the low byte of . Every digital switch has an associated BIT.

If executing this command without digital switch function card, there is no result and no

error message.

ProgramExample

There are total 8 DIP switchs on the digital switch function card. After using SWRD

command to read value, these 8 switchs are in association with the contact M0 to M7.

M1000SWRD K2M0

M0Y0

M1MOV K2M0 D0

M2CNT C0 K10

M3RST C0

M4TMR T0 K100

M0 to M7 can be executed by using each contact command.

When END command is executed, the process of input will complete. REF (I/O)

refresh）command will be invalid.

The min. read one time bits are 4 bits when SWRD command use the input data of

digital switch function card (i.e. K1Y* or K1M* or K1S*).

Footnote

When digital switch function card is inserted, 8 DIP switches correspond to

M1104~M1111 individually.




ECMP P Binary Floating Point Comparison

－－


S1 S2 D Note: Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices.

Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DECMP, DECMPP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DECMPP)

16-bit command

－－－－ 32-bit command (13 STEPS)

DECMP Continuous execution DECMPP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Comparison value 1 of binary floating point : Comparison value 2 of

binary floating point : Comparison result, 3 continuous devices used.

The data of is compared to the data of and the result (＞, ＝, ＜) is

showed by three bit devices in .

If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to compare.

ProgramExample

If the specified device is M10, M10~M12 will automatically be used.

When X0=On and execute DECMP command, one of M10~M12 will be On. When

X0=Off and not to execute DECMP command, M10~M12 will retain the state before X0=

Off.

Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and then the result of ≧, ≦, ≠ are given.

Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the result. X0

DECMP D0 D100 M10

M10

M11

M12

It is On when (D1 D0)>(D101 D100)A A

It is On when (D1 D0)=(D101 D100)A A

It is On when (D1 D0)<(D101 D100)A A

Footnote

As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric

Values for detail.




EZCP P

Binary Floating Point Zone Comparison

－－


S1 S2 S D Note: Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices.

Operand S1 should be smaller than operand S2. Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEZCP, DEZCPP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DEZCPP).

16-bit command


DEZCP Continuous execution DEZCPP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Lower limit of binary floating point zone comparison : Upper limit of binary

floating point zone comparison : Comparison value of binary floating point

: Comparison result, 3 continuous devices used.

The data of is compared to the data range of ~ and the result (＞,

＝, ＜) is showed by three bit devices in .

If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to compare.

When ＞ , will be used as upper and lower limit for the comarison.

ProgramExample

If the specified device is M10, M10~M12 will automatically be used.

When X1=On and execute DEZCP command, one of M0~M2 will be On. When X1=Off

and not to execute EZCP command, M0~M2 will retain the state before X1= Off.

Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the result.

X0DEZCP D0 D10 D20

M10

M11

M12

It is On when (D1 D0)>(D21 D20) A A

it is On when (D1 D0) (D21 D20)<(D11 D10) A < A A

It is On when (D21 D20)>(D11 D10) A A

M0

Footnote


Values for detail.




RAD P Degree Radian

－



This command is only valid for 32-bit commands DRAD and DRADP.

16-bit command

－－－－

32 -bit command (9 STEPS)

DRAD Continuous execution DRADP Pulse

execution Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021

Borrow flag, M1022 Carry flag

CommandExplanation

: data source (degree) : Coverted result (radian). Using following function to convert degree to radian:

Radian ＝ degree × (π/180)

If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.

If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.


ProgramExample

When X0=On, convert degree value of specific binary floating point (D1, D0) to radian to

save in (D11, D10) and the content is binary floating point. X0

DRAD D0 D10

D 1 D 0

D 11 D 10binary floating pointRAD ( 180) value /X πdegree

degree valuebinary floating point

Footnote


Values for detail.


DEG P Radian Degree

－



This command is only valid for 32-bit commands DDEG and DDEGP.

16-bit command

－－－－

32 -bit command (9 STEPS)

DDEG Continuous execution DDEGP Pulse


Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag



CommandExplanation

: data source (radian). : Coverted result (degree). Using following function to convert radian to degree:

degree ＝ radian × (180/π)




ProgramExample

When X0=On, convert degree value of specific binary floating point (D1, D0) to radian to

save in (D11, D10) and the content is binary floating point. X0

DDEG D0 D10

D 1 D 0

D 11 D 10binary floating pointdegree (radian 180/ ) value X π

radian valuebinary floating point

Footnote


Values for detail.

API Applicable modelsES EP EH118 D EBCD P

Convert Binary Floating Point to Decimal Floating Point


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.

This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEBCD, DEBCDP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution commands (DEBCDP)

16-bit command

－－－－ 32 -bit command (9 STEPS)

DEBCD Continuous execution DEBCDP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Data source : Coverted result

Convert binary floating point value at the register specified by to decimal floating

point value stored in the register specified by . PLC floating point is operated by the binary floating point format. DEBCD command is

the specific command used to convert binary floating point to decimal floating point.






ProgramExample

When X0=On, the binary floating point value in D1, D0 will be converted to decimal

floating point stored in D3, D2.

D0DEBCDX0

D2

D0D1

D2D3

Exponent Real number

BinaryFloating Point

32 bits for real number, 8 bits for exponent1 bit for symbol bit

[D2] * 10[D3]ExponentReal numberDecimal

Floating Point


Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH119

D

EBIN P

Convert Decimal Floating Point to Binary Floating Point



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEBIN, DEBINP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution commands (DEBINP).

16-bit command

－－－－ 32 -bit command (9 STEPS)

DEBIN Continuous execution DEBINP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Data source : Coverted result

Convert decimal floating point value at the register specified by to binary floating

point value stored in the register specified by .

For example, =1234, +1= 8 will become =1.2345 x 105

must be a binary floating point format. and +1 represent the real number and exponent of the floating point number respectively.

DEBIN command is the specific command used to convert decimal floating point to

binary floating point.



ProgramExample

1

When X1=On, the decimal floating point value in D1, D0 will be converted to binary

floating point stored in D3, D2.

D0DEBINX1

D2

D0D1

D2D3

[D1] * 10[D0]Decimal

Floating Point


Exponent Real numberExponent Real number


ProgramExample

2

Before perform floating point operation, must use FLT (API 49) command to convert BIN

integer to binary floating point. The source data (the value which will be converted)

should be a BIN integer. However, DEBIN command can be used to convert floating

point value to binary floating point value.

When X0=On, move K314 to D0 and move K-2 to D1 to generate decimal floating point

format (3.14 = 314 × 10-2).

K314MOVPX0

D0

D0DEBIN D2

K-2MOVP D1

K314 D0 [D1]

K-2 D1 [D0]314 x10

(D1 D0) (D3 D2), ,

314 x10

-2


Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH120 D EADD

P Binary Floating Point Addition


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.

This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEADD, DEADDP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DEADDP).

16-bit command


DEADD Continuous execution DEADDP Pulse

execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021

(Borrow flag) and M1022 (Carry flag)



CommandExplanation

: Augend : Addend : Addition result

+ = . The floating point value in the register specified by and

are added and the result is stored in the register specified by . All source data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating

point format.

If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the addition

operation.

and can specify the same register number (the same device can be used

as and ). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DEADD command, the data in the register will be added one time in every scan program during

the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution command

(DEADDP) is generally used.




ProgramExample

1

When X0=On, add binary floating point value of (D1, D0) and binary floating point

value of (D3, D2) and store the result in (D11, D10).

D0DEADDX0

D2 D10

ProgramExample

2

When X2=On, add binary floating point value of (D11, D10) and K1234 (automatically

converted to binary floating point) and store the result in (D21, D20).

D10DEADDX2

K1234 D20

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH121 D ESUB

P Binary Floating Point Subtraction



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DESUB, DESUBP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command(DESUBP).

16-bit command


DESUB Continuous execution DESUBP Pulse


(Borrow flag) and M1022 (Carry flag)



CommandExplanation

: Minuend : Subtrahend : Subtraction result

− = . The floating point value in the register specified by is

subtracted from the floating point value in the register specified by and the result

is stored in the register specified by . All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.

If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the subtraction

operation.


as and ). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DESUB command, the data in the register will be subtracted one time in every scan program

during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution

command (DESUBP) is generally used.




ProgramExample

1

When X0=On, binary floating point value of (D3, D2) is subtracted from binary floating

point value of (D1, D0) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).

D0DESUBX0

D2 D10

ProgramExample

2

When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is subtracted from K1234

(automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).

K1234DESUBX2

D0 D10

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH122 D EMUL

P Binary Floating Point Multiplication



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEMUL, DEMULP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DEMULP).

16-bit command


DEMUL Continuous execution DEMULP Pulse





CommandExplanation

: Multiplicand : Multiplier : Multiplication result

× = . The floating point value in the register specified by is

multiplied with the floating point value in the register specified by and the result is

stored in the register specified by . All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.

If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the multiplication

operation.


as and ). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DEMUL command, the data in the register will be multiplied one time in every scan program

during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution

command (DEMULP) is generally used.




ProgramExample

1

When X1=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is multiplied with binary floating

point (D11, D10) and the result is stored in (D21, D20).

D0DEMULX1

D10 D20

ProgramExample

2

When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is multiplied with K1234

(automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).

K1234DEMULX2

D0 D10

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH123 D EDIV

P Binary Floating Point Division



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEDIV, DEDIVP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DEDIVP).

16-bit command

－－－－


DEDIV Continuous execution DEDIVP Pulse





CommandExplanation

: Dividend : Divisor : Quotient and Remainder

÷ = . The floating point value in the register specified by is

divided by the floating point value in the register specified by and the result is

stored in the register specified by . All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.

If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the division operation.

If is 0 (zero), the operation will fail and will result in an “operand error”, then this command will not be executed.




ProgramExample

1

When X1=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by binary floating point

(D11, D10) and the remainder is stored in (D21, D20).

D0DEDIVX1

D10 D20

ProgramExample

2

When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by K1234 (automatically

converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).

D0DEDIVX2

K10 D10

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH124 D EXP

P Perform Exponent Operation of Binary Floating Point



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEXP, DEXPP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DEXPP).

16-bit command

－－－－


DEXP Continuous execution DEXPP Pulse





CommandExplanation

: operand source device. : operand result device.

For example, the base e =2.71828 and exponent is :

EXP[ +1, ]=[ +1, ] No matter positive or negative value are valid for S. Specific register D needs to use

32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S needs to convert to floating

point.

When operand D= e S, e=2.71828 and S is specific source data.

Error flag M1067 and M1068 read D1067 and D1068.




ProgramExample

When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11).

When M1=On, use (D10, D11) to be exponent to perform exponent operation. The

value is binary floating point and save in register (D20, D21).

When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point to decimal floating point and

save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10) M0

RST M1081

M1DEXP D10 D20

M2DEBCD D20 D30

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH125 D LN

P Perform Natural Logarithm Operation of Binary Floating Point



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DLN, DLNP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DLNP).

16-bit command

－－－－


DLN Continuous execution DLNP Pulse





CommandExplanation

: operand source device. : operand result device.

For example, perform natural logarithm operation ln to operand :

LN[ +1, ]=[ +1, ] Only positive number is valid for S. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and

floating point for operating. Therefore, S needs to convert to floating point.

When operand eD=S, operand D=lnS and S is specific source data.




ProgramExample

When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11).

When M1=On, use (D10, D11) to be real number to perform natural logarithm operation.

The value is binary floating point and save in register (D20, D21).

When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point to decimal floating point and

save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10) M0

RST M1081

M1DLN D10 D20

M2DEBCD D20 D30

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH126 D LOG

P Perform Logarithm Operation of Binary Floating Point


S1 S2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.

This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DLOG, DLOGP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DLOGP).

16-bit command

－－－－


DLOG Continuous execution DLOGP Pulse





CommandExplanation

: operand base device. : operand source device. : operand result device.

Perform logarithm operation to and and save the result to . Only positive number is valid for S2 (positive and negative number are valid for S1).

Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore,

S1 and S2 need to convert to floating point. Consider S1D=S2, D=? →Log S1

S2=D Consider S1=5,S2=125, D=log 5125=? S1D=S2→5D=125→D=log 5

125=3 If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.



ProgramExample

When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) and (D2, D3) to binary floating point and save in

register (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) individually.

When M1=On, use (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to

perform logarithm operation and save the result in 32-bit register (D20, D21).

When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to decimal

floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the

power of 10) M0

RST M1081

M1D10 D12

M2DEBCD D20 D30

D2 D12

D20

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH127 D ESQR

P Square Root of Binary Floating Point


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: Essential condition: S only can be a positive value. (S≧0)

Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DESQR, DESQRP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DESQRP).

16-bit command


DESQR Continuous execution DESQRP Pulse


(Program execution error)



CommandExplanation

: Source device : Destination device which store the result This command performs a square root operation on the floating point value of source

device and stores the result at the destination device . All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.

If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the addition

operation.

If operation result of is 0 (zero), the Zero flag M1020=On.

only can be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a negative value will result in an “operation error” and this command will not be executed.

M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code “0E1B” will be record in D1067.

ProgramExample

1

When X0=On, the square root of binary floating point (D1, D0) is stored in the register

specified by (D11, D10) after the operation of square root.

D0DESQRX0

D10

(D1, D0) (D11 D10), binary floating point binary floating point

ProgramExample

2

When X2=On, the square root of K1234 (automatically converted to binary floating

point) is stored in (D11, D10).

K1234DESQRX2

D10

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH128 D POW

P Perform Power Operation of Binary Floating Point


S1 S2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.

This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DPOW, DPOWP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DPOWP).

16-bit command


DPOW Continuous execution DPOWP Pulse

execution Flag: no.



CommandExplanation

: base device. : exponent device. : operand result device.

Perform power operation to binary floating point and and save the result

to .

POW [ +1, ]^[ +1, ]= Only positive number is valid for S1 and S2. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit

format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S1 and S2 need to convert to floating

point. When S1S2=D, D=? If S1=5,S2=3, D=53=? D=53=125

Error flag M1067 and M1068 read D1067 and D1068.




ProgramExample

When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) and (D2, D3) to binary floating point and save in

register (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) individually.

When M1=On, use (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to

perform power operation and save the result in 32-bit register (D20, D21).

When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to decimal

floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the

power of 10) M0

RST M1081

M1D10 D12

M2DEBCD D20 D30

D2 D12

D20

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH129 D INT

P Convert Binary Floating Point to BIN Integer



ES series models do not support this command (INTP, DINTP).


INT Continuous execution INTP Pulse

execution


DINT Continuous execution DINTP Pulse


(Borrow flag), M1022 (Carry flag)



CommandExplanation

: Source device : Destination device which store the result

The binary floating point value of the register specified by is converted to BIN

integer and stored in the register specified . The decimal of Bin integer will be discarded.

This command is the inverse of the API 49 (FLT) command.

If operation result of is 0 (zero), the Zero flag M1020=On. If there is any decimal discarded, the Borrow flag M1021=On.

If the result exceeds the following setting range (an overflow occurs), the Carry flag

M1022=On.

16-bit command : -32,768~32,767

32-bit command : -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647

ProgramExample

When X0=On, the binary floating point value of (D1, D0) will be converted to BIN

integer and the result is stored in (D10). The decimal of BIN integer will be discarded.

When X1=On, the binary floating point value of (D21, D20) will be converted to BIN

integer and the result is stored in (D31, D30). The decimal of BIN integer will be

discarded.

INTX0

D0 D10

DINTX1

D20 D30

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH130 D SIN

P Sine Operation of Binary Floating Point


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: The data specified in S must be within the range 0° to 360°;

i.e., 0°≦S＜360° Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DSIN, DSINP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DSINP).

16-bit command

－－－－


DSIN Continuous execution DSINP Pulse

execution Flag: M1018 flag for radian/angle.



CommandExplanation

: Specified RAD value : Area where calculated result is stored.

Source desgnated by can be radian or angle by flag M1018. When M1018=Off, it is set to radian mode. RAD=angle ×π/180.

When M1018=On, it is set to angle mode. Angle range: 0°≦angle＜360°.

The SIN value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated

result is stored in the register specified by .

S: RadianR: Result

R

S-2 3

2-2 23

222-

1

-1

0-

Following shows the relation between radian and result:

ProgramExample

1

When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. When X0=On, specify RAD value (D1, D0).

Calculate SIN value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in

(D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.

M1002RST M1018

X0DSIN D0 D10

D1 D0

D1 D10 COS value

RAD 180)value (degree x /binary floating point


ProgramExample

2

When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. Select angle from inputs X0 and X1 and convert it

to RAD value to calculate SIN value.

D10FLTM1000

D1120

K31415926 K1800000000

D20D14 D40

K30MOVPX0

K6

K60X1

K6

D50D40

DEDIV

DSIN

D20

MOVP

DEMUL

(K30 D10)

(K60 D10)

(D10 D15, D14)

( /180) (D21, D20)

(D15, D14) degree x /180(D41, D40) RAD binary floating point

(D41 D40) RAD (D51, D50) SIN,





ProgramExample

3

When M1018=On, it is anlge mode. When X0=On, it designates angle value of (D1,

D0). Angle range is: 0°≦angle value＜360°. After converting to SIN value to save in

(D11, D10) with binary floating point number.



M1002SET M1018

X0DSIN D0 D10

D 1 D 0

D 11 D 10

angle value

SIN value(binary floating point)

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH131 D COS

P Cosine Operation of Binary Floating Point



i.e., 0°≦S＜360° Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DCOS, DCOSP are available. ES/EP series models do not support this command (DCOS, DCOSP).

16-bit command

－－－－


DCOS Continuous execution DCOSP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Specified RAD value. : Area where calculated result is stored.



The COS value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated

result is stored in the register specified by .

S: RadianR: Result

Following shows the relation between radian and result:

S-2 3

2-2 23

222-

1

-1

0-

R

Flag M1018 radian/angle switch: when M1018=Off, is RAD value. When

M1018=On, is angle value (0-360).



ProgramExample

1


Calculate COS value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The value in (D1, D0)

and the result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.

M1002RST M1018

X0DCOS D0 D10

D1 D0

D1 D10 COS value

RAD 180)value (degree x /binary floating point


ProgramExample

2

When M1018=On, it is angle mode. When X0=On, it is angle of specific (D1, D0). Angle

range: 0°≦angle＜360°. After converting to COS value, save in (D11, D10) with binary

floating point.

M1002SET M1018

X0DCOS D0 D10

D 1 D 0

D 1 D 10

angle value

COS value(binary floating point)

Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH132 D TAN

P Tangent Operation of Binary Floating Point



i.e., 0°≦S＜360° Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DTAN, DTANP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command(DTANP).

16-bit command

－－－－


DTAN Continuous execution DTANP Pulse




CommandExplanation

: Specified RAD value. : Area where calculated result is stored.



The TAN value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated result is stored in the register specified by .

S: RadianR: Result

Following shows the relation between radian and result:R

S-2

2

32

22-

1-103

2--

ProgramExample

1


Calculate TAN value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The value in (D1, D0)

and the result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.

M1002RST M1018

X0DTAN D0 D10

D1 D0

D11 D10

RAD 180)value (degree x /

TAN value



ProgramExample

2

When M1018=On, it is angle mode. When X0=On, it is angle of specific (D1, D0). Angle

range: 0°≦angle＜360°. After converting to TAN value, save in (D11, D10) with binary

floating point.

M1002SET M1018

X0DTAN D0 D10

D 1 D 0

D 1 D 10

angle value

TAN value(binary floating point)

Footnote


Values for detail.




ASIN P

Arc Sine Operation of Binary Floating Point



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DASIN, DASINP are available.

16-bit command


DASIN Continuous execution DASINP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored.

ASIN value=SIN –1

S: RadianR: Result


S

2

2-

0-1,0 1,0

ProgramExample

When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the

result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format.

DASINX0

D0 D10

D1 D0

D11 D10 ASIN value



Footnote


Values for detail.




ACOS P

Arc Cosine Operation of Binary Floating Point

－



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DACOS, DACOSP are available.

16-bit command


DACOS Continuous execution DACOSP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored

ACOS value=COS –1

S: RadianR: Result


S

2

0 1,0-1,0

ProgramExample

When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ACOS value and save

the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point

format.

DACOSX0

D0 D10

D1 D0

D11 D10 ACOS value



Footnote


Values for detail.




ATAN P

Arc Tangent Operation of Binary Floating Point

－



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DATAN, DATANP are available.

16-bit command


DATAN Continuous execution DATANP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored.

ATAN value=TAN –1

S: RadianR: Result


S

2

2-

0

ProgramExample

When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ATAN value and save


format.

DATANX0

D0 D10

D1 D0

D11 D10 ATAN value



Footnote


Values for detail.




SINH P

Hyperbolic Sine Operation of Binary Floating Point

－



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DSINH, DSINHP are available.

16-bit command


DSINH Continuous execution DSINHP Pulse


CommandExplanation


SINH value=(es-e-s)/2

ProgramExample

When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate SINH value and save the


DSINHX0

D0 D10

D1 D0

D11 D10 SINH value



Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH137 D COSH

P Hyperbolic Cosine Operation of Binary Floating Point

－



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DCOSH, DCOSHP are available.

16-bit command


DCOSH Continuous execution DCOSHP Pulse


CommandExplanation


COSH value=(es+e-s)/2

ProgramExample

When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate COSH value and save


format.



DCOSHX0

D0 D10

D1 D0

D11 D10 COSH value



Footnote


Values for detail.


ES EP EH138 D TANH

P Hyperbolic Tangent Operation of Binary Floating Point

－



This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DTANH, DTANHP are available.

16-bit command


DTANH Continuous execution DTANHP Pulse


CommandExplanation


TANH value=(es-e-s)/(es+e-s)

ProgramExample

When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the


DTANHX0

D0 D10

D1 D0

D11 D10 TANH value



Footnote


Values for detail.




GPWM P

General Pulse Width Modulation Output

－


S1 S2 D Note: Please refer to command explanation for usage range of

operand S1, S2 and D. Operand S2 occupies 3 devices. Operand S1 should be less or equal to operand S2. Refer to each model specification for usage range.

16-bit command


DPOW Continuous execution DPOWP Pulse

execution Flag: no.

CommandExplanation

: Pulse output width. : Pulse output cycle. : pulse output device.

is specified as pulse output width as t:0~32,767ms.

is specified as pulse output cycle as T:1~32,767ms, ≦ .

+1 and +2 is for system, please don’t use them.

pulse output devices: Y, M and S.

When GPWM command has been executed, the pulse output width and pulse output cycle is output through pulse output device .

When ≦ 0, there is no pulse output from the pulse output device. When ≧ , the pulse output device will be always On.

and can be modified when executing PWM command.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, Y10 will output following pulse. When X0=Off, Y10 output will also be Off.

X0GPWM K1000 K2000 Y10

t T

t=1000ms

T=2000ms

Output Y10

Footnote

This command counts by scan cycle so the maximum offset will be a PLC scan cycle. The value of , and ( - ) should be larger than PLC scan cycle. Otherwise, there will be error occurs for GPWM outputs.

Please notice that if using this command in subroutine or interruption, GPWM output may not be accurate.



API Applicable modelsES EP EH145 FTC

Fuzzy Temperature Control －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 S3 D Note: Refer to command explanation for operand S1, S2 and D

usage range. Operand S3 occupies continuous 6 devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. Refer to footnote for PID usage times in program.


FTC Continuous execution －－


CommandExplanation

: Target value (SV) : Present measured value (PV) : Parameter : Output value (MV)

Operand S1 usage range is 1~3000 to show 0.1°C ~300°C. The unit is 0.1°C. If (+1) (refer to footnote) sets to K0 to show 0.1°C~300°C.

Operand S2 usage range is 1~3000 to show 0.1°C ~300°C. The unit is 0.1°C. If (+1) (refer to footnote) sets to K0 to show 0.1°C~300°C.

Therefore, when user gets the result that analog converts to digital from temperature sensor, it needs to convert to the value during 1~3000 by using the four fundamental operations of arithmetic.

is sampling time setting. If setting is less than K1, command won’t act. If setting exceeds K200, it will be regarded as K200.

The setting of ( +1) only can be K0 (means °C) and K1 (means °F). When setting is not these two settings (K0 and K1), this setting will be set to K0.

Operand D usage range is 0~100 to show 0%~100%. User should use with other commands by heater type when using this command. For example, it can use with GPWM command to control pulse output as shown in footnote (example 1).

ProgramExample

Finishing parameter setting before executing FTC command.

When X0=On, command is executed and save result in D150. When X0=Off, command is not executed and previous data is unchanged.

X0FTC D0 D1 D100 D150



Footnote

The setting of is in the following:

Device Function Usage range Explanation

: Sampling time (TS)(unit: 10ms)

1~200 (unit: 100ms)

When TS is less than a scan time, PID command will execute for a scan time. When TS=0, it won’t act. Therefore, the minimum setting of TS should be larger than program scan time. When setting exceeds 200, it will be regarded as 200.

+1: Temperature unit K0=°C，K1=°FWhen setting is not these two settings (K0 and K1), this setting will be set to K0.

+2:

~

+5: For system uses, please don’t use.

Control Diagram:

+ e

FTC

PV

MVFuzzy

Controller

Temperature Sensor

Attention and suggestion:

It is recommended to set sampling time to twice and above of sampling time of

temperature sensor to get better temperature control.

Example 1: control diagram

FuzzyController

FTC

SVD0 D10

MVY10

D1PV

+ e PWMProgram

Pt Module TemperatureSensor

Following time chart is using GPWM command to output Y10. (t is pulse output width

and T is pulse output cycle time)



T11

T10 The setting of FTC command is sampling time D2=K10 (unit: 10ms) and temperature

unit is D3=K0(℃). Other example for using with temperature control are shown in

following.

M3FTC D0

MOV D10

<=

D11<> D10 D11

SET M4

RST Y10D11 K0

CJ P0

> SET Y10D11 K99

CJ P0

M3TMR T10

Y10TMR T11

T11RST Y10

T10SET Y10

RST T10

M4SET Y10

RST M4

> T10 K99




SWAP P Swap High/Low Byte


S Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit

command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. The continuous command (SWAP, DSWAP) are only provided in V4.9(included) or later version of ES series models and EP/EH series models.

16-bit command (5 STEPS）

SWAP Continuous execution SWAPP Pulse


DSWAP Continuous execution DSWAPP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Device for swapping high/low byte. When being 16-bit command, swapping the content of high/low byte.

When being 32-bit command, swapping the content of high/low byte.of two registers

separately.

This command is usually pulse execution (SWAPP, DSWAPP).

ProgramExample

1

When X0=ON, swapping the content of high/low byte of D0.

D0SWAPPX0

D0

High Byte Low Byte

ProgramExample

2

When X0=ON, swapping upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit of D11 and swapping upper 8-bit

and lower 8-bit of D10.

D10DSWAPX0

D10D11

High ByteHigh Byte Low Byte Low Byte




MEMR P Data Backup MEMORY Read

－


m D n Note: The setting range of m operand: EP series model:

m=0~1,599; EH series models: m=0~9,999. The setting range of D operand: EP series model: D2000~D4999; EH series model: D2000~D9999 The setting range of n operand: 16-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K1,600; EH series models: n=K1〜K8,000. 32-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K800; EH series models: n=K1〜K4,000. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


MEMR Continuous execution MEMRP Pulse


DMEMR Continuous execution DMEMRP Pulse

execution Flag: M1101 (Please refer the

following footnote for detail)

CommandExplanation

: Address (Constant) for reading data of file register. : Address (Constant)

for storing read data. : Quantity of one time reading data. EP/EH series models use this command to read the data of file register and store the

read data in the data register.

EP series models provide 1,600 numbers of 16-bit file registers and EH series models

provide 10,000 numbers of 16-bit file registers.

Operand and for EP series models don’t support register E and F.

If operands , and is out of range, operand error will be occurred. M1067, M1068=On and error code 0E1A will be recorded in D1067.

ProgramExample

1

16-bit command MEMR reads 100 items data from the 10th address of file register and

store the read data in the data register started from D2000.

When X0=On, the command is executed. When X0 goes to Off, the command is not

executed and the content of previous read data has no change. X0

MEMR K10 D2000 K100

ProgramExample

2

32-bit command DMEMR reads 100 items data from the 20th address of file register

and store the read data in the data register started from D3000.



DMEMR K20 D3000 K100




MEMW P Data Backup MEMORY Write In

－


S m n Note: The setting range of S operand: EP series model:

S=D2000~D4999; EH series model: S=D2000~D9999. The setting range of m operand: EP series model: m=K0~K1,599; EH series models: m=K0~K9,999. The setting range of n operand: 16-bit command: EP series model: n= K1~ K1,600; EH series models: n=K1〜K8,000. 32-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K800; EH series models: n=K1〜K4,000. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


MEMW Continuous execution MEMWP Pulse


DMEMW Continuous execution

DMEMWP

Pulse execution

Flag: M1101 (Please refer the following footnote for detail)

CommandExplanation

: Address (Constant) for data writing in, D2000~D9999 : Address

(Constant) for file register writing in, K0~K9,999 : Quantity of one time reading data, K1~K8,000

EP/EH series models use this command to read the data of file register and store the

read data in the data register.

EP series models provide 1,600 numbers of 16-bit file registers and EH series models

provide 10,000 numbers of 16-bit file registers.

Operand and for EP series models don’t support register E and F.

If operands , and is out of range, operand error will be occurred. M1067, M1068=On and error code 0E1A will be recorded in D1067.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, the double word command DMEMW is executed. Write 100 items 32-bit

data started from D2001, D2000 in the file register address 0 to 199.



DMEMW D2000 K0 K100

File Register

EH series models: when EH series PLC startup or goes from STOP to RUN, EH

series PLC will determine M1101 (if startup the function of file register), D1101 (file

register starts to give number, K0~K9,999), D1102 (numbers of file registers of being

read, K1~K8,000), D1103 (destination device which stores the read data of file register,

specified data register D start to give number, K2,000~K9,999) and decide if

automatically transfer the content of file register to the specified data register.

EH series models: When the value of D1101 is less than 0, or the value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or more than 9,999, reading data from file register to data register is disabled.



EP series models: when EP series PLC startup or goes from STOP to RUN, EP series

PLC will determine M1101 (if startup the function of file register), D1101 (file register

starts to give number, K0~K1,600), D1102 (numbers of file registers of being read,

K1~K8,000), D1103 (destination device which stores the read data of file register,

specified data register D start to give number, K2,000~K4,999) and decide if

automatically transfer the content of file register to the specified data register.

EP series models: When the value of D1101 is less than 0 or more than 1,600, or the

value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or more than 4,999, reading data from file register to

data register is disabled.

When file register read data to data register D, if the address of file register or data

register exceeds the limit range, PLC will stop reading.

As for the data read and write in of file register, in PLC program only can use API

command 147 MEMR to read and use API command 148 MEMW to write in. For

detailed information about file registers, please refer to CH2 section 2.8.3.

There are 32,768 file registers. The file registers don’t have real number, therefore the

read/write in function of file register should be performed by the API command 147

MEMR and 148 MEMW, or using a peripheral equipment HPP and WPLSoft software.

The destination device is not always continuous. One part is on the inner SRAM and

the other part is on the SRAM CARD. If user did not insert the SRAM CARD and the

read address exceeds 2,000 addresses, then the read value will be all 0(zero).

Related special relays and registers of file register: Flag Function Explanation

M1101 If startup the function of file register, Latched, Default is Off

Special Register Function Explanation

D1101 File register starts to give number K0~K9,999, Latched, Default is 0

D1102 Numbers of file registers of being read K1~K8,000, Latched, Default is 0

D1103 Destination device which stores the read data of file register, specified data register D start to give number K2,000~K9,999, Latched, Default is 2,000



9-1


MODRW

MODBUS Data Read/ Write In


S1 S2 S3 S n Note: The setting range of S1 operand: K0~K255

The limit of S2 operand is specified as K3(H3), K6(H6), K16(H10) The setting range of n operand: n=K1~K8 This command (MODRW) is only provided in V4.9(included) or later version of ES series models and EP/EH series models.


MODRW Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

－－－－ Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

(Please refer the following footnote)

CommandExplanation

: Connection device address : Function code : Address of being

read or write : Register of being read/write : Length of read/write data

: Connection device address (UNIT ADDRESS). The setting range K0 to K255.

: FUNCTION CODE. For example: the command of AC drive or DVP-PLC to read many items is H03. Write command of AC drive or DVP-PLC is H06 and the

command of write many items is H10. Only above three function codes are provided

and the other function codes are disabled. Please refer the following program

examples.

: Device address that being read/write data (DEVICE ADDRESS). This is an inner device address of connection device. If the address is illegal to the specified

device, there will be fault code store in D1130 and at the same time, M1141 will be

ON. For example, 4000H is illegal to VFD-S, M1141 will be ON and D1130 = 2. Please

refer to VFD-S user manual for the details of fault codes.

: Source or destination of being read/write (SOURCE or DESTINATION). User can set register to write data length in advance or store data after reading.

: Read/Write data length (DATA LENGTH). The specified range K1~K8 (WORD).

ProgramExample

1

Function code K3(H3) : read many items data

1. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (ASCII Mode when M1143=OFF)

2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON)

Received data is stored in 16 continuous registers that start from D0 with ASCII format

when in ASCII mode. PLC will convert the content to Hexadecimal and store in

registers D1296~D1311 automatically. M1131=ON when it starts converting to

hexadecimal and M1131 will be OFF after completing converting.



ProgramExample

1

User can use MOV, DMOV or BMOV commands to move D1296~D1311 that store

hexadecimal data to general register to use. For ES series, other command is invalid

to this area.

Received data is stored in 8 continuous registers that start from D0 and specified by

users in hexadecimal format in RTU mode. At the same time, D1296~D1311 is invalid.

In ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in D1256~D1295.

Users can move these register data to general register by using MOV, DMOV or

BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.

Data received from AC drive is stored in registers specified by users. After complete

receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is correct. If there is

any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.

If inner data address of AC drive is illegal to specified device, it will have fault code.

Fault code will be stored in D1130 and M1141 will be on. For example, 8000H is illegal

to VFD-S and M1141=ON and D1130=2. Please refer to VFD-S user manual to fault

code.

After M1140=ON or M1141=ON, it will transmit a correct data to AC drive. If received

data is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset.

H87MOVM1002

D1120

SET M1120

SETX0

M1122

K100MOV D1129

MODRW K3K1X0

H2100

M1127

RST M1127

M1143X10

D0 K8

setting communicationprotocol 9600, 8, E, 1

communication protocol

setting communicationtime out 100ms

connectiondeviceaddress K1

functioncode K3read manyitems data

data addressH2100

data stored register

read/write datalength (word)

handling received data

ASCII mode : received data is stored in 16 consecutive registers that startfrom D0 with ASCII format when in ASCII mode. PLC will convert the contentto hexadecimal and store in registers D1296~D1311 automatically

RTU mode : received data is stored in 8 consecutive registers that start fromD0 and specified by users in hexadecimal type in RTU mode

receiving data completed and reset flag

RTU mode setting

Setting sending request



9-3

ASCII Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive.

PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”

PLC transmits data register (transmit message)

Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1256 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0


D1257 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1257 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 CMD (1,0) is command code

D1258 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1258 High ‘1’ 31 H D1259 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1259 High ‘0’ 30 H

Data Address


Data contents The content of register D50 (H1770=K6000)

D1262 Low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1262 High ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0

LRC CHK (0,1) is error check

PLC receives data register (response message)

Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D1071 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1071 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 D1072 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1072 High ‘1’ 31 H D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H

Data Address


Data content


RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive

PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07


Register DATA Explanation

D1256 Low 01 H Address

D1257 Low 06 H Function

D1258 Low 20 H

D1259 Low 00 H Data Address




D1260 Low 00 H

D1261 Low 12 H Data content

The content of register D50

(H12)

D1262 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low

D1263 Low 07 H CRC CHK High





D1072 Low 20 H


D1074 Low 00 H

D1075 Low 12 H Data content

D1076 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low


ProgramExample

2

Function code K6(H6) : write one WORD data into register



When in ASCII mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in ASCII

format in specified register D0. Data received from AC drive will be stored in registers

D1070~D1076.

When in RTU mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in hexadecimal

format in specified register D0. Data received from AC drive will be stored in registers

D1070~D1077.

When in ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in registers

D1256~D1295. Users can move these data to general registers by using MOV, DMOV

or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.

After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is

correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.




code.





9-5

H87MOVM1002

D1120

SET M1120

SETX0

M1122

K100MOV D1129

MODRW K6K1X0

H2000

M1127

RST M1127

M1143X10

D50 K1





functioncode K6write onedata in

data addressH2000



setting transmit flag


ASCII mode : received data in ASCII format stored in special registers D1070~1078.


RTU mode : received data in hexadecimal format stored in special registers D1070~1078.


PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”




D1257 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1257 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0



Data Address


Data contents The content of register D50 (H1770=K6000)






Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D1071 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1071 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 D1072 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1072 High ‘1’ 31 H D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H

Data Address


Data content


RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive

PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07


Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low 01 H Address D1257 Low 06 H Function D1258 Low 20 H D1259 Low 00 H Data Address

D1260 Low 00 H D1261 Low 12 H Data content The content of

register D50 (H12) D1262 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1263 Low 07 H CRC CHK High


Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low 01 H Address D1071 Low 06 H Function D1072 Low 20 H D1073 Low 00 H Data Address

D1074 Low 00 H D1075 Low 12 H Data content

D1076 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1077 Low 07 H CRC CHK High



9-7

ProgramExample

3

Function code K16(H10) : write many items WORD data into register



When in ASCII mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in ASCII

format in 8 continuous specified register started from D0. Received data from AC drive

will be stored in registers D1070~D1078.

When in RTU mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in hexadecimal

format in 8 continuous specified register started from D0. Received data from AC drive

will be stored in registers D1070~D1078.

When in ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in registers

D1256~D1295. Users can move these data to general registers by using MOV, DMOV

or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.

After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is

correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.




code.



H87MOVM1002

D1120

SET M1120

SETX0

M1122

K100MOV D1129

MODRW K16K1X0

H2000

M1127

RST M1127

M1143X10

D50 K8





functioncode K16write onedata in

data addressH2000



setting transmit flag


ASCII mode : received data in ASCII format stored in special registers D1070~1078.


RTU mode : received data in hexadecimal format stored in special registers D1070~1078.




PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: “ 01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 30 ”

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: “ 01 10 2000 0002 CD ”

PLC transmits data register (transmits messages)



D1257 Low ‘1’ 31 H CMD 1 D1257 High ‘0’ 30 H CMD 0



Data Address


Number of Register

D1262 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1262 High ‘4’ 34 H Byte Count


Data contents 1 The content of register D50 (H12)


Data contents 2 The content of register D51 (H1770=K6000)



PLC receives data register (response messages)


D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D1071 Low ‘1’ 31 H CMD 1 D1071 High ‘0’ 30 H CMD 0 D1072 Low ‘2’ 32 H D1072 High ‘0’ 30 H D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H

Data Address


Number of Register

D1076 Low ‘C’ 43 H LRC CHK 1 D1076 High ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 0

RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drives

PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 C4 7F

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 10 2000 0002 4A 08



9-9

PLC transmits data register (transmits messages)




D1258 Low 20 H


D1260 Low 00 H

D1261 Low 02 H Number of Register

D1262 Low 04 H Byte Count

D1263 Low 00 H

D1264 Low 12 H Data content 1


(H12)

D1265 Low 17 H

D1266 Low 70 H Data content 2


(H1770=K6000)

D1262 Low C4 H CRC CHK Low

D1263 Low 7F H CRC CHK High

PLC receives data register (response messages)




D1072 Low 20 H


D1074 Low 00 H

D1075 Low 02 H Number of Register

D1076 Low 4A H CRC CHK Low




Footnote

The startup condition (the contact) before MODRD, RDST, MODRW these three

commands, cannot use rising-edge contact and falling-edge. Otherwise, the data

stored in received register will be incorrect.

Related flags and special registers of RS-485 communication MODRW command:

Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command for more detail information. Flag/Special

Register Function Description

M1120 Communication setting latched. The change of D1120 will be invalid after setting.

M1121 When it is Off, RS-485 of PLC is sending communication data. M1122 Delivery request M1123 Receive completed M1124 Receive waiting message M1125 Receive status disable M1126 STX/ETX system definition selection M1127 MODRD / RDST / MODRW commands data receive completed M1128 Transmitting/receiving indication M1129 Receive time out M1130 Users/system definition STX/ETX M1131 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data convert to HEX, M1131=ON M1140 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data receive error M1141 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW command parameter error M1142 VFD-A convenience command data receive error

M1143 ASCII/RTU mode selection (use with commands MODRD/MODWR/MODRW) (Off is ASCII mode, ON is RTU mode)

D1070~D1085

It is PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. This command will send messages during executing and if the receiver receives, it will return messages and save it in D1070~D1085. Users can view return data by this register content.

D1120 RS-485 communication protocol

D1121 PLC communication address.(save PLC communication address, has latched function)

D1122 Remainder characters of delivery data D1123 Remainder characters of received data D1124 Start text definition（STX） D1125 Definition of the first end character（ETX1） D1126 Definition of the second end character（ETX2） D1129 Communication time out abnormal. Time unit:（ms） D1130 Return fault code record of MODBUS

D1256~D1295

This is PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command MODRW. The message that this command sends during executing will be saved in D1256~D1295. User can check according to this register content.

D1296~D1311 PLC will automatically convert ASCII data saved in the register specified by users to hexadecimal format.



9-11


PWD Input Pulse Width Detection

－－


S D Note: The limit of S operand is specified as X10~X17

The setting range of D operand: D=D0~D999, two continuous devices are used and only can be used one time in the program.


PWD Continuous execution －－

32-bit command


CommandExplanation

: Source device : Destenstation device which stores detection result This command is used to detect the On pulse width of X10~X17 inputs and time unit is

100us.

occupy two continuous devices. The longest detectable time is 214,748.3647 seconds, about 3,579.139 minutes, about 59.652 hours.

If the On pulse width is less than 100us, the value of specified is equal to 0(zero).

ProgramExample

When X0=On, record the On pulse width of input X10 and store in D1, D0. X0

PWD X10 D0


RTMU

Start to Measure the Execution Time of I Interrupt

－－


S D Note: The limit of S operand is specified as K0~K9

The limit of D operand is specified as K1~K1,000



32-bit command


CommandExplanation

: Source device : Destination device which stores measure time (time unit is 1us)

The limit range of is K0~K9, specified special D register and can measure ten interrupt subroutine at most, the number of specified special D register is D1156~1165

in order. For example, when the value of is K5, it means the number of specified special D register is D1161.



After executing RTMU command, if the range of , inputted by user is legal, this command will get the timer started to measure the execution time of I

interrupt and reset the content of special D register specified by to 0(zero) simultaneously. When reaching RTMD command, the timer will be closed and

measuring the execution time of I interrupt will end. At the same time, specify the

measuring execution time to the special D register specified by RTMD command.

This RTMU command is used with the next introduced RTMD command and these

two commands are all be used to measure the execution time of I interrupt service

program for the user to deal with high speed response and restrict to providing the

execution time of ISR (Interrupt Service Routine) at the beginning of the program

development. API Applicable models

ES EP EH153 RTMD

End to Measure the Execution Time of I Interrupt

－－


S Note: The limit of S operand is specified as K0~K9



32-bit command


CommandExplanation

: Source device

The limit range of is K0~K9, specified special D register and can measure ten interrupt subroutine at most, the number of specified special D register is D1156~1165

in order. For example, when the value of is K5, it means the number of specified special D register is D1161

ProgramExample

When X0 is Off→On, enter into I001 interrupt subtoutine, the RTMU command will

start a 8-bit timer (unit time is 10us). When reaching RTMD command K0 , close the

timer and store the measurin time in special D register (there are totally ten registers

D1156~D1165 and it is specified as K0~K9).

FEND

M1000

RTMU K0 D0

RTMD K0

IRET

I 001M1000



9-13

Footnote

After developing PLC program completed, we recommanded that user should remove

this command.

Additional Explanation:

1. Due to the time interrupt executed by RTMU command is a less priority (less

important than other interrupts), the timer may not be triggered and cannot count the

time when executing high-speed pulse input counting or specifying high-speed pulse

input during the execution period of RTMU command.

2. If user execute RTMU command but not execute RTMD command before the end of

program interrupt, then the interrupt will not be ended.

3. Please specially notice that RTMU command is executed by starting one inner timer

interrupt of PLC, therefore, the timer may be disordered if execute multiple RTMU or

RTMD commands simultaneously.

D1156~D1165: Special D registers specified by RTMU, RTMD command (numbers is

from K0 to K9).


RAND P Random Number

－


S1 S2 D

Note: S1 operand ≦S2 operand The usage range of operands S1, S2 is: K0 ≦ S1 , S2 ≦

K32,767 Refer to each model specification for usage range.


RAND Continuous execution RANDP －

32-bit command

－－－ Pulse executioin

Flag: No

CommandExplanation

: lower bound for producing random number. : upper bound for producing

random number. : result for producing random number. When user inputs S1 > S2, PLC will occur operand error and won’t execute it, and

then M1067, M1068=On, and records error code 0E1A(HEX) in D1067.

ProgramExample

When X10=On, the random number that produced during lower bound D0 and upper

bound D10 will save in D20. X10

RAND D0 D10 D20




ABSR Absolute Current Value Read

－－


S D1 D2 Note: Operand S occupies 3 continuous devices

Operand D1 occupies 3 continuous devices Operand D2 occupies 2 continuous devices Refer to each model specification for usage range. There is no 16-bit command for API 55, only 32-bit command, DABSR is available and it can only be used for ONCE in program.

16-bit command

－－－－


DABSR Continuous execution －－

Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote.

CommandExplanation

This command provides continuous absolute position data read function of mitsubishi

servo drive MR-J2 (with absolute position check function).

: Input signal from Servo : Control signal for controling Servo : Absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo

is the input signal from Servo and it will use 3 continuous devices , +1,

+2. Device and +1 are connected to the ABS (bit0, bit1) of Servo for

data transmitting. Device +2 is connected to Servo for transmitting data ready flag. Please see the wiring drawing below for details.

is the control signal for controling Servo and it will use 3 continuous devices ,

+1, +2. Device is connected to Servo On (SON) of Servo, device

+1 is connected to ABS data transmitting mode of Servo and +2 is connected to ABS data request signal. Please see the wiring drawing below for details.

PLCDVP32EH00T

ABS(bit 0)ABS(bit 1)

SERVO ON

SERVO AMPMR-J2-A

CN1B

D01 419

106

ZSPTLCSG

589

SONABSMABSR

X0X1X2

24G

S/S+24V

Y4Y5Y6C4

VDD 3

transmission data is ready

ABS requirementABS transmission mode



9-15

is the absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo and it will use 2 continuous

devices , +1. is low word and +1 is high word. The absolute position data should be stored in the current value registers (D1337, D1336)

corresponding to CH0 pulse or the current value registers (D1339, D1338) corresponding

to CH1 pulse, so it is recommanded to specify these two registers. If specify other

devices, finally, the user still have to transmit the data into the current value registers

(D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse or the current value registers (D1339,

D1338) corresponding to CH1 pulse.

When DABSR command drvie contact turns ON and read starts, the command execution

completed flag M1029, M1030 will be energized. The flags must be reset by user.

When driving the DABSR command, please specify normally open contact. If the drive

contact of DABSR command turns Off when DABSR command read starts, the execution

of absolute current value read will be interrupted and result in incorrect data. Please be

careful and notice that.

If the drive contact of DABSR command turns Off after the read is completed, the Servo

On (SON) signal connected to will also turn Off and the operation will be disabled.

ProgramExample

When X7= On, the absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo should be stored in the

current value register (D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse. At the same time,

drive a timer T10 to count 5 second. If over 5 second and the absolute position data (32

bit) read not complete, it will drvie M10=On and this means the absolute position data (32

bit) read is abnormal.

When connecting to system, please set the power of DVP-PLC and SERVO AMP to be

On at the same time or set the SERVO AMP to be ON earlier than the power of DVP-PLC.

X7DABS X0 Y4 D1336

TMR T0 K50M11

M10T0

SET M11M1029

ABS read completed

execution completedflag

Read overtime

ABS absolute positiondata read is abnormal

ABS absolute positiondata read completed



Wiring

X0X1X2

COM+24V

Y4Y5Y6

COM4

24232516SG

PFZSPTLC

CN1

PLC ControllerDVP-20EH

SERVO AMPMR-H-A

ABS(bit 0)ABS(bit 1)

SERVO ON

SERVO AMPMR-J2-A

CN1BX0 D01 4

19

106

ZSPTLCSG

X1X2COM

Y4Y5Y6

589

SONABSMABSR

SOND13D14

124445

transmitting data ready flag

ABS data mode transmittingABS data request

Footnote

Time chart explanation of DABSR command absolute position data read:

When DABSR command starts to execute, it will drive the signal of Servo On (SON)

and ABS data transmitting mode to output.

By the transmitting data ready flag and ABS request signal can confirm the

transmission and receipt of both sides and process the data transmission of current

value position data (32 bit) plus check data (6 bit).

Data is transmitted by ABS (bit0, bit1) two bits.

SON

ABSM

TLC

ABSR

ZSP

D01

AMP output

SERVO ON

ABS(bit 1)

ABS(bit 0)

ABS datarequest

Transmittingdata ready

ABS datamode transmitting

Current value position data 32-bit+(plus) check data 6-bit

Controller output

AMP output

AMP output



9-17

This command is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning

function is connected, such as Mitsubishi MR-J2-A Servo drive.

The Servo motor with absolute positioning function should be rotated more than one

revolution and given the reset signal before manufacturing equipments. Please use one of

the following methods to proceed the first time zero point return:

1. Complete zero point return by using reset signal function to execute API 156 ZRN

command.

2. After using JOG or manual operation to adjust the zero point position of the

equipment, input reset signal SERVO AMP. As for the reset signal input, please refer

to the external switches diagram below to see if using DVP-PLC controller to output.

For the detail of the wiring between DVP-PLC and Mitsubishi MR-J2- A, please

refer to the API 159 DRVA.

CR 8

SG 10

reset

Use Mitsubishi MR-J2- Aas example

Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will

output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off.

M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029=On after the first group pulse (Y0, Y1) pulse output complete or other relative command complete execution.

M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after the second group pulse (Y2, Y3) pulse output complete.

M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse stop output when M1335= On. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output indication flag M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command CLEAR output signal enable flag Special registers description: D1337, D1336: 1. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the

current value registers of positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the first output group Y0, Y1, the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction of rotation.

2. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the total number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y0, Y1.

D1338, D1339: 1. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the current value registers of positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the second output group Y2, Y3, the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction of rotation.

2. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the total number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y2, Y3.



D1340: Operates as the frequency setting of the first step acceleration and last step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) are executed. Setting range: This speed can not less than 10Hz. If the speed is less than 10Hz or larger than max. output frequency, it will output by 10Hz. Factory setting is 200Hz. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting speed.

D1341, D1342: D1342(HIGH WORD), D1341(LOW WORD) represents as the maximum speed setting when positioning control commands ((API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed. Setting range: it is 200KHz.

D1343: Operates as the Acceleration/Deceleration time setting in which maximum speed (D1342, D1341) is achieved from the first step acceleration and last step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed. Setting range: This acceleration / deceleration time can’t be less than 50ms. If it less than 50ms or larger than 5000ms, it will output by 50ms.Facotry setting is 100ms. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting speed.


ZRN Zero Point Return

－－


S1 S2 S3 D Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the

information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2,, D.

16-bit command(9 STEPS)

ZRN Continuous execution －－


DZRN Continuous execution －－

Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote of API 155 ABSR command.

CommandExplanation

: Zero point return speed : Creep speed : Near point signal (DOG)

: Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as output module)

is specified as the zero point return speed as, 16-bit 10 to 32,767Hz or 32-bit 10 to 200,000Hz.

is specified as the creep speed, the lower speed after near point signal (DOG) turns On and its available range is 10 to 32,767Hz.

is specified as the near point signal (DOG) input (A contact input). If any Y, M, S device other than an input relay (X) is specified for the near point signal, it will be

affected by the scanning cycle of the PLC and the dispersion of zero point may be

large.



9-19

Pulse output device only can be specified as Y0, Y2. When executing API 158 DRVI and API 159 DRVA command, the PLC store the

FWD/REV pulse which increase or decrease during operation in current vlaue

registers (Y0: D1337,D1336, Y2: D1339, D1338) so that it can always know the

machine position. However, the data may lost when the power of PLC is Off.

Therefore, the machine should execute zero point turn during initial operation to input

the zero point.

ProgramExample

When M10= On, a frequency of 20KHz outpus from Y0 and zero point return will be

energized. When it reaches the near point signal (DOG), X5= On and it will change to

creep speed. Then, a frequency of 1KHz outpus from Y0 and the command will be

energized. Pulses output will stop until X5=Off. M10

ZRN K20000 K1000 X5 Y0

Footnote

Time chart explanation of reset signal output:

1. When reset flag M1346= On, the reset signal is sent to the servo drive when zero

point trun is completed.

2. Output device of reset signal:

CH0(Y0, Y1) reset output device (Y4)

CH1(Y2, Y3) reset output device (Y5)

M1336, M1337

inside 1ms

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

DOG ONOutput near pointsignal (DOG)

Creep speed

Reset signal Y4 or Y5

Pulse output monitor

reset signal

Zero return speed

Initialposition

about 20ms+ 1 scan time

program interruptscan in circle

Explanation of zero point return operation:

1. When ZRN command is executed, accelerate to Zero point return speed and start to move.

2. When the Near point signal (DOG) goes from Off to On, it will decelerate to Creep

speed . 3. When the Near point signal (DOG) goes from On to Off and the same time of pulse

output stop, the content value of current value register (D1337, D1336) of CH0

pulse or current value register (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse will be 0(zero). Also,

if the reset signal flag M1346= On, the reset signal Y4 or Y5 will output

simultaneously.



4. When the operation of pulse output is completed and flag M1029, M1030 is

activated, indication flag M1336 sent by CH0 pulse or indication flag M1337 sent

by CH1 pulse will be Off.

5. Hence, the command can not search the position of Near point signal (DOG) and

the operation of ZRN command only can be processed in unidirection. In the

operation of ZRN command, the content value of current value register (D1337,

D1336) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse will

decrease.

LSR(DOG)

DOG

LSF

DOG front end detectDOG back end detect( )zero point position

initial position

Zero return speed

Motor

decelerate toCreep speed

Near pointsignal ON switch near

zero point

ForwardBackward

(Forward limit)(Backward limit)

Front endBack end

6. This command is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning

function is connected, such as Mitsubishi MR-H-A Servo drive, MR-J2-A Servo

drvie. It can record current position even the power is Off. Besides, because the

current position of the servo drive can be read by API 155 ABSR command of

DVP-EH series PLC, the ZRN command should only be executed for one time.

After the power is Off, it is unnecessary to execute the ZRN command again.

7. When CH0 and CH1 pulse execute the ZRN command, the current value of pulse

output frequency will display in (D1394, D1395) and (D1396, D1397). After the

operation of ZRN command is completed, the last output frequency value will be

stored in (D1394, D1395) and (D1396, D1397).

8. When the drive contact of ZRN command is On, CH0 and CH1 pulse will read the

content value set by D1343t as aeceleration time. After accelerating to zero point

return speed, wait for the entry of the near point signal (DOG) and output the creep

speed of low speed by decelerating. Immediately stop output pulse when the near

point signal (DOG) turns Off..



9-21


PLSV Variable Speed Pulse Output

－－


S1 D1 D2 Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the information

of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D.


PLSV Continuous execution －－


DPLSV Continuous execution

Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, please refer to the footnote of API 155 ABSR command.

CommandExplanation

: Pulse output frequency : Pulse output device (Please use transistor as

output module) : Rotation direction signal

is specified as pulse output frequemcy, 16-bit 1 to 32,767Hz and -1 to -32,768 Hz or 32-bit 1 to 200,000Hz, -1 to -200,000 Hz. The (+) and (-) symbol indicates the

positive and negative direction. The pulse output frequency can be changed even

when pulses are being output.

Pulse output device only can be specified as Y0, Y2.

is specified as rotation direction signal and it operates following the polarity of

. When is positive (+), is On. When is negative (-), is Off.

PLSV command do not has acceleration/deceleration setting function. Therefore,

acceleration/deceleration are not performed at start and stop. If cushion start and stop

is desired, please increase or decrease the output pulse frequency by using API 67

RAMPcommand.

If the drive contact turns Off while PLSV command execute to output pulse, the

machine will stop without deceleration.

When the drive contact of PLSV command truns Off, it is impossible to drive PLSV

command again even if the pulse send indication flag M1336 of CH0 pulse or pulse

send indication flag M1337 of CH1 pulse is set.

ProgramExample

When M10= On, a frequency of 20KHz outputs from Y0. Y5= On represents the

positive direction. M10

PLSV K20000 Y0 Y5




DRVI Drive to Increment

－－


S1 S2 D1 D2 Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the

information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D1, D2.

16-bit command(9 STEPS)

DRVI Continuous execution －－


DDRVI Continuous execution －－

Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote.

CommandExplanation

: Numbers of pulses (Target device) : Pulse output frequency :

Pulse output designation device (Please use transistor as output module) : Rotation direction signal

is specified as the numbers of pulses (relative positioning). The available

numbers of are: 16-bit command: -32,768 to +32,767

32-bit command: -999,999 to +999,999. The positive (+) and negative (-) symbol

indicates the forward and reverser direction.

is specified as the pulse output frequency. The available numbers of are: 16-bit command: 10 to 32,767Hz

32-bit command: 10 to 200,000Hz

is specified as pulse output designation device. In EH series models, it only can be specified as Y0, Y2.


. When is positive (+), is On. When is negative (-), is Off.

The numbers of pulses will be stored in current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336

low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of

CH1 pulse. When rotation direction is negative, the content value of current value

register will decrease.

The contents of each operand can not be changed while the DRVI command is

executed. The contents will be changed when the next execution is driven.

If the drive contact turns off when the DRVI command is executed, the machine will

decelerates and stops and the execution completed flag M1029, M1030 does not turn

On.



9-23

When the drive contact of DRVI command turns Off, it is impossible to drive DRVI



ProgramExample

When M10= On, twenty thousands (20000) of 2KHz frequency pulses outputs from Y0

(relative positioning). Y5= On represents the positive direction. M10

DRVI K20000 K2000 Y0 Y5

Footnote

Operation explanation of relative positioning control: Using a positive or a negative

symbol to specify travel distance from the current position is also a kind of drive method

of relative positioning control. +3,000

-3,000

0

Currentposition

Settings of relative positioning and operation speed:

Initial value : 100ms(D1343)(D1343)

Initial value(default) 200,000Hz:

(D1342,D1341)

(D1340) (D1340)

Actual

timeacceleration

Output pulsefrequency

Maximum speed

Currentposition

Last stepdeceleration

First stepacceleration

Actual

timedeceleration

Output pulsenumbers

Accel/Decel timeAccel/Decel time

Initial value 100ms:

The minimum value of output pulse frequency which can be actually used is deternined

by the following equation: 1. Minimum value of output pulse frequency =

MaxSpeed [D1342,D1341]Hz ( 2 (Acceleration\Deceleration [ D1343]ms 1000 ))÷ × ÷

2. Even if the specified pulse output frequency is lower than the value of the

calculation value of the equation above, the calculation value of the equation above

will still be actually used while outputting the pulses.

3. The actual output pulse frequency of the first step acceleration and last step

deceleration also use the calculation value of the equation above as the minimum value.



See below for an example:

1. Minimum value of output pulse frequency =

50000Hz ( 2 (100ms 1000 )) 500Hz÷ × ÷ = .

2. Although the specified output pulse frequency is equal to 400 Hz (lower than the calculation value, 500 Hz), the frequency of 500 Hz will be still be used when

output the pulses.

3. If specifying the output pulse frequency = 50,000 Hz, minimum value of output pulse frequency for the first step acceleration and last step deceleration will

still be the calculation value, 500 Hz.

50000Hz500Hz500Hz

Flags description:

M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse

while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will

automatically turn Off.

M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after Y0, Y1 pulse output complete.

In EP/ES series MPU, M1029= On after Y0 pulse output complete.

M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after Y2, Y3 pulse output complete.

In EP/ES series MPU, M1030= On after Y1 pulse output complete.

M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On.

M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse stop output when M1335= On.

M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag

M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output indication flag

M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command output signal enable flag



9-25

Special registers description:

D1337, D1336: 1. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the current

value registers of positioning control commands (API 157 PLSV, API

158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the first output group Y0, Y1, the

current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction

of rotation.

2. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the total

number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API

59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y0, Y1.

D1338, D1339: 1. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the current

value registers of positioning control commands (API 157 PLSV, API

158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the second output group Y2, Y3,

the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the

direction of rotation.

2. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the total

number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API

59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y2, Y3.

D1340: Operates as the frequency setting of the first step acceleration and last

step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN,

API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.

Setting range: 1/10 or less of maximum speed (D1342, D1341)

If the current value exceeds the range, it is automatically set to 1/10 of

the maximum speed during operation.

3. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the

resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while

setting speed.

D1341, D1342: D1342(HIGH WORD), D1341(LOW WORD) represents as the maximum

speed setting when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API

158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.

Setting range: 10 to 200,000Hz, the factory setting (default) is 200,000Hz

Note: The output pulse frequency specified by operand S2 of API 158

DRVI command should be under this maximum speed.

D1343: Operates as the Acceleration/Deceleration time setting in which

maximum speed (D1342, D1341) is achieved from the first step

acceleration and last step deceleration (D1340) when positioning control

commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.

Setting range: 50 to 5,000 ms, the factory setting (default) is 100ms




DRVA Data Backup MEMORY Write In

－－


S1 S2 D1 D2 Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the

information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D1, D2.


DRVA Continuous execution －－


DDRVA Continuous execution －－

Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote of API 158 DRVI command.

CommandExplanation

: Numbers of pulses (Target device) : Pulse output frequency :

Pulse output designation device (Please use transistor as output module) : Rotation direction signal

is specified as the numbers of pulses (absolute positioning). The available

numbers of are: 16-bit command: -32,768 to +32,767 32-bit command: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647. The positive (+) and negative (-)

symbol indicates the forward and reverser direction.

is specified as the pulse output frequency. The available numbers of are: 16-bit command: 10 to 32,767Hz. 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000Hz

is specified as pulse output designation device. In EH series models, it only can be specified as Y0, Y2.


. When is positive (+), is On. When is negative (-), is Off

The numbers of pulses will be stored in current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336

low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of

CH1 pulse. When rotation direction is negative, the content value of current value

register will decrease.

The contents of each operand can not be changed while the DRVA command is

executed. The contents will be changed when the next execution is driven.

If the drive contact turns off when the DRVA command is executed, the machine will

decelerates and stops and the execution completed flag M1029, M1030 does not turn

On. D1343 is used to set acceleration / deceleration time.

When the drive contact of DRVA command turns Off, it is impossible to drive DRVA





9-27

ProgramExample

When M10= On, twenty thousands (20000) of 2KHz frequency pulses outputs from Y0

(absolute positioning), Y5= On represents the positive direction. M10

DRVA K20000 K2000 Y0 Y5

Footnote

Operation explanation of absolute positioning control: Specifying travel distance from a

zero point is also a kind of drive method of absolute positioning control. +3,000

0

0

Zero point

Target position

F0 first step acceleration

(D1340) min. speed: 10Hzlast step deceleration

Settings of absolute positioning and operation speed:

T Accel/Decel time

Currentposition

Accel/Decel time

(D1342,D1341)

(D1340) (D1340)min. speedG 10Hz

F0 last step (deceleration)F0 first step (acceleration)

min. speedG 10Hz

output pulse frequency

Tg accelerationsampling time

Fa accelerated gradient

Initial value: 200,000HzF max. speed

Initial value: 50ms (D1343)

Initial value: 50ms (D1343)

outputpulsenumber

The relation between actual frequency and acceleration / deceleration time is in the

following:

Tg: sampling time of acceleration / deceleration T: acceleration / deceleration time Fa: acceleration / deceleration gradient F: Max. frequency F0: first step acceleration, last step deceleration P: total pulse number

1. Tg = T / ( 60 * 1000 ) 2. Fa = (F – F0) / 60 3. P0 (output pulse number of first step (acceleration)/last step (deceleration)) = 1 4. Each segment frequency:

i. F(n) = F0 + Fa * n ( n = 1~60) 5. Output pulse number of each segment:

Restriction:

1. When each segment of output pulse number P(n)＜1, PLC won’t output pulse and

jump to next segment.

2. Speed of first step (acceleration) and last step (deceleration) F0 can’t less than

10Hz. If it is less than 10Hz or larger than max. output frequency, it will output 10Hz.

)(*)( nFTgnP =



3. If total pulse number P ≦3, acceleration/deceleration function will be invalid.

Wiring of DVP-EH series and Delta ASDA servo drive:

COM-/PLS 43

47

COM-/SIGN 36

49

/OZ

COM-

24

EH MPU

L

N

X0

X1X2

X3

X4

X5

X6

S/S

Y2

C2

startzero point reset

forward limit

JOG(+)

reverse limit 3-phase pow

er

R

ST

U

VW

ASDA series

Delta Servo Driveservo m

otor

24VCN1

VDD

COM+DI 1

DI 5

DI 6

DI 1DI 5DI 6DI 7DI 8

: servo start: servo reset: forward limit: reverse limit: emergency stop

COM-

DI 2

+24V

X7

24G

JOG(-)stop

error reset

DO_COM

X10

X11

X12

X13

X14

SRDYZSPDTPOSALARM

DI 7

DI 8

17

11

9

3332

3130

CN1

Z phase signal (zero point signal)

Error Counter

ElectricGear

200KPPS

EncoderCN2

10

45

pulse clear

Y0

C0

pulse output

Y1

C1

forward/reverse direction

DVP32EH00T

CN1

26

1

23

45

6

7 DO1+

DO2+

DO3+

DO4+

DO1-

DO2-

DO3-

DO4-

SRDY

ZSPD

TPOS

ALARM

DO_COM

220VAC single-phase

220VAC

COM- 50

45DO_COM

Note:

Please connect forward/reverse limit switch to SERVO AMP.

Wiring example of connection between DVP-EH series PLC and a Mitsubishi MR-J2-□A Servo drive:



9-29

Error Counter

ElectricGear

pulse clear

pulse output

forward/reverse direction

SGPP 3

10

SGNP 2

10

OP

LG

14

EH MPU

L

N

X0

X1X2

X3

X4

X5

X6

S/S

Y2

C2

startzero point reset

forward limit

JOG(+)

reverse limit

3-phase power

R

S

T

U

V

W

MR-J2 series

Mitsubishi servo driveservo m

otor

CN1B

SON

RESLSP

LSN

TL

SONRESLSPLSNTL

G servo startG servo resetG forward limitG reverse limit

G emergency stop

SG

CR

+24V

X7

24G

JOG(-)stoperror reset

X10

X11

X12

X13X14

EMG

SG

5

14

16

17

9

1510

CN1AZ phase signal(zero point )

signal

8

20

Y0

C0

Y1

C1

DVP32EH00T

servo malfunctioin

Rcal1

Rcal2

Rcal3SV-END

SV-READY

1

RD

INP

ALM

VDD

COM

24V

Rc3

Rc2

Rc1

5

14

18

18

13

CN1A

CN1B

220VAC single power

220VAC

200KPPS

EncoderCN2

1. Connect to PLC when detecting absolute position.

2. Connect the forward/reverse limit switch to the SERVO AMP.

Cautions when designing position control program: There are no using time limit for position control command API 156 ZRN, API 157

PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA. User can use these commands many times in a

program but be sure to follow the following cautions below:

1. Do not drive the position control commands which use the same output CH0(Y0,

Y1) or CH1(Y2, Y3) simultaneously. Otherwise, they will be treated as double coils

and can not function correctly.

2. It is recommended to use step ladder commands (STL) to design positioning

control program (please see the programming example shown below).

Notes when using position control commands API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158

DRVI, API 159 DRVA with pulse output commandsAPI 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59

PLSR:



The current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336 low byte) of CH0 pulse or current

value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of CH1 will both be used in position

control commands and pulse output commands and this will result in complicated

operation. To avoid incorrect operation when pulse output commands are required while

position control commands are used, it is recommended to use position control

commands in place of pulse output commands.

Explanation of pulse output terminals Y0, Y1of CH0 pulse and Y2, Y3 of CH1 pulse:

1. Voltage range: DC5V to DC24V

2. Current range: 10 mA to 100 mA

3. Output pulse frequency: Y0, Y2 is 200KHz, Y1, Y3 is 10KHz.

Pulse output signal settings of positioning operation:

There are three kinds of pulse output signal of positioning operation for DVP-EH series

PLC:

1. 1-phase 1 output + direction (it is recommended to use this) U/D

U/D FLAG 2. 1-phase 2 outputs (frequency limit is 10KHz)

U

D 3. 2-phase 2 outputs (frequency limit is 10KHz)

A

B Please follow the PLC output settings above to set the pulse input type of parameters

on SERVO AMP or stepping motor.

Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will

output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off.

M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after first group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output complete or other relative commands complete execution.

M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after second group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output complete.

M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse stop output when M1335= On. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output indication flag M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command output signal enable flag



9-31

Special registers description of EH series MPU:

D1220: The phase setting of the first output group Y0, Y1: determine by the last two bits of D1220, other bits are invalid.


D1221: The phase setting of the second output group Y2, Y3: determine by the last two bits of D1221, other bits are invalid.


When several high speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) and position

control commands (ZRN, PLSV, DRVI, DRVA) all use Y0 to output pulse in one

program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning cycle, PLC will

perform the command which has fewest step numbers.

Programming example for forward/reverse operation: For wiring, please refer to the wiring example of connection between DVP-EH series

PLC and a Mitsubishi MR-J2-□A Servo drive.

There is one operation positionng is performed by using the absolute position method

shown below:

500Hz

500Hz

500000

100

200ms

200,000Hz

Zero point

Output pulse frequency

Acceleration/Deceleration time

In this example, the minimum output pulse frequency calculated by equation=

MaxSpeed [D1342,D1341]Hz ( 2 (Acceleration\Deceleration [ D1343]ms 1000 ))÷ × ÷

as the actual minimum output pulse frequency=

200,000Hz ( 2 (100ms 1000 )) 1,000Hz÷ × ÷ = .



Programming example when using step ladder command (STL):

M1002

S0 S10 S11 S12 S13

M1000

X0

JOG(+) JOG(-)

1

1

200,000Hz D1342,D13→

200ms D1343→

DMOV K10000 D1341

MOV K200 D1343

S1334M5

M1334

M1346

Y0

Stop

Zero point return

Output to X-axis (Y0)is stopped

Return to the zero pointwith reset signal is valid

Operation is stoppedPositioningin normalrotation

Positioningin reverserotation

output stop

Set the maximum speed

Set the acceleration/deceleration time

※1. If the maximum speed (D1342,D1341), the acceleration/deceleration (D1343) can set

in their factory setting value (default), then the programming is not required. The

factory setting value (default) of the maximum speed (D1342,D1341) is 200,000Hz.

The factory setting value (default) of the acceleration/deceleration (D1343) is 100

ms.



9-33

X1

RST M10M5

RST M12

RST M13

SET S0

X2RST M12

M5

RST M13

SET S10

X3RST M12

M5

RST M13

SET S11

X4RST M12

M5

RST M13

SET S12

M10

X5RST M12

M5 M10

JOG(+)2

JOG(-)2

Zero pointreturn

Operation being stopped




Positioningin normalrotation



Zero pointreturncompletedflag

Zero pointreturncompletedflag

Reset the reverse rotationpositioning completed flag

Reset the normal rotationpositioning completed flag

Drive the normal rotationpositioning status(S12)





Drive the JOG(-) status (S11)

Drive the JOG(+) status (S11)









Drive the zero point returnstatus (S0)

Reset the zero point returncompleted flag

RST M13

SET S13 Drive the reverse rotationpositioning status(S13)

※2. The maximum size of a JOG command is ±999,999 pulses, as this is equal to the

maximum number of output pulses for API 158 DRVI command. If a greater distance is

required, please execute the JOG command again.



S0 M50

M50M1000

S10DDRVI K999999 K30000 Y0 Y4

X2

RST S10M1336 M51

M51M1000

M51

S11DDRVI K-999999 K30000 Y0 Y4

X3

RST S11M1336 M52

M52M1000

M52

3

JOG(+) JOG(+)

3

3

JOG(-) JOG(-)

Zero point return is completed (auto-reset)

Executioncompleted

RST S0M1336 M50

Y0 beingoutput

DZRN K50000 K5000 X6 Y0

SET M10M1029

Zero pointreturn Zero point

returnspeed

Creepspeed

Near pointsignal (DOG)

Pulse outputdevice

Zero point return commandoperate in the (-) direction

Reset the zero point returncompleted flag

Y0 beingoutput

(maximum value in (+)direction)

Output pulsenumbers

Outputpulsefrequency

Outputpulsedevice

Rotationdirectionsignal outputdevice

JOG(+) operation is completed(auto-reset)

JOG(-) operation is completed(auto-reset)

Using relative positioningcommand execute the JOGoperation in the (+) direction(Y4=On)

(maximum value in (-)direction)

Output pulsenumbers

Outputpulsefrequency

Outputpulsedevice

Rotationdirectionsignal outputdevice

Using relative positioningcommand execute the JOGoperation in the (-) direction(Y4=Off)

Y0 beingoutput

RUN monitor

※3. In order to prevent position control commands being driven at the same time, the

command drive timing is delayed by one scanning cycle.



9-35

S12DDRVA K500000 K100000 Y0 Y4

M53

SET M12M1029

RST M12M1336 M53

M53M1000

S13DDRVA K100 K100000 Y0 Y4

M54

SET M13M1029

RST M13M1336 M54

M54M1000

Positioningin normalrotation


Executioncompleted

Executioncompleted

Reverse rotation positioningcompleted flag

Normal rotation positioningcompleted flag

Normal rotation positioningis completed (auto-reset)

Reverse rotation positioningis completed (auto-reset)

Y0 beingoutput

Y0 beingoutput

Using absolute positioningcommand move to theabsolute position ? 00000�(Y4=On)

Using absolute positioningcommand move to theabsolute position ? 00�(Y4=Off)

RET

END


ES EP EH160 TCMP

P Time Compare －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 S3 S D Note: The range of operand S1, S2, S3: S1=0~23, S2 =S3=S0~59

Operand S occupies 3 continuous devices. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


TCMP Continuous execution TCMPP Pulse

execution




CommandExplanation

: setting the hour of comparison time, setting range is K0~K23 : setting

the minute of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59 : setting the second

of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59 : Current time of real time clock

: Comparison result

, , is compared to the current value of the head address and

save the comparsion result in .

is the hour of current time and the content is K0~K23. +1 is the minute of

current time and the content is K0~K59. +2 is the second of current time and the content is K0~K59.

The current time of real time clock specified by is read by using TRD command

previously and then compared by using TCMP command. If the content of exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the command won’t

be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.

ProgramExample

When X10= On, the command is executed and the current time of real time clock in

(D20~D22) is compared to the set value 12:20:45 and the result is shown at

M10~M12. When X10 goes from On→Off, the command is not executed but the

On/Off state before M10~M12 is kept.

Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and then the result of ≧, ≦, ≠ are given.

X10

M10

TCMP K12 K20 K45 D20 M10

M11

M12

ON when 12:20:45

ON when 12:20:45

ON when 12:20:45

>

=

<


ES EP EH161 TZCP

P Time Zone Compare －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 S D Note: Operand S1, S2, S occupies 3 continuous devices.

S1 should be less than S2, i.e. S1 ≦ S2 Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


TZCP Continuous execution TZCPP Pulse

execution




9-37

CommandExplanation

: Lower limit time data : Upper limit time data : Current time of real

time clock : Comparison result

is compared to the time period of ~ and the comparsion result is

stored in .

, +1, +2: respectively represent “Hours”, “Minutes”, “Seconds” of the lower limit time data.

, +1, +2: respectively represent “Hours”, “Minutes”, “Seconds” of the Upper limit time data。

, +1, +2: respectively represent “Hours”, “Minutes”, “Seconds” of the current time of perpetual calender.

The current time of real time clock specified by is read by using TRD command

previously and then compared by using TZCP command. If the content of S , , exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the

command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A

(HEX) in D1067.

If < , is On. If > , +2 is On. Besides these two

situations, +1 is On. (Lower bound should be less than upper bound

.)

ProgramExample

When X10= On, the command is executed and one of M10~M12 will be On. When

X10=Off, the command is not executed but the state of M10~M12 before X10=Off is

kept. X10

M10

TZCP D0 D10 D20 M10

M11

M12

ON when

ON when

ON when


ES EP EH162 TADD

P Time Addition －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Operand S1, S2, D occupies 3 continuous devices.



TADD Continuous execution TADDP Pulse

execution


M1022 (Carry flag)



CommandExplanation

: Time augend : Time addend : Addition result

+ = . The time data in the register specified by is added to

the time data in the register specified by and the addition result is stored in the

register specified by .

If the time data in , exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error

code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.

If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On. The

value of the result shows in is the time remaining above 24 hours. If the addition result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag

M1020= On.

ProgramExample

When X10= On, the command is executed. Add the time data specified by D0~D2 and

D10~D12 and store the result in the register specified by D20~D22.

X10TADD D0 D10 D20

8

20

6406

14

265010

08:10:20 06:40:06 14:50:26

If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On.

X10TADD D0 D10 D20

30

11308

6

381040

18:40:30 11:30:08 06:10:38

18


ES EP EH163 TSUB

P Time Subtraction －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Operand S1, S2, D occupies 3 continuous devices.

Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (TSUB, TSUBP).


TSUB Continuous execution TSUBP Pulse

execution


M1021 (Borrow flag)



9-39

CommandExplanation

: Time Minuend : Time Subtrahend : Subtraction result

− = . The time data in the register specified by is subtracted

from the time data in the register specified by and the result is stored in the

register specified by .

If the time data in , exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error


If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the Zero flag M1020= On.

The value of the result shows in is the time remaining below 0 (zero) hour. If the subtraction result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag

M1020= On.

Except using API 166 TRD command, MOV command also can be used to move the

special register D1315 (Hours), D1314 (Minutes), D1313 (Seconds) to the three

registers specified to read the current time of real time clock.

ProgramExample

When X10= On, the command is executed. The time data specified by D10~D12 is

subtracted from the time data specified by D0~D2 and the result is stored in the

register specified by D20~D22.

X10TSUB D0 D10 D20

14308

5

574920

20:20:05 14:30:08 05:49:57

20

5

If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the borrow flag M1021= On.

X10TSUB D0 D10 D20

191115 15

920

05:20:30 19:11:15 10:09:15

5

30

10




TRD P Time Data Read

－


D Note: Operand D occupies 7 continuous devices.



TRD Continuous execution TRDP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1016, M1017, M1076

(Please refer the footnote for detail.)

CommandExplanation

: The device stored the reading current time of perpetual calender A perpetual calender clock is built in the DVP-EH/EP series PLC and this clock

provide year (A.D.), week, month, date, hours, minutes and seconds total 7 data

devices stored in D1319~D1313. The function of TRD command is for program

designer to read the current time of perpetual calender directly and store the reading

data in the 7 data registers specified by . D1319 is read as a two digit number and this setting can be change to a four digit

number, please refer the footnote of API 167 TWR command for the detail.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, read the current time of perpetual calender to the specified register

D0~D6.

The content of D1318: 1 is indicated Monday, 2 is indicated Tuesday,…, 7 is indicated

Sunday.

D0TRDX0

Special D

device Meaning Content General D device Meaning

D1319 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D0 Year (A.D.)

D1318 Day (Mon.~Sun.) 1~7 D1 Day

(Mon.~Sun.) D1317 Month 1~12 D2 Month D1316 Date 1~31 D3 Date D1315 Hours 0~23 D4 Hours

D1314 Minutes 0~59 D5 Minutes

D1313 Seconds 0~59 D6 Seconds



9-41

Footnote

Error Flag of the real time clock built in DVP-EH/EP series PLC: Device Name Function

M1016 year display of perpetual calender

It displays 2 right-most digit number of year of D1319 when it is Off. It displays (2000+ 2 right-most digit number of year of D1319) when it is On.

M1017 ±30 seconds correction

It will correct when it is from Off→On. (if it is 0-29 seconds, it will reset to 0. If it is 30-59 seconds, add 1 to minute and set 0 to second)

M1076 perpetual calender fault

It will be On when setting is out of range or run out of battery. (it only check when power is on)

Device Name Range D1313 Second 0-59 D1314 Minue 0-59 D1315 Hour 0-23 D1316 Day 1-31 D1317 Month 1-12 D1318 Week 1-7 D1319 Year 0-99 (two right-most digit number of year) The method to correct perpetual calender:

There are two methods to correct built-in API perpetual calender:

1. specified command to correct

please refer to command TWR (API 167) for reference.

2. setting by peripheral

using WPLSoft (software to edit ladder diagram) to set

Display four digit number of year:

1. It usually displays 2 digit number of year (for example: only display 03 for year

2003). If you want to display 4 digit number, please key in following program at the

start of program. M1002

SET M1016 display 4 digit number for year

2. It will display 4 bits (two right-most digit number + 2000) to replace original 2 digit

number.

3. If you want to write new time setting in 4 digit number display mode, only 2 digit

number you can write in and its range is “00-99” which corresponds to year

“2000-2099”. For example, 00=year 2000, 50=year 2050 and 99=year 2099.




TWR P Time Data Write In

－


S Note: Operand D occupies 7 continuous devices.



TWR Continuous execution TWRP Pulse

execution

32-bit command －－－－ Flag: M1016, M1017, M1076 Please refer the footnote of API 166 TRD command.

CommandExplanation

: The device stored the new setting time of perpetual calender A perpetual calender clock is built in the DVP-EH/EP series PLC. This command can

be used to write the correct current time in the built-in perpetual calender clock when

adjusting the built in perpetual calender.

When executing this command, new setting time will be written in the internal

perpetual calender clock immediately. Therefore, please notice that the written-in new

setting time if match the current time then when executing this command.

If the time data in exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error


ProgramExample

1

When X0= On, write the correct current time in the built-in perpetual calender clock.

D20TWRPX0

General D device Meaning Content Special D

device Meaning

D20 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D1319 Year (A.D.)

D21 Day (Mon.~Sun.) 1~7 D1318 Day

(Mon.~Sun.) D22 Month 1~12 D1317 Month

D23 Date 1~31 D1316 Date

D24 Hours 0~23 D1315 Hours

D25 Minutes 0~59 D1314 Minutes

New

setting time

D26 Seconds 0~59 D1313 Seconds

Real Tim

e Clock



9-43

ProgramExample

2

Set the current time of perpetual calender and adjust the time to 2002/03/23, Tuesday,

15:27:30 (please refer the following program example).

The content of D0~D6 is the new setting time of perpetual calender.

When X10= On, then can change the current time of perpetual calender clock to

setting time.

When X11=On every time, the perpetual calender clock will perform the ±30 seconds

correction. “Correction” means that if the second hand of perpetual calender colock is

located between 1~29, the second time will be automatically calculated as “0” (zreo)

second and the minute time won’t change. However, if the second hand of perpetual

calender colock is located between 30~59, the second time will also be automatically

calculated as “0” (zreo) second but the minute time will increase 1 minute.

X10MOV K02 D0

MOV K2 D1

MOV K3 D2

MOV K26 D3

MOV K15 D4

MOV K27 D5

MOV K30 D6

TWR D0

M1017

X11

Year (2002)

Day (Tuesday)

Month(March)

Date

Hours

Minutes

Seconds

Write the setting time in the perpetual calender

30 seconds correction

Footnote

Using WPLSoftsoftware also can set the time of perpetual calender.

The year (A.D.) display four digit number:

1. The year usually only dispaly two digit number (for example, year 1998 only

display 98). But this can be changed to a four digit number by setting the following

program during the first program scan. M1002

MOV K2000 D1018 The year dispaly four digit number

2. The year display will switch from two digit number to four digit number after the first

scan program when PLC is running. K2,000 in the command is a fix value.

3. If the new setting time is desired to be written in under the four digit number mode,

also only two digit number can be written in. The range for the year of two digit

number is 0~99. Hence, the corresponding range for the year of four digit number

is 1980~2079.



For example:

80(a two digit number) is equal to 1980(a four digit number)

99(a two digit number) is equal to 1999(a four digit number)

00(a two digit number) is equal to 2000 (a four digit number)

79(a two digit number) is equal to 2079 (a four digit number) API Applicable models

ES EP EH169 D HOUR

Hour Meter －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Operand S only can use 16-bit command when using F

device. Operand D1 occupies 2 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. Command HOUR can be used for four times in program.


HOUR Continuous execution －－

32-bit command

DHOUR Continuous execution －－

Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: setting time for turning on and unit is hour. Its setting range is

K1~K32,767. : current time suring counting and unit is hour. Its setting range is

K1~K32,767. : output device. +1 saves current time that less than one hour and unit is second. Its setting range is K0~K3,599.

If using input contact to be timer, output device will be On when attaining setting time

(unit is hour). It can provide user a timer for managing machine operation or maintain.

After output device is On, timer will keep on counting.

When 16-bit timer counts up to max. value (32,767 hours and 3,599 seconds) of

16-bit, it will stop. If you want to recount, and +1 need to clear to 0.

- +3 need to clear to 0. When 32-bit timer counts up to max. value (2,147,483,647 hours and 3,599 seconds)

of 16-bit, it will stop. If you want to recount, - +3 need to clear to 0.

ProgramExample

1

For 16-bit command: When X0=On, Y10 will turns On and start to count time. When

the time reaches 100 hours, Y0 will turns On and D0 will record the current time (unit

is hour, but if D0 is less than one hour, unit will be second and its range is 0~3599).

HOUR

Y10

K100 Y0D0Y10

X0

ProgramExample

2

For 32-bit command: When X0=On, Y10 will turns On and start to count time. When

the time reaches 40000 hours, Y0 will turns On. D0 and D1 will record the current time

(unit is hour). If current time is less than one hour, D2 will record the current time (unit:

second).



9-45

DHOUR

Y10

K40000 Y0D0Y10

X0


ES EP EH170 D GRY

P BIN GRAY CODE －


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: Operands S and D only can use 16-bit command when

using F device. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


GRY Continuous execution GRYP Pulse

execution


DGRY Continuous execution DGRYP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Source device : Device which store Gray code

The BIN value in the specified device by is converted to the GRAY CODE

equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by .

The range of that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows: 16-bit command ：0~32,767

32-bit command ：0~2,147,483,647

If the BIN value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as “Operation Error”.

At this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error


ProgramExample

When X0=On, constant K 6513 is converted to the GRAY CODE and stored in the

K4Y20. X0

GRY K6513 K4Y20

0 0 0 1 1 10 0 0 1 1 1 10 0 0b15 b0

K6513=H1971

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1111111

K4Y20

Y37 Y20GRAY6513




GBIN P GRAY CODE BIN

－




GBIN Continuous execution GBINP Pulse

execution


DGBIN Continuous execution DGBINP Pulse


CommandExplanation

: Source device which store GRAY CODE : Device which store converted BIN value

The GRAY CODE value in the specified device by is converted to the BIN value

equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by . This command can be used to read the value from an absolute position type encoder

(it is generally a gray code encoder) which is connected to PLC inputs. Convert the

value to the BIN value and store it in the specified register.

Program scan time plus input response time is equal to the output delay time specified

by . If the source is set to inputs X0~X17, it can speed up the input response time by using

REFF command (API151) or D1020 (adjust input response time).

The range of that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows: 16-bit command ：0~32,767

32-bit command ：0~2,147,483,647

If the GRAY CODE value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as “Operation Error”.

ProgramExample

When X20=On, the GRAY CODE value in the absolute position type encoder

connected to X0~X17 inputs is converted to BIN value and stored in D10. X20

GBIN K4X0 D10

0 0 0 1 10 11 10 0 0

b15 b0

H1971=K6513 0 0 0 0 0 0 111111

X17 X0

GRAY6513

K4X0

0 1 0 1

0 0 1 0



9-47


MAND P Matrix AND

－－


S1 S2 D n Note: specific range of operand n is 1~256.

For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


MAND Continuous execution MANDP Pulse

execution

32-bit command (17 STEPS) －－－－ Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where

calculated result is stored : matrix length

Do matix AND operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save

the result in . The operation rule of matix AND is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are all 1 otherwise it is 0.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, do MAND and matrix AND operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit

register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows

(D20-D22) of 16-bit register. X0

MAND D0 D10 D20 K3

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 0 0 0

b15 b0

MAND

1 1 0 0 01110 00000 00

1 1 0 0 01110 00000 00

1 1 0 0 01110 00000 00

1 1 0 0 010 00000 00

1 1 0 0 010 00000 00

1 1 0 0 010 00000 00

0 00 00 0

BeforeExecution

AfterExecution

Footnote

Explanation for matrix command:

1. A matix is made up of 1 and above continuous 16-bit registers. The register

number that made up matrix is called matrix length n. There are 16 X n bits (dots)

for a matix and a bit (dot) once for a oprand unit.

2. 16 X n bits (serial number b0 – b16n-1) will be regarded as a set of a serial single

point for matrix command. Thus, operate with a specific point in the set not value.

3. The matrix command is convenient and important application command for dealing

with single point to multi-points or multi-point to multi-point, such as move, copy,

compare, search, etc.



4. It usually needs a 16-bit register to designate one point of 16 X n points during

marix operation. This regsiter calls Pr (pointer). The setting range is 0 – 16n-1 and

correspond to b0 – b16n-1 in matrix individually.

5. There are actions: shift left, shift right or rotate during operation. Large number is

defined to left and small number is defined to right as shown in the following.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

1 1 0 10 0 0 0 0 00 0 1 1 0 0

1 1 0 10 0 0 0 0 00 0 1 1 0 0

b0

b16

b32b31

b15

b47

D0

D1

D2

b16n-1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Left Rightwidth is 16-bit

Dn-1

6. Fixed width of matrix is 16-bit.

7. Pr: matrix pointer. If Pr is 15, it means designated point is b15.

8. Matrix length is n and n is 1-256.

Example: The matrix that is made up of D0 and n=3, D0=HAAAA, D1=H5555,

D2=HAAFF

C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0

R0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D0R1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D1R2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D2

Example: The matrix that is made up of K2X0 and n=3, K2X0=H37, K2X10=H68,

K2X20=H45 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0

R0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 X0~X7 R1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 X10~X17R2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 X20~X27

It needs to fill 0 to R0(C15-C8), R1(C15-C8), R2(C15-C8) once the value is empty.



9-49


MOR P Matrix OR

－－


S1 S2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256.



MOR Continuous execution MORP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation



Do matix OR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save

the result in . The operation rule of matrix OR is: bit is 1 when one of 2 bits is 1 and only 2 bits are 0

bit will be 0.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, do MOR and matrix OR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register

and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of

16-bit register. X0

MOR D0 D10 D20 K3

1

11 0 00 1100 00

11 0 00 1100 00

11 0 00 1100 00

0 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

11

1

11

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

11 0 01100

11 0 01100

11 0 01100

1

11

1

11

1

11

1

11

11 1111

11

11

11

b15 b0

MOR BeforeExecution

AfterExecution




MXOR P Matrix XOR

－－


S1 S2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.



MXOR Continuous execution MXORP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation



Do matix XOR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save

the result in . The operation rule of matrix XOR is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are different otherwise it is 0.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, do MXOR and matrix XOR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit



MXOR D0 D10 D20 K3

BeforeExecution

AfterExecution

1

11 0 00 1100 0011 0 00 1100 00

11 0 00 1100 00

0 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

11

1

11

1

00

0

11

1

1

1

1

1 0 01001 0 0100

1 0 0100

11

1

11

1

11 111

1

1

11

1

1

1

00

0

00

0

00

0

00

0

b15 b0

MXOR



9-51


MXNR P Matrix XNR

－－


S1 S2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.



MXNR Continuous execution MXNRP Pulse

execution


CommandExplanation



Do matix XNR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save

the result in . The operation rule of matrix XNR is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are the same otherwise it is 0.

ProgramExample

When X0=On, do MXNR and matrix XNR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit



MXNR D0 D10 D20 K3

BeforeExecution

AfterExecution

1

11 0 00 1100 00

11 0 00 1100 0011 0 00 1100 00

0 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

111

111

0

00

111

111

1 0 00

1 0 001 0 00

1

11

111

111

000

000

000

000

000

1

11

1

11

1

11

1

11

b15 b0

MXNR




MINV P Matrix Inverse

－－


S D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256.



MINV Continuous execution MINVP Pulse



CommandExplanation

: Matrix source device : result : matrix length

Do matix inverse operation to matix source device 1 by length of and save the

result in .

ProgramExample

When X0=On, do MINV operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register and 3 rows

(D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of 16-bit register.X0

MINV D0 D20 K3

BeforeExecution

AfterExecution

0

0

0

111

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

111

1

1

1

0

0

0

11

1

0

0

0

11

1

0

0

0

11

1

0

0

0

11

1

0

0

0

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

b15 b0

MINV


ES EP EH185 MCMP

P Matrix Compare －－


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.



MCMP Continuous execution MCMPP Pulse

execution

32-bit command (17 STEPS) －－－－ Flag: Please refer to explanation for

M1088-M1092.



9-53

CommandExplanation


calculated result is stored : pointer Pr, save target address.

For each comparison, it will compare each bit of with from address Pr.

To find the address of different value and save the address in to complete this comparison.

You can find the result of comparison from comparison flag M1088. If the same,

M1088=1 and M1088=0 for difference. Once comparsion attains, it will stop

comparing immediately and set bit search flag M1091=1. When comparison attains

the last bit, matrix search end flag M1089 will be On and comparison attained number

is saved in . For next scan period, it will start comparing from the first bit and set

matrix search start flag M1090=1. When value exceeds the usage range, point error flag M1092 =1.

It usually needs a 16-bit register to designate one of 16n points in matrix to operate.

This register is called pointer, Pr. This is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1

that correspond to bit b0 – b16n-1 individually. You should avoid to change Pr in

operation to affect correct comparison search. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix

pointer error flag M1092 will be 1 and this command won’t be executed.

Matrix search end flag M1089 and set bit search flag M1091 will be 1 at the same

time.

ProgramExample

When X0 is from Off→On, matrix search start falg M1090=0 thus it will start comparing

to find the different bit from the bit that present value +1. (M1088=0 means difference) When present value of pointer D20=2, it can get following four results ( , , , )

when X0 is executed from Off→On for four times. D20=5, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0. D20=45, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0. D20=47, matrix bit search flag M1091=0, matrix search end flag M1089=1. D20=1, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0. X0

MCMPP D0 D10 D20K3

b0

1 0 11000

1 0 00 11000

1 0 00 1100

111

111

111

D202

111

000

000

111

10 10 10 10 10 1 10 110 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 1 10 10 10 10 10 10

b47

b0

MCMP

b47

b0

0

0 1

1

1 0

pointer



Footnote

Explanation for flag signal

M1088: matrix comparison flag, if the result of comparison is the same, M1088=1,

otherwise M1088=0.

M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1.

M1090: matrix search start flag, start comparing from the first bit, M1090=1.

M1091: matrix bit search flag, it will stop comparing once comparison attained,

M1091=1.

M1092: matrix pointer error flag, pointer Pr exceeds that range, M1092=1.


ES EP EH186 MBRD

P Matrix Bit Read －－


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range.


MBRD Continuous execution MBRDP Pulse


－－－－ Flag: Please refer to explanation for

M1089-M1095

CommandExplanation

: matrix source device. : matrix length : pointer Pr, save target address.

When executing command, it will start to see if M1094 (matrix pointer clear flag) is On.

If it is On, pointer will be cleared to 0 and read from the 0 bit and read On/Off state of each bit to M1095 (matrix rotate/shift/output/carry). It will see if M1093

(matrix pointer increase flag) is On after reading a bit. And increase 1 to if it is

On. When reading to the last bit, M1089 (matrix search end flag) =On, pointer records the number of read bit and then end executing this command.

Pr (pointer) is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b0 –

b16n-1 individually. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will

be 1 and this command won’t be executed.

ProgramExample

When X0 is from Off→On, pointer clear flag M1094=On, matrix pointer increase flag

M1093=1, and increase 1 to pointer Pr after reading a bit.

When present value of pointer D20=45, it can get following three results ( , , )

when X0 is executed from Off→On for three times.

D20=46, matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1095=0, matrix search end flag

M1089=0.


M1089=0.




9-55

M1089=1. X0

MBRD D0 D10 D20K3

b0

D2045

10 10 10 10 10 1 10 1

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

1 10 10 10 10 10 10

b470

0 1

0 1pointer

Footnote




M1093: matrix pointer increase flag, add 1 to present pointer.

M1094: matrix pointer clear flag, clear present pointer to 0.

M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag.


ES EP EH187 MBWR

P Matrix Bit Write －－




MBWR Continuous execution MBWRP Pulse



M1089-M1096

CommandExplanation

: matrix source device. : matrix length : pointer Pr, save target address.

When executing command, it will start to see if M1094 (matrix pointer clear flag) is On.

If it is On, pointer will be cleared to 0 and write M1096 (matrix shift/input

complement flag) in the 0 bit of . It will see if M1093 (matrix pointer increase flag)

is On after writing a bit. And increase 1 to if it is On. When writing to the last bit,

M1089 (matrix search end flag) =On, pointer records the number of read bit

and then end executing this command. If exceeds range, M1092=1. Pr (pointer) is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b0 –

b16n-1 individually. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will

be 1 and this command won’t be executed.



ProgramExample

When X0 is from Off→On, pointer clear flag M1094=On, matrix pointer increase flag

M1093=1, and increase 1 to pointer Pr after writing a bit.

When present pointer is D20=45, M1094 (matrix shift/input complement flag) =1.

When X0 is executed once from Off→On, it can get following result: X0

MBWRP D0 D20K3

1b0

0 10 10 10 10 10 10 110 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 1 10 10 10 10 10 10

b47

D2045

1

1 M1096

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 110 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

10 1 10 10 10 10 10 10

1

0

1b47

D2045

Before Execution

AfterExecution

pointer

pointer

(Matrix shift/input complement flag)

Footnote




M1093: matrix pointer increase flag, add 1 to present pointer.

M1094: matrix pointer clear flag, clear present pointer to 0.

M1096: matrix shift/input complement flag


ES EP EH188 MBS

P Matrix Bit Shift －－




MBS Continuous execution MBSP Pulse



M1095-M1097

CommandExplanation

: matrix source device. : matrix length : result.



9-57

This command is used to shift to left or right by matrix length. M1097=0 moves to left and M1097=1 moves to right. It needs to use the state of M1096 (complement

flag) to fill the empty bit (shift to left is b0 and shift to right is b16n-1) due to shiftment

for each bit. If there is one more bit due to shiftment (shift to left is b16n-1 and shift to

right is b0), it needs to send the state to M1095 (carry flag) and save the result in

. The most use of this command is pulse execution command (MBSP).

ProgramExample

1

When X0=On, M1097=Off means shift matrix to left. Setting complement flag

M1096=0, shift 16-bit registers D0-D2 to left and save the result in 16-bit register

D20-D22 and carry flag M1095 will be 1.

X0RST

MBSP D0 D20 K3

M1097

Before Execution

After shifting to left

1b0010 10 10 10 10 10 1

1 010 10 10 10 10 10 10

1 01 10 10 10 10 10 10

b150

0

0

M1096

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

10 1 10 10 10 10 10 100

0

1

M1095

M1095

MBS

M1097=0

ProgramExample

2

When X1=On, M1097=On to shift matrix to right. Setting complement flag M1096=1,

shift 16-bit registers D0-D2 to right and save the result to 16-bit registers D20-D22 and

carry flag M1095 will be 0.

X1M1097

MBSP D0 D20 K3

Before Execution

1b0010 10 10 10 10 10 1

1 010 10 10 10 10 10 101 01 10 10 10 10 10 10

b150

0

0

M1096

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 010 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 1 10 10 10 10 10 100

0

1

M1095

M1095

MBS

M1097=0



Footnote


M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag

M1096: matrix shift/input complement flag

M1097: matrix rotate/shift direction flag


ES EP EH189 MBR

P Matrix Bit Rotate －－




MBR Continuous execution MBRP Pulse



M1095, M1097

CommandExplanation

: matrix source device. : matrix length : result.

This command is used to rotate to right or left by matrix length. M1097=0 moves to left and M1097=1 moves to right. The empty bit (rotate to left is b0 and shift

to right is b16n-1) due to rotation will be filled by the bit (rotate to left is b16n-1 and

shift to right is b0) that rotated out and save the result in . The bit that is rotated out is not only used to fill the empty bit but also send its state to carry flag M1095.

The most use of this command is pulse execution command (MBRP).

ProgramExample

1

When X0=On, M1097=Off means rotate matrix to left. To rotate 16-bit registers D0-D2

to left and save the result in 16-bit register D20-D22. The carry flag M1095 will be 1.

X0

MBRP D0 D20 K3

RST M1097

Before Execution

After rotating to left

1b0010 10 10 10 10 10 1

1 010 10 10 10 10 10 101 01 10 10 10 10 10 10

b15

0

0

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

10 1 10 10 10 10 10 100

0

1

M1095

M1095

MBRM1097=0



9-59

ProgramExample

2

When X1=On, M1097=On to rotate matrix to right. To rotate 16-bit registers D0-D2 to

right and save the result to 16-bit registers D20-D22 . The carry flag M1095 will be 0.

X1

MBRP D0 D20 K3

M1097

Before Execution

After rotating to right

M1097=0

1b0010 10 10 10 10 10 1

1 010 10 10 10 10 10 101 01 10 10 10 10 10 10

b15

0

0

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 1 10 10 10 10 10 100

0 0

M1095

M1095

MBR

Footnote


M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag

M1097: matrix rotate/shift direction flag


ES EP EH190 MBC

P Matrix Bit State Count －－


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: usage range of operand n is K1~K256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.



MBC Continuous execution MBCP Pulse



M1098, M1099

CommandExplanation

: Matrix source device : result : matrix length

To count number of bit 1 or bit 0 by matrix length and number in . When M1098=1, count the number of bit 1. And count the number of bit 0 when

M1098=0. If counting result is 0, M1099=1.

ProgramExample

When X10=On, it counts bit 1 number of D0-D2 and save the total number in D10. When

M1098=0, it counts bit 0 number of D0-D2 and save the total number in D10. X10

MBC D0 K3 D10



1 1 1 1 1 10 11 1 1 1 1 10 101 1 1 1 1 10 10

0

12

111

111

111

111

111

000

000

M1098=0

36 M1098=1

Footnote

Explanation for matrix command:

M1098: matrix count “bit 1” or “bit 0” flag

M1099: it is On when counted result is 0.


ES EP EH196 HST

P High Speed Counter －－


X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS Note: usage range of operand S is K0 (H0), K1(H1).


HST Continuous execution HSTP Pulse

execution

32-bit command (17 STEPS) －－－－ Flag: M1015 high speed connected

timer action

CommandExplanation

: the ondition to stop high speed timer start

When =1, start high speed timer and set M1015=On, high speed timer starts and records present value in D1015. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us.

The range for D1015 to count is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next

count will be 0.

When =0, stop high speed timer and set M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately.

When is not 1 or 0, command HSTMR won’t act.

ProgramExample

When X10=On, M1015=On. It will start high speed timer and record present value in

D1015.

When X10=Off, M1015=Off. It will stop high speed timer.

X10HST K1

X10HST K0



9-61

Footnote


M1015: high speed timer start flag

D1015: high speed timer

This command doesn’t support for EH models. Following is the explanation for using

special M and special D directly.

1. It is only valid when PLC RUN.

2. When M1015=On, only start high speed timer D1015 as PLC executes END

command of that scan period. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us.

3. The range of D1015 is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will

be 0.

4. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting in command END or HST.

This command doesn’t support for EP models. Following is the explanation for using

special M and special D directly.

1. It is only valid when PLC RUN.

2. When D1015=On, start high speed timer D1015 immediately. The min. unit of

D1015 is 100us.

3. The range of D1015 is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will

be 0.

4. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately.



10-1

API Applicable modelsES EP EH215~

217 D

LD#

The Contact Type Logic Operation LD#

－


S1 S2 Note: ＃: &, |, ^



LD# Continuous execution －－


DLD# Continuous execution －－

Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: Data source device 1 : Data source device 2

Compare the contents of and . To take “LD&” as an example, if the comparison result is not 0 , the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0 , the contact is in

discontinuity.

Command LD# could connect directly with the BUS.

API No. 16 -bit command

32 -bit command

Continuity condition

Discontinuity condition

215 LD& DLD& & ≠0 & =0 216 LD| DLD| | ≠0 | =0 217 LD^ DLD^ ^ ≠0 ^ =0

& : Logic “AND” operation

| : Logic “OR” operation

^ : Logic “XOR” operation

If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to

use the 32-bit command (DLD#). If the 16-bit command (LD#) is utilized, CPU will

determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel will

be blinking.

ProgramExample

When the result that using the LD& (Logic “AND” operation) command to compare the

content of C0 and C10 is not equal to 0, Y10=ON.

When the result that using the LD| (Logic “OR” operation) command to compare the

content of D200 and D300 is not equal to 0 and X1=ON, Y10=ON and retain.

When the result that using the LD^ (Logic “XOR” operation) command to compare the

content of C201 and C200 is not equal to 0 or M3=ON, M50=ON.

M3DLD C201 C200 M50

LD C0 C10

LD D200 D300 SETX1

&

^

I Y011

Y10



API Applicable modelsES EP EH218~

220 D

AND#

The Series Connection Contact Type Logic Operation AND#

－


S1 S2 Note: ＃: &, |, ^



AND# Continuous execution －－


DAND# Continuous execution －－

Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: Data source device 1. : Data source device 2.

Compare the contents of and of . To take “AND&” as an example, if the comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, the contact is in

discontinuity.

The AND# command is used to connect to contact in series.


32 -bit command



218 AND& DAND& & ≠0 & =0 219 AND| DAND| | ≠0 | =0 220 AND^ DAND^ ^ ≠0 ^ =0




If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to use

the 32-bit command (DAND#). Or if the 16-bit command (AND#) is utilized, CPU will

determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel will be

blinking.

ProgramExample

When X0=ON, using the AND& (Logic “AND” operation) command to compare the content of

C0 and C10. If the result is not equal to 0, Y10=ON.

When X1=OFF, using the AND| (Logic “OR” operation) command to compare the content of

D10 and D0. If the result is not equal to 0, Y11=ON and retain.

When X2=ON, using the AND^ (Logic “XOR” operation) command to compare the content of

32-bit registers D200(D201) and D100(D101). If the result is not equal to 0 or

M3=ON,M50=ON.



10-3

M3DAND D200 D100 M50

AND C0 C10

AND D10 D0 SET

&

^

I Y11

Y10X0

X1

X2


ES EP EH221~ 223

D OR#

The Parallel Connection Contact Type Logic Operation OR#

－


S1 S2 Note: ＃: &, |, ^



OR# Continuous execution －－


DOR# Continuous execution －－

Flag: None

CommandExplanation


Compare the contents of and of . Take ”OR&” as an example, if the comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, he contact is in

discontinuity.

Command OR# is used to connect to contact in parallel.

API No. 16 -bit

command

32 -bit

command

Continuity

condition

Discontinuity

condition

221 OR& DOR& & ≠0 & =0

222 OR| DOR| | ≠0 | =0

223 OR^ DOR^ ^ ≠0 ^ =0




If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure

to use the 32-bit command (DOR#). Or if the 16-bit command (OR#) is utilized, CPU

will determine it as “Program Error” , and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel

will be blinking.



ProgramExample

When X1=ON, using the OR& (Logic “AND” operation) command to compare the

content of C0 and C10. If the result is not equal to 0, Y0=ON.

If both X2 and M30 are “ON”, or when using the OR| (Logic “OR” operation) command

to compare the content of D10 and D20 and the result is not equal to 0, or when using

the OR^ (Logic “XOR” operation) command to compare the content of D100 and D200

and the result is not equal to 0, M60=ON.

DOR D100 D200

OR C0 C10

DOR D10 D20

&

^

I

Y0

X2

X1

M30M60


ES EP EH224~ 230

D LD＊

The Contact Type Comparison LD＊


S1 S2 Note: ＊: =, >, <, <>, ≦, ≧


16-bit command (5 STEPS) LD＊

Continuous execution －－

32-bit command (9 STEPS) DLD＊


Flag: None

CommandExplanation


Compare the contents of and of . To take API 224 “LD=” as an example, if the comparison result is “=” , the contact is in continuity, and if it is “≠” , the contact is in

discontinuity.

Command LD＊can connect to BUS directly.


32 -bit command



224 LD＝ DLD＝＝ ≠ 225 LD＞ DLD＞＞ ≦ 226 LD＜ DLD＜＜ ≧ 228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ ≠ ＝ 229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ ≦ ＞ 230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ ≧ ＜

When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31), from

and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for comparison.



10-5

If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to

use the 32-bit command (DLD＊). If the 16-bit command (LD＊) is utilized, CPU will

determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel will

be blinking.

ProgramExample

If the content of counter C10 is equal to K200, Y10=ON.

When the content of D200 is smaller or equal to K–30, and that X1=ON, Y11=ON and

retain.

If the content of C200 is smaller than K678,493 or when M3=ON, M50=ON.

LD= K200 C10

DLD> K678493 C200

M3

Y10

LD> D200 K-30X1

SET Y11

M50


ES EP EH232~ 238

D AND＊

The Series Connection Contact Type Comparison AND＊


S1 S2 Note: ＊: =, >, <, <>, ≦, ≧


16-bit command (5 STEPS) AND＊ Continuous

execution －－

32-bit command (9 STEPS) DAND＊ Continuous

execution －－

Flag: None

CommandExplanation


Compare the contents of and of . To take API 232 “AND=” as an example, if the comparison result is “=” , the contact is in continuity, and if it is “≠” , the

contact is in discontinuity.

Command AND＊is the comparison command that connect to contact in series.


32 -bit command



232 AND＝ DAND＝＝ ≠ 233 AND＞ DAND＞＞ ≦ 234 AND＜ DAND＜＜ ≧ 236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ ≠ ＝ 237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ ≦ ＞ 238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ ≧ ＜



When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31),

from and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for comparison.

If the 32-bit length counter (C200~C254) is put into this command for comparison, be

sure to use the 32-bit command (DAND＊). Or if the 16-bit command (AND＊) is

utilized, CPU will determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on

the MPU panel will be blinking.

ProgramExample

If X0=ON and that the current value of counter C10 equals K200, Y10=ON.

If X1=OFF and that the content of register D0 not equal to K–10, Y11=ON and retain.

If X2=ON and that the contents of the 32-bit registers D11 and D0 are smaller than

K678,493, M50=ON.

AND= K200 C10

DAND> K678493 D10

M3

Y10

AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11

M50X2

X1

X0


ES EP EH240~ 246

D OR＊

The Parallel Connection Contact Type Comparison OR＊


S1 S2 Note: ＊: =, >, <, <>, ≦, ≧


16-bit command (5 STEPS) OR＊


32-bit command (9 STEPS) DOR＊


Flag: None

CommandExplanation

: Data source device 1. : Data source device 2.

Compare the contents of and of . Take API 240 (OR=) as an example, if the comparison result is “=”, the contact is in continuity, and if it is “≠”, the contact is in

discontinuity.

Command OR＊is the comparison command that connect to contact in parallel.



10-7


32 -bit command



240 OR＝ DOR＝＝ ≠ 241 OR＞ DOR＞＞ ≦ 242 OR＜ DOR＜＜ ≧ 244 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ ≠ ＝ 245 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ S1 ≦ S1 ＞ 246 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ S1 ≧ S1 ＜

When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31),

from and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for comparison.

If the 32-bit length counter (C200~C254) is put into this command for comparison, be

sure to use the 32-bit command (DOR＊). Or if the 16-bit command (OR＊) is utilized,

CPU will determine it as “Program Error” , and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU

panel will be blinking.

ProgramExample

If X1=ON, or that the current value of counter C10 is equal to K200, Y0=ON.

If both X2 and M30 are “ON”, or if the contents of the 32-bit registers D101 and D100

are greater or equal to K100,000, M60=ON.

OR= K200 C10

DOR> D100 K100000

Y0

X2

X1

M30M60

=

dvp-plc application manual programmingprofsite.um.ac.ir/~shoraka/delta plc applications...

Documents